sv8300 programong manualpdf

Programming Manual

NWA-033625-001ISSUE 2.0

LIABILITY DISCLAIMER

NEC Infrontia Corporation reserves the right to change the specifica-tions, functions, or features, at any time, without notice.

NEC Infrontia Corporation has prepared this document for use by itsemployees and customers. The information contained herein is theproperty of NEC Infrontia Corporation and shall not be reproducedwithout prior written approval from NEC Infrontia Corporation.

Dterm is a registered trademark of NEC Corporation.PCPro is a trademark of NEC Corporation.

Copyright 2008

NEC Infrontia Corporation

REMARKS

This manual includes description for the commands related to the fol-lowing features. However, these features are not available for8300R1 software.

- Attendant Console Features- WLAN Features

THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY.

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

The following provides additional information for Programming Manual.

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION:

Page3-24: The following office data setting should be added in “DIGITAL TRUNK DATA ASSIGN-MENT” of “ISDN-PRI PROGRAMMING”.

Provide the cyclic redundancy checking for PRT.

•(1)(2)

Y=089 CRC error check 00-63: D channel Trunk Route No.0 : To provide

CM35

i NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093toc001.fm

TABLE OF CONTENTS

INTRODUCTIONPURPOSE ................................................................................................................ 1OUTLINE OF THIS MANUAL ................................................................................... 2TERMS IN THIS MANUAL ....................................................................................... 3

PBX System Designation ................................................................................................. 3Terminal Name ................................................................................................................ 3

REFERENCE MANUAL ........................................................................................... 4HOW TO READ THIS MANUAL ............................................................................... 5PRECAUTIONS ........................................................................................................ 7

System Data Backup ....................................................................................................... 7

Chapter 1 BUSINESS FEATURESACCOUNT CODE .................................................................................................... 1-3ADD-ON MODULE ................................................................................................... 1-4ALPHANUMERIC DISPLAY ..................................................................................... 1-6ANALOG PORT ADAPTER ...................................................................................... 1-10ANNOUNCEMENT SERVICE .................................................................................. 1-12ANSWER KEY .......................................................................................................... 1-21AUTHORIZATION CODE ......................................................................................... 1-22AUTOMATED ATTENDANT .................................................................................... 1-25AUTOMATIC CALL DISTRIBUTION (ACD) ............................................................. 1-30

BUSY IN/BUSY OUT-ACD .............................................................................................. 1-33CALL WAITING INDICATION-ACD ................................................................................. 1-34DELAY ANNOUNCEMENT-ACD .................................................................................... 1-38HUNT PAST NO ANSWER-ACD .................................................................................... 1-41IMMEDIATE OVERFLOW-ACD ...................................................................................... 1-42PRIORITY QUEUING-ACD ............................................................................................. 1-43QUEUE SIZE CONTROL-ACD ........................................................................................ 1-44SILENT MONITOR-ACD ................................................................................................. 1-45

AUTOMATIC CALL DISTRIBUTION (ACD) WITH MANAGEMENT INFORMATION SYSTEM (MIS) .................................................... 1-48AUTOMATIC CAMP-ON .......................................................................................... 1-49AUTOMATIC CHANGE TO DAYLIGHT SAVING TIME ........................................... 1-50AUTOMATIC NUMBER IDENTIFICATION (ANI) ..................................................... 1-55AUTOMATIC RECALL ............................................................................................. 1-62

JULY/18/2008

ii NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093toc001.fm

BOSS/SECRETARY CALLING ................................................................................ 1-63BROKER’S CALL ..................................................................................................... 1-66CALL BACK .............................................................................................................. 1-67CALL FORWARDING ............................................................................................... 1-69

ATTENDANT CALL FORWARDING SET-UP AND CANCEL ......................................... 1-70CALL FORWARDING-ALL CALLS .................................................................................. 1-71CALL FORWARDING-BUSY LINE .................................................................................. 1-73CALL FORWARDING-NO ANSWER .............................................................................. 1-76CALL FORWARDING-DESTINATION ............................................................................ 1-81CALL FORWARDING-OVERRIDE .................................................................................. 1-82MULTIPLE CALL FORWARDING-ALL CALLS /MULTIPLE CALL FORWARDING-BUSY LINE ............................................................... 1-83MULTIPLE CALL FORWARDING-NO ANSWER ............................................................ 1-84SPLIT CALL FORWARDING-ALL CALLS ....................................................................... 1-85SPLIT CALL FORWARDING-BUSY LINE ....................................................................... 1-89SPLIT CALL FORWARDING-NO ANSWER ................................................................... 1-93GROUP DIVERSION ....................................................................................................... 1-100

CALL HISTORY ........................................................................................................ 1-101INCOMING CALL HISTORY (CID CALL BACK) ............................................................. 1-101OUTGOING CALL HISTORY (STACK DIAL) .................................................................. 1-104

CALL PARK .............................................................................................................. 1-105CALL PARK-SYSTEM ..................................................................................................... 1-105CALL PARK-TENANT ..................................................................................................... 1-107

CALL PICKUP .......................................................................................................... 1-108CALL PICKUP-DIRECT ................................................................................................... 1-108CALL PICKUP-GROUP ................................................................................................... 1-109CALL PICKUP-DESIGNATED GROUP ........................................................................... 1-111

CALL REDIRECT ..................................................................................................... 1-112CALL TRANSFER .................................................................................................... 1-113

CALL TRANSFER-ALL CALLS ....................................................................................... 1-113CALL TRANSFER-ATTENDANT ..................................................................................... 1-114

CALLER ID ............................................................................................................... 1-115CALLER ID CLASS ......................................................................................................... 1-115CALLER ID DISPLAY ...................................................................................................... 1-118CALLER ID-STATION ..................................................................................................... 1-123CALLER ID-STATION (ETSI-FSK) .................................................................................. 1-126CID CALL ROUTING ....................................................................................................... 1-128NO CID CALL ROUTING ................................................................................................. 1-137

CAMP-ON/CALL WAITING ...................................................................................... 1-142CENTREX COMPATIBILITY .................................................................................... 1-145CLASS OF SERVICE ............................................................................................... 1-146

JULY/18/2008

iii NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093toc001.fm

CODE RESTRICTION .............................................................................................. 1-149CONFERENCE (THREE/FOUR PARTY) ................................................................. 1-154CONSECUTIVE SPEED DIALING ........................................................................... 1-157CONSULTATION HOLD .......................................................................................... 1-167CUSTOMER ADMINISTRATION TERMINAL (CAT) ................................................ 1-168DATA LINE SECURITY ............................................................................................ 1-171DELAYED HOTLINE ................................................................................................ 1-172DELAYED RINGING ................................................................................................ 1-174DIAGNOSTICS ......................................................................................................... 1-175DIAL BY NAME ........................................................................................................ 1-176DIAL CONVERSION ................................................................................................ 1-185DIRECT DIGITAL INTERFACE ................................................................................ 1-187

SYSTEM OUTLINE ......................................................................................................... 1-187DTI ................................................................................................................................... 1-188PLO .................................................................................................................................. 1-189SYSTEM CAPACITY ....................................................................................................... 1-190HARDWARE REQUIRED ................................................................................................ 1-191TIME SLOT ALLOCATION .............................................................................................. 1-192DTI SPECIFICATIONS .................................................................................................... 1-193

DIRECT INWARD DIALING (DID) ............................................................................ 1-211DID CALL WAITING ........................................................................................................ 1-215DID DIGIT CONVERSION ............................................................................................... 1-216DID NAME DISPLAY ....................................................................................................... 1-221

DIRECT INWARD SYSTEM ACCESS (DISA) ......................................................... 1-223CALL FORWARDING SET BY DISA ............................................................................... 1-227

DIRECT INWARD TERMINATION (DIT) .................................................................. 1-232DIRECT OUTWARD DIALING (DOD) ...................................................................... 1-234DIRECT STATION SELECTION/BUSY LAMP FIELD (DSS/BLF) CONSOLE ......... 1-237DISTINCTIVE RINGING ........................................................................................... 1-239DO NOT DISTURB ................................................................................................... 1-265ENHANCED 911 ...................................................................................................... 1-271EXECUTIVE CALLING ............................................................................................. 1-275EXECUTIVE OVERRIDE ......................................................................................... 1-276EXTERNAL PAGING WITH MEET-ME .................................................................... 1-277FAX ARRIVAL INDICATOR ..................................................................................... 1-280FLEXIBLE LINE KEY ASSIGNMENT ....................................................................... 1-284FLEXIBLE NUMBERING PLAN ............................................................................... 1-288FLEXIBLE RINGING ASSIGNMENT ........................................................................ 1-290FORCED ACCOUNT CODE .................................................................................... 1-294GROUP CALL BY PILOT NUMBER DIALING ......................................................... 1-297

JULY/18/2008

iv NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093toc001.fm

GROUP LISTENING ................................................................................................ 1-300HOLD ........................................................................................................................ 1-301

AUTOMATIC HOLD ......................................................................................................... 1-301CALL HOLD ..................................................................................................................... 1-302DUAL HOLD .................................................................................................................... 1-303EXCLUSIVE HOLD .......................................................................................................... 1-304

HOTLINE-INSIDE/OUTSIDE .................................................................................... 1-305INTERCEPT ANNOUNCEMENT ............................................................................. 1-309INTERCOM .............................................................................................................. 1-310

MANUAL INTERCOM ...................................................................................................... 1-310AUTOMATIC INTERCOM ............................................................................................... 1-311DIAL INTERCOM ............................................................................................................. 1-313

INTERNAL TONE/VOICE SIGNALING .................................................................... 1-315INTERNAL ZONE PAGING WITH MEET-ME .......................................................... 1-317LAST NUMBER REDIAL .......................................................................................... 1-319LEAST COST ROUTING-3/6 DIGIT ......................................................................... 1-320LINE LOCKOUT ....................................................................................................... 1-335LINE PRESELECTION ............................................................................................. 1-336MULTILINE TERMINAL ............................................................................................ 1-337

AUTOMATIC IDLE RETURN ........................................................................................... 1-348CALLING NAME AND NUMBER DISPLAY ..................................................................... 1-349DYNAMIC DIAL PAD ....................................................................................................... 1-350GROUP FEATURE KEY .................................................................................................. 1-351MUTE KEY ...................................................................................................................... 1-352MY LINE NUMBER DISPLAY .......................................................................................... 1-353PRESET DIALING ........................................................................................................... 1-354PRIME LINE PICKUP ...................................................................................................... 1-355RECALL KEY ................................................................................................................... 1-356RELAY CONTROL FUNCTION KEY ............................................................................... 1-357RING FREQUENCY CONTROL ...................................................................................... 1-360RINGING LINE PICKUP .................................................................................................. 1-364SOFT KEY ....................................................................................................................... 1-365VOLUME CONTROL ....................................................................................................... 1-368

MESSAGE CENTER INTERFACE (MCI) ................................................................. 1-369SYSTEM OUTLINE ......................................................................................................... 1-369HARDWARE REQUIRED ................................................................................................ 1-371SYSTEM OPERATION .................................................................................................... 1-372PROGRAMMING ............................................................................................................. 1-380

MESSAGE REMINDER ............................................................................................ 1-385MESSAGE WAITING ............................................................................................... 1-389MISCELLANEOUS TRUNK ACCESS ...................................................................... 1-392

JULY/18/2008

v NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093toc001.fm

CCSA ACCESS ............................................................................................................... 1-392CODE CALLING EQUIPMENT ACCESS ........................................................................ 1-393DICTATION EQUIPMENT ACCESS ............................................................................... 1-396FOREIGN EXCHANGE (FX) ACCESS ........................................................................... 1-398RADIO PAGING EQUIPMENT ACCESS ........................................................................ 1-399WIDE AREA TELEPHONE SERVICE (WATS) ACCESS ............................................... 1-402

MOBILITY ACCESS ................................................................................................. 1-403MULTILINE TERMINAL ATTENDANT POSITION ................................................... 1-417MUSIC ON HOLD ..................................................................................................... 1-425NIGHT SERVICE ...................................................................................................... 1-431

CALL REROUTING ......................................................................................................... 1-431DAY/NIGHT MODE CHANGE BY STATION DIALING ................................................... 1-432DAY/NIGHT MODE CHANGE BY SYSTEM CLOCK ...................................................... 1-434OVERFLOW FOR TAS QUEUE ...................................................................................... 1-443QUEUE LIMIT FOR TAS ................................................................................................. 1-444TRUNK ANSWER ANY STATION (TAS) ........................................................................ 1-447

OFF-HOOK ALARM ................................................................................................. 1-453OFF-PREMISES EXTENSIONS .............................................................................. 1-454PAD LOCK ............................................................................................................... 1-455PC PROGRAMMING ................................................................................................ 1-459

FAULT MESSAGE ........................................................................................................... 1-461FAULT REPORT SCHEDULING ..................................................................................... 1-462PASSWORDS ................................................................................................................. 1-463PEG COUNT ................................................................................................................... 1-465REMOVE AND RESTORE SERVICE ............................................................................. 1-466STATION LINE STATUS DISPLAY ................................................................................. 1-467

PERIODIC TIME INDICATION TONE ...................................................................... 1-468POOLED LINE ACCESS .......................................................................................... 1-469PRIORITY CALL ....................................................................................................... 1-471PRIVACY .................................................................................................................. 1-472PRIVATE LINES ....................................................................................................... 1-474REMOTE HOLD ....................................................................................................... 1-475RETURN MESSAGE SCHEDULE DISPLAY ........................................................... 1-477ROUTE ADVANCE ................................................................................................... 1-478SAVE AND REPEAT ................................................................................................ 1-479SECURITY ALARM .................................................................................................. 1-480SEMI-AUTOMATIC CAMP-ON ................................................................................ 1-481SET RELOCATION .................................................................................................. 1-483SHORT MESSAGE SERVICE (SMS) ...................................................................... 1-484SINGLE DIGIT FEATURE ACCESS CODE ............................................................. 1-485

JULY/18/2008

vi NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093toc001.fm

SOFTWARE LINE APPEARANCE (VIRTUAL EXTENSIONS) ................................ 1-488STATION HUNTING ................................................................................................. 1-489

STATION HUNTING-CIRCULAR .................................................................................... 1-489STATION HUNTING-TERMINAL .................................................................................... 1-491STATION HUNTING-SECRETARIAL .............................................................................. 1-492

STATION MESSAGE DETAIL RECORDING (SMDR) ............................................. 1-493SYSTEM OUTLINE ......................................................................................................... 1-493SYSTEM CAPACITY ....................................................................................................... 1-497COMBINATION OF SMDR SERVICE ............................................................................. 1-498HARDWARE REQUIRED ................................................................................................ 1-499PROGRAMMING SUMMARY ......................................................................................... 1-500PROGRAMMING ............................................................................................................. 1-501

STATION SPEED DIALING ..................................................................................... 1-513STEP CALL .............................................................................................................. 1-522SUPERVISORY CONTROL OF PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT ................................. 1-523SYSTEM CLOCK SETUP BY STATION DIALING ................................................... 1-524SYSTEM SPEED DIALING ...................................................................................... 1-525TENANT SERVICE .................................................................................................. 1-533TIE LINES ................................................................................................................. 1-537TIE LINE TANDEM SWITCHING ............................................................................. 1-544TIMED FORCED RELEASE ..................................................................................... 1-545TIMED QUEUE ......................................................................................................... 1-547TIMED REMINDER .................................................................................................. 1-548TRUNK-DIRECT APPEARANCES ........................................................................... 1-556TRUNK QUEUING-OUTGOING ............................................................................... 1-562TRUNK-TO-TRUNK CONNECTION ........................................................................ 1-563UNIFORM CALL DISTRIBUTION (UCD) ................................................................. 1-565

BUSY IN/BUSY OUT-UCD .............................................................................................. 1-568CALL WAITING INDICATION-UCD ................................................................................. 1-569DELAY ANNOUNCEMENT-UCD .................................................................................... 1-574HUNT PAST NO ANSWER-UCD .................................................................................... 1-577IMMEDIATE OVERFLOW-UCD ...................................................................................... 1-578PRIORITY QUEUING-UCD ............................................................................................. 1-579QUEUE SIZE CONTROL-UCD ....................................................................................... 1-580SILENT MONITOR-UCD ................................................................................................. 1-581

UNIFORM NUMBERING PLAN (UNP)-VOICE AND DATA ..................................... 1-584VARIABLE TIMING PARAMETERS ......................................................................... 1-592VOICE GUIDE .......................................................................................................... 1-593VOICE MAIL INTEGRATION (ANALOG) ................................................................. 1-596WHISPER PAGE ...................................................................................................... 1-600

JULY/18/2008

vii NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093toc001.fm

Chapter 2 HOTEL FEATURESHOTEL SYSTEM OUTLINE ..................................................................................... 2-2HOTEL SYSTEM CAPACITY ................................................................................... 2-7HOTEL SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS ....................................................................... 2-8HOTEL FEATURE LIST ........................................................................................... 2-9HOTEL SYSTEM PROGRAMMING SUMMARY ...................................................... 2-10HOTEL SYSTEM PROGRAMMING ......................................................................... 2-11

PRECAUTION ................................................................................................................. 2-11HOTEL FEATURE PROGRAMMING .............................................................................. 2-12AUTOMATIC WAKE UP .................................................................................................. 2-13CHECK IN / CHECK OUT ............................................................................................... 2-22DIRECT DATA ENTRY .................................................................................................... 2-26DO NOT DISTURB-HOTEL/MOTEL ............................................................................... 2-27DO NOT DISTURB-SYSTEM .......................................................................................... 2-32HOTEL/MOTEL DID NUMBER ALLOCATION TO GUEST STATION ............................ 2-35HOTEL/MOTEL FRONT DESK INSTRUMENT ............................................................... 2-36HOTEL/MOTEL TOLL RESTRICTION CHANGE-GUEST STATION ............................. 2-39HOUSE PHONE .............................................................................................................. 2-41MAID STATUS ................................................................................................................. 2-42MESSAGE REGISTRATION ........................................................................................... 2-45MESSAGE WAITING ....................................................................................................... 2-47PROPERTY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM INTERFACE ..................................................... 2-50ROOM CUTOFF .............................................................................................................. 2-58ROOM STATUS .............................................................................................................. 2-59SINGLE DIGIT DIALING .................................................................................................. 2-60

Chapter 3 ISDN FEATURESISDN SYSTEM OUTLINE ......................................................................................... 3-2

SYSTEM OUTLINE OF ISDN-PRI ................................................................................... 3-2SYSTEM OUTLINE OF ISDN-BRI ................................................................................... 3-3SYSTEM OUTLINE OF ISDN-VPN ................................................................................. 3-5SYSTEM OUTLINE OF ISDN TELEPHONE ................................................................... 3-7DTI ................................................................................................................................... 3-9PRT .................................................................................................................................. 3-10BRT .................................................................................................................................. 3-11PLO .................................................................................................................................. 3-13

ISDN SYSTEM CONDITIONS .................................................................................. 3-14TIME SLOT ALLOCATION FOR DTI/PRT BLADE .......................................................... 3-14LINE DISTANCE BETWEEN PBX AND NT1/ISDN TELEPHONE .................................. 3-15

DTI SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................................................. 3-16

viii NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093toc001.fm

TRANSMISSION CHARACTERISTICS .......................................................................... 3-16FRAME CONFIGURATION OF 24DTI ............................................................................ 3-18FRAME CONFIGURATION OF 30DTI ............................................................................ 3-22

ISDN-PRI PROGRAMMING ..................................................................................... 3-24DIGITAL TRUNK DATA ASSIGNMENT .......................................................................... 3-24

ISDN-BRI PROGRAMMING ..................................................................................... 3-38BRT ASSIGNMENT ......................................................................................................... 3-38

ISDN FEATURE PROGRAMMING .......................................................................... 3-50CLI TRANSPARENCY ............................................................................................. 3-51DID ADDRESSING ................................................................................................... 3-53MEGACOM® ACCESS ............................................................................................. 3-57SID TO NETWORK-PRESENT/CPN TO NETWORK-PRESENT ............................ 3-58SID TO TERMINATING USER-DISPLAY ................................................................ 3-64CPN TO TERMINATING USER-DISPLAY ............................................................... 3-67SUBADDRESS-PRESENT ....................................................................................... 3-69TRUNK PROVISIONING SERVICE SELECTION .................................................... 3-70CALL BY CALL SERVICE SELECTION ................................................................... 3-71

AVAILABLE SERVICES .................................................................................................. 3-71CALL BY CALL LCR PROGRAMMING ........................................................................... 3-72FEATURES ...................................................................................................................... 3-73

ADVICE OF CHARGE-DISPLAY ............................................................................. 3-78ALTERNATE ROUTING FOR ISDN ......................................................................... 3-80CENTREX SHF OVER ISDN ................................................................................... 3-81OVERLAP SENDING ............................................................................................... 3-82OVERLAP RECEIVING ............................................................................................ 3-85ADDRESSING .......................................................................................................... 3-90CHANNEL NEGOTIATION ....................................................................................... 3-93CONNECTED LINE IDENTIFICATION PRESENTATION (COLP)/CONNECTED LINE IDENTIFICATION RESTRICTION (COLR) .............................. 3-94MALICIOUS CALL TRACE ....................................................................................... 3-96CALL COMPLETION TO BUSY SUBSCRIBER (CCBS) ......................................... 3-97ISDN-VPN PROGRAMMING ................................................................................... 3-99ISDN TELEPHONE DATA PROGRAMMING ........................................................... 3-101

BRT ASSIGNMENT ......................................................................................................... 3-101POINT-TO-POINT CONNECTION .................................................................................. 3-105POINT-TO-MULTIPOINT CONNECTION ....................................................................... 3-106INDIVIDUAL TERMINAL CALL ....................................................................................... 3-108GROUP CALL .................................................................................................................. 3-112

JULY/18/2008

ix NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093toc001.fm

Chapter 4 OPEN APPLICATION INTERFACE (OAI) FEATURESOAI SYSTEM OUTLINE ........................................................................................... 4-2OAI SYSTEM CONDITIONS .................................................................................... 4-3LIST OF OAI COMMANDS ...................................................................................... 4-4OAI BASIC DATA ASSIGNMENT ............................................................................ 4-12MSF DATA ASSIGNMENT ....................................................................................... 4-14TMF DATA ASSIGNMENT ....................................................................................... 4-19MRF DATA ASSIGNMENT ...................................................................................... 4-21SCF DATA ASSIGNMENT ....................................................................................... 4-22FLF DATA ASSIGNMENT ........................................................................................ 4-34KTF DATA ASSIGNMENT ....................................................................................... 4-35ACF DATA ASSIGNMENT ....................................................................................... 4-36SSF DATA ASSIGNMENT ....................................................................................... 4-37SMF DATA ASSIGNMENT ....................................................................................... 4-41TROUBLESHOOTING FOR ETHER ........................................................................ 4-46

Chapter 5 WCS FEATURES (PCS)WCS SYSTEM (PCS) OUTLINE .............................................................................. 5-2WCS SYSTEM (PCS) SPECIFICATIONS ................................................................ 5-4ZT SPECIFICATIONS .............................................................................................. 5-5PROGRAMMING SUMMARY .................................................................................. 5-6

INITIAL SET UP OF SYSTEM ......................................................................................... 5-6CHANGING ZT DATA IN SERVICE ................................................................................ 5-7CHANGING PS DATA ..................................................................................................... 5-8REPLACING PS .............................................................................................................. 5-9

ZT DATA PROGRAMMING ...................................................................................... 5-10INITIAL SET UP ............................................................................................................... 5-10CHANGING ZT DATA IN SERVICE ................................................................................ 5-15

ZT AUTHORIZATION ............................................................................................... 5-16INITIAL SET UP OF ZT ................................................................................................... 5-16SETTING UP OF ADDITIONAL ZT ................................................................................. 5-17

PS DATA PROGRAMMING ..................................................................................... 5-18TRUNK DATA PROGRAMMING (FOR ADJUNCT ANALOG) ................................. 5-22WCS FEATURE PROGRAMMING .......................................................................... 5-27ANNOUNCEMENT-PS NO ANSWER/ANNOUNCEMENT-PS OUT OF ZONE ...... 5-28CALL FORWARDING-NOT AVAILABLE ................................................................. 5-31CALL FORWARDING-PS OUT OF ZONE ............................................................... 5-32CALLING NAME DISPLAY-PS ................................................................................. 5-34

x NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093toc001.fm

DTMF SIGNAL SENDER ......................................................................................... 5-39MULTI-LINE OPERATION-PS ................................................................................. 5-40NUMBER SHARING ................................................................................................. 5-41PS LOCATION INDICATION .................................................................................... 5-43PS LOCATION SEARCH ......................................................................................... 5-44SOFT PHONE WIRELESS HANDSET .................................................................... 5-46STATION HUNTING-NOT AVAILABLE ................................................................... 5-48VOICE MAIL INDICATION ....................................................................................... 5-49MAINTENANCE DATA PROGRAMMING ................................................................ 5-50

Appendix A CHARACTER CODE TABLE

JULY/18/2008

INTRODUCTION

1 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch0001.fm

PURPOSE

INTRODUCTION

PURPOSEThis manual explains the feature programming and hardware requirements for each business, hotel, ISDN,OAI and WCS (PCS) service in the SV8300.

JULY/18/2008

INTRODUCTION

2 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch0001.fm

OUTLINE OF THIS MANUAL

OUTLINE OF THIS MANUALThis manual consists of five chapters and one appendix. The following paragraphs summarize Chapters 1through 5, and Appendix A.

CHAPTER 1 BUSINESS FEATURESThis chapter explains the programming procedure and hardware requirements forBusiness Features in this system.

CHAPTER 2 HOTEL FEATURESThis chapter explains the system outline, system capacity, system specifications,system programming and hardware requirements for the Hotel System.

CHAPTER 3 ISDN FEATURESThis chapter explains the programming procedure to provide the ISDN feature tothe PBX.

CHAPTER 4 OAI FEATURESThis chapter explains the programming procedure to provide OAI to the PBX.

CHAPTER 5 WCS FEATURES (PCS)This chapter explains the programming procedure to provide the WCS feature to thePBX.

APPENDIX A CHARACTER CODE TABLEThis appendix contains the character code table to set a station name displayed onMultiline Terminal or Attendant Console.

NOTE: As for the equipment name and function of chassis and circuit blades and system capacity, refer to the System Hardware Manual.

INTRODUCTION

3 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch0001.fm

TERMS IN THIS MANUAL

TERMS IN THIS MANUAL

PBX System DesignationPBX system is usually designated as “PBX” or “system”.When we must draw a clear line between the PBX systems, they are designated as follows.SV8300 : UNIVERGE SV83002400 IPX: 2400 IPX Internet Protocol eXchange

Terminal NameThe following IP terminals are designated as “Multiline Terminal” usually, unless we need to mention thetype of terminal in particular.

NOTE: Dterm75 (Series E)/Dterm85 (Series i) terminal can be used as the IP terminal by attaching the IP Adapter (IP Enabled Multiline Terminal). This terminal provides users with all features cur-rently available in IP Station.

TERMINAL NAME PRODUCT NAMEMultiline Terminal

Digital Multiline Terminal

Dterm Dterm70 (Elite)

Dterm75 (Series E)

Dterm85 (Series i)

DT300 Series DT310

DT330

IP Station

IP Multiline Terminal

IP Enabled Digital Multiline Terminal[For North America only]

Dterm75 (Series E) (IP Adapter Type)

Dterm85 (Series i) (IP Adapter Type)

DtermIP INASET

DtermIP Dterm85 (Series i) (IP Bundled Type)

Soft Phone DtermSP30

SIP Multiline Terminal

DT700 Series DT710

DT730

DT750

JULY/18/2008

INTRODUCTION

4 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch0001.fm

REFERENCE MANUAL

REFERENCE MANUALDuring installation, refer also to the manuals below:

System Hardware Manual:Contains the installation procedure for the PBX system and the hardware installation procedure forthe SV8300.

Command Manual:Contains the Customer Administration Terminal (CAT) operation, command functions and data re-quired for programming the system.

System Data Programming Manual:Contains the Customer Specifications Sheets and the System Data Programming Sheets.

Programming Manual:Contains procedure for programming each business, hotel, ISDN, OAI and WCS feature.

System Maintenance Manual:Contains the system maintenance service and the recommended troubleshooting procedure.

Networking Manual:Contains the system description and the programming procedure for the CCIS, Q-SIG and RemoteUnit System.

SMDR/MCI/PMS Interface Specifications:Contains the interface specifications for Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR), Message Cen-ter Interface (MCI), Property Management System (PMS) and the PMS operation.

PC Programming Manual:Contains the functional description and the installation procedure of PCPro.

JULY/18/2008

INTRODUCTION

5 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch0001.fm

HOW TO READ THIS MANUAL

HOW TO READ THIS MANUALChapter 1 through Chapter 5 explains the feature programming for each service about the following items.

PROGRAMMINGThis section explains the programming procedure for each service.The meanings of (1), (2) and marking are as follows.

(1) : 1st data

(2) : 2nd data

: DefaultWith the system data clear command (CM00, CM01), the data with this marking is automaticallyset for each command.

: A reset of the CPU blade is required after data setting.Press RESET switch on the CPU blade.

: A reset of the blade by CME0 Y=3 is required after data setting.

: Commands with this marking can be used only under Off-Line mode of the CPU blade. To set Off-Line mode,(1) Set SENSE switch on the CPU blade to “E” or “F”.(2) Press RESET switch on the CPU blade.

RESET

BLADE RESET

OFF LINE

INTRODUCTION

6 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch0001.fm

HOW TO READ THIS MANUAL

HARDWARE REQUIREDIn this section, required hardware for each service is listed, except the following:

Single line telephone set and interface blade (LC blade)Central Office Trunk blade (COT blade)Attendant Console and interface blade

For Direct Digital Interface, Message Center Interface (MCI), and Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR), the following sections explain the system for further details.

SYSTEM OUTLINEDTI*PLO*SYSTEM OPERATION**TIME SLOT ALLOCATION*DTI SPECIFICATIONS*PROGRAMMING SUMMARY***

* : Direct Digital Interface only** : MCI only***: SMDR only

INTRODUCTION

7 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch0001.fm

PRECAUTIONS

PRECAUTIONS

System Data Backup

CAUTION• If you operate as follows without system data backup after system data setting or service

memory setting (registration of the features such as “Call Forwarding” and “Speed Dialing”from a station), the data that has been set is invalid.You must execute the system data backup before the following operations.

-Turning Off the system-System Reset (reset of CPU blade)-Changing the CPU blade to Off-Line Mode-Changing the CPU blade to On-Line Mode after system data setting under Off-Line Mode

• You can execute the system data backup by the following two ways.-Executing the system data backup once a day at the time set by CM43 Y=5>00 (If no data is set, the default setting is 3:00 a.m.)-Executing the system data backup from PCPro/CAT by CMEC Y=6>0: 0

• Do not reset the CPU blade while “SYSD” LED on the CPU blade is flashing.

JULY/18/2008

8 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch0001.fm


UNIVERGE SV8300Programming Manual

1-1 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1001.fm

Chapter

1

BUSINESS FEATURES

This chapter explains the programming procedure and hardware re-quirements for Business Features in this system.Explanations are given in alphabetical order of the feature namesexcept the features on the next page.

Chapter 1 BUSINESS FEATURES

1-2 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1001.fm

The following features require no programming.

For the following features, refer to the SV8300 manuals mentioned below.

Refer to the System Manual:

• Alarm Indications• Elapsed Call Timer• Feature Activation from Secondary Extension• Handsfree Answerback• Handsfree Dialing and Monitoring• Multiline Terminal

– Called Station Status Display– Handsfree Unit– I-Hold/I-Use Indication– Microphone Control– Multiple Line Operation

• Night Service– Day/Night Mode Change by Attendant

Console• Non-exclusive Hold• PC Programming

– Battery Release Control– Configuration Report

• Power Failure Transfer• Reserve Power• Voice Mail Private Password

• Automatic Program Download for IP Enabled Digital Multiline Terminal/IP Multiline Terminal

• Bandwidth Control• Call Forwarding-Logout (IP Multiline Terminal)• IP Multiline Terminal

• FAX over IP• IP Enabled Digital Multiline Terminal• Modem over IP• SNMP• VoIP

JULY/18/2008

1-3 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1001.fm

ACCOUNT CODE

ACCOUNT CODE

PROGRAMMING

HARDWARE REQUIRED

SMDR

DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify whether Service Set Tone should be sent after dialing the access code for Account Code entry.

(1)(2)

3620 : No Tone1 : Service Set Tone

Assign Service Restriction Class A for Account Code entry to the required stations.

•(1)(2)

Y=02X-XXXXXXXX: My Line No.XX ZZXX: 00-15 : Service Restriction Class A

Allow Account Code in Service Restriction Class A assigned by CM12 Y=02.

•(1)

(2)

Y=030 00-15: Service Restriction Class A

assigned by CM12 Y=021 : Allow

Specify the maximum number of digits for Account Codes with CPU.

NOTE: If the SMDR message format (2400 IMS Format) is assigned, the maximum number of digits is 10.

(1)(2)

1001-16 : 1 digit-16 digitsNONE : 10 digits

Assign an access code for Account Code entry. •(1)(2)

Y=0-3: Numbering Plan Group 0-3X-XXXX: Access CodeA085

Assign an Account Code feature access key to a Multiline Terminal.

•(1)(2)

Y=00My Line No. + + Key No. F0085

START

CM08

CM12

CM15

CM42

CM20

CM90,

END

1-4 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1001.fm

ADD-ON MODULE

ADD-ON MODULE

PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign a Unit and Slot number to the DLC blade.

•(1)

(2)

Y=0XX ZZXX: 01-50: Unit No.ZZ : 01-18: Slot No.10: DLC blade

Assign the Add-On Module number to its associated Physical Port number.

NOTE: When the data assignment of both DSS Console and Add-On Module are required, the same number (the last two digits of the data) cannot be used.

•(1)

(2)

Y=00XX YY ZZ: Physical Port No.XX: 01-50: Unit No.YY: 01-18: Slot No.ZZ : 01-32: Circuit No.EC00-EC31: Add-On Module No. NOTE

Assign the Add-On Module to be equipped with the DT700 Series through the LAN con-nection (Side Connection).

•(1)

(2)

Y=010000-1499: Virtual Port No.

(For IP terminal)EC00-EC31: Add-On Module No.

Assign the Multiline Terminal which is associ-ated with the Add-On Module.

•(1)

(2)

Y=000-31: Last two digits of Add-On

Module No. EC00-EC31

X-XXXXXXXX: My Line No.

Assign the Service Restriction Class for the accommodation of Single-Line Telephone to Multiline Terminal. (Assignment for Single-Line Telephone only).

•(1)(2)

Y=05X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.0: Accommodated

Assign the station and trunk numbers to the keys on each Add-On Module.

NOTE: Single-Line, Virtual Line or My Line can be assigned on Add-On Module.

•(1)

(2)

Y=00My Line No. + + Add-On Module Key No. (30-54)X-XXXXXXXX: Station No. NOTEDXXXXXX: 000-511 (Trunk No.)

START

CM05

BLADE RESET

CM10

CM98

CM12

CM90,

A

JULY/18/2008

1-5 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1001.fm

ADD-ON MODULE

HARDWARE REQUIRED

DSS ConsoleDLC blade

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the Automatic/Manual/Dial Intercom key to each Add-On Module, if required.For details, refer to INTERCOM.

•(1)

(2)

Y=00My Line No. + + Add-On Module Key No. (30-54)A000-A031, A100-A131:Automatic Intercom No.A200-A700, A201-A701...A224-A724:Manual Intercom No.B000-B900, B001-B901...B024-B924:Dial Intercom No.

Assign the Station Speed Dialing to the keys on each Add-On Module, if required.For details, refer to STATION SPEED DIALING.

•(1)

(2)

Y=00My Line No. + + Add-On Module Key No. (30-89)F11XXXX: 00-99: Station Speed Dialing 00-99

Assign the Delayed Ringing feature to each line/trunk key on an Add-On Module, if required.

NOTE: Delayed Ringing can be assigned to the first 16 line/trunk keys (Key No. 30-45).

•(1)

(2)

Y=02My Line No. + + Add-On Module Key No. (30-45) NOTE0: Delayed Ringing

Specify the Delayed Ringing timing. •(1)(2)

Y=10901-20: 1024-20480 ms.

(1024 ms. increments)If no data is set, the default setting is 5120 ms.

Provide Trunk-Direct Appearances to the trunk number.

•(1)(2)

Y=18000-511: Trunk No.0: To provide

A

CM90,

,

,

CM41

CM30

END

1-6 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1001.fm

ALPHANUMERIC DISPLAY


PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION DATA

Provide station number and name display when an incoming call terminates to a Prime Line and a My Line.

(1)(2)

335 0 : Station No. and name display only

when incoming call terminates to Prime Line

1 : Station No. and name display when incoming call terminates to Prime Line or My line

Assign the access code for Name Display. •(1)(2)

Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3X-XXXX: Access CodeA110

Specify the time to go back to Date and Time display after the call answered.

(1)(2)

1200 : 10 seconds later1 : 6 seconds later

Specify the duration to display the name. (1)(2)

1210 : Until call finished1 : As per CM08>120

Specify the duration of displaying the destina-tion information (called number/name) on Multiline Terminal when the outgoing call is answered by the destination (except CCIS).

(1)(2)

5380 : Until call is finished1 : 6 seconds

Specify the duration of displaying the destina-tion information (called number/name) on Multiline Terminal when the outgoing call is answered by the destination via CCIS.

(1)(2)

5800 : 6 seconds1 : Until call is finished

Assign a trunk name number to each trunk route.

•(1)(2)

Y=00300-63: Trunk Route No.00-14: Trunk Name No. 00-1415 : Kind of trunk route assigned by

CM35 Y=000 is displayed 16-63: Trunk Name No. 16-63

START

CM08

RESET

CM20

CM08

CM35

A

1-7 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1001.fm


NOTE 1: The maximum number of stations that can be provided with the user’s name display is 512. The maximum number of characters per name is eight, including spaces. The PCPro or Customer Administration Terminal (CAT) can be used to register or change a name. A Multiline Terminal can register or change the name assignment of that individual Multiline Terminal.

NOTE 2: User names can be assigned to stations that do not have an LCD. NOTE 3: The trunk name display is provided on a trunk-route basis. The maximum amount of characters

in the trunk name display is four. The maximum number of trunk routes assignable is 16. The PCPro or CAT can be used to register or change a trunk name display.

NOTE 4: There are two ways to change a name that is currently programmed. (1) by overwriting with a new name, or (2) by inserting a blank space as the first character to cancel the existing name.

DESCRIPTION DATA

Enter the desired station user’s name to each station number by CM77 Y=0 or CM77 Y=1.

•(1)(2)

Y=0 By Character CodeX-XXXXXXXX: Station No. Character Code 20-7F (Maximum 32 dig-its)See APPENDIX A: Character Code Table.

Page A-2

•(1)(2)

Y=1 By CharacterX-XXXXXXXX: Station No. A-Z, 0-9: Character

(Maximum 16 characters)

Assign the desired trunk route name to each trunk route by CM77 Y=2 or CM77 Y=3.

•(1)

(2)

Y=2 By Character Code00-14, 16-63: Trunk Route Name No.

assigned by CM35 Y=003Character Code 20-7F (Maximum 8 digits)See APPENDIX A: Character Code Table.

Page A-2

•(1)

(2)

Y=3 By Character00-14, 16-63: Trunk Route Name No.

assigned by CM35 Y=003A-Z, 0-9: Character


A

CM77

END

JULY/18/2008

1-8 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1001.fm


To display the Caller ID for each Multiline Terminal before answer when an incoming call is terminatedwith TAS, do the following programming.

NOTE: This programming is effective only when CM76 Y=01-04 is set to D03 (Trunk Direct Appear-ance + TAS)/D13 (TAS), or CM30 Y=02/04/40/41 is set to 03 (Trunk Direct Appearance + TAS)/13 (TAS).

DESCRIPTION DATA

Provide Caller ID Display for each tenant when an incoming call is terminated to a Multiline Terminal with TAS.

•(1)(2)

Y=4200-63: Tenant No.0 : To provide1 : Not provided

Specify the My Line number of Multiline Ter-minal that displays the caller ID.

NOTE: The number of stations that can display the caller ID on LCD is maximum 8 per tenant.Set the allocation number to the stations that displays the caller ID.

•(1)

(2)

Y=30XX YYXX: 00-63: Tenant No.YY: 00-07: Allocation No.X-XXXXXXXX: My Line No.

Provide Caller ID Display for the My Line assigned by CM57 Y=30.

•(1)(2)

Y=54X-XXXXXXXX: My Line No.0 : To provide1 : Not provided

Assign the TAS Answer keys to the Multiline Terminal.

•(1)(2)

Y=00My Line No. + + Key No. F40XXXX: 00-63: Tenant No. assigned by CM57

Y=30

START

CM65

CM57

CM13

CM90,

END

JULY/18/2008

1-9 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1001.fm


To display the Caller ID for each Multiline Terminal before answer when an incoming call is terminatedto a sub line, do the following programming.

DESCRIPTION DATA

Provide Caller ID Display for each tenant when an incoming call is terminated to a sub line of Multiline Terminal.

•(1)(2)

Y=4300-63: Tenant No.0 : To provide1 : Not provided

Specify the My Line number of Multiline Ter-minal that displays the caller ID.

NOTE: The number of stations that can display the caller ID on LCD is maximum 8 per tenant.Assign the allocation number to the stations that displays the caller ID.

•(1)

(2)

Y=30XX YYXX: 00-63: Tenant No.YY: 00-07: Allocation No.X-XXXXXXXX: My Line No.

Provide Caller ID Display for the My Line assigned by CM57 Y=30.

•(1)(2)

Y=54X-XXXXXXXX: My Line No.0 : To provide1 : Not provided

Provide Caller ID Display for the stations of SLT/sub line of Multiline Terminal/Virtual line/Virtual station for PS that are accommo-dated to the Multiline Terminal multiline as a sub line.

NOTE: When terminating the call to the stations of SLT/sub line of Multiline Terminal/Virtual line/Virtual station for PS, the caller ID is displayed on the LCD of the Multiline Terminal assigned by CM57 Y=30.

•(1)(2)

Y=55X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.0 : To provide1 : Not provided

START

CM65

CM57

CM13

END

JULY/18/2008

1-10 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1001.fm

ANALOG PORT ADAPTER

ANALOG PORT ADAPTER

PROGRAMMING

NOTE: This feature is available for Dterm Series i/Dterm Series E only.

To assign the Single Port Mode:

To assign the Dual Port Mode:(1) Data Assignment for Digital Multiline Terminal accommodates the Analog Port Adapter

DESCRIPTION DATA

Provide the Analog Port Adapter to the required stations.

•(1)(2)

Y=32X-XXXXXXXX: My Line No.0: To connect

Assign the Single Port Mode to the required stations.

•(1)(2)

Y=33X-XXXXXXXX: My Line No.1 : Single port mode

Specify whether a ringing signal is sent to the analog terminal.

•(1)(2)

Y=35X-XXXXXXXX: My Line No.0 : Not sent1 : To send

DESCRIPTION DATA


•(1)(2)

Y=32X-XXXXXXXX: My Line No.0: To connect

Assign the Dual Port Mode to the required stations.

•(1)(2)

Y=33X-XXXXXXXX: My Line No.0: Dual port mode

START

CM13

RESET

END

START

CM13

RESET

END

1-11 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1001.fm

ANALOG PORT ADAPTER

(2) Data Assignment for Analog Terminal connected to the Analog Port Adapter

HARDWARE REQUIRED

Analog Port Adapter

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign an analog terminal station number to the required Physical Port number.

NOTE: For detail of Dual Port Mode, refer to “Setting Method of Port number/Station number in Dual port mode” in CM10 of the Command Manual.

•

(1)

(2)

Y=00

XX YY ZZ: Physical Port No.XX: 01-50: Unit No.YY: 01-18: Slot No.ZZ : 17-32: Circuit No.FX-FXXXXXXXX: Analog Terminal

Station No.

Assign a key for analog terminal. •(1)

(2)

Y=00Analog Terminal Station No. + + Key No.X-XXXXXXXXXX: Analog Terminal

Station No. assigned by CM10 Y=00

Assign an analog terminal station number as Prime Line.

(1)

(2)

X-XXXXXXXX: Analog Terminal Station No.

X-XXXXXXXX: Analog Terminal Station No.


•(1)

(2)

Y=34X-XXXXXXXX: Analog Terminal Station

No.0: To connect

Specify whether a ringing signal is sent to the analog terminal.

•(1)(2)

Y=35X-XXXXXXXX: My Line No.0 : Not sent1 : To send

Specify the PAD control of the analog terminal.

•(1)

(2)

Y=09X-XXXXXXXX: Analog Terminal Station

No.0 : Without PAD1 : As per CM42>190

START

CM10BLADE RESET

CM90,

CM93

CM13

END

JULY/18/2008

1-12 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1001.fm

ANNOUNCEMENT SERVICE


PROGRAMMING

To access the Voice Response System (VRS) from a station or C.O./Tie Line party:

DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify the Multiple Connections of the Voice Response System (VRS) on Announcement Service.

(1)(2)

124 0 : Available1 : Not available (Single Connection)

Assign Service Restriction Class A for Announcement Service to the required stations.

•(1)(2)

Y=02X-XXXXXXXX: My Line No.XX ZZ XX: 00-15 : Service Restriction Class A

Allow Announcement Service in Service Restriction Class A assigned by CM12 Y=02.

•

•

•

•

•

•

(1)

(2)

Y=034 Announcement Service Group 0 (Replay)Y=035 Announcement Service Group 1(Replay)Y=036 Announcement Service Group 2(Replay)Y=037 Announcement Service Group 3 (Replay)Y=038 Announcement Service Group 4 (Replay)Y=039 Announcement Service Group 0-4 (Record)00-15: Service Restriction Class A

assigned by CM12 Y=02 1 : Allow

START

CM08

CM12

CM15

A

1-13 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1001.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign access codes for Announcement Service.

•(1)(2)

Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3X-XXXX: Access CodeA103: Announcement Service Group 0-4

(Record)A104: Announcement Service Group 0

(Replay)A105: Announcement Service Group 1


(Replay) A107: Announcement Service Group 3


(Replay)A109: Announcement Service Group 0-4

(Delete)

When Multiple Connections are provided (CM08>124=0), specify the duration of message replay for the AnnouncementService.

•(1)(2)

Y=0 5301-99: 4-396 seconds

(4 second increments)If no data is set, the default setting is 60-64 seconds.

Assign the function for each Voice Response System.

•(1)(2)

Y=00000-007: Built-in VRS on CPU blade04X ZX: 0-4: Group No.Z: 0-9: Message No.

To provide a C.O./Tie Line party with this service, assign the Announcement Service Group 0-4 to the required trunk routes.

•••••

(1)(2)

Y=069 Announcement Service Group 0Y=070 Announcement Service Group 1Y=071 Announcement Service Group 2Y=072 Announcement Service Group 3Y=073 Announcement Service Group 400-63: Trunk Route No.1 : Allow

A

CM20

CM41

CM49

CM35

END

1-14 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1001.fm


NOTE 1: A maximum of five different announcements can be accessed. There is a limit of 10 Voice Response System Circuit for each of the five different announcements. When recording an announcement, each Voice Response System Circuit must be recorded individually.

NOTE 2: Each time a station is connected to a Voice Response System Circuit, the message will be repeated three times. The station will then be disconnected.

NOTE 3: For the single connection of a Voice Response System Circuit, the duration of an announcement is limited to 60 seconds.

NOTE 4: For the multi-connection of a Voice Response System Circuit, the duration of replay for an an-nouncement is programmable from 4 to 396 seconds.

1-15 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1001.fm


To provide a voice message when an incoming C.O. line/Tie line call has been transferred and encountersa busy or no answer condition:

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign Service Restriction Class A for Voice Response System Access (Record/Replay/De-lete).

•(1)(2)

Y=02X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.XX ZZXX: 00-15 : Service Restriction Class A

Allow Voice Response System Access in Service Restriction Class A assigned by CM12 Y=02.

•(1)

(2)

Y=03300-15: Service Restriction Class A as-

signed by CM12 Y=021 : Allow

Assign the feature for a voice message connection to a transferred trunk when the transferred destination does not answer or the transferred destination is busy to the required tenant.

•(1)(2)

Y=50 No Answer00-63: Tenant No. 0

•(1)(2)

Y=51 Busy00-63: Tenant No.0


•(1)(2)

Y=00000-007: Built-in VRS on CPU blade06XX: No AnswerXX : 00-63: Message No.07XX: BusyXX : 00-63: Message No.

••

(1)

(2)

Y=06 No AnswerY=07 BusyXX: 00-63: Tenant No. of transferring

stationXX: 00-63: Message No. assigned by

CM49 Y=00

To record, replay and delete a message, assign the respective Voice Response System access code.

•(1)(2)

Y=0-3 Number Plan Group 0-3X-XXXX: Access CodeA100: RecordA101: ReplayA102: Delete

START

CM12

CM15

CM65

CM49

CM20

END

1-16 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1001.fm


NOTE: Announcement Service can be used to provide a voice message when an incoming C.O. line/Tie line call has been transferred and encounters a busy or no answer condition. After the voice message is given, normal call processing continues. • This application can be programmed on a tenant basis.• Only one (1) message of up to the following seconds can be recorded on an individual Voice

Response System Circuit. Built-in VRS on CPU: 30 seconds

• In this application, a minimum of two Voice Response System Circuits are needed: one is forbusy condition and the other is for no answer.

• More than one Voice Response System Circuit can be used, depending on traffic conditions.• System programming can be set to, wait until circuits become free or immediately follow pre-

programmed normal call handling, if a busy condition is encountered.• Voice Response System Circuits can be shared among tenants.• This feature does not function on Attendant transferred calls.

1-17 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1001.fm


To provide a voice message when an incoming DID line/Tie line call has been terminated to a station andencounters a busy or no answer condition:

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign Service Restriction Class A for Voice Response System Access (Record/Replay/De-lete).

•(1)(2)


Allow Voice Response System Access in Service Restriction Class A assigned by CM12 Y=02.

•(1)

(2)

Y=03300-15: Service Restriction Class A


Specify the transferred timing when an incoming DID Line/Tie Line call encounters a no answer condition.

•(1)(2)

Y=00101-30: 4-120 seconds



•(1)(2)

Y=00000-007: Built-in VRS on CPU blade0D00: No Answer0E00: Busy

Assign the Voice Response System as the des-tination of the DID call on each tenant.

••

(1)(2)

Y=00 No AnswerY=03 Busy00-63: Tenant No.EB000-EB007: Voice Response System

No.

Assign the Voice Response System as the des-tination of the Tie Line call on each tenant.

••

(1)(2)

Y=01 No AnswerY=04 Busy00-63: Tenant No.EB000-EB007: Voice Response System

No.

To record, replay and delete a message, assign the respective Voice Response System access code.

•(1)(2)


START

CM12

CM15

CM41

CM49

CM51

CM20

END

1-18 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1001.fm


NOTE: Announcement Service can be used to provide a voice message when an incoming DID line/Tie line call has been terminated to a station and encounters a busy or no answer condition. After the voice message is given, normal call processing continues. • This application can be programmed on a tenant basis.• Only one (1) message of up to the following seconds can be recorded on an individual Voice

Response System Circuit. Built-in VRS on CPU: 30 seconds

1-19 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1001.fm


To provide an Internal Recorded Message from a Voice Response System (VRS) in place of Music OnHold:

NOTE: A voice message in place of Music-On-Hold can be provided when a call has been placed on hold.• Different messages can be programmed on a tenant basis.• Different messages can be programmed, depending on the type of line (C.O. line, Tie line or

station) on Hold.• More than one connection can be made to a Voice Response System Circuit. Only the first

connection can be assured of hearing the message from the beginning.• Announcement will be repeated until the call is removed from hold.

DESCRIPTION DATA

Define the type of call to be provided with Hold Message.

•(1)

(2)

Y=000: C.O. Line Call01: Tie Line Call02: Station0500: Hold Message

Assign the function of the Voice Response System to Hold Message Service.

•(1)(2)

Y=00000-007: Built-in VRS on CPU blade05XX: Hold Message ServiceXX : 00-63: Message No.

•(1)(2)

Y=0500-63: Tenant No.00-63: Message No. assigned by CM49

Y=00

To record, replay, or delete a message, assign the respective Voice Response System access code.

•(1)(2)


START

CM48

CM49

CM20

END

1-20 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1001.fm


To provide the Night Announcement by Voice Response System (VRS):

NOTE: A voice message can be sent to incoming C.O. lines during Night Mode.• Different messages can be programmed on each C.O. line.• The voice message can be programmed for Day/Night Mode.• More than one connection can be made to a Voice Response System Circuit. Only the first

connection can be assured of hearing the message from the beginning.• Announcements may be programmed to be repeated from 4 to 120 seconds in four-second

increments.

HARDWARE REQUIRED

CPU blade (built-in VRS)

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the Voice Response System number to each incoming trunk.

•(1)(2)

Y=03000-511: Trunk No.04: Direct-In Termination

•(1)(2)

Y=05000-511: Trunk No.EB000-EB007: Voice Response System

No.

Assign the function of the Voice Response System to Night Announcement.

•(1)(2)

Y=00000-007: Built-in VRS on CPU blade03000: Night Announcement Service

To record, replay, or delete a message, assign the respective Voice Response System access code.

•(1)(2)

Y=0-3 (Numbering Plan Group 0-3)X-XXXX: Access CodeA100: RecordA101: ReplayA102: Delete

START

CM30

CM49

CM20

END

1-21 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1001.fm

ANSWER KEY

ANSWER KEY

PROGRAMMING

NOTE: An ANSWER key is initially assigned on each Multiline Terminal.

HARDWARE REQUIRED

Multiline Terminal and DLC blade

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign Service Restriction Class B for Answer Key to the required Multiline Terminal.

•(1)(2)

Y=02 X-XXXXXXXX: My Line No.XX ZZ ZZ: 00-15 : Service Restriction Class B

Allow Answer Key in Service Restriction Class B assigned by CM12 Y=02.

•(1)

(2)

Y=072 00-15: Service Restriction Class B as-

signed by CM12 Y=020: Allow

START

CM12

CM15

END

1-22 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1002.fm

AUTHORIZATION CODE

AUTHORIZATION CODE

PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION DATA

Provide the system with Authorization Code. (1)(2)

2160 : To provide (CPU)1 : Not provided (OAI [ACF])

Specify whether Service Set Tone should be provided after dialing the access code for Authorization Code.

(1)

(2)

362: Service Set Tone after dialing the ac-cess code

0 : No tone1 : Service Set Tone

Assign Service Restriction Class A for Autho-rization Code to the required stations.

•(1)(2)


Allow Authorization Code in Service Restric-tion Class A assigned by CM12 Y=02.

•(1)

(2)

Y=031 Authorization Code00-15: Service Restriction Class A as-


Specify the entry of Authorization Code after dialing an LCR access code and desired number.

NOTE: To provide this operation, the following data assignments are required.- Toll restriction

(CM12 Y=01, CM8A Y=5XXX: 000, CM81)

- LCR origination(CM20: A126/A127/A128/A129, CM8A Y=5XXX: 180, CM85)

•(1)

(2)


signed by CM12 Y=020 : Allow7 : Restricted

Assign the access code for Authorization Code.

•(1)(2)

Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3X-XXXX: Access CodeA086: Authorization Code

START

CM08

CM12

CM15

CM20

A

1-23 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1002.fm

AUTHORIZATION CODE

DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify the maximum number of digits for Authorization Code with CPU.

(1)(2)

11Maximum number of digits01-16 : 1 digit-16 digitsNONE : 10 digits

Assign the ID Code Development number for Authorization Code.

•(1)(2)

Y=A00: Authorization Code 0-9: ID Code Development No. 00-09

NOTE: CM2A Y=00-09 is determined by this data.

Assign the ID Code for Authorization Code. •(1)

(2)

Y=00-09 ID Code Development No. 00-09X-XX...XX (Maximum16 digits):ID Code for Authorization Code0000-2999: ID Code Pattern No.

Assign the valid range of ID Code. •(1)(2)

Y=100000-2999: ID Code Pattern No.0 : Authorization Code/Forced Account

Code/Remote Access to System (DISA)

1 : Authorization Code/Forced Account Code

3 : Invalidate the ID Code

Assign the desired Trunk Restriction Class for each ID Code Pattern number.

•(1)(2)

Y=110000-2999: ID Code Pattern No.1 : Unrestricted (RCA)2 : Non-Restricted-1 (RCB)3 : Non-Restricted-2 (RCC)4 : Semi-Restricted-1 (RCD)5 : Semi-Restricted-2 (RCE)6 : Restricted-1 (RCF)7 : Restricted-2 (RCG)8 : Fully-Restricted (RCH)

A

CM42

CM2A

B

1-24 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1002.fm

AUTHORIZATION CODE

NOTE: Approximately 3000 Authorization Codes including Forced Account Codes and DISA codes can be defined.

Number of the codes varies with the number of digits assigned to each code.For details, refer to “BUSINESS/HOTEL/DATA FEATURES AND SPECIFICATIONS”.

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the desired Service Restriction Class A to each ID Code Pattern number.The features available in each class are as-signed by CM15.

•(1)(2)

Y=120000-2999: ID Code Pattern No.00-15 : Service Restriction Class A

Assign the desired Service Restriction Class B to each ID Code Pattern number.The features available in each class are as-signed by CM15.

•(1)(2)

Y=130000-2999: ID Code Pattern No.00-15 : Service Restriction Class B

Assign the desired Service Restriction Class C to each ID Code.The features available in each class are assigned by CM15.

•(1)(2)

Y=140000-2999: ID Code Pattern No.00-15 : Service Restriction Class C

B

CM2A

END

1-25 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1002.fm

AUTOMATED ATTENDANT

AUTOMATED ATTENDANT

PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the data for Automated Attendant to the required trunks.

••••

(1)(2)

Y=02 Terminating System in Day ModeY=03 Terminating System in Night ModeY=40 Terminating System in Mode AY=41 Terminating System in Mode B000-511: Trunk No.09: Automated Attendant

NOTE: When providing a Night Message for Automated Attendant, the 2nd Answering Message which is assigned by CM49 Y=00 2nd data 02XX is used for the Night Message. In that case, the 2nd data 08 of CM30 Y=30, 31 cannot be specified for handling of Busy/Not Available Automated Attendant destination.

•

•

(1)(2)

Y=30 Handling of busy/not available Auto-mated Attendant destination in Day ModeY=31 Handling of busy/not available Auto-mated Attendant destination in Night Mode000-511: Trunk No.00 : C.O. line release01 : Forwarded to TAS indicator03 : Forwarded to Attendant Console04 : Forwarded to DIT Station05 : Music and DT connection for Redial06 : DT connection for redial08 : 2nd Answering Message + DT

connection for redial NOTE15 : C.O. line release

•

•

(1)(2)

Y=32 Handling of timed-out Automated Attendant call in Day ModeY=37 Handling of timed-out Automated Attendant call in Night Mode000-511: Trunk No.00 : C.O. line release01 : Forwarded to TAS indicator03 : Forwarded to Attendant Console04 : Forwarded to DIT station06 : DT connection for redial15 : C.O. line release

START

CM30

A

1-26 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1002.fm

AUTOMATED ATTENDANT

DESCRIPTION DATA

•

(1)(2)

Y=33 Handling of all PBR busy when Y=30, 31 is set to data 08000-511: Trunk No.00 : C.O. line release01 : Forwarded to TAS indicator03 : Forwarded to Attendant Console15 : C.O. line release

Specify whether inter-tenant connection is allowed on an Automated Attendant incoming call.

•(1)

(2)

Y=2XX ZZXX: 00-63 (Tenant No. of called station)ZZ : 00-63 (Tenant No. of trunk)0 : Restricted1 : Allowed

Assign the answering method for the Automat-ed Attendant, to the required tenants.

•(1)(2)

Y=000-63: Tenant No.00 : DT Connection01 : Hold Tone on CPU blade + DT

Connection02 : 1st Answering Message + DT

Connection03 : DT Connection

For providing a Night Message, assign the answering method of Night Mode, to the required tenants.

•(1)(2)

Y=200-63: Tenant No.00 : DT Connection01 : Hold Tone Source on CPU blade +

DT Connection02 : Night Message assigned by CM49

Y=00, 02XX03 : According to the data set by CM64

Y=0

Specify whether no Dial Tone connection is required for the answering method assigned by CM64 Y=0.

•(1)(2)

Y=2060 : No Dial Tone1 : Dial Tone

A

CM30

CM63

CM64

CM48

B

1-27 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1002.fm

AUTOMATED ATTENDANT

DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify the ringing cadence for an Automated Attendant call.

(1)(2)

1800 : 0.4 seconds ON-0.2 seconds OFF-

0.4 seconds ON-2 seconds OFF[For North America]Special Ringing(See Interval of Ringing Tones for Multiline Terminal by CM08>392/CM08>396/CM08>397.

Page 1-253 )[For EU]As per CM08>392-Pattern 2[For other than North America/EU]

1 : As per CM35 Y=033

Specify the process when a call is transferred by an Automated Attendant to a predetermined station and time-out occurs.

(1)(2)

3590 : Disconnect call1 : Continue call

Specify the process for an Automated Atten-dant call when a caller dials while receiving the message or music.

(1)(2)

3630 : Not allowed (Allowed after receiving

the message or music)1 : Allowed

B

CM08

C

JULY/18/2008

1-28 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1002.fm

AUTOMATED ATTENDANT

DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify the time before answering by Auto-mated Attendant.

•(1)(2)

Y=05900-08: 0-32 seconds


Specify the time before an Automated Atten-dant call is redirected because no digits are received from the calling party.

•(1)(2)

Y=03401-30: 4-120 seconds


Specify the timing of unanswered call after forwarding to predetermined station in Auto-mated Attendant.

•(1)(2)

Y=03901-30: 4-120 seconds


Specify the time before Dial Tone timeout in Automated Attendant.

•(1)(2)

Y=04301-14: 1-14 seconds

(1 second increment)If no data is set, the default setting is 14 seconds.

C

CM41

END

1-29 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1002.fm

AUTOMATED ATTENDANT

When the 1st and/or the 2nd answering message is required: CM30 Y=30, 31>2nd data 08, CM64 Y=0>2nd data 02, or Night Message is required: CM64 Y=2>2nd data 02, do the following programming.

HARDWARE REQUIRED

For providing the first and/or second Answering Message/Night MessageCPU blade (built-in VRS)

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the function of the Voice Response System.

•(1)(2)

Y=00000-007: Built-in VRS on CPU blade01XX: 1st Answering Message02XX: 2nd Answering Message/Night

MessageXX : 00-63 (Message No.)

Assign the Message number to the required tenants.

••

(1)(2)

Y=01 For 1st Answering MessageY=02 For 2nd Answering Message/Night Message00-63: Tenant No.00-63: Message No. assigned by CM49

Y=00

To record, replay, or delete a message, assign the respective Voice Response System access codes.

•(1)(2)

Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3X-XXXX: Access CodeA100: RecordA101: ReplayA102: Delete

Specify the message replay timer for Automat-ed Attendant.

•(1)(2)

Y=05101-31: 8-128 seconds

(4 second increments)If no data is set, the default setting is 64-68 sec-onds.

START

CM49

CM20

CM41

END

1-30 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1002.fm

AUTOMATIC CALL DISTRIBUTION (ACD)

AUTOMATIC CALL DISTRIBUTION (ACD)[For North America/EU]

PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION DATA

For each ACD group, assign station numbers, one by one, in the order of hunting.

NOTE: Up to 60 stations can be assigned into a single ACD group.

Example: For setting station numbers 200, F201, 202 into one ACD group.

1st Operation (1) 200(2) 201

2nd Operation (1) 201(2) 202

3rd Operation (1) 202(2) 200

•(1)(2)

Y=0X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.X-XXXXXXXX: Another station No. to

be linked

Assign the Pilot station and Member station.

NOTE: Pilot station must be a non-equipped Physical Port number (CM10 Y=00) phantom.

•(1)(2)

Y=1X-XXXXXXXX: ACD station No.0 : Member station1 : Pilot station

Assign the ACD group number. •(1)(2)

Y=2X-XXXXXXXX: ACD station No.00-15: ACD Group 00-15

Specify ACD service for each type of call. •(1)

(2)

Y=4 Internal CallX-XXXXXXXX: Pilot station No. of ACD

group0 : Not provided1 : To provide

•

(1)(2)

Y=5 C.O. (DDD/FX/WATS) Incoming CallX-XXXXXXXX: Pilot station No. of ACD


START

CM17

3rd1st

2nd

200

202201

A

JULY/18/2008

1-31 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1002.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

•(1)

(2)

Y=6 Tie Line Incoming CallX-XXXXXXXX: Pilot station No. of ACD


•(1)

(2)

Y=7 DID/Automated Attendant CallX-XXXXXXXX: Pilot station No. of ACD


•

(1)

(2)

Y=B Designation of number of queuing in each ACD groupX-XXXXXXXX: Pilot station No. of ACD

group0 : To provide (See CM42>16)1 : Not provided

Specify the maximum number of queuing in each ACD group.

(1)(2)

1601-99 : 1 call-99 callsNONE : No limit

Specify the basic call answer delay time for use in PEG Count analysis.

•(1)(2)

Y=01601-30: 4-120 seconds


Assign the access code for ACD Station Busy Out Set and Reset.

•(1)(2)

Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3X-XXXX: Access CodeA044: Busy Out SetA045: Busy Out Reset

Assign the ACD Busy Out key on the Multi-line Terminal, if required.

•(1)(2)

Y=00My Line No. + + Key No.F0044: ACD Busy Out

Assign the Release key on the Multiline Termi-nal, if required.

•(1)(2)

Y=00My Line No. + + Key No.F1020: Release

A

CM17

CM42

CM41

CM20

CM90,

,

B

1-32 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1002.fm


To provide DID Number Conversion for an ACD Group:See DID DIGIT CONVERSION. Page 1-216

DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify the processing for an incoming call when all ACD stations are busy.

(1)(2)

2120 : Busy Tone Connection1 : Queuing

Specify the processing for a held call after the agent sets the ACD Busy Out.

(1)(2)

214: For the held call from Tie Line0 : Reconnected by Switch Hook Flash1 : Disconnected

(1)(2)

215: For the held call from C.O. Line0 : Reconnected by Switch Hook Flash1 : Disconnected

Specify whether the transferred C.O. call from a station or an attendant is placed into queuing mode when all ACD stations are busy.

NOTE: This data is only effective when CM08>212 is set to 1.

(1)(2)

2270 : The call is placed into queuing

mode NOTE1 : Recall to the transferring station when

the call is transferred from a station, or attendant Camp-On is set when the call is transferred from Attendant

Enable the ACD Busy Out set and reset from the secondary extension.

(1)(2)

4420 : Available1 : Not available

Specify whether the MIS command while hearing busy tone on ACD termination.

(1)(2)

8540 : To send1 : Not sent

B

CM08

END

1-33 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1002.fm

AUTOMATIC CALL DISTRIBUTION (ACD)BUSY IN/BUSY OUT-ACD

BUSY IN/BUSY OUT-ACD[For North America/EU]

PROGRAMMING

To provide ACD Busy Out indication on DSS Console:

DESCRIPTION DATA

Provide the system with ACD Busy Out indication on DSS Console.

(1)(2)

2650: To provide

Assign the function key on each DSS Console. (1)

(2)

DSS Console No. (00-31) + + Function Key No. (57-59)F1055: ACD Busy Out

START

CM08

CM97 ,

END

JULY/18/2008

1-34 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1002.fm

AUTOMATIC CALL DISTRIBUTION (ACD)CALL WAITING INDICATION-ACD

CALL WAITING INDICATION-ACD[For North America/EU]

PROGRAMMING

To provide Call Waiting (CW) LEDs on the Multiline Terminal:

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the incoming call to queuing mode when all ACD stations are busy.

(1)(2)

2121 : Queuing

Specify the maximum number of queuing in each ACD group for controlling call waiting lamp of a Multiline Terminal.

(1)(2)

1501-99 : 1 call-99 callsNONE : 1 call

NOTE: Depending on the number of queuing station/trunk, LED indication pattern on a Multiline Terminal is different as shown below:

N=Number of queuing station/trunk

Assign the ACD Call Waiting Indication LED to the required Multiline Terminal, as required.

•(1)(2)

Y=00My Line No. + + Key No. F1500-F1515: ACD Group 0-15

START

CM08

CM42

CONDITIONS LED INDICATION2nd Data=01 Steady on red irrespective of number of queuing station/trunk1≤N<2nd Data (2nd Data≠01) Steady on red2nd Data≤N (2nd Data≠01) Flashing red

CM90,

END

JULY/18/2008

1-35 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1002.fm


To provide an external Call Waiting Indicator:

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the incoming call to queuing mode when all ACD stations are busy.

(1)(2)

2121 : Queuing

Specify the maximum number of queuing in each ACD group for controlling external indi-cator lamp.

(1)(2)


NOTE: Depending on the number of queuing station/trunk, LED indication pattern on the external indicator is different as shown below:


Specify the external ACD Call Waiting indica-tion pattern.

(1)(2)

0001 : 30 IPM (1 second ON/OFF)02 : 60 IPM (0.5 seconds ON/OFF)03 : 120 IPM (0.25 seconds ON/

OFF)07 : Steady onNONE : 120 IPM (0.25 seconds ON/

OFF)

START

CM08

CM42

CONDITIONS LED INDICATION2nd Data=01 Lamp on irrespective of number of queuing station/trunk (For the

indication pattern, see CM59 in this page.)N<2nd Data (2nd Data≠01) Lamp off2nd Data≤N (2nd Data≠01) Lamp on (For the indication pattern, see CM59 in this page.)

CM59

A

To use the External Relay Interface on CPU

B

To use the PGD(2)-U10 ADP

JULY/18/2008

1-36 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1002.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

Set the function of ACD Calling Waiting Indication to the External Relay Interface on CPU.

•(1)(2)

Y=00312, 313: External Relay Interface on CPU14XXXX: 00-15: ACD Group No. assigned by

CM17

DESCRIPTION DATA


NOTE: When the PGD(2)-U10 ADP is accommodated to the Remote Unit, execute the system data copy by CMEC Y=8 before executing the blade reset.

•(1)

(2)


Assign the station number connected to PGD(2)-U10 ADP to its associated Physical Port number.

•(1)

(2)

Y=00XX YY ZZ: Physical Port No.XX: 01-50: Unit No.YY: 01-18: Slot No.ZZ : 01-32: Circuit No.X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.

Assign the Kind of PGD(2)-U10 station.

NOTE: Set the second data to “1” when combining external relay with pag-ing. Set the second data to “3” only when using this feature.

•(1)(2)

Y=65X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.1: Paging3: External relay/external key only

A

CM44

END

B

CM05

BLADE RESET

CM10

CM12

C

JULY/18/2008

1-37 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1002.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

Allow the accommodation of PGD(2)-U10 ADP.

•(1)(2)

Y=63X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.0 : To accommodate 1 : Not accommodated

NOTE 1: Set this data only for a Base Port of DLC blade.

NOTE 2: When the second data is set to “0”, PGD(2)-U10 ADP cannot be accommodated with Dterm75 under the same DLC blade (DT300 Series can be accommodated with Dterm85).

Set the function of ACD Calling Waiting Indication to the PGD(2)-U10 ADP.

•(1)

(2)

Y=00XX Y XX: 00-31: Relay Group No.Y : 0-3: Circuit No.14XXXX: 00-15: ACD Group No. assigned by

CM17

Associate the PGD(2)-U10 station number with the Relay Group number.

•(1)(2)

Y=0100-31: Relay Group No.X-XXXXXXXX: PGD(2)-U10 Station No.NONE : No data

C

CM13

BLADE RESET

CM44

END

JULY/18/2008

1-38 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1002.fm

AUTOMATIC CALL DISTRIBUTION (ACD)DELAY ANNOUNCEMENT-ACD

DELAY ANNOUNCEMENT-ACD[For North America/EU]

PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign Service Restriction Class A for Voice Response System Access (Record/Replay/Delete) to the required stations.

•(1)(2)

Y=02X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.XX ZZ XX: 00-15 : Service Restriction Class A

Assign Voice Response System Access in Service Restriction Class A assigned by CM12 Y=02.

•(1)

(2)



Specify the pattern of message sent to each ACD group periodically.

•(1)

(2)

Y=AX-XXXXXXXX: Pilot station No. of ACD

group0: To send periodically

If the data for CM17 Y=A is “0”, set the interval time for ACD Delay Announcement.

•(1)(2)

Y=04701-30: 4-120 seconds


Specify the maximum ACD call waiting time before answer or abandonment for ACD PEG Count, and waiting time before ACD Delay Announcement.

•(1)(2)

Y=01601-30: 4-120 seconds


Assign the ACD Delay Announcement function to the required Voice Response System.

•(1)(2)

Y=00000-007: Built-in VRS on CPU blade0B0XXXX: 00-63: ACD group No.

START

CM12

CM15

CM17

CM41

CM49

A

JULY/18/2008

1-39 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1002.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

When transferring the call to a station or Atten-dant after the 1st interval time of ACD Delay Announcement, assign the destination.

NOTE: This is a separate feature called “Delay Overflow”. ACD Delay Announcement is required in order for this feature to work.

•(1)(2)

Y=1700-63: Tenant No.Destination: X-XXXXXXXX: Station No. E000 : Attendant Console

To record, replay and delete a message, assign the Voice Response System access code, respectively.

•(1)(2)

Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3X-XXXX: Access codeA100: RecordA101: ReplayA102: Delete

Specify a diversion display on a Multiline Ter-minal or Attendant Console when transferring an ACD call.

(1)(2)


A

CM51

CM20

CM08

END

1-40 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1002.fm


When sending the ACD second delay announcement:

DESCRIPTION DATA

Provide the system with Busy Tone Connec-tion for processing when all ACD stations are busy.

(1)(2)

2120: Busy Tone Connection

Specify the pattern of message sent to each ACD group periodically.

•(1)

(2)

Y=AX-XXXXXXXX: Pilot station number of

ACD group0: To send periodically

Set the interval time of ACD Delay Announce-ment.

•(1)(2)

Y=04701-30: 4-120 seconds


Specify the maximum ACD call waiting time for ACD PEG Count, and waiting time before ACD Delay Announcement.

•(1)(2)

Y=01601-30: 4-120 seconds


Assign the ACD Delay Announcement func-tion and the ACD Second Delay Announce-ment function to the required Voice Response System.

•(1)(2)

Y=00000-007: Built-in VRS on CPU blade11XX: ACD Second Delay Announce-

mentXX : 00-63: ACD group No.

START

CM08

CM17

CM41

CM49

END

1-41 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1002.fm

AUTOMATIC CALL DISTRIBUTION (ACD)HUNT PAST NO ANSWER-ACD

HUNT PAST NO ANSWER-ACD[For North America/EU]

PROGRAMMING

Refer to CALL FORWARDING-NO ANSWER. Page 1-76

JULY/18/2008

1-42 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1002.fm

AUTOMATIC CALL DISTRIBUTION (ACD)IMMEDIATE OVERFLOW-ACD

IMMEDIATE OVERFLOW-ACD[For North America/EU]

PROGRAMMING

Refer to CALL FORWARDING-BUSY LINE. Page 1-73

JULY/18/2008

1-43 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1002.fm

AUTOMATIC CALL DISTRIBUTION (ACD)PRIORITY QUEUING-ACD

PRIORITY QUEUING-ACD[For North America/EU]

PROGRAMMING

To assign Priority Queuing per trunk route.

To assign Priority Queuing per DID incoming LDN.

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign Priority Queuing per trunk route. •(1)(2)

Y=06000-63: Trunk Route No.0 : To provide1 : Not provided

DESCRIPTION DATA

Provide DID digit conversion to the trunkroute number.

•(1)(2)




Assign the Number Conversion Block number for Development Table 0.

•(1)(2)

Y=00X-XXXX: DID No.000-999 : Number Conversion Block No.NONE : No data

Assign Priority Queuing per DID incoming LDN.

•(1)

(2)

Y=11000-999: Number Conversion Block No.

assigned by CM76 Y=00/900 : Not provided1 : To provide

START

CM35

END

START

CM35

CM76

END

JULY/18/2008

1-44 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1002.fm

AUTOMATIC CALL DISTRIBUTION (ACD)QUEUE SIZE CONTROL-ACD

QUEUE SIZE CONTROL-ACD[For North America/EU]

PROGRAMMING

Refer to AUTOMATIC CALL DISTRIBUTION (ACD). Page 1-30

JULY/18/2008

1-45 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1002.fm

AUTOMATIC CALL DISTRIBUTION (ACD)SILENT MONITOR-ACD

SILENT MONITOR-ACD[For North America/EU]

PROGRAMMING

To monitor an ACD call, with or without warning tone:

NOTE: Monitoring telephone conversations may be illegal under certain circumstances and laws. Con-sult a legal advisor before implementing the monitoring of telephone conversations. Some fed-eral and state laws require a party monitoring a telephone conversation to use beep-tones, to notify all parties to the telephone conversation, and/or obtain consent from all parties to the telephone conversation. Some of these laws provide strict penalties for illegal monitoring of telephone conversations.

DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify the warning tone sent to connected stations when monitoring a station-to-station or station-to-trunk call.

(1)(2)

2590 : No tone1 : One warning tone

Specify whether the warning tone is sent to the outside party when monitoring a station-to-trunk call.

(1)(2)


Assign Service Restriction Class A for monitoring stations.

•(1)(2)


Allow monitoring stations in Service Restric-tion Class A assigned by CM12 Y=02.

•(1)

(2)



Assign Service Restriction Class A for monitored stations.

•(1)(2)


START

CM08

CM12

CM15

CM12

A

JULY/18/2008

1-46 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1002.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

Allow being monitored in Service Restriction Class A assigned by CM12 Y=02.

•(1)

(2)



Assign the access code for monitoring, if required.

•(1)(2)

Y=0-3 Number Plan Group 0-3X-XXXX: Access CodeA033: Monitor

Assign a monitoring function key to the Multi-line Terminal, if required.

•(1)(2)

Y=00My Line No. + + Key No.F0033: Monitoring

Specify the action of monitoring station after the hold/hooking key is pressed in the moni-tored station or the monitored station becomes idle.

(1)(2)

5600 : Keep monitoring1 : Stop monitoring

When setting the second data of CM08>560 to 0 (keep monitoring), set the music for Internal Hold Tone that is sent to monitoring station.

NOTE: This data setting is effective only for the legacy terminal.For IP Station, this data setting is not effective. IP Station uses the tone source in IP Adapter (Minuet).

•(1)(2)

Y=30100 : Nocturne01 : Minuet02 : Fur Elise03 : The Maiden’s Prayer04 : When the saints go marching in06 : Spring (by four seasons)08 : Ich bin ein Musikante (German

folk song)10 : Amaryllis (French folk song)NONE : Minuet

Define the type of call to be provided with Hold Tone on the CPU blade.

•(1)(2)

Y=002: Internal Call1400: Hold Tone Source on CPU blade

A

CM15

CM20

CM90,

CM08

CM48

END

JULY/18/2008

1-47 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1002.fm


HARDWARE REQUIRED

To provide the delay announcement for ACD:CPU blade (built-in VRS)

To provide the external Call Waiting Indicator:CPU blade (built-in External Equipment Interface)External Indicator

Requirement for External IndicatorControl Method: Ground/Battery (Maximum125 mA)Type: Visual and/or Audible type with volume control

1-48 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1002.fm

AUTOMATIC CALL DISTRIBUTION (ACD) WITH MANAGEMENT INFORMATION SYSTEM (MIS)

AUTOMATIC CALL DISTRIBUTION (ACD) WITH MANAGEMENT INFORMATION SYSTEM (MIS)NOTE: Additional programming is required for MIS, once ACD has been programmed. Refer to the

CallCenterWorX System Manual. If you use the CallCenterWorX, the maximum digit of a station number must be 4 digits.

1-49 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1002.fm

AUTOMATIC CAMP-ON

AUTOMATIC CAMP-ON

PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify the Camp-On Tone pattern. (1)(2)

0680 : Send out only once1 : Repeat at 4 second intervals

Assign Automatic Camp-On to the required DIT trunks.

••

(1)(2)

Y=13 In Day ModeY=14 In Night Mode000-511: Trunk No.06: Automatic Camp-On

START

CM08

CM30

END

1-50 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1002.fm

AUTOMATIC CHANGE TO DAYLIGHT SAVING TIME


PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify the automatic change time of the sys-tem clock from standard time to daylight-sav-ing time (for change pattern 0).

NOTE: The change of system clock is exe-cuted at 2:00 am (in standard time) of the specified day.

•(1)(2)

Y=800MM W DMM: 01-12 (Change Month)W: 1-4/9 (Change Week)

1-4: First-Fourth Week 9 : Final Week

D : 0-6 (Change Day of the week)0: Sunday1: Monday2: Tuesday3: Wednesday4: Thursday5: Friday6: Saturday

NONE : Automatic clock change is not provided

Specify the automatic change time of the sys-tem clock from daylight-saving time to stan-dard time (for change pattern 0).

NOTE: The change of system clock is exe-cuted at 3:00 am (in daylight-saving time) of the specified day.

•(1)(2)





START

CM43

A

1-51 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1002.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify the automatic change time of the sys-tem clock from standard time to daylight-sav-ing time (for change pattern 1).

NOTE: The change of system clock is exe-cuted at 2:00 am (in standard time) of the specified day.

•(1)(2)





Specify the automatic change time of the sys-tem clock from daylight-saving time to stan-dard time (for change pattern 1).

NOTE: The change of system clock is exe-cuted at 3:00 am (in daylight-saving time) of the specified day.

•(1)(2)





A

CM43

B

1-52 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1002.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the automatic clock change pattern to each location number.

•(1)(2)

Y=3100-63: Location No.0 : Change Pattern 0 (assigned by

CM43 Y=8>00/01)1 : Change Pattern 1 (assigned by

CM43 Y=8>04/05)NONE : Automatic clock change is not

provided

Set the daylight-saving time to each location.

NOTE: Usually do not set this command by PCPro/CAT. This command is set automatically when automatic system clock change has been exe-cuted by CM43 Y=8/CM67 Y=31.If the system power is off at the time for clock change, set this data.

•(1)(2)

Y=3000-63: Location No.0 : To operate with Daylight-Saving

Time NONE : To operate with Standard Time

Specify the system clock used for the SMDR output of outgoing/incoming call.

(1)(2)

8360 : System clock of the unit that the seized

trunk is accommodated (for outgoing call)/System clock of unit that the ter-minated trunk is accommodated (for outgoing call)

1 : System clock of Main Unit

Specify the system clock used for the SMDR output of station to station call.

(1)(2)


trunk/calling station is accommodated1 : System clock of Main Unit

Specify the system clock used for the date pat-tern/time pattern in LCR service.

(1)(2)


trunk/calling station is accommodated1 : System clock of Main Unit

B

CM67

CM08

END

1-53 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1002.fm


To read the system clock which the automatic clock change was executed (for change pattern 0/changepattern 1):

DESCRIPTION DATA

Read the system clock which the automatic clock change was executed from standard time to daylight-saving time (for change pattern 0).

•(1)(2)

Y=802YYYY MM DDYYYY : 2007-2099 (Year)MM : 01-12 (Month)DD : 01-31 (Date)NONE : Automatic clock change has not

been executed

Read the system clock which the automatic clock change was executed from daylight-saving time to standard time (for change pat-tern 0).

•(1)(2)


been executed

Read the system clock which the automatic clock change was executed from standard time to daylight-saving time (for change pattern 1).

•(1)(2)


been executed

Read the system clock which the automatic clock change was executed from daylight-saving time to standard time (for change pat-tern 1).

•(1)(2)


been executed

START

CM43

END

1-54 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1002.fm


To read out of daylight-saving time of Main Unit:

DESCRIPTION DATA

Read out of daylight-saving time of Main Unit. (1)(2)

3HH MM SSHH : 00-23 (Hour)MM: 00-59 (Minute)SS : 00-59 (Second)

START

CM02

END

1-55 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1002.fm

AUTOMATIC NUMBER IDENTIFICATION (ANI)

AUTOMATIC NUMBER IDENTIFICATION (ANI)[For North America]

PROGRAMMING

(1) DTI Assignment for ANI

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign a trunk route number to each DTI. •(1)(2)

Y=00 000-511: Trunk No.00-63: Trunk Route No.

Specify the Terminating System in Day Mode, Night Mode, Mode A and Mode B for incom-ing calls.

••••

(1)(2)

Y=02 Day Mode Y=03 Night Mode Y=40 Mode AY=41 Mode B000-511: Trunk No.31 : DID, Tie line and any call which is

not handled by the PBX

Assign the trunk route data to each DTI route. •

(1)(2)

Y=000 Kind of trunk route

00-63: Trunk Route No.00: DDD (C.O./DID), ISDN trunk

•(1)(2)

Y=004 Answer signal from distant office00-63: Trunk Route No.2: Answer signal arrives

•(1)(2)

Y=005 Release signal from distant office 00-63: Trunk Route No.1 : Release signal arrives

•

(1)(2)

Y=009 Incoming connection signaling

00-63: Trunk Route No.03: Wink Start

•(1)(2)

Y=010 2nd DT sending on call termination00-63: Trunk Route No.0: 2nd Dial Tone is not sent

START

CM30BLADE RESET

CM35BLADE RESET

BLADE RESET

A

JULY/18/2008

1-56 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1002.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the trunk route data to each DTI route. •

(1)(2)

Y=020 Sender Start Condition

00-63: Trunk Route No.00: Wink Start

Assign calling number sending method from the network to each trunk route.

•(1)(2)

Y=129 Calling No. Sending Method00-63: Trunk Route No.0: Caller ID (Class SM)1: T1-ANI

Assign the PAD data for the connection from a trunk to a station.

•(1)(2)

Y=28900-63: Trunk Route No.01-31 : PAD data

01: -15 dB(1 dB increment)

15: -1 dB16: 0 dB17: +1 dB

(1 dB increment)31: +15 dB

NONE : 0 dB(+: Gain, -: Loss)

Assign the PAD data for the connection from a station to a trunk.

•(1)(2)



15: -1 dB16: 0 dB17: +1 dB



A

CM35BLADE RESET

~~

~~

B

JULY/18/2008

1-57 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1002.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the PAD data for the tandem connec-tion.

•(1)

(2)

Y=1XX ZZXX: 00-63: Incoming Trunk RouteZZ : 00-63: Outgoing Trunk RouteXX ZZXX : 01-31: PAD data from an Incom-

ing Trunk Route to an Outgoing Trunk Route

ZZ : 01-31: PAD data from an Outgo-ing Trunk Route to an Incoming Trunk Route

XX, ZZ: PAD data01: -15 dB

(1 dB increment)15: -1 dB16: 0 dB17: +1 dB


NONE : 0 dB/0 dB(+: Gain, -: Loss)

B

CM36

~~

END

1-58 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1002.fm


(2) MF Signaling Assignment

DESCRIPTION DATA

Provide required DID trunk route with MF Signaling.

•(1)(2)

Y=037 MF Signaling Assignment00-63: Trunk Route No.0: Available

Assign Busy/Idle information not to be sent to T1 network.

•(1)(2)

Y=048 Busy/Idle Sending to T1 Network00-63: Trunk Route No.0: Not available

START

CM35

END

1-59 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1002.fm


(3) ANI Assignment

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign requiring of ANI Signal from T1 network when an incoming call terminates.

(1)(2)

4720: Available

Assign the Signal Pattern received from T1 network.

NOTE: • When the Signal Pattern from T1 network is FGD-Format: Assign the data to “NONE”.

• When the Signal Pattern from T1 network is ANI-Format: Assign the data to “02”.

•(1)(2)

Y=300: Signal Pattern from T1 Network NOTENONE : ANI + Called No. 02 : ANI

Assign the number of digits of Called Number received from T1 network.

•(1)(2)

Y=1 2: Number of Digits of Called No.NONE : No data01-31 : 1-31 digits

Assign the signal kind of Called Number sent from T1 network.

NOTE: • When the Signal Pattern from T1 network is FGD-Format: Assign the data to “1”.


•(1)(2)

Y=A 17: Signal Kind of Called No. NOTE0 : DP 1 : MF

Assign the ACK-WINK Signal to be sent to the DTI when the signal kind of Called from T1 network is MF Signal.



•(1)

(2)

Y=A 16: Sending of ACK-WINK Signal on Re-

ceiving MF Signal NOTE0 : To send1 : Not sent

START

CM08

CM31

A

1-60 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1002.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the ACK-WINK Signal to be sent to the DTI when the signal kind of called number received from T1 network is DP Signal.



•(1)

(2)

Y=A 18: Sending of ACK-WINK Signal on

Receiving DP Signal NOTE0 : To send1 : Not sent

Assign the number of digits to be deleted from ANI, if required.

< An example of FGD Format >

•(1)(2)

Y=A 14: Number of Deleting Digits from ANI00 : No digit deletion 01-10: Leading one digit deletion-Leading

10 digits deletion 15 : No digit deletion

Assign whether ANI is sent to the OAI terminal or not.

(1)(2)

462: Sending ANI to OAI terminal0 : To send1 : Not sent

Assign whether ANI is sent to the SMDR terminal or not.

(1)(2)

463: Sending ANI to SMDR terminal0 : To send1 : Not sent

A

CM31

Received digits: Key Pulse + XX + 1234567890 + Stop Pulse

ANI (10 digits)Information digits (2 digits)

• 2 digits deletion• Identification on the terminal:

10 digits (ANI)

CM08

END

1-61 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1002.fm


When the signal pattern of the called number sent from T1 network is as shown below, assign the followingdata, if required.

Called Number=NPA + NNX + Called Station Number

NOTE: FGD-Format and ANI-Format are:

HARDWARE REQUIRED

DTI blade

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the Digit Addition/Deletion on the incoming calls.

•(1)(2)

Y=017 Digit Addition/Deletion Assign-ment00-63: Trunk Route No.00-09: “0” add -“9” add 10 : 2-digit addition (CM50 Y=00>0) 11 : 1 digit deletion 12 : 2 digits deletion 15 : Addition/deletion is not performed

Assign the access code for LCR Group 0-3. •(1)(2)

Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3X-XXXX: Access CodeA126: LCR Group 0 A127: LCR Group 1 A128: LCR Group 2 A129: LCR Group 3

Assign an area code for Intra-Office Termination.

•

(1)(2)

Y=4005-4007 Area Code Development No. 5-7 X-XXXXXXXX: Area Code, 1-8 digits8000: Intra-Office Termination

SIGNAL PATTERN CALLED NUMBER ANIFGD-Format MF Signal MF SignalANI-Format DP Signal MF Signal

START

CM35

CM20

CM8A

END

1-62 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1002.fm

AUTOMATIC RECALL

AUTOMATIC RECALL

PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify the timing for AUTOMATIC RE-CALL. If no data is set, the following timing will be applied:Attendant Recall : 31.2-33.6 secondsNon Exclusive Hold : 60-64 secondsExclusive Hold : 236-240 secondsTransfer Recall : 24-28 secondsAttendant Hold Recall: 31.2-33.6 secondsCamp-On Recall : 24-32 seconds

•(1)(2)

Y=000: Attendant Recall01-14: 2.4-33.6 seconds

(2.4 second increments)15-24: 38.4-124.8 seconds

(9.6 second increments)

(1)(2)

05: Non Exclusive Hold01-98: 4-392 seconds

(4 second increments)99 : Recall is not performed

(1)(2)

06: Exclusive Hold01-98: 4-392 seconds


(1)(2)

07: Transfer Recall01-30: 4-120 seconds

(4 second increments)

(1)(2)

11: Attendant Hold Recall01-14: 2.4-33.6 seconds


(9.6 second increments)

(1)(2)

26: Camp-On Recall01-15: 16-128 seconds

(8 second increments)

START

CM41

END

JULY/18/2008

1-63 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1002.fm

BOSS/SECRETARY CALLING


PROGRAMMING

To set up the Secretary station with the Multiline Terminal:

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the Secretary station to the required sta-tion number.

•(1)

(2)

Y=12X-XXXXXXXX: My Line No. of Secre-

tary0: Secretary station

If the Boss station is a Single-Line Telephone with MW lamp, provide the Message Waiting service to the Boss station.

•(1)(2)

Y=03X-XXXXXXXX: Boss Station No.0: To provide

Assign the Boss line key as a Secondary Extension line to the Secretary’s Multiline Ter-minal.

•(1)(2)

Y=00My Line No. of Secretary + + Key No. X-XXXXXXXX: Boss Station No. /Boss

My Line No.

Assign the MW SET/MW RESET keys to the Secretary’s Multiline Terminal, if needed.

•(1)(2)

Y=00My Line No. of Secretary + + Key No. F0040: MW SetF0041: MW Reset

If the Boss station is a Multiline Terminal, as-sign a MW Lamp to the Boss’ Multiline Termi-nal.

•(1)(2)

Y=00My Line No. of Boss + + Key No. F1005: MW Lamp

Assign the access code for MW Set/MW Reset to the secretary’s Multiline Terminal, if re-quired.

•(1)(2)

Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3X-XXXX: Access CodeA040: MW SetA041: MW Reset

Whether delete Call History-No Answer/Mes-sage Waiting irrespective of the station an-swering when calling back to the Call History-No Answer or the Message Waiting.

(1)(2)

2340 : To delete1 : Not delete (To delete only when an-

swering)

Specify the MW LED indication pattern for Multiline Terminal.

(1)(2)

2940 : Flashing (60 IPM)1 : Steady lighting

START

CM13

CM90,

,

,

CM20

CM08

A

1-64 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1002.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the destination of the call from the Boss station that has Message Waiting set.

•(1)(2)

Y=1500-63: Tenant No.X-XXXXXXXX: Secretary Station No.

To provide Boss/Secretary Override, assign Service Restriction Class A for Call Waiting to the Secretary station.

For Secretary Station:•

(1)(2)

Y=02X-XXXXXXXX: Station No. XX ZZXX: 00-15 : Service Restriction Class A

Allow Call waiting to the Secretary station in Service Restriction Class A assigned by CM12 Y=02.

•(1)

(2)

Y=043 Calling Side00-15: Service Restriction Class A as-


To provide Boss/Secretary Override, assign Service Restriction Class A for Call Waiting to the Boss station.

For Boss Station:•

(1)(2)

Y=02X-XXXX: Station No. XX ZZXX: 00-15 : Service Restriction Class A

Allow Call waiting to the Boss station in Service Restriction Class A assigned by CM12 Y=02.

•(1)

(2)

Y=044 Called Side00-15: Service Restriction Class A as-


A

CM51

CM12

CM15

CM12

CM15

END

1-65 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1002.fm


To assign the Boss station as a singleline telephone:

HARDWARE REQUIRED


DESCRIPTION DATA

Set the data for accommodating the Boss’ line to the Secretary’s Sub line.

•(1)(2)

Y=05X-XXXXXXXX: Boss Station No. 0 : Accommodated1 : Not accommodated

Specify whether to send ringing signal to the Boss station.

•(1)(2)

Y=08X-XXXXXXXX: Boss Station No. 0 : Not sent1 : Send

START

CM12

CM13

END

1-66 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1002.fm

BROKER’S CALL

BROKER’S CALL

PROGRAMMING

Refer to CALL HOLD. Page 1-302

1-67 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1002.fm

CALL BACK

CALL BACK

PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION DATA

Provide the system with the Single Digit Feature Access Code while the calling station hears ringback tone/busy tone.

(1)(2)

156: Ringback Tone0: Available

(1)(2)

208: Busy Tone0: Available

To activate the Single Digit Feature Access Code, set CM08>050, 051, 069 and 148 to “1”.

(1)(2)

050: * Button as Switch Hook Flash1 : Ineffective

(1)(2)

051: # Button as Switch Hook Flash1 : Ineffective

(1)

(2)

069: Single Digit Dialing on BT Connec-tion

1 : Step Call

(1)

(2)

148: Same Last Digit Redialing on BT Connection

1 : Ineffective

NOTE 1: A single digit access code “2” is fixedly assigned to this feature.

NOTE 2: While the calling Multiline Terminal, DP or DTMF telephone is holding the other call, the single digit access code “2” is not available.

NOTE 3: From a DTMF telephone a hooking operation is required before dialing the single digit access code.

Assign Service Restriction Class A to the necessary stations.

•(1)(2)


START

CM08

CM12

A

1-68 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1002.fm

CALL BACK

HARDWARE REQUIRED

Multiline Terminal and DLC blade if required

DESCRIPTION DATA

Allow Call Back in Service Restriction Class A assigned by CM12 Y=02.

•(1)

(2)



Allow Call Back-Multiple Assignment in the Service Restriction Class A assigned by CM12 Y=02, if required.

•(1)

(2)



Assign the access code for Call Back. •(1)(2)

Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3X-XXXX: Access CodeA002: Call Back SetA003: Call Back Cancel

For setting the same access code as Trunk Queuing-Outgoing:(1)(2)

X-XXXX: Access CodeA004: Outgoing Trunk Queuing/Call Back

SetA005: Outgoing Trunk Queuing/Call Back

Cancel

Assign a Call Back key to the Multiline Termi-nals, as required.

•(1)(2)

Y=00My Line No. + + Key No. F0004: Outgoing Trunk Queuing/Call Back

A

CM15

CM20

CM90,

END

1-69 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1002.fm

CALL FORWARDING

CALL FORWARDINGTo set or reset the Call Forwarding service from a PCPro/CAT, use the following command.

DESCRIPTION DATA

Use Y=00-03 for Call Forwarding and Y=04-05 for Split Call Forwarding. To reset the service, assign “CCC” to the second data of each Y No.

••••

(1)(2)

Y=00 Call Forwarding-All CallsY=01 Call Forwarding-Busy LineY=02 Call Forwarding-No AnswerY=03 Call Forwarding-Busy Line/No An-swer X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.Destination No. <Destination=Extension>X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.<Destination=Outside Party>X-XXXX + + YY···Y

X-XXXX: Outgoing Trunk/LCR Group Access Code (1-4 digits)

: Separate MarkYY···Y : Called No. (Maximum 26

digits)<Destination=Attendant>E000: Attendant Console

••

(1)(2)

Y=04 Split Call Forwarding-ALL CallsY=05 Split Call Forwarding-Busy Line/No AnswerX-XXXXXXXX: Station No.0: Target Station for Split Call Forwarding

(Block 0)/ATT1: Target Station for Split Call Forwarding

(Block 1)2: Target Station for Split Call Forwarding






(Block 7)8: Target Station for Call Forwarding 9: Station Speed Dialing (Block 0)

START

CME6

,

,

END

1-70 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1002.fm

CALL FORWARDINGATTENDANT CALL FORWARDING SET-UP AND CANCEL

ATTENDANT CALL FORWARDING SET-UP AND CANCEL

PROGRAMMING

Refer to CALL FORWARDING-ALL CALLS. Page 1-71Refer to CALL FORWARDING-BUSY LINE. Page 1-73Refer to CALL FORWARDING-NO ANSWER. Page 1-76

1-71 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1002.fm

CALL FORWARDINGCALL FORWARDING-ALL CALLS

CALL FORWARDING-ALL CALLS

PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign Service Restriction Class A for this fea-ture to the required stations.

•(1)(2)


Allow Call Forwarding All Calls in Service Restriction Class A assigned by CM12 Y=02.

NOTE: When providing Call Forwarding-All Calls-Outside, set “1” (Allow) for CM15 Y=000, Y=026.

••

(1)

(2)

Y=000 Call Forwarding-All CallsY=026 Call Forwarding-All Calls-Outside00-15: Service Restriction Class A as-


Assign the access code for Call Forwarding-All Calls, Set and Cancel, respectively.

•(1)(2)

Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3X-XXXX: Access CodeA010: Call Forwarding-All Calls SetA011: Call Forwarding-All Calls Cancel

To apply this feature to incoming calls, set the trunk route combinations for Tandem Connec-tion.

•(1)(2)

Y=00500-63: Trunk Route No.1 : Release signal arrives

•(1)

(2)

Y=0Incoming Trunk Route No. + Outgoing Trunk Route No. assigned by CM35 Y=0050: Allow

START

CM12

CM15

CM20

CM35

CM36

A

1-72 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1002.fm

CALL FORWARDINGCALL FORWARDING-ALL CALLS

HARDWARE REQUIRED


DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify the setting method for Call Forward-ing-All Calls-Outside.

(1)(2)

2220 : Setting when the station goes on-

hook/when receiving Service Set Tone (ORT time out)

1 : Setting when receiving Service Set Tone (ORT time out)

Assign whether an extension can set a destina-tion of Call Forwarding-All Calls-Outside by entering only a trunk access code.

(1)(2)

3860 : Restricted1 : Allowed

Select the trunk route seized for Call Forward-ing-All Calls-Outside.

(1)(2)

6000 : By calling party’s tenant/terminating

trunk’s tenant1 : By Call Forwarding setting station’s

tenant

Assign Call Forwarding-All Calls keys to the Multiline Terminals, as required.

•(1)(2)

Y=00My Line No. + + Key No.F0010: Call Forwarding-All Calls Set/

Cancel

Provide Call Forwarding feature to each tenant as per incoming call type.

•••

(1)(2)

Y=23 Internal Call or ATT assisted CallY=24 C.O. Incoming CallY=25 Tie Line Incoming Call00-63: Tenant No.1 : Call Forwarding

Select the Dial Tone on setting Call Forward-ing-All Calls.

•(1)

(2)

Y=213: Dial Tone on setting Call Forwarding-

All Calls0 : Special Dial Tone (Stutter Dial

Tone)1 : Dial Tone

A

CM08

CM90,

CM65

CM48

END

1-73 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1002.fm

CALL FORWARDINGCALL FORWARDING-BUSY LINE

CALL FORWARDING-BUSY LINE

PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION DATA


•(1)(2)


Allow Call Forwarding-Busy Line in Service Restriction Class A assigned by CM12 Y=02.

NOTE: When providing Call Forwarding-Busy Line-Outside, set “1” (Allow) for CM15 Y=011, Y=028, Y=012, Y=029.

••

•

•

(1)

(2)

Y=011 Call Forwarding-Busy LineY=028 Call Forwarding-Busy Line-OutsideY=012 Call Forwarding-Busy Line/No AnswerY=029 Call Forwarding-Busy Line-Outside/No Answer-Outside00-15: Service Restriction Class A


Assign the access code for Call Forwarding-No Answer, Set and Cancel, respectively.

•(1)(2)

Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3X-XXXX: Access CodeA012: Call Forwarding-No Answer/Busy

Line SetA013: Call Forwarding-No Answer/Busy

Line Cancel


•(1)(2)


•(1)

(2)


START

CM12

CM15

CM20

CM35

CM36

A

1-74 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1002.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify the setting method for Call Forward-ing-Busy Line-Outside.

(1)(2)




Allow or restrict the ability to set Call For-warding-Busy Line for a station with Do Not Disturb set.

(1)(2)

2400 : Allowed1 : Restricted

Assign whether an extension can set a destina-tion of Call Forwarding-Busy Line-Outside by entering only a trunk access code.

(1)(2)


Select the trunk route seized for Call Forward-ing-Busy Line-Outside.

(1)(2)



tenant

Assign Call Forwarding-No Answer keys to the Multiline Terminal, as required.

•(1)(2)

Y=00My Line No. + + Key No.F0012: Call Forwarding-No Answer/Busy

Line Set/Cancel

Provide Call Forwarding feature with each tenant as per incoming call type.

•••

(1)(2)


Call termination to the My Line while the sta-tion user makes a call with a Sub Line on a Multiline terminal.

(1)(2)

5930 : To activate the Call Forwarding that

set an incoming call1 : As per CM08>268

(1)(2)

2680 : Busy Line1 : Station Call

A

CM08

CM90,

CM65

CM08

END

JULY/18/2008

1-75 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1002.fm


HARDWARE REQUIRED


JULY/18/2008

1-76 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1002.fm

CALL FORWARDINGCALL FORWARDING-NO ANSWER

CALL FORWARDING-NO ANSWER

PROGRAMMING

To provide Call Forwarding-No Answer with the timer on a system basis set by PCPro/CAT, do the fol-lowing programming.

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign Service Restriction Class A to the required stations.

•(1)(2)


Allow Call Forwarding-No Answer in Service Restriction Class A assigned by CM12 Y=02.

NOTE: When providing Call Forwarding-No Answer-Outside, set “1” (Allow) for CM15 Y=010, Y=027, Y=012, Y=029.

•••

•

(1)

(2)

Y=010 Call Forwarding-No AnswerY=027 Call Forwarding-No Answer-OutsideY=012 Call Forwarding-Busy Line/No An-swerY=029 Call Forwarding-Busy Line-Outside/No Answer-Outside00-15: Service Restriction Class A as-



•(1)(2)



Line Cancel

Specify the timing of Call Forwarding-No An-swer.

•(1)(2)

Y=46X-XXXXXXXX: My Line No.0 : As per CM41 Y=0>100, 101 or CME6

Y=07, 08 NOTE1 : As per CM41 Y=0>01, 15

NOTE: When CME6 Y=07, 08 are set, the timing on a station basis (CME6 Y=07, 08) is effective.When CME6 Y=07, 08 are not set, the timing on a system basis (CM41 Y=0>100, 101) is effective.

START

CM12

CM15

CM20

CM13

A

1-77 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1002.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify the timing of Call Forwarding-No An-swer for a trunk incoming call.

•(1)

(2)

Y=001 : Timing for a trunk incoming call100: Timing for a trunk incoming call01-30: 4-120 seconds


Specify the timing of Call Forwarding-No An-swer for an internal call or an assisted call.

•(1)

(2)

Y=0 15 : Timing for an internal call or an assist-

ed call101: Timing for an internal call or an assist-

ed call01-30: 4-120 seconds



•(1)(2)


•(1)

(2)


Specify the setting method for Call Forward-ing-No Answer-Outside.

(1)(2)




Assign whether an extension can set a destina-tion of Call Forwarding-No Answer-Outside by entering only a trunk access code.

(1)(2)


Select the trunk route seized for Call Forward-ing-No Answer-Outside.

(1)(2)



tenant

A

CM41

CM35

CM36

CM08

B

1-78 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1002.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign Call Forwarding-No Answer keys to the Multiline Terminals, as required.

•(1)(2)

Y=00My Line No. + + Key No.F0016: Call Forwarding-No Answer Set/

Cancel

For setting the same key as Call Forwarding-Busy Line(1)(2)

My Line No. + + Key No.F0012: Call Forwarding-No Answer/Busy

Line Set/Cancel

Provide Call Forwarding feature with each ten-ant as per incoming call type.

•••

(1)(2)


Specify the timing of Call Forwarding-No An-swer for a tie line incoming call.

(1)(2)

1260 : As per timing for internal call or an as-

sisted call1 : As per timing for trunk incoming call

NOTE: The timing for a tie line incoming call is set as following data.When CM08>126:0 is set:

When CM08>126:1 is set:

B

CM90,

,

CM65

CM08

2ND DATA OF CM13 Y=46 TIMING FOR TIE LINE INCOMING CALL

0 As per CM41 Y=0>101

1 As per CM41 Y=0>15


0 As per CM41 Y=0>100


END

1-79 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1002.fm


To provide Call Forwarding-No Answer with the timer on a station basis set by PCPro/CAT, do the fol-lowing programming in addition to the programming for Call Forwarding-No Answer with the timer on asystem basis. Page 1-76

DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify the timing of Call Forwarding-No An-swer to as per CM41 Y=0>100, 101 or CME6 Y=07, 08.

•(1)(2)

Y=46X-XXXXXXXX: My Line No.0: As per CM41 Y=0>100, 101 or CME6

Y=07, 08 NOTE



•(1)(2)

Y=07X-XXXXXXXX: My Line No.001-120 : 4-120 seconds

(4 second increments)NONE : As per CM41 Y=0>100


•(1)(2)



START

CM13

CME6

A

1-80 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1002.fm


HARDWARE REQUIRED


DESCRIPTION DATA


(1)(2)





A

CM08

2ND DATA OF CM13 Y=46 TIMING ON A STATION BASIS (CME6 Y=08)

TIMING FOR TIE LINE INCOMING CALL

0Set As per CME6 Y=08

Not set As per CM41 Y=0>101





END

1-81 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1002.fm

CALL FORWARDINGCALL FORWARDING-DESTINATION

CALL FORWARDING-DESTINATION

PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign Service Restriction Class A to each station.

•(1)(2)


Allow Call Forwarding-Destination in Service Restriction Class A assigned by CM12 Y=02.

•(1)

(2)



Assign the access code for Call Forwarding-Destination, Entry and Cancellation, respec-tively.

•(1)(2)

Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3X-XXXX: Access CodeA018: Call Forwarding-Destination EntryA019: Call Forwarding-Destination Cancel

Assign Call Forwarding-Destination Set/Cancel Keys to the Multiline Terminals, as re-quired.

•(1)(2)

Y=0My Line No. + + Key No.F0018: SetF0019: Cancel

START

CM12

CM15

CM20

CM90,

END

1-82 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1002.fm

CALL FORWARDINGCALL FORWARDING-OVERRIDE

CALL FORWARDING-OVERRIDE

PROGRAMMING

To allow the call forward destination station user to call the station which has set Call Forwarding-AllCalls, no programming is required. To allow the call forward destination station user with Multiline Terminal Sub Line to call the stationwhich has set Call Forwarding-All Calls to the My Line of the station, assign the following data.

HARDWARE REQUIRED

Multiline Terminal and DLC blade as required

DESCRIPTION DATA

Provide Call Forwarding-Override when Call Forwarding-All Calls is set to the My Line of the Multiline Terminal.

(1)(2)

5090: Call Forwarding-Override

Restrict the call termination to the My Line while the station user makes a call with the Sub Line on the Multiline Terminal.

(1)(2)

2680: Restricted

START

CM08

END

1-83 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1002.fm

CALL FORWARDINGMULTIPLE CALL FORWARDING-ALL CALLS / MULTIPLE CALL FORWARDING-BUSY LINE

MULTIPLE CALL FORWARDING-ALL CALLS /MULTIPLE CALL FORWARDING-BUSY LINE

PROGRAMMING

In addition to the programming for Call Forwarding-All Calls/Busy Line, do the following programming.

DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify the number of times a call can be forwarded.

(1)(2)

1401-05 : 1 time-5 timesNONE : 5 times

START

CM42

END

1-84 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1002.fm

CALL FORWARDINGMULTIPLE CALL FORWARDING-NO ANSWER

MULTIPLE CALL FORWARDING-NO ANSWER

PROGRAMMING

In addition to the programming for Call Forwarding-No Answer, do the following programming.

DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify the timing for No Answer after second Call Forwarding.

•(1)(2)

Y=04601-30: 4-120 seconds


START

CM41

END

1-85 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1002.fm

CALL FORWARDINGSPLIT CALL FORWARDING-ALL CALLS

SPLIT CALL FORWARDING-ALL CALLS

PROGRAMMING

To activate Split Call Forwarding feature, both Call Forwarding and Split Call Forwarding settings are required.

DESCRIPTION DATA


•(1)(2)

Y=02 X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.XX ZZXX: 00-15 : Service Restriction Class A

Allow Call Forwarding-All Calls in Service Restriction Class A assigned by CM12 Y=02.

NOTE: To provide this feature, set “1” (Allow) for CM15 Y=000, Y=026.

••

(1)

(2)

Y=000 Call Forwarding-All CallsY=026 Call Forwarding-All Calls-Outside00-15: Service Restriction Class A



•(1)(2)


Assign the access code for Split Call Forward-ing-All Calls, Set and Cancel, respectively.

•(1)(2)

Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3X-XXXX: Access CodeA180: Split Call Forwarding-All Calls SetA181: Split Call Forwarding-All Calls

Cancel


•(1)(2)


•(1)

(2)


START

CM12

CM15

CM20

CM35

CM36

A

1-86 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1002.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify the setting method for Call Forward-ing-All Calls-Outside.

(1)(2)




Assign whether an extension can set a destina-tion of Split Call Forwarding-All Calls-Out-side by entering only a trunk access code.

(1)(2)


Select the trunk route seized for Split Call For-warding-All Calls-Outside.

(1)(2)



tenant

Select the Call Forwarding type when an in-coming call terminates via CCIS.

(1)(2)

6080 : As per CM65 Y=37/38/391 : As per CM65 Y=23/24/25


•(1)(2)


Cancel

Assign Split Call Forwarding-All Calls keys to the Multiline Terminals, as required.

•(1)(2)

Y=00My Line No. + + Key No.F0A80: Split Call Forwarding-All Calls

Set/Cancel

A

CM08

CM90,

,

B

1-87 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1002.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

Select the feature available in each tenant when an internal call and a Tie Line/C.O.incoming call are terminated.

•••

(1)(2)

Y=23 Internal Call or ATT assisted CallY=24 C.O. Incoming CallY=25 Tie Line Incoming Call00-63: Tenant No.0 : Split Call Forwarding 1 : Call Forwarding

Select the feature available in each tenant when an internal call via CCIS and a Tie Line/C.O. incoming call via CCIS are terminated.

NOTE: CM65 Y=37/38/39 are effective only when the second data of CM08>608 is set to 0.

•

••

(1)(2)

Y=37 Internal Call or ATT assisted Call via CCISY=38 C.O. Incoming Call via CCISY=39 Tie Line Incoming Call via CCIS00-63: Tenant No.0 : Split Call Forwarding 1 : Call Forwarding

Assign the destination of Split Call Forward-ing. (See NOTE in next page.)

(1)

(2)

XX YXX: 00-63: Tenant No.Y : 0-7: Block No.X-XX + + YY···Y

X-XX : Trunk Access Code (1-2 digits)YY···Y: Called No.

(Maximum 26 digits)X-XXXXXXXX: Station No. (1-8 digits)

Select the Dial Tone on setting Split Call Forwarding-All Calls.

•(1)

(2)

Y=213: Dial Tone on setting Split Call Forward-

ing-All Calls0 : Special Dial Tone (Stutter Dial Tone)1 : Dial Tone

B

CM65

CM78

,

CM48

END

1-88 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1002.fm


NOTE: The operating procedure for Split Call Forwarding-All Calls is as follows:CM78 is used to assign the destination forwarded when the destination No. 0-7 is specified.

HARDWARE REQUIRED

Multiline Terminal with LCD and DLC blade, if required

Dial Access Code for Split Call Forwarding-All Calls.

Dial Destination No. X (0-9).0: BLOCK No. 01: 12: 23: 3 Destination assigned by 4: 4 CM78.5: 56: 67: BLOCK No. 78: Destination for Call Forwarding-All Calls9: Destination for Station Speed Dialing

(BLOCK No. 0)

or+

Depress Split Call Forwarding-All Calls key.

1-89 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1002.fm

CALL FORWARDINGSPLIT CALL FORWARDING-BUSY LINE

SPLIT CALL FORWARDING-BUSY LINE

PROGRAMMING

To activate Split Call Forwarding feature, both Call Forwarding and Split Call Forwarding settings are re-quired.

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign Service Restriction Class A for this feature to the required stations.

•(1)(2)


Allow Call Forwarding-Busy Line in Service Restriction Class A assigned by CM12 Y=02.

NOTE: To provide this feature, set “1” (Al-low) for CM15 Y=011, Y=028, Y=012, Y=029.

••

•

•

(1)

(2)

Y=011 Call Forwarding-Busy LineY=028 Call Forwarding-Busy Line-OutsideY=012 Call Forwarding-Busy Line/No AnswerY=029 Call Forwarding-Busy Line-Outside/No Answer-Outside00-15: Service Restriction Class A



•(1)(2)



Line Cancel

Assign the access code for Split Call Forwarding-Busy Line, Set and Cancel, respectively.

•(1)(2)

Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3X-XXXX: Access CodeA182: Split Call Forwarding-Busy Line/

No Answer SetA183: Split Call Forwarding-Busy Line/

No Answer Cancel


•(1)(2)


START

CM12

CM15

CM20

CM35

A

1-90 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1002.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

•(1)

(2)


Specify the setting method for Call Forward-ing-Busy Line-Outside.

(1)(2)




Allow or restrict the ability to set Call Forwarding-Busy Line for a station with Do Not Disturb set.

(1)(2)


Assign whether an extension can set a destina-tion of Split Call Forwarding-Busy Line-Outside by entering only a trunk access code.

(1)(2)


Select the trunk route seized for Split Call Forwarding-Busy Line-Outside.

(1)(2)



tenant

Select the Call Forwarding type when an incoming call terminates via CCIS.

(1)(2)



•(1)(2)


Line Set/Cancel

Assign Split Call Forwarding-Busy Line keys to the Multiline Terminals, as required.

•(1)(2)

Y=00My Line No. + + Key No.F0A82: Split Call Forwarding-Busy Line/

No Answer Set/Cancel

A

CM36

CM08

CM90,

,

B

1-91 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1002.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

Select the feature available in each tenant when an internal call and a Tie Line/C.O. incoming call are terminated.

•••

(1)(2)




•

••

(1)(2)


Assign the destination of Split Call Forward-ing. (See NOTE in next page.)

(1)

(2)




B

CM65

CM78

,

END

1-92 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1002.fm


NOTE: The operating procedure for Split Call Forwarding-Busy Line/No Answer is as follows:CM78 is used to assign the destination forwarded when the destination No. 0-7 is specified.

HARDWARE REQUIRED


Dial Access Code for Split Call Forwarding-Busy Line/No Answer.

Dial Destination No. X (0-9).0: BLOCK No. 01: 12: 23: 3 Destination assigned by 4: 4 CM78.5: 56: 67: BLOCK No. 78: Destination for Call Forwarding-Busy Line/

No Answer9: Destination for Station Speed Dialing

(BLOCK No. 0)

or +

Depress Split Call Forwarding- Busy Line/No Answer key.

1-93 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1002.fm

CALL FORWARDINGSPLIT CALL FORWARDING-NO ANSWER

SPLIT CALL FORWARDING-NO ANSWER

PROGRAMMING

To activate Split Call Forwarding feature, both Call Forwarding and Split Call Forwarding settings are re-quired. For Split Call Forwarding-No Answer with the timer on a system basis set by PCPro/CAT, do thefollowing programming.

DESCRIPTION DATA


•(1)(2)

Y=02 X-XXXXXXXX: My Line No.XX ZZXX: 00-15 : Service Restriction Class A

Allow Call Forwarding-No Answer in Service Restriction Class A assigned by CM12 Y=02.

NOTE: To provide this feature, set “1” (Allow) for CM15 Y=010, Y=027,Y=012, Y=029.

••

•

•

(1)

(2)

Y=010 Call Forwarding-No AnswerY=027 Call Forwarding-No Answer-Out-sideY=012 Call Forwarding-Busy Line/No An-swerY=029 Call Forwarding-Busy Line-Out-side/No Answer-Outside00-15: Service Restriction Class A as-



•(1)(2)



Line Cancel

Assign the access code for Split Call Forward-ing-No Answer, Set and Cancel, respectively.

•(1)(2)

Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3X-XXXX: Access Code A182: Split Call Forwarding-Busy Line/


No Answer Cancel

START

CM12

CM15

CM20

A

1-94 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1002.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify the timing of Call Forwarding-No Answer.

•(1)(2)

Y=46X-XXXXXXXX: My Line No.0 : As per CM41 Y=0>100, 101 or CME6

Y=07, 08 NOTE1 : As per CM41 Y=0>01, 15


Specify the timing of Call Forwarding-No Answer for a trunk incoming call.

•(1)

(2)

Y=001 : Timing for a trunk incoming call100: Timing for a trunk incoming call01-30: 4-120 seconds


Specify the timing of Call Forwarding-No Answer for an internal call or an assisted call.

•(1)

(2)

Y=015 : Timing for an internal call or an assist-

ed call101: Timing for an internal call or an assist-

ed call01-30: 4-120 seconds



•(1)(2)


•(1)

(2)


A

CM13

CM41

CM35

CM36

B

1-95 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1002.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify the setting method for Call Forward-ing-No Answer-Outside.

(1)(2)




Assign whether an extension can set a destina-tion of Split Call Forwarding-No Answer-Out-side by entering only a trunk access code.

(1)(2)


Select the trunk route seized for Split Call Forwarding-No Answer-Outside.

(1)(2)



tenant

Select the Call Forwarding type when an incoming call terminates via CCIS.

(1)(2)



•(1)(2)

Y=00My Line No. + + Key No.F0016: Call Forwarding-No Answer Set/

Cancel

For setting the same key as Call Forwarding-Busy Line. (1)(2)

My Line No. + + Key No.F0012: Call Forwarding-No Answer/Busy

Line Set/Cancel

Assign Split Call Forwarding-No Answer keys to the Multiline Terminals, as required.

•(1)(2)

Y=00My Line No. + + Key No.F0A82: Split Call Forwarding-Busy Line/


Select the feature available in each tenant when an internal call and a Tie Line/C.O. in-coming call are terminated.

•••

(1)(2)


B

CM08

CM90,

,

,

CM65

C

1-96 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1002.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA



•

••

(1)(2)



(1)(2)





C

CM65

CM08


0 As per CM41 Y=0>101



0 As per CM41 Y=0>100


D

1-97 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1002.fm


NOTE: The operating procedure for Split Call Forwarding-Busy Line/No Answer is as follows:CM78 is used to assign the destination forwarded when the destination No. 0-7 is specified.

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the destination of Split Call Forward-ing. (See NOTE below.)

(1)

(2)




Dial Access Code for Split Call Forwarding-Busy Line/No Answer.

Dial Destination No. X (0-9).0: BLOCK No. 01: 12: 23: 3 Destination assigned by 4: 4 CM78.5: 56: 67: BLOCK No. 78: Destination for Call Forwarding-Busy Line/

No Answer9: Destination for Station Speed Dialing

(BLOCK No. 0)

or +

Depress Split Call Forwarding- Busy Line/No Answer key.

D

CM78

,

END

1-98 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1002.fm


For Split Call Forwarding-No Answer with the timer on a station basis set by PCPro/CAT, do the followingprogramming in addition to the programming for Split Call Forwarding-No Answer with the timer on asystem basis. Page 1-93

DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify the timing of Call Forwarding-No An-swer to as per CM41 Y=0>100, 101 or CME6 Y=07, 08.

•(1)(2)

Y=46X-XXXXXXXX: My Line No.0: As per CM41 Y=0>100, 101 or CME6

Y=07, 08 NOTE



•(1)(2)




•(1)(2)



START

CM13

CME6

A

1-99 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1002.fm


HARDWARE REQUIRED


DESCRIPTION DATA


(1)(2)





A

CM08









END

1-100 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1002.fm

CALL FORWARDINGGROUP DIVERSION

GROUP DIVERSION

PROGRAMMING

NOTE: The number of stations that can be included in a Group Diversion is unlimited.

DESCRIPTION DATA

Provide the system with Group Diversion. (1)(2)

026: Group Diversion0: To provide

Assign the members to be included in each Group Diversion group.

•(1)

(2)

Y=2 Group Diversion groupX-XXXXXXXX: Station No. to be includ-

ed in a Group Diversion group

00-30: Group Diversion group No.

Assign the destination for each Group Diversion group to the required stations.

•(1)(2)

Y=600-30: Group Diversion group No.X-XXXXXXXX: Diversion group No.

Assign the timing for transferring a call using this feature.

•(1)(2)

Y=00101-30: 4-120 seconds


START

CM08

CM16

CM19

CM41

END

1-101 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1002.fm

CALL HISTORYINCOMING CALL HISTORY (CID CALL BACK)


PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify Message Waiting LED indication on the Multiline Terminal to which Message Waiting/Message Reminder is set.

(1)(2)

2940 : Flashing 60 IPM1 : Steady Lighting

Specify the time display for Message Waiting/Message Reminder on Multiline Terminal with LCD.

(1)(2)

2800 : 24-Hour1 : 12-Hour

Specify whether CID Call Back is provided or not when an incoming call is forwarded, when a station to which a call is terminated is busy, or a station to which a call terminated is set Do Not Disturb.

NOTE: CID Call Back by this command is available under the following conditions.• The Multiline Terminal station

line is set to Call Forwarding-All Calls/Call Forwarding-Busy Line/Call Forwarding-No answer/Call Forwarding-IP Station logout when a trunk call is termi-nated.

• The Multiline Terminal station line is set to Do Not Disturb when a trunk call is terminated.

• The Multiline Terminal station line received the incoming call is busy when a trunk call is termi-nated.

(1)(2)

5880 : To provide1 : Not provided

START

CM08

A

JULY/18/2008

1-102 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1002.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

Provide each Multiline Terminal with Message Waiting.

•(1)(2)

Y=03X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.0: To provide

Assign Service Restriction Class A for CID Call Back to the required stations.

•(1)(2)


Storage of the call record when answering a trunk call/handling of an unanswered trunk call.

•(1)(2)

Y=15000-63: Trunk Route No.0: To store

Assign the trunk access code for CID Call Back.This trunk access code will be saved and sent with the calling number.

•(1)(2)

Y=04400-63: Trunk Route No.0-9/00-99: Trunk Access Code

Assign a Numbering Plan Group number to each tenant.

(1)(2)

00-63: Tenant No.710-713 : Numbering Plan Group 0-3NONE : Numbering Plan Group 0

Assign the access code for Message Waiting/Message Reminder Search/Retrieve/Set/Cancel.

•(1)(2)

Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3X-XXXX: Access CodeA146: Message Waiting SearchA147: Message Waiting RetrieveA148: Message Reminder SetA149: Message Reminder Cancel

Assign the number of stored call records for each Multiline Terminal station.

•(1)(2)

Y=38X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.01-50 : Number of stored call recordsNONE : 10 calls

A

CM13

CM12

CM35

CM29

CM20

CM12

B

JULY/18/2008

1-103 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1002.fm


HARDWARE REQUIRED

Multiline Terminal with LCD and DLC blade

DESCRIPTION DATA

Provide the function to storage of the call record on the Multiline Terminal when the sta-tion call is answered, for the required stations.

•(1)(2)

Y=41X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.0: To store

Storage of the call record when handling of unanswered call.

•(1)(2)

Y=49X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.0 : To store1 : Not stored

Storage of the call record when answering a trunk call.

•(1)(2)


Storage of the call record when handling of an unanswered trunk call.

•(1)(2)


Assign the Call History Screen Start key to the Multiline Terminals.

•(1)(2)

Y=00My Line No. + + Key No.F0A46: Call History Screen Start

B

CM13

CM90,

END

JULY/18/2008

1-104 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1002.fm

CALL HISTORYOUTGOING CALL HISTORY (STACK DIAL)

OUTGOING CALL HISTORY (STACK DIAL)

PROGRAMMING

To provide DESKCON with this feature:

HARDWARE REQUIRED

Multiline Terminal with LCD and DLC bladeDESKCON and DLC blade

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign Service Restriction Class C to the re-quired stations.

•(1)(2)

Y=07X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.00-15 : Service Restriction Class C

Allow the Multiline Terminal LCD display service.

•(1)

(2)

Y=09600-15: Service Restriction Class C as-

signed by CM12 Y=071 : With LCD

Assign the Stack Dial/Redial/Speed Dialing key to each Multiline Terminal.

•(1)(2)

Y=00My Line No. + + Key No.F1000: Stack Dial/Redial/Speed Dialing

Provide the system with Automatic Idle Re-turn.

(1)(2)

1721 : To provide

Specify whether the Automatic Idle Return is available or not, in case the PBR time out occurs after the Redial/Speaker key is pressed with the Multiline Terminal is on-hook condi-tion.

(1)(2)

5670 : Not available1 : Available

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the Stack Dial/Redial key to each DESKCON.

•(1)

(2)

Y=00ATTCON No. (E000-E007) + + Key No.F6121: Stack Dial/Last Number Redial

START

CM12

CM15

CM90,

CM08

END

START

CM90,

END

JULY/18/2008

1-105 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1002.fm

CALL PARKCALL PARK-SYSTEM


PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify whether a trunk line placed on Consul-tation Hold by Call Park-System can be retrieved by pressing a trunk line appearance key on a Multiline Terminal.

(1)(2)


Specify the recall timing for the Call Park-System.

•(1)(2)

Y=00501-98: 4-392 seconds


If no data is set, the default setting is 60-64 seconds.

START

CM08

CM41

A

To provide Call Park-System with dialing a Park number

B

To provide Call Park-System with dialing a station number

1-106 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1002.fm


To provide Call Park-System with dialing a Park number

To provide Call Park-System with dialing a station number

HARDWARE REQUIRED


DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the access code for Call Park-System set and retrieve.

•(1)(2)

Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3X-XXXX: Access CodeA008: Call Park-System SetA009: Call Park-System Retrieve

Assign a Call Park-System key to the Multiline Terminal, if required.

•(1)(2)

Y=00My Line No. + + Key No.F5000: Call Park-System

Assign a Call Park-System key to DESKCON, if required.

•(1)

(2)

Y=00ATTCON No. (E000-E007) + + Key No.F6144: Call Park-System

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the access code for Call Park-System Set which retrieved by dialing station number/Retrieve by dialing station number.

•(1)(2)

Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3X-XXXX: Access CodeA198: Call Park-System Set which

retrieved by dialing station numberA199: Call Park-System Retrieve by

dialing station number

Assign a function key for Call Park-System which retrieved by dialing station number to the Multiline Terminal, if required.

•(1)(2)

Y=00My Line No. + + Key No.F0A98: Call Park-System Set which

retrieved by dialing station number

A

CM20

CM90,

,

END

B

CM20

CM90,

END

1-107 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1002.fm

CALL PARKCALL PARK-TENANT

CALL PARK-TENANT

PROGRAMMING

HARDWARE REQUIRED


DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign access codes for Call Park-Tenant set/retrieve.

•(1)(2)

Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3X-XXXX: Access CodeA062: Call Park-Tenant Set/Retrieve

Specify whether a trunk line placed on Consul-tation Hold by Call Park-Tenant can be re-trieved by pressing a trunk line appearance key on a Multiline Terminal.

(1)(2)


Assign Service Restriction Class C to each station.

•(1)(2)

Y=07X-XXXXXXXX: Station No. 00-15 : Service Restriction Class C

Assign the type of Multiline Terminal to Ser-vice Restriction Class C assigned by CM12 Y=07.

•(1)

(2)


signed by CM12 Y=071 : With LCD

Specify the recall timing for Call Park-Tenant. •(1)(2)

Y=00501-98: 4-392 seconds



Assign Call Park-Tenant Retrieve keys to the Multiline Terminal, as required.

•(1)(2)

Y=00My Line No. + + Key No. F3XX ZXX: 00-63: Group No.Z : 1-8: Serial No.

START

CM20

CM08

CM12

CM15

CM41

CM90,

END

1-108 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1002.fm

CALL PICKUPCALL PICKUP-DIRECT

CALL PICKUPCALL PICKUP-DIRECT

PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION DATA


•(1)(2)


Allow Call Pickup-Direct in the Service Restriction Class A assigned by CM12 Y=02.

•(1)

(2)



Assign an access code for Call Pickup-Direct. •(1)(2)

Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3X-XXXX: Access CodeA021: Call Pickup-Direct

Assign a Call Pickup-Direct key to Multiline Terminal, if required.

•(1)(2)

Y=00My Line No. + + Key No. F0021: Call Pickup-Direct

START

CM12

CM15

CM20

CM90,

END

1-109 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1002.fm

CALL PICKUPCALL PICKUP-GROUP

CALL PICKUP-GROUP

PROGRAMMING

NOTE 1: There is no limit to the amount of Call Pickup groups.NOTE 2: The maximum number of stations within a group is 60. Individual stations can be assigned to

only one Call Pickup group.

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign each Call Pickup group, by assigning station numbers within a group one by one with the following operation:

1st Operation : (1) Station A (2) Station B2nd Operation : (1) Station B (2) Station C

Last Operation: (1) Station X (2) Station A

•(1)

(2)

Y=0X-XXXXXXXX: Station No. in Call Pick-

up groupX-XXXXXXXX: Another Station No. in

same group

Assign the access code for Call Pickup-Group. •(1)(2)

Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3X-XXXX: Access CodeA020: Call Pickup-Group

Assign a Call Pickup-Group key to each Multiline Terminal, as required.

•(1)(2)

Y=00My Line No. + + Key No. F0020: Call Pickup-Group

START

CM16

~ ~

CM20

CM90,

END

1-110 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1002.fm

CALL PICKUPCALL PICKUP-GROUP

To permit a station within the Call Pickup group to answer the calls to other lines, in the order from a spec-ified pilot station (ringing search start position):

NOTE 1: There is no limit to the amount of Call Pickup groups.NOTE 2: The maximum number of stations within a group is 60. Individual stations can be assigned to

only one Call Pickup group.

HARDWARE REQUIRED


DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign each Call Pickup group, by assigning station numbers within a group one by one with the following operation:

1st Operation : (1) Station A (2) Station B2nd Operation : (1) Station B (2) Station C


•(1)

(2)


up groupX-XXXXXXXX: Another Station No. in

same group

Specify a pilot station in Call Pickup group. •(1)

(2)

Y=8X-XXXXXXXX: Station No. to be includ-

ed in the Call Pickup group

0 : Pilot Station1 : Member Station

Assign the access code for Call Pickup-Group (Pilot).

•(1)(2)

Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3X-XXXX: Access CodeA234: Call Pickup-Group (Pilot)

Assign a Call Pickup-Group key to each Multiline Terminal, as required.

•(1)(2)

Y=00My Line No. + + Key No. F0B34: Call Pickup-Group (Pilot)

START

CM16

~ ~CM20

CM90,

END

1-111 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1002.fm

CALL PICKUPCALL PICKUP-DESIGNATED GROUP

CALL PICKUP-DESIGNATED GROUP

PROGRAMMING

NOTE 1: There is no limit to the amount of Call Pickup groups.NOTE 2: The maximum number of stations within a group is 60. Individual station can be assigned to

only one Call Pickup Group.

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign each Call Pickup group, by assigning station numbers within a group one by one with the following operation:1st Operation : (1) Station A (2) Station B2nd Operation : (1) Station B (2) Station C


•(1)

(2)


up GroupX-XXXXXXXX: Another station No. in

same Call Pickup Group


•(1)(2)


Allow Call Pickup-Direct in Service Restriction Class A assigned by CM12 Y=02.

•(1)

(2)



Assign an access code for Call Pickup-Designated Group.

•(1)(2)

Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3X-XXXX: Access CodeA037: Call Pickup-Designated Group

START

CM16

~ ~

CM12

CM15

CM20

END

1-112 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1002.fm

CALL REDIRECT

CALL REDIRECT

PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION DATA

Provide the Multiline Terminal with a Call Re-direct key for transferring a call to a destina-tion station or VMS.

•(1)(2)

Y=00My Line No. + + Key No. F5011: Call Redirect 0 (For transferring to

a station assigned by CM51 Y=22)F5012: Call Redirect 1 (For transferring to

a VMS assigned by CM51 Y=18)

Specify the destination VMS station of Call Redirect, to each tenant.

•(1)(2)

Y=1800-63: Tenant No.X-XXXXXXXX: VMS Station No.

Specify the destination station of Call Redirect, to each tenant.

•(1)(2)

Y=2200-63: Tenant No.X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.

START

CM90,

CM51

END

1-113 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1002.fm

CALL TRANSFERCALL TRANSFER-ALL CALLS

CALL TRANSFERCALL TRANSFER-ALL CALLS

PROGRAMMING

To specify the system operation after the C.O./Tie line call (via TRK-B) is completed, when a station thathas a C.O./Tie line call (via TRK-A) on Consultation Hold is talking with another C.O./Tie line call (viaTRK-B):

DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify Call Transfer from a station before called station answers.

(1)(2)


Specify the duration of sending SPDT after a hooking operation for Call Transfer.

•(1)(2)

Y=010510-60 : 10-60 seconds

(1 second increment)NONE : 15 seconds

DESCRIPTION DATA

When a station that has a C.O./Tie line call (via TRK-A) on Consultation Hold is talking with another C.O./Tie line call (via TRK-B), speci-fy the system operation after the C.O./Tie line call (via TRK-B) is completed.

(1)(2)

5340 : Return to the original call (via TRK-A)1 : ROT

START

CM08

CM41

A

A

CM08

END

1-114 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1002.fm

CALL TRANSFERCALL TRANSFER-ATTENDANT

CALL TRANSFER-ATTENDANT

PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the Access code for operator calls. •(1)(2)

Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3X-XXXX: Access Code800

Specify the tenants to be handled by each ATT Group.

•

(1)(2)

Y=0-3 ATT Group 0-3 assigned by CM60 Y=0000-63: Tenant No.0: To be handled

Specify Call Transfer from a station before the called attendant answers.

(1)(2)

063 0 : Available1 : Not available

START

CM20

CM62

RESET

CM08

END

1-115 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1002.fm

CALLER IDCALLER ID CLASS

CALLER IDCALLER ID CLASS[For North America/Asia]

PROGRAMMING

(1) Trunk Assignment for CALLER ID CLASS

DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify the Terminating System in Day Mode/Night Mode/Mode A/Mode B for incoming calls.

••••

(1)(2)

Y=02 Day ModeY=03 Night Mode Y=40 Mode AY=41 Mode B000-511: Trunk No.02 : Trunk-Direct Appearances03 : Trunk-Direct Appearances + TAS04 : Direct-In Termination08 : Dial-in09 : Automated Attendant10 : Attendant Console + TAS11 : Attendant Console + Trunk-Direct

Appearances12 : Attendant Console + Trunk-Direct

Appearances + TAS13 : TAS14 : Attendant Console16 : DISA18 : ISDN Indial31 : DID, Tie Line and any call which is


START

CM30

A

JULY/18/2008

1-116 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1002.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the type of the trunk route. •(1)(2)

Y=000 Kind of Trunk Route00-63: Trunk Route No.00: DDD (C.O./DID) trunk

Provide the trunk route with MF Signaling. •(1)(2)

Y=037 MF Signaling00-63: Trunk Route No.0: Available

Specify the busy/idle status not to be sent to the network.

•(1)(2)

Y=048 Busy/Idle Sending00-63: Trunk Route No.0: Not sent

Assign the sending method of calling number from the network, to each trunk route.

•(1)(2)

Y=129 Calling No. Sending Method00-63: Trunk Route No.0: CALLER ID (CLASS SM)1: T1-ANI

Assign requesting of ANI Signal. (1)(2)

472: Request for ANI Signal0: Available

A

CM35BLADE RESET

CM08

END

JULY/18/2008

1-117 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1002.fm


(2) Other Relational Data Assignment

HARDWARE REQUIRED

COT blade (CD-4COTA/CD-4COTB)

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the trunk access code for outgoing call sent to the SMDR.For using Save & Repeat feature, this Trunk Access Code will be saved and sent with the calling number.

•

(1)(2)

Y=044Trunk Access Code for Save & Repeat00-63: Trunk Route No.0-9/00-99: Trunk Access Code

Specify whether the calling number is sent to the OAI terminal or not.

(1)(2)

462: Sending to OAI terminal0 : To send 1 : Not sent

Specify whether the calling number is sent to the SMDR terminal or not.

(1)(2)

463: Sending to SMDR terminal0 : To send 1 : Not sent

Specify the type of Single Data Message Frame Format.

(1)(2)

489: Single Data Message Frame Format0 : Without Time Parameter1 : With Time Parameter

Assign the purpose of the Caller ID sender. •(1)(2)

Y=01020: Caller ID-Station

Provide the Multiline Terminal with a select key of Calling Number Display or Calling Name Display.

•(1)(2)

Y=00My Line No. + + Key No.F1099: Select Key of Calling Number Dis-

play or Calling Name Display

Provide the DESKCON with a select key of Calling Number Display or Calling Name Dis-play.

•(1)

(2)

Y=00ATTCON No. (E000-E007) + + Key No.F6122: Select Key of Calling Number Dis-


START

CM35

CM08

CM04

CM90,

,

END

JULY/18/2008

1-118 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1002.fm

CALLER IDCALLER ID DISPLAY

CALLER ID DISPLAY

PROGRAMMING

In addition to Automatic Number Identification (ANI) or Caller ID Class, assign the following data.

To store the calling party name list in the CPU blade and display the name on Multiline Terminal for in-coming trunk calls, do the following programming.

NOTE: This programming is effective only when a calling party name is not received from network.

DESCRIPTION DATA

Provide the Multiline Terminal with a Caller ID Display key for displaying the ANI or Call-er ID.

•(1)(2)

Y=00My Line No. + + Key No.F5010: Caller ID Display

DESCRIPTION DATA


•(1)(2)


Allow Calling Name Display for incoming trunk calls in Service Restriction Class A assigned by CM12 Y=02.

•(1)

(2)


signed by CM12 Y=020 : Calling Number Display1 : Calling Name Display

Provide the trunk route with Calling Name Display for incoming calls.

•(1)(2)

Y=15600-63: Trunk Route No.0 : 1000-Slot Memory Block No. 031 : 1000-Slot Memory Block No. 02, 033 : Not provided

START

CM90,

END

START

CM12

CM15

CM35

A

JULY/18/2008

1-119 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1002.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the calling party number, which is used for Calling Name search, to the 1000-Slot Memory Block No. 03.

NOTE 1: When this feature is provided, the 1000-Slot Memory Block No. 03 cannot be used for Station Speed Dialing.

NOTE 2: The calling party number must be the number received from network, including the area code.

•(1)

(2)

Y=003 YY Z03 : 1000-Slot Memory Block No. 03

NOTE 1YY: 10-Slot Memory Block No. 00-99Z : Memory Parcel No. 0-9Stored No.:Access Code (Maximum 4 digits) + + Calling Party No. (Maximum 16 digits)

NOTE 2NONE : No data

Assign the calling party name to be displayed for the calling party number assigned by CM74 Y=0, to each Memory Slot number, by charac-ter codes or characters.

•(1)

(2)

Y=103 YY Z03 : 1000-Slot Memory Block No. 03YY: 10-Slot Memory Block No. 00-99Z : Memory Parcel No. 0-9XX...XX: Calling Party Name Character

Code (Maximum 32 digits, 16 characters)

NONE : No dataSee APPENDIX A: Character Code Table.

Page A-2

•(1)

(2)

Y=203 YY Z03 : 1000-Slot Memory Block No. 03 YY: 10-Slot Memory Block No. 00-99Z : Memory Parcel No. 0-9XX...XX: Calling Party Name Character

(Maximum 16 characters)NONE : No data

A

CM74

,

B

JULY/18/2008

1-120 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1002.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA


•(1)(2)

Y=00My Line No. + + Key No.F1099: Select Key of Calling Number

Display or Calling Name Display

Provide the DESKCON with a select key of Calling Number Display or Calling Name Dis-play.

•(1)

(2)

Y=00ATTCON No. (E000-E007) + + Key No.F6122: Select Key of Calling Number

Display or Calling Name Display

B

CM90,

,

END

JULY/18/2008

1-121 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1002.fm


To provide Calling Number and Calling Name Display on Multiline Terminal/ATTCON LCD simultaneously, do the following programming:

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign Service Restriction Class A for Caller ID Display on the LCD of Multiline Terminal to the required stations.

•(1)(2)


Specify the displaying pattern of Caller ID on the LCD of Multiline Terminal before answer-ing or after answering a trunk call.

•(1)

(2)


assigned by CM12 Y=020: To display calling number on upper line

of LCD, calling name on middle line of LCD

1: To display calling name on upper line of LCD, calling number on middle line of LCD

Allow Calling Name Display for incoming trunk calls in Service Restriction Class A as-signed by CM12 Y=02.

•(1)

(2)


assigned by CM12 Y=020 : Calling Number Display1 : Calling Name Display

Allow blinking LCD for caller ID Display on each Multiline Terminal.

•(1)

(2)


assigned by CM12 Y=020 : Restricted1 : Allow

Specify the displaying pattern of Caller ID on the LCD of ATTCON before answering or after answering a trunk call.

•(1)(2)

Y=340-7: ATTCON No.0: To display calling number on upper line

of LCD, calling name on middle line of LCD

Specify the information to display on the middle line of the Multiline Terminal/AT-TCON LCD when forwarding a trunk call to the Multiline Terminal/ATTCON by Call For-warding-All Calls/No Answer/Busy Line/Not Available.

(1)(2)

5630 : Forwarding station name1 : Caller ID

(Calling number/Calling name)

START

CM12

CM15

CM60

CM08

A

JULY/18/2008

1-122 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1002.fm


HARDWARE REQUIRED


DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify displaying the first forwarding station number via CCIS or the second forwarding sta-tion number of own office on LCD of forward-ing destination Multiline Terminal.

(1)(2)

5640 : The first forwarding number via CCIS1 : The second forwarding number of own

office

Specify the duration of displaying the Caller information (Calling number/name) on Multi-line Terminal when the incoming call is an-swered.

(1)(2)

5800 : 6 seconds1 : Until call is finished

A

CM08

END

JULY/18/2008

1-123 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1002.fm

CALLER IDCALLER ID-STATION

CALLER ID-STATION[For North America/Asia]

PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign a Unit and Slot number to the LC blade. •(1)

(2)

Y=0XX ZZXX: 01-50: Unit No.ZZ : 01-18: Slot No.20: LC blade

Assign the station number of an analog tele-phone for Caller ID-Station to the required Physical Port number.

•(1)

(2)


Assign the purpose of the Caller ID sender. •(1)(2)

Y=01020: Caller ID-Station

Specify the calling party information which is sent to the analog telephone for Caller ID-Station.

•(1)(2)

Y=20X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.0: Calling Party Number1: Calling Party Number and Calling Party

Name

Specify whether the calling station number is sent to the analog telephone for Caller ID-Station when an internal call is terminated.

(1)(2)

5070 : Not sent1 : To send

To call back from the analog telephone for Caller ID-Station, assign the access code to be added to the calling station number when an internal call is terminated.

•(1)(2)

Y=008X-XXXX: Access Code to be added

(Maximum 4 digits)X: 0-9, A (*), B (#)

START

CM05BLADE RESET

CM10

CM04

CM12

CM08

CM50

A

JULY/18/2008

1-124 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1002.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

Restrict One hit ringing for Call Forwarding-All Calls. (To restrict all stations in the system)

(1)(2)

2660: Restricted

Assign the Caller ID information sending for-mat.

(1)(2)

5920 : CCITT V.23 Modem (Data Format:

ETSI)1 : Bell 202 Modem

Assign Service Restriction Class C to each sta-tion. (To restrict per Station Class)

•(1)(2)

Y=07X-XXXXXXXX: Station No. 00-15 : Service Restriction Class C

Restrict One hit ringing for Call Forwarding-All Calls to Service Restriction Class C as-signed by CM12 Y=07. (To restrict per Station Class)

•(1)

(2)


signed by CM12 Y=070: Restricted

A

CM08

RESET

CM12

CM15

END

JULY/18/2008

1-125 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1002.fm


By the following programming, the Calling Party Number and the Calling Party Name sent from the net-work over CCIS can be displayed on the LCD of the analog telephone for Caller ID-Station.

HARDWARE REQUIRED

Analog telephone with LCD which supports Caller IDLC blade

DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify the calling party information which is sent to the analog telephone for Caller ID-Station.

•(1)(2)

Y=20X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.0: Calling Party Number1: Calling Party Number and Calling Party

Name

Specify whether the calling station number is sent to the analog telephone for Caller ID-Station when an internal call is terminated.

(1)(2)


Specify whether the calling party name is sent to the analog telephone for Caller ID-Station when an internal call is terminated.

NOTE 1: This data is effective only when the 2nd data of CM12 Y=20 is set to 1.

NOTE 2: For the programming for Calling Number Display-CCIS and Calling Name Display-CCIS, refer to the SV8300 Networking Manual.

(1)(2)

5240 : To send

(Calling Party Name is sent)1 : Not sent

(Calling Party Number is sent)

START

CM12

CM08

END

JULY/18/2008

1-126 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1002.fm

CALLER IDCALLER ID-STATION (ETSI-FSK)

CALLER ID-STATION (ETSI-FSK)[For EU]

PROGRAMMING

To provide this feature for the country with following ringing pattern: - Internal Ringing : 0.3 seconds ON-0.2 seconds OFF-0.3 seconds ON-4.2 seconds OFF - External Ringing: 1 second ON-4 seconds OFF

In addition to the programming of CALLER ID-STATION Page 1-123, do the following program-ming.

To provide this feature for the country with following ringing pattern: - Internal Ringing : 1 second ON-4 seconds OFF - External Ringing: 0.3 seconds ON-0.2 seconds OFF-0.3 seconds ON-4.2 seconds OFF

In addition to the programming of CALLER ID-STATION Page 1-123, do the following program-ming.

DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify the ringing signal pattern for an inter-nal/external call.

(1)(2)

3921

(1)(2)

3960

(1)(2)

3970

DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify the ringing signal pattern for an inter-nal/external call.

(1)(2)

3920

(1)(2)

3961

(1)(2)

3970

START

CM08

RESET

END

START

CM08

RESET

A

JULY/18/2008

1-127 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1002.fm

CALLER IDCALLER ID-STATION (ETSI-FSK)

HARDWARE REQUIRED

Analog telephone with LCD which supports Caller IDLC blade

DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify the Single Line Telephone ringing sig-nal for Station-to-Station connection.

•(1)(2)

Y=000501 : ON02 : 2 seconds ON-4 seconds OFF03 : 1 second ON-2 seconds OFF04 : 0.5 seconds ON-0.5 seconds OFF05 : 0.25 seconds ON-0.25 seconds OFF06 : 0.5 seconds ON-0.5 seconds OFF-0.5

seconds ON-1.5 seconds OFF07 : 0.25 seconds ON-0.25 seconds OFF-

0.25 seconds ON-5.25 seconds OFF08 : 0.375 seconds ON-0.25 seconds

OFF-0.375 seconds ON-2 seconds OFF

09 : 0.25 seconds ON-0.125 seconds OFF-0.25 seconds ON-0.125 sec-onds OFF-0.25 seconds ON-2 sec-onds OFF

10 : 1 second ON-4 seconds OFF11 : 0.25 seconds ON-0.25 seconds OFF-

0.25 seconds ON-4.25 seconds OFF12 : 1 second ON-3 seconds OFF13 : 0.25 seconds ON-0.25 seconds OFF-

0.25 seconds ON-2.25 seconds OFF31 : 1 second ON-2 seconds OFF

Assign the interval of ringing signal for station on incoming C.O. calls to the interval for inter-nal ringing.

•(1)(2)

Y=03300-63: Trunk Route No.2: Internal Ringing (1 second ON-4

seconds OFF)

A

CM04

CM35

END

JULY/18/2008

1-128 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1002.fm

CALLER IDCID CALL ROUTING

CID CALL ROUTING

PROGRAMMING

For DID on ISDN, T1-ANI incoming calls:(See SAMPLE DATA PROGRAMMING 1. Page 1-133 )

DESCRIPTION DATA

Provide the incoming trunk route with digit conversion.

•(1)(2)

Y=01800-63: Trunk Route No.0: To provide

Specify the Development Table for digit con-version.

•(1)(2)

Y=17000-63: Trunk Route No.0 : Development Table 13 : Development Table 0


•(1)(2)

Y=00X-XXXX: DID No. /Called No.000-999: Number Conversion Block No.

NOTE

NOTE: When the Number Conversion Block number is assigned for CID Call Routing, do not use the same Number Conversion Block number for the DID feature.


•(1)(2)

Y=90X-XXXXXXXX: DID No. /Called No.000-999: Number Conversion Block No.

NOTE

NOTE: When the Number Conversion Block number is assigned for CID Call Routing, do not use the same Number Conversion Block number for the DID feature.

START

CM35

CM76

A

JULY/18/2008

1-129 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1002.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

Provide the calling number development and specify its Development Pattern for each Number Conversion Block number assigned by CM76 Y=00/90.

NOTE: For non-DID on ISDN, Caller ID calls, this data is not effective and the data setting of CM35 Y=174 is effective.

•(1)

(2)


assigned by CM76 Y=00/900: To provide

(Using Development Pattern 0)1: To provide


(Using Development Pattern 2)

Assign the Development Block number for each calling party number.

•

•

•

(1)

(2)

Y=50 Development Pattern 0 assigned by CM76 Y=26Y=51 Development Pattern 1 assigned by CM76 Y=26Y=52 Development Pattern 2 assigned by CM76 Y=26X-XX....XX: Calling Party No. (Maximum

16 digits)X: 0-9

000-999: Development Block No. NOTE

NOTE: Set the different number from the Number Conversion Block number assigned by CM76 Y=00/90.

Select the two kinds of mode change or the four kinds of mode change per each tenant.

•(1)(2)

Y=2900-63: Tenant No.0 : Two kinds of mode (Day Mode, Night

Mode)1 : Four kinds of mode (Day Mode, Night

Mode, Mode A, Mode B)

Assign the station tenant for each calling party number.

•(1)

(2)

Y=09000-999: Development Block No. assigned

by CM2A Y=50/51/5200-63: Station Tenant No.

A

CM76

CM2A

CM65

CM76

B

JULY/18/2008

1-130 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1002.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the data for interpreting the digits received.

NOTE: Day/Night Mode, Mode A/B can be specified according to following conditions.1st priority:Specified by tenant number for each calling party number (CM76 Y=09)2nd priority:Specified by trunk tenant number (CM30 Y=01)3rd priority:Specified by tenant number for each DID number (CM76 Y=09)

••••

(1)

(2)

Y=01 Day ModeY=02 Night ModeY=03 Mode AY=04 Mode B000-999: Development Block No. assigned

by CM2A Y=50/51/52X-XXXXXXXX: Station No. to be

terminatedDXX: Change Terminating System to:

D02: Trunk-Direct AppearancesD03: Trunk-Direct Appearances +

TASD04: Direct-In TerminationD09: Automated AttendantD10: Attendant Console + TASD11: Attendant Console + Trunk-

Direct AppearancesD12: Attendant Console + Trunk-

Direct Appearances + TASD13: TASD14: Attendant ConsoleD16: DISA

When CM76 Y=01/02/03/04 is set to “D13” (TAS), assign the terminating tenant for Day/Night Mode, Mode A/B per each calling party number.

••••

(1)

(2)


by CM2A Y=50/51/5200-63: Trunk Tenant No.

NOTE: When you set the other CM76 data (Y=10, 11, 13-16, 18-25) for the Development Block number assigned by CM2A Y=50/51/52, these settings are also effective for each calling party number.

B

CM76

END

JULY/18/2008

1-131 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1002.fm


For non-DID on ISDN, Caller ID incoming calls:(See SAMPLE DATA PROGRAMMING 2. Page 1-135 )

NOTE: When a Called Party Subaddress is received from ISDN subscriber, CID Call Routing is not effective.

DESCRIPTION DATA

Provide the calling number development and specify its Development Pattern for each trunk route number.

NOTE: For DID on ISDN, T1-ANI calls, this data is not effective and the data setting of CM76 Y=26 is effective.

•(1)(2)




(Using Development Pattern 2)

Assign the Development Block number for each calling party number.

•

•

•

(1)

(2)

Y=50 Development Pattern 0 assigned by CM35 Y=174Y=51 Development Pattern 1 assigned by CM35 Y=174Y=52 Development Pattern 2 assigned by CM35 Y=174X-XX....XX: Calling Party No.

(Maximum 16 digits)X: 0-9

000-999: Development Block No.


•(1)(2)




Assign the station tenant for each calling party number.

•(1)

(2)

Y=09000-999: Development Block No. assigned

by CM2A Y=50/51/5200-63: Station Tenant No.

START

CM35

CM2A

CM65

CM76

A

JULY/18/2008

1-132 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1002.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the data for interpreting the digits received.

NOTE: Day/Night Mode, Mode A/B can be specified according to following conditions.1st priority:Specified by tenant number for each calling party number (CM76 Y=09)2nd priority:Specified by trunk tenant number (CM30 Y=01)

••••

(1)

(2)


by CM2A Y=50/51/52X-XXXXXXXX: Station No. to be

terminatedDXX: Change Terminating System to:





When CM76 Y=01/02/03/04 is set to “D13” (TAS), assign the terminating tenant for Day/Night Mode, Mode A/B per each calling party number received on DID call.

••••

(1)

(2)


by CM2A Y=50/51/5200-63: Trunk Tenant No.

NOTE: When you set the other CM76 data (Y=10, 11, 13-16, 18-25) for the Development Block number assigned by CM2A Y=50/51/52, these settings are also effective for each calling party number.

A

CM76

END

JULY/18/2008

1-133 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1002.fm


SAMPLE DATA PROGRAMMING 1

For DID on ISDN, T1-ANI incoming calls.

< Example >

• DID No. : 0123 456-7890• Trunk Route No. : 00• Calling Party No. : 1234 567-8901

: 2345 678-9012• Terminating System: TAS (Day Mode) when the number 1234 is received

: Direct-In Termination (Day Mode) when the number 2345 is received• Station Tenant No. : 01• Trunk Tenant No. : 01

ISDN/

PSTN

Calling Party No.:

1234 567-8901/

2345 678-9012

Trunk Route: 00

SV8300

When the number assigned by

CM2A corresponds with the upper

digits of calling party number, the

call terminates with the specified

terminating system.

Station to be terminated

when the calling party

number 2345 is received




JULY/18/2008

1-134 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1002.fm


< Data Programming >

COMMAND 1st DATA 2nd DATA REMARKSCM30 Y=00 000 00 Assign the trunk route number 00 to the trunk num-

ber 000.CM30 Y=02 000 18 Set the ISDN Indial for the incoming calls.CM35 Y=012 00 3 Assign the number of digits to be received on DID to

4 digits.CM35 Y=018 00 0 Provide the trunk route number 00 with digit conver-

sion.CM76 Y=00 7890 000 Assign the Number Conversion Block number 000

to the DID number 7890.CM76 Y=26 000 0 Provide the calling number development with the

Development Pattern 0 to the Number Conversion Block number 000.

CM2A Y=50 1234 010 Assign the Development Block number 010 for the calling party number 1234.

CM2A Y=50 2345 011 Assign the Development Block number 011 for the calling party number 2345.

CM76 Y=01 010 D13 Assign TAS in Day Mode to the Development Block number 010.

CM76 Y=01 011 D04 Assign Direct-In Termination in Day Mode to the Development Block number 011.

CM76 Y=09 010 01 Assign the station tenant number 01 to the Develop-ment Block number 010.

CM76 Y=05 010 01 Assign the trunk tenant number 01 to the Develop-ment Block number 010.

JULY/18/2008

1-135 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1002.fm


SAMPLE DATA PROGRAMMING 2

For non-DID on ISDN, Caller ID incoming calls.

< Example >

• Calling Party No. : 1234 567-8901 : 2345 678-9012

• Trunk Route No. : 00• Terminating System: TAS (Day Mode) when the number 1234 is received

: Direct-In Termination (Day Mode) when the number 2345 is received• Station Tenant No. : 01• Trunk Tenant No. : 01

ISDN/

GSTN

Calling Party No.:

1234 567-8901/

2345 678-9012

Trunk Route: 00

SV8300

When the number assigned by

CM2A corresponds with the upper

digits of calling party number, the

call terminates with the specified

terminating system.







JULY/18/2008

1-136 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1002.fm



COMMAND 1st DATA 2nd DATA REMARKSCM35 Y=174 00 0 Provide the calling number development with the

Development Pattern 0 for trunk route number 00.CM2A Y=50 1234 020 Assign the Development Block number 020 for the

calling party number 1234.CM2A Y=50 2345 021 Assign the Development Block number 021 for the

calling party number 2345.CM76 Y=01 020 D13 Assign TAS in Day Mode to the Development Block

number 020.CM76 Y=01 021 D04 Assign Direct-In Termination in Day Mode to the

Development Block number 021.CM76 Y=09 020 01 Assign the station tenant number 01 to Development

Block number 020.CM76 Y=05 020 01 Assign the trunk tenant number 01 to Development

Block number 020.

JULY/18/2008

1-137 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1002.fm

CALLER IDNO CID CALL ROUTING

NO CID CALL ROUTING

• For Direct Inward Dialing calls

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the indication of reason why the calling number is not informed from network to trunk route.

•(1)(2)

Y=133 00-63: Trunk Route No.0: To indicate

Assign whether the call terminating method is specified for DID incoming call with no CLI.

NOTE: Assign the call terminating method by CM76 Y=34/36 when this com-mand is set to 0/1.

••

(1)(2)

Y=33 (For Day Mode)Y=35 (For Night Mode/Mode A/Mode B)000-999: Block No.0 : Specified when reason of the incom-

ing call with no CLI is “privacy”1 : Specified for all incoming calls with

no CLI3 : Not specified

Assign the specification of the call terminating method for DID incoming call with no CLI.

••

(1)(2)

Y=34 (For Day Mode)Y=36 (For Night Mode/Mode A/Mode B)000-999: Block No.0 : To transfer to the VRS/another station/

Attendant console (assigned by CM51 Y=33)

1 : To reject the call termination2 : To terminate the Multiline Terminal

with LED indication/ringer tone/ring-er pattern (assigned by CM76 Y=37, 38, 39)

3 : To terminate as usual

Assign the destination of call forwarding when the calling number is not informed from net-work.

NOTE 1: This command needs to be set when CM76 Y=34/36 is set to 0.

NOTE 2: Assign the function of Voice Re-sponse System by CM49 Y=00 when this command is set to Voice Re-sponse System No.

•(1)(2)

Y=3300-63: Tenant No.X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.E000: AttendantEB000-EB007: Voice Response System

No.NONE : No data

START

CM35

CM76

CM51

A

JULY/18/2008

1-138 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1002.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify the function of Voice Response Sys-tem.

NOTE: This command is effective only when CM51 Y=33 is set to Voice Response System No.

•(1)

(2)

Y=00000-007: Voice Response System No.

assigned by CM51 Y=33 2200 : Announcement Service for no

Caller-IDNONE : No data

Specify a distinctive LED indication on Multi-line Terminal for DID incoming call with no CLI.

•(1)(2)

Y=37000-999: Block No.0 : Green (120 IPM)1 : Red (120 IPM)

NOTE: This command is effective on the following conditions.• CM35 Y=032 is set to 1.• CM76 Y=34, 36 are set to 0 or 2, and Multiline Terminal receives the incoming call.

Specify the ringing tone interval of SLT or Multiline Terminal for DID incoming call with no CLI.

NOTE 1: Assign this command when the ter-minal destination is SLT or Multi-line Terminal.

NOTE 2: This command is effective when CM76 Y=34, 36 is set to 0 or 2.

•(1)(2)

Y=38000-999: Block No.0 : 0.5 seconds ON-0.5 seconds OFF

(Multiline Terminal)1 second ON-2 seconds OFF (SLT)

1 : 0.5 seconds ON-0.5 seconds OFF -0.5 seconds ON-1.5 seconds OFF (Multiline Terminal)0.4 seconds ON-0.2 seconds OFF -0.4 seconds ON-2 seconds OFF (SLT)

2 : 1 second ON-2 seconds OFF (Multi-line Terminal or SLT)

3 : As per CM76 Y=22[For North America]

A

CM49

CM76

B

JULY/18/2008

1-139 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1002.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify a Multiline Terminal Ringer Tone Pat-tern for DID incoming call with no CLI.

NOTE 1: This command is effective when CM76 YY=34, 36 is set to 0 or 2, and Multiline Terminal receives the incoming call.

NOTE 2: For details of the Ringer Tone Pat-tern, see CM65 Y=40.

•(1)(2)

Y=39000-999: Block No.0 : Ringer Tone Pattern 01 : Ringer Tone Pattern 12 : Ringer Tone Pattern 23 : Ringer Tone Pattern 34 : Ringer Tone Pattern 45 : Ringer Tone Pattern 56 : Ringer Tone Pattern 67 : As per CM76 Y=23

Specify a kind of call termination indicator key/lamp on Attendant console for DID in-coming call with no CLI.

NOTE: The command is effective when CM76 Y=34, 36 is set to 0, and the destination of call forwarding is At-tendant console.

•(1)(2)

Y=40000-999: Block No.0 : C.O. Incoming Call 01 : C.O. Incoming Call 12 : C.O. Incoming Call 23 : C.O. Incoming Call 34 : C.O. Incoming Call 45 : C.O. Incoming Call 56 : C.O. Incoming Call 67 : As per CM35 YY=015

B

CM76

END

JULY/18/2008

1-140 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1002.fm


• For Ring Down calls

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the indication of reason why the calling number is not informed from network to trunk route.

•(1)(2)

Y=13300-63: Trunk Route No.0: To indicate

Assign whether the call terminating method is specified for incoming call with no CLI.

NOTE: Assign the call terminating method by CM35 Y=255/257 when this command is set to 0/1.

••

(1)(2)

Y=254 (For Day Mode)Y=256 (For Night Mode/Mode A/Mode B)00-63: Trunk Route No.0 : Specified when reason of the incom-

ing call with no CLI is “privacy”1 : Specified for all incoming call with no

CLI3 : Not specified

Assign the specification of the call terminating method for incoming call with no CLI.

••

(1)(2)

Y=255 (For Day Mode)Y=257 (For Night Mode/Mode A/Mode B)00-63: Trunk Route No.0 : To transfer to the VRS/another station/

Attendant console (assigned by CM51 Y=33)

1 : To reject the call termination2 : To terminate the Multiline Terminal

with unusual LED indication (as-signed by CM35 Y=258)

3 : To terminate as usual

START

CM35

A

JULY/18/2008

1-141 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1002.fm


HARDWARE REQUIRED


DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the destination of call forwarding when the calling number is not informed from net-work.

NOTE 1: This command needs to be set when CM35 Y=255/257 is set to 0.

NOTE 2: Assign the function of Voice Re-sponse System by CM49 Y=00 when this command is set to Voice Re-sponse System No.

•(1)(2)

Y=3300-63: Tenant No.X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.E000: AttendantEB000-EB007: Voice Response System

No.NONE : No data

Specify the function of Voice Response Sys-tem.

NOTE: This command is effective only when CM51 Y=33 is set to Voice Response System No.

•(1)

(2)

Y=00000-007: Voice Response System No.

assigned by CM51 Y=33 2200 : Announcement Service for no

Caller-IDNONE : No data

Specify a distinctive LED indication on Multi-line Terminal for incoming call with no CLI.

•(1)(2)

Y=2580 : Green (120 IPM)1 : Red (120 IPM)

NOTE: This command is effective on the following conditions.• CM35 Y=032 is set to 1.• CM35 Y=255, 257 are set to 0 or 2, and Multiline Terminal receives the incoming call.

A

CM51

CM49

CM35

END

JULY/18/2008

1-142 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1002.fm

CAMP-ON/CALL WAITING


PROGRAMMING

Camp-On (Transfer Method)

DESCRIPTION DATA

Provide the system with the Camp-On by Station feature.

(1)(2)

146: Automatic Camp-On0: Available

(1)

(2)

147: Manual Camp-On (Result of Switch Hook-Flash while hearing Busy Tone)

0: Special Dial Tone allowing use of Camp-On by Station access code

Assign Service Restriction Class A for Camp-On to the required stations.

•(1)(2)


Allow Camp-On (Transfer Method) in Service Restriction Class A assigned by CM12 Y=02.

•(1)

(2)

Y=016 Transfer Method00-15: Service Restriction Class A as-


Specify the Camp-On Tone sent to a busy station by Camp-On Transfer Method.

(1)(2)

068 0 : Only once1 : Every 4 seconds

Specify the timing for the Camp-On Recall Timer.

•(1)(2)

Y=02601-15: 16-128 seconds


Assign an access code for Camp-On by Station (Transfer method).

•(1)(2)

Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3X-XXXX: Access CodeA007: Camp-On by Station (Transfer

method)

START

CM08

CM12

CM15

CM08

CM41

CM20

END

JULY/18/2008

1-143 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1002.fm


Camp-On (Call Waiting Method)

NOTE: For the data assignment of the Answer key to answer a Camp-On call from a Multiline Termi-nal, refer to ANSWER KEY. Page 1-21

DESCRIPTION DATA

Provide the system with the Camp-On by Station feature.

(1)(2)

146: Automatic Camp-On0: Available

(1)

(2)

147: Manual Camp-On (Result of Switch Hook Flash while hearing Busy Tone)

0: Special Dial Tone allowing use of Camp-On by access code

Assign Service Restriction Class A for Camp-On to the required stations.

•(1)(2)


Allow Call waiting in Service Restriction Class A assigned by CM12 Y=02.

•

•

(1)

(2)

Y=043 Call Waiting Method-Set from calling sideY=044 Call Waiting Method-Answer from called side00-15: Service Restriction Class A as-


Assign the access code for Camp-On by Station (Call Waiting Method).

•(1)(2)

Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3X-XXXX: Access CodeA125: Camp-On by Station (Call Waiting

Method)

START

CM08

CM12

CM15

CM20

END

JULY/18/2008

1-144 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1002.fm


When using a Single Digit Feature Access Code for Camp-On, add the following system data.

DESCRIPTION DATA

To activate the Single Digit Feature Access Code, set the data for 050, 051, 069 and 148 to “1”.

(1)(2)

050: * Button as Switch Hook Flash1 : Ineffective

(1)(2)


(1)

(2)


1 : Step Call

(1)

(2)


1 : Ineffective

Provide the System with the Single Digit Feature Access Code on BT Connection.

(1)(2)

208 0: Available

START

CM08

END

JULY/18/2008

1-145 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1002.fm

CENTREX COMPATIBILITY

CENTREX COMPATIBILITY[For North America]

PROGRAMMING

In addition to the programming of DIRECT OUTWARD DIALING (DOD) Page 1-234, do the fol-lowing programming.

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the Centrex Trunk function to the required trunk routes.

•(1)(2)

Y=08600-63: Trunk Route No.0: Centrex Trunk

Provide the capability for sending a hookflash signal to the Centrex.

•(1)(2)

Y=01600-63: Trunk Route No.1 : Sending

Assign the access code for sending a hookflash signal to the Centrex Line from a PB Single-Line Telephone.

•(1)(2)


Assign the Centrex Trunk as a Prime Line to the desired Multiline Terminal extension.

(1)(2)

X-XXXXXXXX: My Line No.D000-D511: Trunk No.

START

CM35

CM20

CM93

END

JULY/18/2008

1-146 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1003.fm

CLASS OF SERVICE

CLASS OF SERVICE

PROGRAMMING

To assign the Telephone Class:

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the Telephone Class to each station. •(1)(2)

Y=00 Type of TelephoneX-XXXXXXXX: Station No.1 : DP (Rotary Dial Telephone) 2 : DTMF (Push Button Telephone)3 : DTMF/DP

•(1)(2)

Y=03 Telephone ClassX-XXXXXXXX: Station No.00 : House Phone 0 01 : House Phone 102 : House Phone 203 : House Phone 304 : Hot Line 05 : Automatic Intercom 06 : Manual Intercom07 : Dial Intercom08 : Attendant Position Loop Line 15 : Ordinary Station

START

CM12

END

1-147 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1003.fm

CLASS OF SERVICE

To assign the Trunk Restriction Class:

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the Trunk Restriction Class to each station.

•(1)(2)

Y=01 Trunk Restriction ClassX-XXXXXXXX: Station No.X ZX: 1 -8: Trunk Restriction Class in Day

ModeZ: 1 -8: Trunk Restriction Class in Night

Mode1: Unrestricted (RCA)2: Non-Restricted 1 (RCB)3: Non-Restricted 2 (RCC)4: Semi-Restricted 1 (RCD) 5: Semi-Restricted 2 (RCE) 6: Restricted 1 (RCF)7: Restricted 2 (RCG)8: Fully-Restricted (RCH)

Set the Outgoing/Incoming Trunk Route Restriction Data by Trunk Restriction Classes (RCA-RCH).

•

•

(1)(2)

Y=051-058 Outgoing Trunk Restriction DataY=061-068 Incoming Trunk Restriction Data00-63: Trunk Route No.0 : Restricted1 : Allow

START

CM12

CM35

END

1-148 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1003.fm

CLASS OF SERVICE

To assign the Service Restriction Class:

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the required Service Restriction Class to each station.Service Restriction categories for each class are specified by CM15.

•(1)(2)

Y=02X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.XX ZZXX: 00-15 : Service Restriction Class A ZZ : 00-15 : Service Restriction Class B

•(1)(2)


Specify the services in each Service Class A, B, and C.

NOTE: For details, refer to Command Manual.

(1)(2)

00-15: Service Restriction Class A, B, C0 : NOTE1 : NOTE

START

CM12

CM15

END

1-149 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1003.fm

CODE RESTRICTION

CODE RESTRICTION

PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION DATA

Provide the system with the Tol1 Restriction feature for an outgoing call by System Speed Dialing/Station Speed Dialing, if desired.

(1)(2)

035: Station Speed Dialing0 : Not provided1 : To provide

(1)(2)

044: System Speed Dialing0 : Not provided1 : To provide

Provide the system with Toll Diversion or Toll Denial.

(1)(2)

119 0 : Toll Diversion (Routed to the “ICPT”

key on the DESKCON)1 : Toll Denial (Routed to Reorder Tone)

Assign a Trunk Restriction Class to each station.

•(1)(2)

Y=01X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.X Z: Trunk Restriction ClassX: 1 -8: In Day ModeZ : 1 -8: In Night Mode

1: Unrestricted (RCA)2: Non-Restricted 1 (RCB)3: Non-Restricted 2 (RCC)4: Semi-Restricted 1 (RCD)5: Semi-Restricted 2 (RCE)6: Restricted 1 (RCF)7: Restricted 2 (RCG)8: Fully-Restricted (RCH)

Assign the data for Dial Pulse sending to the Route number assigned.

•(1)(2)

Y=008 Dial Pulse Sending00-63: Trunk Route No.3 : To send

Provide the Toll Restriction feature to the required trunk routes.

•(1)(2)

Y=01100-63: Trunk Route No. (00)0: To provide

Specify outgoing route access capability for each restriction class.

•(1)(2)

Y=051-05800-63: Trunk Route No.0 : Restricted1 : Allow

START

CM08

CM12

CM35

A

1-150 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1003.fm

CODE RESTRICTION

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the Area Code Development Pattern number for Toll Restriction and Maximum Digit Analysis to each trunk route.

•(1)(2)

Y=07600-63: Trunk Route No.00-04: Area Code Development Pattern

No. 0-4

Assign the Toll Restriction Patterns with eight kinds of Trunk Restriction Classes assigned by CM12 Y=01. Toll Restriction Pattern 00-15 are preassigned as shown below. If a new Restriction Pattern is required, change the data for Restriction Patterns 01-13 (00, 14 and 15 are fixed).

•(1)(2)

Y=01-13 Toll Restriction Pattern No. 01-131-8: Trunk Restriction Class0: Restricted 3: Allowed

Specify the maximum number of sending dig-its to be dialed during an outgoing call. The maximum number of sending digits, including the area codes, should be assigned to each area code.

•

(1)

(2)

Y=0-4 Area Code Development Pattern No. 0-4 assigned by CM35 Y=076X-X...X: Area Code dialed, Maximum 8

digits01-24 : 1 digit-24 digits25-79 : 25-79 digits

A

CM35

CM81

0: Restricted3: Allowed

TRUNKRESTRICTION

CLASS

Y

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 00

TOLL RESTRICTION PATTERN NUMBER ON EACH TRUNK RESTRICTION CLASS

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 00

1 RCA 3 0 3 3 3 0 0 0 3 3 3 3 3 0 3 0

2 RCB 3 0 3 3 0 0 0 0 3 3 0 0 0 0 3 0

3 RCC 3 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 3 0

4 RCD 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0

5 RCE 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0

6 RCF 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0

7 RCG 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0

8 RCH 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0

CM85

B

1-151 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1003.fm

CODE RESTRICTION

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the area code to be restricted and the Trunk Restriction Pattern number assigned by CM81 to the Area Code Development Pattern number assigned by CM35 Y=076. For example, to provide the Trunk Restriction Class “RCB, RCC, RCD, and RCE” with the Toll Restriction for Area Code “00”:

• Area Code=00 • Trunk Restriction Pattern=05

(See Toll Restriction Pattern Table on CM81.)

If the Toll Restriction Pattern for the same area code is changed according to the Tenant, Date, and Time, assign the required patterns (Tenant, Date, and Time) to the area code.

•

(1)(2)

Y=4000-4004 Area Code Development No. 0-4Area Code (Maximum 8 digits) B000-B015: Trunk Restriction Pattern

00-15

B

CM8A

AREACODE 4000

-4004

DATEPATTERN

2000-2007

3000-3003

1000-1015

TENANTPATTERN

TIMEPATTERN

0000-0255

ROUTEPATTERN

5000-5255

TRPATTERN

TRUNK RESTRICTION PATTERN 00-15

C

1-152 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1003.fm

CODE RESTRICTION

DESCRIPTION DATA

To add a Tenant Pattern:

STEP1: Assign the area code to be restrict-ed and a Tenant Pattern number to the Area Code Development Pattern number assigned by CM35 Y=076.

•

(1)(2)

Y=4000-4004 Area Code Development Pattern No. 0-4Area Code (Maximum 8 digits)1000-1015: Tenant Pattern No. 00-15

STEP2: Assign a Tenant number and the Route Pattern number to the Tenant Pattern number assigned by Step1.

•(1)(2)

Y=1000-1015 Tenant Pattern No. 00-1500-63: Tenant No. 00-630000-0255: Route Pattern No. 000-255

STEP3: Assign a TR Pattern number to the Route Pattern number assigned by Step 2.

•(1)(2)

Y=0000-0255 Route Pattern No. 000-2551 XXX 00 XXX: 000-255: TR Pattern No.

STEP4: Assign a Trunk Restriction Pattern number assigned by CM81 to the TR Pattern number assigned by Step 3.

•(1)(2)

Y=5000-5255 TR Pattern No.000 00-15 : Trunk Restriction Pattern No. 00-

15

To add a Time and Date Pattern:

STEP1: Assign the area code to be restrict-ed and a Date Pattern number to the Area Code Development Pattern number assigned by CM35 Y=076.

•(1)(2)

Y=4000-4004Area Code (Maximum 8 digits)3000-3003: Date Pattern No. 0-3

STEP2: Assign a date and Time Pattern No. 0-7 to the Date Pattern number assigned by Step 1.

Set the data for all dates, one by one, for which Toll Restriction is to be applied.

•(1)

(2)

Y=3000-3003 Date Pattern No. 0-30-6 (Date)0: Sunday 1: Monday 2: Tuesday 3: Wednesday 4: Thursday 5: Friday 6: Saturday 2000-2007: Time Pattern No. 0-7

C

CM8A

D

1-153 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1003.fm

CODE RESTRICTION

DESCRIPTION DATA

STEP3: Assign the starting time for the Toll Restriction and Route Pattern number to the Time Pattern number assigned by Step 2. Set the Starting Time as shown below.

NOTE: Two times must be set. The first to start Toll Restriction and the second to stop it (or change it back).

•(1)

(2)

Y=2000-2007 Time Pattern No. 0-7HHMM (Time to Change) HH : 00-23: HoursMM: 00/30: Minutes0000-0255: Route Pattern No. 000-255If Tenant Pattern is required, set 1000-1015 (Tenant Pattern No. 00-15).

STEP4: Assign the TR Pattern number to the Route Pattern number assigned by Step 3.

•(1)(2)

Y=0000-0255 Route Pattern No. 000-2551 XXX 00XXX: 000-255: TR Pattern No.

STEP5: Assign the Toll Restriction Pattern number assigned by CM81 to the TR Pattern number assigned by Step 4.

•(1)(2)

Y=5000-5255 TR Pattern No. 000-255000 00-15 : Toll Restriction Pattern No. 00-15

D

CM8A

END

1-154 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1003.fm

CONFERENCE (THREE/FOUR PARTY)


PROGRAMMING

To provide a conference by calling another party as the third party of the conference:

DESCRIPTION DATA

Provide the system with three-party conference.

(1)(2)

101 1 : Three Party Conference among

stations

(1)(2)

102 0: As per CM08>101

(1)(2)

103 0: As per CM08>104

(1)(2)

104 1 : Three Party Conference among

stations and trunk call

Provide the system with a four-party conference.

NOTE: This feature can only be activated from a Multiline Terminal.

(1)(2)

246 1 : Four Party Conference

Specify the PAD data for a station-to-station call.

(1)(2)

19001-31 : PAD data

(Transmitter/Receiver)01: -15 dB/-15 dB

(1 dB increment)15: -1 dB/-1 dB16: 0 dB/0 dB17: +1 dB/+1 dB

(1 dB increment)31: +15 dB/+15 dB

NONE : -6 dB/-6 dB(+: Gain, -: Loss)

START

CM08

CM42

~~

A

1-155 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1003.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify the PAD data for a station/trunk-to-conference trunk.

(1)(2)

19100-63 : PAD data


44: -1 dB45: 0 dB46: +1 dB


NONE : -10 dB(+: Gain, -: Loss)

A

CM42

~~

END

JULY/18/2008

1-156 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1003.fm


To provide a conference by adding a held call as the third party of the conference:

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign Service Restriction Class B for Confer-ence leader.

•(1)(2)

Y=02X-XXXXXXXX: My Line No.XX ZZZZ: 00-15 : Service Restriction Class B

Allow Privacy Release in Service Restriction Class B assigned by CM12 Y=02.

•(1)

(2)

Y=063 Privacy Release00-15: Service Restriction Class B


Allow adding the held call on Multiline Termi-nal multiline as a third party of the conference.

•(1)(2)

Y=4100-63: Tenant No.0: Allow

START

CM12

CM15

CM65

END

1-157 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1003.fm

CONSECUTIVE SPEED DIALING


PROGRAMMING

To provide Consecutive Station Speed Dialing from Single Line Telephone or Multiline Terminal:

DESCRIPTION DATA


•(1)(2)


Allow Station Speed Dialing in the Service Re-striction Class A assigned by CM12 Y=02.

•(1)

(2)



Assign access codes for Station Speed Dialing, Origination, Entry and Cancel, respectively.

•(1)(2)

Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3X-XXXX: Access CodeA064: Origination A065: Entry A066: Cancel

Specify whether to provide Toll Restriction for an outgoing call by Station Speed Dialing.

(1)(2)

0350 : Not provided1 : Provided

Specify whether to set “#” dialing as paused data (1.5 seconds) or dialed digit when the DTMF station or Multiline Terminal dials “#” in the setting of the Station Speed Dialing fea-ture.

(1)(2)

1680 : Paused data (1.5 seconds)1 : Dialed digit

Specify “*” dialing is set as programmable pause by CM41 Y=0>38 or dialed digit when the DTMF station or Multiline Terminal dials “*” in the setting of the Station Speed Dialing feature.

(1)(2)

1710 : Programmable pause by CM41

Y=0>381 : Dialed digit

START

CM12

CM15

CM20

CM08

A

1-158 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1003.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

Allocate the memory area for Station Speed Dialing to each station when using Consecu-tive Speed Dialing.

(1)(2)

X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.WW XX Y ZZWW: 00-19: 1000-Slot Memory Block

No. NOTE XX : 00-99: Memory Start Block No.

(10-Slot Memory Block)Y : Facility for programming the dialed

number from the Station0/1: Effective/Ineffective

ZZ : 01-10: Number of 10-Slot Memory Blocks

NOTE: 1000-Slot Memory Block number 04-19 (16000 Memory Parcels) cannot be used for Speed Dialing with Station Speed Dialing keys provided by CM90: F11XX on a Multiline Termi-nal, and cannot also be used for System Speed Dialing.

A

CM73

B

1-159 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1003.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

The memory area for storing one called number of Station Speed Dialing is called a “Memory Parcel”. An assembly of 10 Memory Parcels is called a “10-Slot Memory Block,” and one hundred 10-Slot Memory Blocks are called a “1000-Slot Memory Block”.

Example: If the stored number intended is 10 for Station Number 300, 20 for Station Number 301, and 30 for Station Number 302, the memory areas assignment is as follows.

B

CM73

00

~

03

04

1000-SlotMemory Block

0

9

1

Memory Parcel

00

99

01

10-SlotMemory Block

~

19

4000Memory Parcels

16000Memory Parcels

Station No.1000-Slot Memory

Block No.Memory Start Block No.(10-Slot Memory Block)

Number of 10-SlotMemory Block

(1st Data)300301302303

(2nd Data: WW)00000000

(2nd Data: XX)00010306

(2nd Data: ZZ)01020301

C

1-160 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1003.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

The abbreviated codes for this feature are automatically determined by assigning this command, on a station basis.If the number of Memory Parcels per station does not exceed 10, then Abbreviated Code=0-9.If the number of Memory Parcels per station exceeds 10, then Abbreviated Code=00-99.The following figure shows the relation between Abbreviated Codes and Memory Parcels.

C

CM73

0

In the case of 10 Memory Parcels

Memory Parcel

Number

10-Slot Memory

Block

(Abbreviated Code)

1

2

3

4

5

~

9

0

1

2

3

4

5

~

9

0


Memory Parcel

Number

10-Slot Memory

Block

(Abbreviated Code)

1

9

0

1

~

9

00

01

09

10

11

~19

~ ~

10-Slot Memory

Block

D

1-161 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1003.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the number to be dialed to each Memo-ry Slot number, if required. The numbers to be called are usually set from individual stations by their station users.

•(1)

(2)

Y=0XX YY ZXX: 00-19: 1000-Slot Memory Block No.YY: 00-99: 10-Slot Memory Block No.Z : 0-9: Memory Parcel No.Stored No.: Outgoing Call Access Code (Maximum 4 digits) + + Stored No. (Maximum 26 digits)To set a pause into the Stored No., enter “C” (Fixed Pause=1.5 seconds) or “D” (Programmable Pause specified by CM41 Y=0>38) after desired digits.NONE : No data

Assign the Station Name to be displayed to each Memory Slot number, by character codes or character.

•(1)

(2)

Y=1XX YY ZXX: 00-19: 1000-Slot Memory Block No.YY: 00-99: 10-Slot Memory Block No.Z : 0-9: Memory Parcel No.XX...XX: Station Name Character Code

(Maximum 32 digits, 16 charac-ters)

NONE : No dataSee APPENDIX A:Character Code Table.

Page A-2

•(1)

(2)

Y=2XX YY ZXX: 00-19: 1000-Slot Memory Block No.YY: 00-99: 10-Slot Memory Block No.Z : 0-9: Memory Parcel No.XX...XX: Station Name Character


D

CM74

,

E

1-162 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1003.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign Station Speed Dialing keys on each Multiline Terminal, if required.

•(1)(2)

Y=00My Line No. + + Key No. F11XX XX: 00-99: Station Speed Dialing 00-99

NOTE: For detail of Multiline Terminal key layout set by CM12 Y=24, re-fer to the Command Manual.

E

CM90,

END

1-163 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1003.fm


To provide Consecutive Station Speed Dialing from Multiline Terminal with One Touch keys:

DESCRIPTION DATA


•(1)(2)



•(1)

(2)




(1)(2)

0350 : Not provided1 : Provided

Specify whether to set “#” dialing as paused data (1.5 seconds) or dialed digit when the Multiline Terminal dials “#” in the setting of the Station Speed Dialing feature.

(1)(2)


Specify whether to set “*” dialing as program-mable pause by CM41 Y=0>38 or dialed digit when the DTMF station or Multiline Terminal dials “*” in the setting of the Station Speed Di-aling feature.

(1)(2)



Allocate the memory area for Station Speed Dialing to each station when using Consecu-tive Speed Dialing for One Touch Keys.

(1)(2)

X-XXXXXXXX: My Line No.WW XX 0 ZZ WW: 00-19: 1000-Slot Memory Block No.XX : 00-99: 10-Slot Memory Start Block

No.ZZ : 01-10: Number of 10-Slot Memory

Blocks

NOTE 1: If the station number is assigned to One Touch keys using 1000-Slot Memory Block number 04-19 (16000 Memory Parcels), the lamp does not show the busy state.

NOTE 2: When Consecutive Speed Dialing is provided using the One Touch Keys, the same memory area must be assigned on CM73 and CM94.

START

CM12

CM15

CM08

CM94

A

1-164 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1003.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

The memory area for storing one called number of Station Speed Dialing is called a “Memory Parcel”. An assembly of 10 Memory Parcels is called a “10-Slot Memory Block,” and one hundred 10-Slot Memory Blocks are called a “1000-Slot Memory Block”.


A

CM94

00

~

03

04


0

9

1

Memory Parcel

00

99

01

10-SlotMemory Block

~

19

4000Memory Parcels

16000Memory Parcels




(1st Data)300301302303

(2nd Data: WW)00000000

(2nd Data: XX)00010306

(2nd Data: ZZ)01020301

END

1-165 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1003.fm


To provide Consecutive System Speed Dialing:

DESCRIPTION DATA


•(1)(2)


Allow System Speed Dialing in the Service Restriction Class A assigned by CM12 Y=02.

•(1)

(2)

Y=006 System Speed Dialing00-15: Service Restriction Class A as-


Assign the access code for System Speed Dialing.

•(1)(2)

Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3X-XXXX: Access CodeA067: System Speed Dialing

Assign the memory area for the System Speed Dialing. 300 memory slots are available per system. The number of slots available for each Tenant is also 300.

(1)

(2)

00-63: For stations within Tenant 00-6364 : For Attendant ConsoleXXX YYYXXX: 000-299: First Memory Slot No. in

BlockYYY: 001-300: Number of Slots to be

allocated in Block

Abbreviated Call Codes required for accessing this feature are automatically given to each Tenant as shown below.

Example:

For example, to provide 20 memory slots starting at Slot 60: Data=060020

The number of digits for Abbreviated Code is automatically determined as shown below:

• Less than 100 memory slots per Tenant: 2 digits (00-99)

• More than 100 memory slots per Tenant: 3 digits (000-299)

START

CM12

CM15

CM20

CM71

Tenant 00

Slot 000

Slot 019

20MemorySlots

00

19

AbbreviatedCodes

Tenant 01

Slot 020

Slot 034

15MemorySlots

00

14

AbbreviatedCodes

A

1-166 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1003.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

Set a stored number to each Memory Slot number allocated by CM71, as needed.

•(1)(2)

Y=0000-299: Memory Slot No.Stored No.:Outgoing Access Code (Maximum 4 digits) + + Stored No. (Maximum 26 digits) To set a pause into the Stored No., enter “C” (Fixed pause=1.5 seconds) or “D” (Programmable pause specified by CM41 Y=0>38) after desired digits.NONE : No data

Assign the name for display, to the Memory Slot number allocated by CM71, by character codes or character.

•(1)(2)

Y=1000-299: Memory Slot No.XX...XX: Station Name Character Code



Page A-2

•(1)(2)

Y=2000-299: Memory Slot No.XX...XX: Station Name Character


Specify the System Speed Dialing security. (Stored number displays on Multiline Terminal for an outgoing call by System Speed Dialing.)

(1)(2)

043 0 : Not displayed1 : Display

Specify Toll Restriction for an outgoing call by System Speed Dialing.

(1)(2)

044 0 : Not provided1 : Provided

A

CM72

,

CM08

END

1-167 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1003.fm

CONSULTATION HOLD

CONSULTATION HOLD

PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION DATA

Select the ringing pattern on station calls with a trunk line placed in Consultation Hold.

(1)(2)

137 0 : Change from Internal Ringing

(CM08>138/CM04 Y=00>05) to External Ringing (CM35 Y=033) when transferring a call

1 : External Ringing (CM35 Y=033)

Assign Service Restriction Class C to each station.

•(1)(2)


Allow the Switch Hook Flash capability in Service Restriction Class C assigned by CM12 Y=07.

•

•

(1)

(2)

Y=088, 089 Switch Hook Flash on Internal CallY=090, 091 Switch Hook Flash on External Call00-15: Service Restriction Class C as-

signed by CM12 Y=071 : Available (Special Dial Tone Connec-

tion)

START

CM08

CM12

CM15

END

1-168 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1003.fm

CUSTOMER ADMINISTRATION TERMINAL (CAT)


PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign Service Restriction Class B for CAT to the required Multiline Terminal.

•(1)(2)

Y=02 X-XXXXXXXX: My Line No.XX ZZZZ: 00-15 : Service Restriction Class B

Allow change of mode for CAT in Service Restriction Class B assigned by CM12 Y=02.

•(1)

(2)



Specify the command codes accessible to each Password Level.

••••••••••••••

(1)

(2)

Y=00: Password Level 0-6Y=01: Password Level 1-6Y=02: Password Level 2-6Y=03: Password Level 3-6Y=04: Password Level 4-6Y=05: Password Level 5-6Y=06: Password Level 6Y=10: Password Level 0Y=11: Password Level 1Y=12: Password Level 2Y=13: Password Level 3Y=14: Password Level 4Y=15: Password Level 5Y=16: Password Level 602-F8: Command Code exclusive of 03,

E7, E90 : Allowed1 : Restricted

Assign the setting/changing of the password to be allowed.

(1)(2)

8 0 : Allowed1 : Restricted

START

CM12

CM15

CME7

CME9

A

1-169 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1003.fm


NOTE 1: To use the CAT after clearing all system data, perform the following operations on the system.1. Plug a DLC blade into Slot 01 accommodated in Unit01 (for Multiline Terminal).2. Connect the CAT (Multiline Terminal) to Physical Port No. 010101 at the MDF or Virtual

Port No. 0000.3. Set SENSE switch on the CPU blade accommodated in Unit01 to “A”.4. Press RESET switch on the CPU blade accommodated in Unit01.5. Check the LED status.

• RUN LED lights and SYSD LED flashes while loading the standard system data.• RUN LED and SYSD LED go off and S2 LED lights when the standard system data is

loaded normally.• RUN LED and SYSD LED go off and ALM LED lights if the loading of the standard sys-

tem data fails.6. Set SENSE switch on the CPU blade accommodated in Unit01 to “1”.7. Press RESET switch on the CPU blade accommodated in Unit01.

CPU will reset automatically after SENSE switch is set to “1”.

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign a password to each Password Level. (1)(2)

0-7: Password Level 0-7X-X...X : Maximum 8 digits PasswordCCC : Password clearNONE : No data

A password for Password Level 7 should be assigned in advance because of providing the password service by Function No. 9 of CME9.The following passwords are not available.“CCCCCCCC”“FFFFFFFF”

The setting/changing of the password is avail-able only when the second data of CME9>8 is set to “0 (Allowed)”.If CME9>8 is set to “1 (Restricted)”, “DATA ERROR” is displayed when you set/change the password.

Provide the system with Password Feature. After setting this data, access to system programming will be available with password entry only.

(1)(2)

9 0: Provided

A

CME9

END

1-170 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1003.fm


NOTE 2: If Password Service is activated, enter the predetermined password (assigned by CME9>0-7) by CM03 before programming from a CAT.

+ 03 + + Password Level number (0-7) + + Password + – “OK” will be displayed, if accepted.– “DATA ERROR” will be displayed if the password is incorrect.

ST DE DE EXE

1-171 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1003.fm

DATA LINE SECURITY

DATA LINE SECURITY

PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the function of Analog Data station (Single-Line Station with FAX or MODEM) to the required stations.

•(1)(2)

Y=07X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.0: Data station

START

CM13

END

1-172 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1003.fm

DELAYED HOTLINE

DELAYED HOTLINE

PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign a Delayed Hotline to the required sta-tions.

•(1)(2)

Y=03X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.09: Delayed Hotline

Specify the Delayed Hotline activation timer. •(1)(2)

Y=011901-30: 1-30 seconds


Define the Delayed Hotline pairs.

NOTE 1: When assigning a station number to a calling side, the second data of CM12 Y=03 must be set to “04”.

•(1)(2)

(1)(2)

Y=00-99 Delayed Hotline Pair No.0: Calling Side X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.

1: Called SideX-XXXXXXXX: Station No.E000-E007 : ATTCON No.

NOTE 2: Do not assign station number with first digit “0”.

Assign a Delayed Hotline to the required sta-tions.

•(1)(2)

Y=03X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.04: Delayed Hotline

START

CM12

CM41

CM52

CM12

A

1-173 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1003.fm

DELAYED HOTLINE

DESCRIPTION DATA

Allocate the memory area for the Delayed Hot-line-Outside call. For example, to assign the 10 Delayed Hotline-Outside calls into No. 100 through No. 109 Memory Slots, 2nd data is “100010”. Abbreviated Codes are automati-cally assigned as shown below:

(1)(2)

65: For Delayed Hotline-OutsideXXX YYYXXX: 000-299: Starting Memory Slot No.

in blocksYYY: 001-100: Number of Memory Slots

to be assigned in blocks

Set the outside party’s number to each Memory Slot number.

•(1)(2)

Y=0000-299: Memory Slot No.XXXX + + YY...Y: Outside Party’s No.XXXX : Access Code (Maximum 4 dig-

its): Separator Mark

YY...Y : Outside Party’s No. (Maximum 26 digits)

NONE : No data

•(1)(2)

Y=1000-299: Memory Slot No.XXX...X: Station Name Character Code

(Maximum 32 digits: 16 charac-ters)


Page A-2

•(1)(2)

Y=2000-299: Memory Slot No.XXX...X: Station Name Character by

PCPro/CAT (Maximum 16 char-acters)

NONE : No data

A

CM71

Abbreviated CodeMemory Slot 100 00

Memory Slot 109 09

CM72

,

,

END

1-174 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1003.fm

DELAYED RINGING

DELAYED RINGING

PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the Delayed Ringing feature to each line key on a Multiline Terminal.

NOTE: The Delayed Ringing feature can be assigned to the first 16 line/trunk keys (Key 01-16)/24 line/trunk keys (Key 01-24).

•(1)(2)

Y=02My Line No. + + Key No. NOTE0: Delayed Ringing

Specify the timing for Delayed Ringing. •(1)(2)

Y=10901-20: 1024-20480 ms.


START

CM90,

CM41

END

1-175 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1003.fm

DIAGNOSTICS

DIAGNOSTICS

PROGRAMMING

Refer to the System Maintenance Manual.

1-176 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1003.fm

DIAL BY NAME

DIAL BY NAME

PROGRAMMING

(1) Assignment for Soft Key

DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify that the Soft Key feature is available to each Multiline Terminal.

•(1)(2)

Y=22X-XXXXXXXX: My Line No. 1 : Available

Assign Soft Key Pattern number to each Mul-tiline Terminal.

•(1)(2)

Y=23X-XXXXXXXX: My Line No. 0 : Pattern No. 01 : Pattern No. 12 : Pattern No. 23 : Pattern No. 3

START

CM12

A

1-177 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1003.fm

DIAL BY NAME

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the Dial By Name function to each Soft Key on idle status of the Multiline Terminal.

The LCD shows a maximum of 4 Soft Keys at once. If assigning more than 4 Soft Keys on one status, it is necessary to assign Scroll key at every 4 keys (on 1st through 4th display).

NOTE 1: Scroll key must be assigned as a key for each active display.

NOTE 2: Help key is only available in Pattern No. 3.

NOTE 3: For the Pattern No. 3, the reset Soft Key data for Dial By Name are assigned as follows:

NOTE 4: Pattern No. 3 is fixed.

NOTE 5: Dial By Name is available only when the Multiline Terminal is in idle state.

•

(1)

(2)

Y=00-03 Soft Key Pattern No. 0-3 assigned by CM12 Y=23

00 bb00: Status No. (Idle state) NOTE 5bb: 00-15: Soft Key No.

00-03: Indicated on 1st display04-07: Indicated on 2nd display 08-11: Indicated on 3rd display12-15: Indicated on 4th display

F5002 : Scroll key to change Soft Key Indication

F5014 : Dial By Name for System Speed Dialing (300-Slot Memory)

F5015 : Dial By Name for Station Speed Dialing

F5016 : Dial By Name for System Speed Dialing (1000-Slot Memory Block No. 00)




NONE : No data

A

CM9A

CM9A Y=03

1st Data 2nd Data

0001 F50140002 F5015

B

1-178 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1003.fm

DIAL BY NAME

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the Characters indicated on each status of the Multiline Terminal, corresponding to the Soft Key function assigned by CM9A Y=00-03. For the Pattern No. 3, the reset Soft Key data for Dial By Name are assigned as fol-lows:

•

(1)(2)

Y=10-13Soft Key Pattern No. 0-3 assigned by CM12 Y=23

Same as CM9A Y=00-03XX...XX: Soft Key name indicated on

LCD(Maximum 12 characters)


Page A-2

Specify whether the system sends SPDT when entering the name/number.

(1)(2)


B

CM9A

CM9A Y=13

1st Data 2nd Data

0001 SYS.0002 STA.

CM08

END

1-179 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1003.fm

DIAL BY NAME

(2) Assignment for the Memory Allocation and the Station Name• When using Dial By Name for System Speed Dialing:

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the memory block for System Speed Dialing. 300 memory slots are available per system. The number of slots available for each Tenant is also 300.

Abbreviated Call Codes required for accessing this feature are automatically given to each Tenant as shown in the following example.

(1)(2)

00-63: For stations within the Tenant 00-63XXX YYYXXX: 000-299: Starting Memory Slot

No. in BlockYYY: 001-300: Number of Slots to be

assigned in BlockFor example, to provide 20 memory slots starting at Slot 60: Data: 060020

START

CM71

Tenant 00

Slot 000

Slot 019

20MemorySlots

00

19

AbbreviatedCodes

Tenant 01

Slot 020

Slot 034

15MemorySlots

00

14

AbbreviatedCodes

A

1-180 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1003.fm

DIAL BY NAME

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the number to be called to the Memory Slot number allocated by CM71.

•(1)(2)

Y=0000-299: Memory Slot No.Stored No.: Outgoing Access Code (Maximum 4 digits) + + Called Party No. (Maximum 26 digits) To set a pause into the Stored No., enter “C” (Fixed pause=1.5 seconds) or “D” (Programmable pause specified by CM41 Y=0>38) after desired digits (more than 2 digits). NONE : No data

Assign the name for display, to the Memory Slot number allocated by CM71, by character codes or character.

•(1)(2)




Page A-2

•(1)(2)

Y=2000-299: Memory Slot No.XX...XX: Station Name Character by

PCPro/CAT (Maximum 16 characters)

NONE : No data

A

CM72

,

END

1-181 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1003.fm

DIAL BY NAME

• When using Dial By Name for Station Speed Dialing, Multiline Terminal One Touch Keys, andSystem Speed Dialing (1000-Slot Memory):

DESCRIPTION DATA

Allocate the memory area for Station Speed Dialing to each station when using Dial By Name for Station Speed Dialing.

(1)(2)

X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.WW XX Y ZZWW: 00-19: 1000-Slot Memory Block

No. NOTEXX : 00-99: Memory Start Block No.

(10-Slot Memory Block) Y : Facility for programming the dialed




START

CM73

A

1-182 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1003.fm

DIAL BY NAME

DESCRIPTION DATA

The memory area for storing one called number of Station Speed Dialing is called a “Memory Par-cel”. An assembly of 10 Memory Parcels is called a “10-Slot Memory Block”, and one hundred 10-Slot Memory Blocks are called a “1000-Slot Memory Block”.


A

CM73

00

~

03

04


0

9

1

Memory Parcel

00

99

01

10-SlotMemory Block

~

19

4000Memory Parcels

16000Memory Parcels




(1st Data)300301302303

(2nd Data: WW)00000000

(2nd Data: XX)00010306

(2nd Data: ZZ)01020301

B

1-183 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1003.fm

DIAL BY NAME

DESCRIPTION DATA

Allocate the memory area for Station Speed Dialing to each station when using Dial By Name for Multiline Terminal One Touch Keys. The same memory area must be assigned on CM73 and CM94.

(1)(2)



Blocks

NOTE 1: When Dial By Name is provided using the One Touch Keys, the same memory area must be specified by CM73 and CM94.

NOTE 2: If the station number is assigned to One Touch Keys using 1000-Slot Memory Block number 04-19, the lamp does not show the busy state.

Specify the memory area to be used for System Speed Dialing when using Dial By Name for System Speed Dialing (1000-Slot Memory).

(1)(2)

112: 1000-Slot Memory Block No. 000 : Available1 : Not available

(1)(2)


(1)(2)


(1)(2)


B

CM94

CM08

C

1-184 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1003.fm

DIAL BY NAME

HARDWARE REQUIRED

Multiline Terminal with LCD and Soft Key, and DLC blade

DESCRIPTION DATA


•(1)

(2)

Y=0XX YY Z XX: 00-19: 1000-Slot Memory Block No.YY: 00-99: 10-Slot Memory Block No.Z : 0-9: Memory Parcel No.Stored No.:Outgoing Access Code (Maximum 4 digits) + + Called Party No. (Maximum 26 digits)To set a pause into the Stored No., enter “C” (Fixed Pause=1.5 seconds) or “D” (Programmable Pause specified by CM41 Y=0>38) after desired digits.NONE : No data

Assign the station name to be displayed to each Memory Slot number, by character codes or character.

•(1)

(2)




Page A-2

•(1)

(2)

Y=2XX YY ZXX: 00-19: 1000-Slot Memory Block No.YY: 00-99: 10-Slot Memory Block No.Z : 0-9: Memory Parcel No.XX...XX: Station Name Character by

PCPro/CAT (Maximum 16 characters)

NONE : No data

C

CM74

,

END

1-185 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1003.fm

DIAL CONVERSION

DIAL CONVERSION

PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the type of telephone set to DTMF stations. This data assignment is not required for Multiline Terminal stations.

•(1)(2)

Y=00X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.2: DTMF Telephone set

For a DP trunk, assign the type of signaling for Outgoing and Bothway trunk routes to DP.

•(1)(2)

Y=00100-63: Trunk Route No.

<Incoming> <Outgoing>2: DP DP

Specify the DP Sender characteristics to match the Central Office.

•(1)(2)

Y=023 DP Sender Inter Digital Pause 00-63: Trunk Route No.0 : 300 ms. 1 : 400 ms. 2 : 500 ms. 3 : 600 ms. 4 : 700 ms. 5 : 900 ms. 6 : 1100 ms. 7 : 800 ms.

•(1)(2)

Y=025 DP Sender Make Ratio00-63: Trunk Route No.0 : 39 %1 : 33 %

For a DTMF trunk, assign the type of signaling for Outgoing and Bothway trunk routes to DTMF.

•(1)(2)


<Incoming> <Outgoing>7 : DTMF/DP DTMF

START

CM12

CM35

BLADE RESET

BLADE RESET

BLADE RESET

A

1-186 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1003.fm

DIAL CONVERSION

DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify the DTMF Sender characteristics to match the Central Office.

•(1)(2)

Y=024 DTMF Inter Digital Pause00-63: Trunk Route No.0 : 32 ms. 1 : 64 ms. 2 : 80 ms. 3 : 96 ms. 4 : 160 ms. 5 : 192 ms. 6 : 240 ms. 7 : 128 ms.

•(1)(2)

Y=026 DTMF Sender Signal Width00-63: Trunk Route No.0 : 64 ms.1 : 128 ms.

•(1)(2)

Y=046 DP/DTMF Sender Release Timing 00-63: Trunk Route No.0 : 2 seconds1 : 4 seconds2 : 6 seconds3 : 8 seconds4 : 12 seconds5 : 14 seconds6 : 16 seconds7 : 10 seconds

Assign whether “*” or “#” from a DTMF Tele-phone is used as a Switch Hook Flash while hearing Busy Tone.

(1)(2)

050: * is used as Switch Hook Flash0: Effective

(1)(2)

051: # is used as Switch Hook Flash0: Effective

A

CM35

CM08

END

1-187 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1003.fm

DIRECT DIGITAL INTERFACESYSTEM OUTLINE

DIRECT DIGITAL INTERFACESYSTEM OUTLINEThe PBX is equipped with Direct Digital Interface which can be interfaced with a Tie Line or Public Net-work of

• 24-channel PCM Digital Line (1.544 MHz)

To add a Direct Digital Interface to the system, it is necessary to install a DTI (Digital Trunk Interface)blade (CD-PRTA). Figure below shows the system outline of the Direct Digital Interface of the PBX.

System Outline of Direct Digital Interface

TDSW24 CH 24 CHANNEL PCM

DIGITAL LINE

CLOCK SIGNAL

PLO: PHASE LOCKED

OSCILLATOR

DTI : 24 CHANNEL

DIGITAL TRUNK

INTERFACE

DTI

CPU(PLO)

CPU(PLO)

DTIDIGITAL

PBX

1-188 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1003.fm

DIRECT DIGITAL INTERFACEDTI

DTIThe Digital Trunk Interface (DTI) interfaces the PBX directly to a 24-channel PCM transmission line. TheDTI has the following functions.

• Unipolar/Bipolar Conversion (AMI Format)• Signaling Insertion/Extraction• Alarm Detection/Insertion• Loopback Test (Local Loopback)• Cyclic Redundancy Checking (based on ITU-T Rec. G704)

For connection of a DTI and transmission line, twisted-pair cables can be used.

1-189 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1003.fm

DIRECT DIGITAL INTERFACEPLO

PLOThe PLO (Phase Locked Oscillator) equipped on the CPU blade is responsible to synchronize the systemwith the digital network clock.

When the PBX is a clock receiver office, the PLO generates the clock signals according to the source clockreceived from the source office within the network. The source clock signals are extracted at DTI bladesand supplied to the PLO. Two clock routes are available: one is the route 0 from the source office and theother is a standby route 1 from a sub-source office. When no clock signals arrive from either route 0 orroute 1 due to a transmission line failure, the PLO keeps generating the clock signals at the frequency ofthe last source clock. The PLO can receive different frequency of source clocks from route 0 and route 1.

Figure below shows an example of clock supply route when the system is a receiver office.

Clock Supply Route

PLO

TDSW

SOURCE OFFICE

~

SOURCECLOCK

RECEIVER OFFICE

PBX

DTI

DTI

TDSW

RECEIVER OFFICE

DTI

DTI

DTI

TDSW

SUB-SOURCE OFFICE

PLO

DTI

DTI1

DTI0DTI

DTI

PLO

PLO: DIRECTION OF CLOCK

SIGNAL SUPPLY

TDSW

1-190 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1003.fm

DIRECT DIGITAL INTERFACESYSTEM CAPACITY

SYSTEM CAPACITY

System Capacity for Direct Digital Interface

DESCRIPTION CAPACITY

DTI Blade 8

DTI Trunk 192

DTI Trunk Route 64

Ports per DTI Blade 24

1-191 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1003.fm

DIRECT DIGITAL INTERFACEHARDWARE REQUIRED

HARDWARE REQUIREDDTI bladeCPU (Internal PLO) blade

1-192 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1003.fm

DIRECT DIGITAL INTERFACETIME SLOT ALLOCATION

TIME SLOT ALLOCATIONOn each DTI blade, the system recognizes the lowest and highest channel numbers to which trunk numbershave been assigned, and allocates time slots to all the channels between them. If trunk numbers are notassigned to consecutive channels, the system allocates time slots to channels not assigned.

For example, as shown below, even when Channel 1 through Channel 10 have been assigned by the systemdata programming (CM10 Y=00) except for Channel 5, the system allocates a total of 10 time slots for allten channels. Therefore, to avoid unnecessary allocation of time slots, it is recommended that consecutivechannels be assigned on each DTI blade.

Time Slot Allocation for DTI

DXXX

DXXX

DXXX

NONE

DXXX

NONE

DXXX

1

CH0

10

9

6

4

5

HIGHEST CHANNEL

10 TIME SLOTS ARE

ALLOCATED EVEN

WHEN CH5 IS NOT

ASSIGNED.

LOWEST CHANNEL

1-193 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1003.fm

DIRECT DIGITAL INTERFACEDTI SPECIFICATIONS

DTI SPECIFICATIONS

Transmission Characteristics


* AMI : Alternate Mark InversionZCS : Zero Code SuppressionB8ZS: Bipolar Eight Zero Substitution

CHARACTERISTICS

(1) Output• Line Rate• Line Code • Line Impedance• Pulse Amplitude (Base to Peak)• Pulse Width

(2) Input• Line Rate• Pulse Amplitude (Base to Peak)• Frame Synchronization Pattern• Input Jitter• Wander• Cable Length from PBX to CSU

1.544 Mbps ±50 ppmAMI with ZCS/B8ZS*100 Ω3 volts ±0.6 volts324 ns ±30 ns

1.544 Mbps ±200 bps (130 ppm)1.5 volts-3 volts100011011100ITU-T Fig. 1/G743+138UI, –193UI or –138UI, +193UIMaximum 200 m (655 ft.)[with 0.6 φ (22 ABAM) twisted-pair cable]

1-194 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1003.fm


Frame Configuration of DTI

According to the AT&T Specifications for 24-channel transmission, there are two types of frame config-urations: 12-Multi Frame (D4) and 24-Multi Frame (ESF).

1. 12-Multi FrameThis configuration has 12-Multi Frames, and each Multi Frame has a 24-channel PCM signal (8 bits/channel) and a S bit (Super Frame Bit). Figure below shows the frame configuration, and Table innext page shows frame bit assignment.

DTI Frame Configuration (12-Multi Frame)

SCH1 CH2 CH3 CH24

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

FRAME 1 FRAME 2 FRAME 3 FRAME 12

125 µs

S: SUPERFRAME BIT

1-195 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1003.fm


12-Multi Frame Bit Assignment

* The S-bit is the first bit in each frame.* Frames are repeated in the order shown above.* Frames 6 and 12 become signal frames.

FRAMENo.

S BIT BIT No. OF EACH CHANNEL(CH1-CH24)

SIGNALCHANNELTERMINAL

SYNCHRONIZATION(FT)

SIGNALSYNCHRONIZATION

(FS)

INFORMATIONSIGNAL BIT

CONTROLSIGNAL BIT

1 1 1-8

2 0 1-8

3 0 1-8

4 0 1-8

5 1 1-8

6 1 1-7 8 A

7 0 1-8

8 1 1-8

9 1 1-8

10 1 1-8

11 0 1-8

12 0 1-7 8 B

1-196 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1003.fm


2. 24-Multi FrameThis configuration has 24-Multi Frames and each Multi Frame has a 24-Channel PCM signal (8 bits/channel) and a S bit (Super Frame Bit). Figure below shows the frame configuration, and Table innext page shows frame bit assignment.


SCH1 CH2 CH3 CH24

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8


125 µs

S: SUPERFRAME BIT

1-197 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1003.fm



* The S-bit is the first bit in each frame.* Frames are repeated in the order shown above.* Frames 6, 12, 18 and 24 become signal frames.* “m” in the “4 Kbps Data Link” column means that the frame is usually assigned to 1.

FRAMENo.

S BIT BIT No. OF EACH CHANNEL(CH1-CH24) SIGNAL

CHANNELFRAMESYNCHRONIZATION

4 KbpsDATA LINK CRC INFORMATION

SIGNAL BITCONTROL

SIGNAL BIT

1 m 1-8

2 CB1 1-8

3 m 1-8

4 0 1-8

5 m 1-8

6 CB2 1-7 8 A

7 m 1-8

8 0 1-8

9 m 1-8

10 CB3 1-8

11 m 1-8

12 1 1-7 8 B

13 m 1-8

14 CB4 1-8

15 m 1-8

16 0 1-8

17 m 1-8

18 CB5 1-7 8 C

19 m 1-8

20 1 1-8

21 m 1-8

22 CB6 1-8

23 m 1-8

24 1 1-7 8 D

1-198 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1003.fm


PROGRAMMING

(1) Tie Line Interface

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign a Unit and Slot number to the DTI blade.

NOTE: When PRT blade is used as a DTI blade for the first time, the PRI firm-ware program needs to be changed to the DTI firmware program by ex-ecuting the blade firmware program update.For details, refer to the PC Pro-gramming Manual.

•(1)

(2)

Y=0XX ZZXX: 01-50: Unit No.ZZ : 01-18: Slot No.43: DTI blade

Assign a Trunk blade number to the DTI blade. •(1)

(2)

Y=1XX ZZXX: 01-50: Unit No.ZZ : 01-18: Slot No.000-127: Trunk blade No.

Assign trunk numbers to Physical Port number on the DTI blade.

•(1)

(2)

Y=00XX YY ZZ: Physical Port No.XX: 01-50: Unit No.YY: 01-18: Slot No.ZZ : 01-32: Circuit No.D000-D511: Trunk No.

Assign the destination to receive the synchro-nous signal for DTI.

NOTE: Assign this data when the system is a slave office and receives the check synchronization signal from the master office.This data assignment is not required when the office is the master office.

•(1)

(2)

Y=10-5901: First priority02: Second priority01-18: Slot No.

START

CM05

BLADE RESET

BLADE RESET

CM10

BLADE RESET

CM04

BLADE RESET

A

1-199 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1003.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the necessary functions to the DTI blade.

After entering the data, execute by CMXX Y=XX for DTI initialization.

NOTE: The following table shows the rela-tionship between CMAA Y=01 and CMAA Y=02.

•(1)

(2)

Y=00 Data Mode000-127: Trunk blade No. assigned by

CM05 Y=10: Based on AT&T Specifications

•(1)

(2)

Y=01 Frame Configuration000-127: Trunk blade No. assigned by

CM05 Y=10 : 12-Multi Frame (D4)1 : 24-Multi Frame (ESF)

•(1)

(2)

Y=02 Zero Code Suppression000-127: Trunk blade No. assigned by

CM05 Y=10 : Available (Non Transparent)1 : Not available (Transparent)

•(1)

(2)

Y=03000-127: Trunk blade No. assigned by

CM05 Y=17 : Associated Channel Interoffice

Signaling

Select the cable length. •(1)

(2)


CM05 Y=10 : 0-40 m (0-131.2 ft)1 : 41-81 m (134.5-265.7 ft)2 : 82-122 m (269.0-400.2 ft)3 : 123-162 m (403.4-531.4 ft)4 : 163-200 m (534.6-656 ft)7 : 0-40 m (0-131.2 ft)

Assign a trunk route number for tie line inter-face to each DTI.

NOTE: The DTI route must be separated from any analog trunk route.

•(1)

(2)

Y=00000-511: Trunk No. assigned by CM10


Assign trunk route data to each DTI route. •

(1)(2)

Y=000 Kind of Trunk Route

00-63: Trunk Route No.04: Tie line trunk

A

CMAA

BLADE RESET

[ ]: Indicates 2nd data

CMAA Y=01 (FRAME

CONFIGURATION)

CMAA Y=02 (ZERO CODE

SUPPRES-SION)

SIGNALING

24-Multi Frame [1] B8ZS

12-Multi Frame [0]Not available

[1]Transparent

Available [0] B7

CM30

BLADE RESET

CM35BLADE RESET

B

1-200 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1003.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA


(1)(2)

Y=001 Dialing signal type

00-63: Trunk Route No.7 : DP/DTMF (Incoming)

DTMF (Outgoing)

•(1)(2)

Y=004 Answer signal from distant office00-63: Trunk Route No.2: Answer signal arrives

•(1)(2)

Y=005 Release signal from distant office00-63: Trunk Route No.1 : Release signal arrives

•

(1)(2)


00-63: Trunk Route No.03: Wink Start04: Delay Dial05: Immediate Start06: 2nd DT/Timing Start-Tie line

•

(1)(2)

Y=020 Sender start condition

00-63: Trunk Route No.00 : Wink Start01 : Delay Dial02 : Ground Start15 : Timing Start


•(1)(2)



15: -1 dB16: 0 dB17: +1 dB



B

CM35BLADE RESET

BLADE RESET

BLADE RESET

CM35

~~

C

1-201 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1003.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA


•(1)(2)



15: -1 dB16: 0 dB17: +1 dB




•(1)

(2)








C

CM35

~~

CM36

~~

D

1-202 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1003.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify the various timing, if required. •(1)

(2)

Y=321: Release Signal Detect Timing on DTI

trunk01-98: 200-19600 ms.

(200 ms. increments)99 : 25500 ms.

If no data is set, the default setting is 80 ms.

•(1)

(2)

Y=320: Answer Signal Detect Timing on DTI

trunk01-98: 8-784 ms. (8 ms. increments)99 : 1020 ms.


•(1)

(2)

Y=323: DTI Wink signal sending time for con-

nection check01-98: 16-1568 ms. (16 ms. increments)99 : 2040 ms.


•(1)(2)

Y=324: DTI Trunk Wink/Delay Signal Timeout01-98: 16-1568 ms. (16 ms. increments)99 : 2040 ms.


Assign an access code for the DTI trunk route.

NOTE: The Least Cost Routing or Route Advance feature is available for call origination via the DTI.Refer to the following feature pro-gramming.LEAST COST ROUTING-3/6 DIGIT Page 1-320ROUTE ADVANCE

Page 1-478

•(1)(2)

Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3X-XXXX: Access Code100-163: Trunk Route 00-63

D

CM41BLADE RESET

CM20

END

JULY/18/2008

1-203 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1003.fm


• When DTI blade is mounted, reassignment of the Highway Channel (128ch) allocation is requiredto each physical slot (slot1-6/7-12/13-18). For the details of Highway Channel reassignment, referto “CMF7 Y=9” in Command Manual.

DESCRIPTION DATA

Reassign Highway Channel. •(1)

(2)

Y=9XX YYXX: 01-50: Unit No.YY: 01-18: Slot No.XX YYXX: 01-50: Unit No.YY: 01-18: Slot No.

Execute the blade reset for all slots of the Unit accommodated the DTI blade.

•(1)

(2)


START

CMF7

CME0

END

JULY/18/2008

1-204 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1003.fm


(2) C.O. Line Interface

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign a Unit and Slot number to the DTI blade.

NOTE: When PRT blade is used as a DTI blade for the first time, the PRI firm-ware program need to be changed to the DTI firmware program by exe-cuting the blade firmware program update.For details, refer to the PC Pro-gramming Manual.

•(1)

(2)

Y=0XX ZZXX: 01-50: Unit No.ZZ : 01-18: Slot No.43: DTI blade

Assign a Trunk blade number to the DTI blade. •(1)

(2)


Assign trunk numbers to Physical Port number on the DTI blade.

•(1)

(2)


Assign the destination to receive the synchro-nous signal for DTI.

NOTE: Assign this data when the system is a slave office and receives the clock synchronization signal from the master office.This data assignment is not required when the office is the master office.

•(1)

(2)


START

CM05

BLADE RESET

BLADE RESET

CM10

BLADE RESET

CM04

BLADE RESET

A

JULY/18/2008

1-205 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1003.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the necessary functions to the DTI blade.

NOTE: The following table shows the relationship between CMAA Y=01 and CMAA Y=02.

•(1)

(2)

Y=00 Data Mode000-127: Trunk blade No. assigned by

CM05 Y=10: Based on AT&T Specifications

•(1)

(2)

Y=01 Frame Configuration000-127: Trunk blade No. assigned by

CM05 Y=10 : 12-Multi Frame (D4)1 : 24-Multi Frame (ESF)

•(1)

(2)


CM05 Y=10 : Available (Non Transparent)1 : Not available (Transparent)

Select the cable length. •(1)

(2)


CM05 Y=10 : 0-40 m (0-131.2 ft)1 : 41-81 m (134.5-265.7 ft)2 : 82-122 m (269.0-400.2 ft)3 : 123-162 m (403.4-531.4 ft)4 : 163-200 m (534.6-656 ft)7 : 0-40 m (0-131.2 ft)

A

CMAA

BLADE RESET


CMAA Y=01 (FRAME

CONFIGURATION)


SUPPRES-SION)

SIGNALING


12-Multi Frame [0]Not available

[1]Transparent

Available [0] B7

B

JULY/18/2008

1-206 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1003.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign a trunk route number for C.O. line Interface to each DTI.

NOTE: The DTI route must be different than any analog trunk route.

•(1)

(2)



Specify the terminating system in Day Mode, Night Mode, Mode A, or Mode B for incoming C.O. calls.

••••

(1)

(2)

Y=02 Day ModeY=03 Night ModeY=40 Mode AY=41 Mode B000-511: Trunk No. assigned by CM10

Y=0002 : Trunk-Direct Appearances03 : Trunk-Direct Appearances + TAS04 : Direct-In Termination08 : Dial-in09 : Automated Attendant10 : Attendant Console + TAS11 : Attendant Console + Trunk-Direct

Appearances12 : Attendant Console + Trunk-Direct

Appearances + TAS13 : TAS14 : Attendant Console16 : DISA18 : ISDN Indial31 : DID, Tie Line and any call which is

not handled by PBX

B

CM30

BLADE RESET

C

1-207 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1003.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA


(1)(2)


00-63: Trunk Route No.00: DDD (C.O./DID) trunk01: FX trunk02: WATS trunk03: CCSA trunk04: Tie line trunk

•

(1)(2)

Y=001 Dialing signal type

00-63: Trunk Route No.Incoming Outgoing

2 : DP DP4 : DTMF DTMF7 : DP/DTMF DTMF

•

(1)(2)

Y=004Answer signal from distant office00-63: Trunk Route No.2 : Answer signal arrives7 : Answer signal does not arrive

•

(1)(2)

Y=005Release signal from distant office00-63: Trunk Route No.0 : Release signal does not arrive (Loop

Start C.O. line without Release signal)1 : Release signal arrives (Ground Start/

Loop Start with Release signal)

•

(1)(2)


00-63: Trunk Route No.01 : Ring Down (Ground Start C.O. line)15 : Ring Down (Loop Start C.O. line)

•

(1)(2)


00-63: Trunk Route No.02 : Ground Start15 : Timing Start (Loop Start)

C

CM35BLADE RESET

BLADE RESET

BLADE RESET

BLADE RESET

D

1-208 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1003.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify the various timing for the DTI trunk, if required.

•(1)(2)

Y=305: Release Signal Detect Timing01-15: 64-960 ms. (64 ms. increments)


•(1)(2)

Y=306: Answer Signal Detect Timing01-15: 64-960 ms. (64 ms. increments)


•(1)(2)

Y=307: Ringing Signal Detect Time out01-15: 512-7680 ms. (512 ms. increments)


•(1)(2)

Y=308: Guard Timing of DTI release01-15: 128-1920 ms. (128 ms. increments)


•(1)(2)

Y=309: Hooking Signal sending timing01-15: 64-960 ms. (64 ms. increments)


•(1)

(2)

Y=322: Ring Signal Detect Timing for DTI

Trunk01-98: 16-1568 ms. (16 ms. increments)99 : 2040 ms.


D

CM41

BLADE RESET

E

1-209 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1003.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

•(1)

(2)

Y=310: Ground Start Release (Loop off) Detect

Timing01-15: 64-960 ms. (64 ms. increments)


•(1)

(2)

Y=311: Ground Start Release (Ground off)

Detect Timing01-15: 64-960 ms. (64 ms. increments)


•(1)

(2)

Y=312: Ground Start (Return Ground) Detect

Time out01-15: 1-15 seconds (1 second increments)

If no data is set, the default setting is 7 seconds.

Assign an access code for the DTI trunk route used as a C.O. line interface.

NOTE: The Least Cost Routing or Route Advance feature is also available for call origination via the DTI.Refer to the following feature pro-gramming.LEAST COST ROUTING-3/6 DIGIT Page 1-320ROUTE ADVANCE

Page 1-478

•(1)(2)

Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3X-XXXX: Access Code100-163: Trunk Route 00-63

E

CM41

CM20

END

1-210 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1003.fm


• When DTI blade is mounted, reassignment of the Highway Channel (128ch) allocation is requiredto each physical slot (slot1-6/7-12/13-18). For the details of Highway Channel reassignment, referto “CMF7 Y=9” in Command Manual.

DESCRIPTION DATA


(2)


Execute the blade reset for all slots of the Unit accommodated the DTI blade.

•(1)

(2)


START

CMF7

CME0

END

JULY/18/2008

1-211 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1004.fm

DIRECT INWARD DIALING (DID)


PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the ring cadence on a Direct Inward Di-aling.

(1)(2)

1800 : 0.4 seconds ON-0.2 seconds OFF-0.4

seconds ON-2 seconds OFF[For North America]Special Ringing(See Interval of Ringing Tones for Multiline Terminal by CM08>392/CM08>396/CM08>397.

Page 1-253 )[For EU]As per CM08>392-Pattern 2[For other than North America/ EU]

1 : As per CM35 Y=033 or CM76 Y=22

Assign a Unit and Slot number to the Direct Inward Dialing blade.

•(1)

(2)

Y=0XX ZZXX: 01-50: Unit No.ZZ : 01-18: Slot No.32: Direct Inward Dialing blade

Assign the trunk numbers to the requiredPhysical Port number.

•(1)

(2)


Assign the data for DID to the trunk numbers assigned by CM10 Y=00.

•

(1)(2)

Y=00 Trunk Route Allocation

000-511: Trunk No.00-63: Trunk Route No.

•(1)(2)

Y=01 Tenant Allocation000-511: Trunk No.00-63: Tenant No. 01 : Tenant No.

START

CM08

CM05

BLADE RESET

CM10

CM30BLADE RESET

A

JULY/18/2008

1-212 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1004.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA


••••

(1)(2)

Y=02 Terminating System in Day Mode Y=03 Terminating System in Night Mode Y=40 Terminating System in Mode AY=41 Terminating System in Mode B000-511: Trunk No.31 : DID, Tie Line and any call which is


Assign the data for DID to the trunk routes as-signed by CM30 Y=00.

•

(1)(2)


00-63: Trunk Route No. 00: DID trunk

•(1)(2)

Y=002 Call direction00-63: Trunk Route No. 1: Incoming trunk

•(1)(2)

Y=005 Release Signal from distant office00-63: Trunk Route No.1 : Release Signal arrives

•

(1)(2)


00-63: Trunk Route No.06: 2nd DT/Timing Start-Tie Line

NOTE: When 2nd data is set to “1”, the Trunk ID number assigned by CM30 Y=19 is displayed.

•

(1)(2)

Y=075 DID incoming LDN display on Multiline Terminal/DESKCON00-63: Trunk Route No.0 : Available1 : Not available NOTE

Assign the function of each Voice Response System, if needed.

•(1)(2)

Y=00000-007: Built-in VRS on CPU blade0D00: Announcement Service when the

called station does not answer the DID/Tie Line call

0E00: Announcement Service when the DID/Tie Line call terminates to the busy station

A

CM30

CM35BLADE RESET

BLADE RESET

CM49

B

1-213 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1004.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the destination of DID call transferred when the station is busy/unassigned/no an-swer.

NOTE: When Announcement Service is provided for No Answer (CM51 Y=00) or Busy (CM51 Y=03), see ANNOUNCEMENT SERVICE.

Page 1-12When Announcement Service is provided for unassigned (CM51 Y=06), see INTERCEPT ANNOUNCEMENT.

Page 1-309

•••

(1)(2)

Y=00 No AnswerY=03 BusyY=06 Unassigned00-63: Tenant No. Destination:X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.E000 : Attendant ConsoleEB000-EB007 : Voice Response System

No. NOTE

B

CM51

END

1-214 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1004.fm


To assign the destination tenant for Day/Night Mode and Mode A/B, when DID call terminates(When CM76 Y=01/02/03/04 is set to “D13” (TAS)):

To assign the destination tenant for Day/Night Mode and Mode A/B, when DID call terminates(When CM76 Y=01/02/03/04 is set to “station number to be terminated”):

HARDWARE REQUIRED

Direct Inward Dialing blade (DID Trunk)

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the tenant for Day/Night Mode and Mode A/B per station number received on DID call.

••••

(1)

(2)

Y=05 Day ModeY=06 Night ModeY=07 Mode AY=08 Mode B000-999: Number Conversion Block No.

assigned by CM76 Y=00/9000-63: Trunk Tenant No.

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign a tenant number to each station as-signed by CM76 Y=01/02/03/04.

•(1)

(2)

Y=04 X-XXXXXXXX: Station No. assigned by

CM76 Y=01/02/03/04 00-63: Tenant No.01 : Tenant No.

Assign the terminating station tenant for each DID number during Day/Night Mode and Mode A/B.

••••

(1)

(2)


assigned by CM76 Y=00/9000-63 : Station Tenant No.NONE : Trunk Tenant

START

CM76

END

START

CM12

CM76

END

1-215 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1004.fm

DIRECT INWARD DIALING (DID)DID CALL WAITING

DID CALL WAITING

PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify the Camp-On tone sent to a busy sta-tion by Camp-On Call Waiting Method.

(1)(2)

367 0 : Every 4 seconds1 : Only once

Assign Service Restriction Class A for the Call Waiting feature to the required stations.

•(1)(2)


Allow Call Waiting Answer from called side in Service Restriction Class A assigned by CM12 Y=02.

•

(1)

(2)

Y=044 Call Waiting Answer from called side00-15: Service Restriction Class A as-


Assign the data for DID Call Waiting to the trunk routes assigned by CM30.

•(1)(2)

Y=059 Call Waiting for DID call00-63: Trunk Route No.0: To provide

Specify Call Waiting for DID call per incom-ing LDN number, if required.

NOTE: CM76 Y=10 is effective when the 2nd data of CM35 Y=018 is “0” (Received Digits Conversion is to be provided).

•(1)

(2)


assigned by CM76 Y=00/900 : Restricted1 : Allow

START

CM08

CM12

CM15

CM35

CM76

END

1-216 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1004.fm

DIRECT INWARD DIALING (DID)DID DIGIT CONVERSION

DID DIGIT CONVERSION

PROGRMMING SUMMARY FOR DID DIGIT CONVERSION

(1) Specify whether the DID Digit Conversion is provided for each trunk route by CM35 Y=018.

(2) To provide the DID Digit Conversion, set the following data.

STEP1: Specify the Development Table for DID Digit Conversion to each trunk route by CM35 Y=170.

STEP2: Assign the number of digits to be received on DID and the number of digits to be converted on DID to each trunk route/each Development Table by CM35 Y=012, 78/CM35 Y=171, 172.

STEP3: Set the Number Conversion Block number for each Development Table by CM76 Y=00, 90.

STEP4: Assign the data for interpreting the received digits to each Number Conversion Block number by CM76 Y=01-04.

DID Digit Conversion Programming Procedure

Received number=Station number

DID stationCM35 Y=018

0: To provide DID Digit Conversion

CM35 Y=170

CM35 Y=012

Number of

digits to be

received:

1-4 digits

CM35 Y=078

Number of

digits to be

converted:

2-4 digits

CM76 Y=00

DID number

Number

Conversion

Block number

0: Development

Table 1

CM35 Y=172

Number of

digits to be

received:

1-14 digits

CM35 Y=171

Number of

digits to be

converted:

1-8 digits

CM76 Y=90

DID number

Number

Conversion

Block number

1 : Not provided DID Digit Conversion

DID station

3 : Development

Table 0

CM76

Y=01-04

The data setting

for interpreting

the digits re-

ceived to each

Number Con-

version Block

number

1-217 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1004.fm


PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION DATA

Provide DID Digit Conversion to the trunk route number assigned by CM30 Y=00.

•(1)(2)

Y=018 00-63: Trunk Route No.0: To provide

Specify the Development Table for DID Digit Conversion.

NOTE: When using the Development Table 1, see SAMPLE DATA PROGRAMMING.

Page 1-219

•(1)(2)

Y=17000-63: Trunk Route No.0 : Development Table 13 : Development Table 0

Specify the number of digits to be received on DID for Development Table 0.

•(1)(2)

Y=01200-63: Trunk Route No.Number of digits0 : 1 digit1 : 2 digits2 : 3 digits3 : 4 digits

Specify the number of digits to be converted on DID for Development Table 0.

•(1)(2)

Y=07800-63: Trunk Route No.0 : Leading 2-4 digits1 : All digits of DID number are convert-

ed by CM76


•(1)(2)

Y=17200-63: Trunk Route No.Number of digits 01-14: 1-14 digits15 : 4 digits

Specify the number of digits to be converted on DID for Development Table 1.

•(1)(2)

Y=17100-63: Trunk Route No.01-08: 1-8 digits15 : 4 digits

START

CM35

A

1-218 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1004.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA


•(1)(2)

Y=00X-XXXX: DID No.000-999: Number Conversion Block No.


•(1)(2)

Y=90X-XXXXXXXX: DID No.000-999: Number Conversion Block No.

Assign the data for interpreting the digits re-ceived.

••••

(1)

(2)

Y=01 Day Mode Y=02 Night Mode Y=03 Mode AY=04 Mode B000-999: Number Conversion Block No.

assigned by CM76 Y=00/90X-XXXXXXXX: Station No. to be termi-

natedDXX: Change Terminating System to:





A

CM76

END

1-219 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1004.fm


SAMPLE DATA PROGRAMMING

< Example >

• The PBX provides DID lines of multiple telecommunication companies (company A, company B),and when the PBX receives the calls that have the same lower 4 digits of DID number from eachtelecommunication company, the calls are terminated to each station which have been specified.

• DID No. : X XXX 084-1234 (DID number of company A): X XXX 085-1234 (DID number of company B)

• Trunk Route No.: 00 (for DID line of company A): 01 (for DID line of company B)

• Station No. : 2000 (for DID line of company A) : 3000 (for DID line of company B)

PSTN

DID number of company A

: X XXX 084-1234

DID number of company B

: X XXX 085-1234

Trunk Route: 00

Trunk Route: 01

SV8300

Station No.2000

The lower 5 digits in DID num-

bers of company A and compa-

ny B are converted by Develop-

ment Table 1.

Station No.3000

1-220 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1004.fm



COMMAND 1st DATA 2nd DATA REMARKSCM35 Y=018 00 0 Provide DID Digit Conversion to the trunk route

number 00.CM35 Y=018 01 0 Provide DID Digit Conversion to the trunk route

number 01.CM35 Y=170 00 0 Specify the Development Table 1 for DID digit con-

version to the trunk route number 00.CM35 Y=170 01 0 Specify the Development Table 1 for DID digit con-

version to the trunk route number 01.CM35 Y=172 00 07 Specify the number of digits to be received on DID

for Development Table1 as 7 digits to trunk route number 00.

CM35 Y=172 01 07 Specify the number of digits to be received on DID for Development Table1 as 7 digits to the trunk route number 01.

CM35 Y=171 00 05 Specify the number of digits to be converted on DID for Development Table1 as 5 digits to the trunk route number 00.

CM35 Y=171 01 05 Specify the number of digits to be converted on DID for Development Table1 as 5 digits to the trunk route number 01.

CM76 Y=90 41234 000 Assign the Number Conversion Block number 000 to the DID number 41234.

CM76 Y=90 51234 001 Assign the Number Conversion Block number 001 to the DID number 51234.

CM76 Y=01 000 2000 Assign the station number 2000 to the Number Con-version Block number 000.

CM76 Y=01 001 3000 Assign the station number 3000 to the Number Con-version Block number 001.

1-221 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1004.fm

DIRECT INWARD DIALING (DID)DID NAME DISPLAY

DID NAME DISPLAY

PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the DID name to the Number Conver-sion Block number assigned by CM76 Y=00/90 with character or character code.

NOTE: Number Conversion Block No. 200-999 cannot be used for this assign-ment.

•(1)

(2)


assigned by CM76 Y=00/90XX...XX: Character (Maximum 16 charac-

ters)X: 0-9, A-Z

•(1)

(2)


assigned by CM76 Y=00/9020-7F: Character Code (Maximum 32 dig-

its, 16 characters)See APPENDIX A: Character Code Table.

Page A-2

Assign Service Restriction Class A to the re-quired stations.

•(1)(2)


START

CM76

CM12

A

1-222 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1004.fm

DIRECT INWARD DIALING (DID)DID NAME DISPLAY

DESCRIPTION DATA

Allow Calling Name Display-PS in Service Restriction Class A assigned by CM12 Y=02.

•(1)

(2)



Provide Calling Name Display for trunk in-coming calls in Service Restriction Class A as-signed by CM12 Y=02.

•(1)

(2)

Y=136 00-15: Service Restriction Class A as-

signed by CM12 Y=021 : Calling Name Display

Provide the Multiline Terminal with a select key of Calling Number Display or Calling Name Display, if required.

•(1)(2)

Y=00My Line No. + + Key No.F1099: Select Key of Calling Number Dis-


Provide the DESKCON with a select key of Calling Number Display or Calling Name Dis-play, if required.

•(1)

(2)

Y=00ATTCON No. (E000-E007) + + Key No.F6122: Select Key of Calling Number Dis-


Provide the Multiline Terminal with a Caller ID Display key for displaying the Caller ID, if required.

•(1)(2)


A

CM15

CM90,

,

,

END

1-223 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1004.fm

DIRECT INWARD SYSTEM ACCESS (DISA)


PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION DATA

Provide the system with the ID code on DISA. (1)(2)

217 0 : To provide (CPU)1 : Not provided (OAI [ACF])

Assign the ring cadence on a DISA. (1)(2)

180 0 : 0.4 seconds ON-0.2 seconds OFF-0.4



1 : As per CM35 Y=033

Assign the data for DISA to the required trunks.

••••

(1)(2)

Y=02 Terminating System in Day Mode Y=03 Terminating System in Night Mode Y=40 Terminating System in Mode AY=41 Terminating System in Mode B000-511: Trunk No.16: DISA

•

•

(1)(2)

Y=30 Handling of DISA destination in Day ModeY=31 Handling of busy/not available DISA destination in Night Mode000-511: Trunk No.00 : C.O. line release 01 : Forwarded to TAS indicator03 : Forwarded to Attendant Console04 : Forwarded to DIT station assigned

by CM30 Y=04, 0506 : DT connection for redial08 : C.O. line release 15 : C.O. line release

START

CM08

CM30

A

JULY/18/2008

1-224 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1004.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

When providing DISA to the DID calls, assign the data for converting the received digits to DISA. See DID DIGIT CONVERSION.

Page 1-216

••••

(1)

(2)


assigned by CM76 Y=00/90D16: DISA

Assign the ID Code Development number for DISA.

•(1)(2)

Y=A020-9: ID Code Development No. 00-09

NOTE: CM2A Y=00-09 is determined by this data.

Assign the ID Code for DISA. •(1)

(2)

Y=00-09 ID Code Development No. 00-09X-XX...XX (Maximum 16 digits): ID Code for DISA0000-2999: ID Code Pattern No.


•(1)(2)

Y=110000-2999: ID Code Pattern No.1 : Unrestricted (RCA)2 : Non-Restricted-1 (RCB)3 : Non-Restricted-2 (RCC)4 : Semi-Restricted-1 (RCD) 5 : Semi-Restricted-2 (RCE) 6 : Restricted-1 (RCF)7 : Restricted-2 (RCG)8 : Fully-Restricted (RCH)

Assign the desired Service Restriction Class A to each ID Code Pattern number. The features available in each class are assigned by CM15.

•(1)(2)


Assign the desired Service Restriction Class B to each ID Code Pattern number. The features available in each class are assigned by CM15.

•(1)(2)


A

CM76

CM2A

B

1-225 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1004.fm


NOTE: Approximately 3000 DISA codes including Authorization Codes and Forced Account Codes can be defined.

Number of the codes varies with the number of digits assigned to each code.For details, refer to “BUSINESS/HOTEL/DATA FEATURES AND SPECIFICATIONS”.

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the desired Service Restriction Class C to each ID Code. The features available in each class are assigned by CM15.

•(1)(2)





2 : Remote Access to System (DISA)3 : Invalidate the ID Code

Specify the maximum number of digits for DISA Code with CPU.

(1)(2)


B

CM2A

CM42

END

1-226 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1004.fm


To access the Voice Response System (VRS) via DISA, add the following programming.

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign Service Restriction Class A for Voice Response System access to the required ID Code Pattern number.

•(1)

(2)

Y=12 0000-2999: ID Code Pattern No. assigned

by CM2A Y=00-0900-15 : Service Restriction Class A

Allow Voice Response System access in Service Restriction Class A assigned by CM2A Y=12.

•(1)

(2)

Y=033 00-15: Service Restriction Class A

assigned by CM2A Y=12 1 : Allow

To record and replay a message from an outside user, assign the Voice Response System access code, respectively.

•(1)(2)

Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3X-XXXX: Access Code A100: RecordA101: Replay

START

CM2A

CM15

CM20

END

1-227 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1004.fm

DIRECT INWARD SYSTEM ACCESS (DISA)CALL FORWARDING SET BY DISA

CALL FORWARDING SET BY DISA

PROGRAMMING

In addition to the DISA programming, do the following programming.

DESCRIPTION DATA


•(1)(2)


Allow Manual Call Forwarding set by DISA in Service Restriction Class A assigned by CM12 Y=02.

•(1)

(2)



Provide the system with the ID Code on DISA. (1)(2)



•(1)(2)


START

CM12

CM15

CM08

CM20

C

Without ID Code entry when digit conversion on DID call is not provided (CM35 Y=018 is set to “1”): Page 1-230

B

Without ID Code entry when digit conversion on DID call is provided (CM35 Y=018 is set to “0”): Page 1-229

A

With ID Code entry: Page 1-228

1-228 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1004.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the ID Code Development number for DISA.

•(1)(2)

Y=A02: DISA Code0-9: ID Code Development No. 00-09

Assign the ID Code for DISA. •(1)

(2)

Y=00-09 ID Code Development No. 00-09X-XX...XX: ID Code for DISA

(Maximum 16 digits)0000-2999: ID Code Pattern No.


Y=100000-2999: ID Code Pattern No.0: Authorization Code/Forced Account

Code/Remote Access to System (DISA)2: Remote Access to System (DISA)

Assign Service Restriction Class A assigned by CM15 Y=134 to the ID Code Pattern num-ber.

•(1)(2)


Specify the setting station of Manual Call For-warding set by DISA, if required.If the station number is set by this command, Call Forward setting is not available for the other stations.

•(1)(2)

Y=160000-2999: ID Code Pattern No.X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.NONE : All stations

A

CM2A

END

1-229 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1004.fm


To abbreviate the ID Code entry when digit conversion on DID call is provided(CM35 Y=018 is set to “0”):

DESCRIPTION DATA

Set the trunk route to use the calling party number as the ID Code for DISA.

•(1)(2)

Y=15500-63: Trunk Route No.0: Available

Assign the ID Code Development number, for Call Forwarding set by DISA.

•(1)(2)

Y=A03: Automatic service setting by DISA0-9: ID Code Development No. 00-09

Assign the calling party number as the ID Code for DISA.

•(1)

(2)

Y=00-09 ID Code Development No. 00-09X-XX...XX: Calling Party No.






•(1)(2)


Set the calling party number to be used as the ID Code for DISA.

•(1)(2)

Y=150000-2999: ID Code Pattern No.0: Available


•(1)(2)


B

CM35

CM2A

END

1-230 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1004.fm


To abbreviate the ID Code entry when digit conversion on DID call is not provided(CM35 Y=018 is set to “1”):

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the Number Conversion Block number to the DID number.

•(1)(2)

Y=00X-XXXX: DID No.000-999: Number Conversion Block No.

000-999

Specify the terminating system as DISA. ••••

(1)

(2)

Y=01 Day ModeY=02 Night Mode Y=03 Mode AY=04 Mode B000-999: Number Conversion Block No.

assigned by CM76 Y=00D16: DISA

Set the calling party number to be used as the ID Code for DISA when the DID number as-signed by CM76 Y=00 is sent.

•(1)

(2)


assigned by CM76 Y=000: Available

Allow the service setting by DISA without di-aling the ID Code.

•(1)

(2)


assigned by CM76 Y=0015 : Service setting without dialing the ID

Code

Assign the ID Code Development number, for Call Forwarding set by DISA.

•(1)(2)

Y=A03: Automatic service setting by DISA0-9: ID Code Development No. 00-09

Assign the calling party number as the ID Code for DISA.

•(1)

(2)

Y=00-09 ID Code Development No. 00-09X-XX...XX: Calling Party No.


C

CM76

CM2A

D

1-231 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1004.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA





•(1)(2)


Set the calling party number to be used as the ID Code for DISA.

•(1)(2)

Y=150000-2999: ID Code Pattern No.0: Available


•(1)(2)


D

CM2A

END

1-232 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1004.fm

DIRECT INWARD TERMINATION (DIT)


PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the data for terminating system in Day Mode/Night Mode/Mode A/Mode B, to each Loop/Ground Start trunk, respectively.

•

(1)(2)

Y=02 Day Mode/03 Night Mode/40 Mode A/41 Mode B

000-511: Trunk No.04: Direct-In Termination

Assign the station number to be terminated by DIT in Day Mode/Night Mode/Mode A/Mode B respectively.

•

(1)(2)

Y=04 Day Mode/05 Night Mode/42 Mode A/43 Mode B

000-511: Trunk No.X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.

Assign the destination to be rerouted when the DIT station is busy/not available in Day Mode and Night Mode respectively.

•(1)(2)

Y=13 Day Mode/14 Night Mode000-511: Trunk No.01 : TAS BUZZER 04 : Attendant Console06 : Automatic Camp-On 15 : Waiting until the DIT station be-

comes idle

Assign the transfer destination for an unan-swered DIT call in Day Mode and Night Mode, respectively.

•(1)(2)

Y=15 Day Mode/16 Night Mode000-511: Trunk No.01 : Attendant Console03 : TAS15 : To be continued DIT

Specify the timing for an unanswered call to a DIT destination.

•(1)(2)

Y=00101-30: 4-120 seconds


START

CM30

CM41

A

1-233 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1004.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the ring cadence on a DIT call. (1)(2)

179 0 : As per CM35 Y=0331 : 0.4 seconds ON-0.2 seconds OFF-0.4



A

CM08

END

JULY/18/2008

1-234 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1004.fm

DIRECT OUTWARD DIALING (DOD)


PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign a Unit and Slot number to the COT/Di-rect Inward Dialing blade.

•(1)

(2)

Y=0XX ZZXX: 01-50: Unit No.ZZ : 01-18: Slot No.30: COT blade32: Direct Inward Dialing blade

Assign the trunk numbers to the requiredPhysical Port number.

•(1)

(2)


Assign the data for Direct Outward Dialing to the trunk number assigned by CM10 Y=00.

•

(1)(2)

Y=00 Trunk Route allocation


•(1)(2)

Y=01 Tenant Allocation000-511: Trunk No.00-63: Tenant No.01 : Tenant No.

•(1)(2)

Y=08 Restriction on Night Mode000-511: Trunk No.0 : Restricted1 : Allow

START

CM05

BLADE RESET

CM10

CM30BLADE RESET

A

1-235 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1004.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the data for Direct Outward Dialing to the Route number assigned by CM30 Y=00.

•

(1)(2)

Y=000 Kind of Route

00-63: Trunk Route No.00: DDD 01: FX02: WATS03: CCSA

•

(1)(2)

Y=001 Type of Signal

00-63: Trunk Route No.2 : DP4 : DTMF 7 : DTMF

•(1)(2)

Y=002 OG/IC00-63: Trunk Route No.2 : Outgoing 3 : Bothway

•(1)(2)

Y=004 Answer Signal Condition00-63: Trunk Route No.1 : Answer Signal by Polarity Reversal 7 : No Answer Signal

In case of no Answer Signal, system recognizes the answer in timing set by CM41 Y=0>03.

•(1)(2)

Y=005 Release Signal Condition00-63: Trunk Route No.0 : No Release Signal from C.O.1 : Release Signal from C.O.

•(1)(2)

Y=008 Dial Pulse Sending00-63: Trunk Route No.3 : To be sent

•

(1)(2)

Y=009 Incoming Connection Signalling

00-63: Trunk Route No.01 : Ring Down (Ground Start) 15 : Ring Down (Loop Start)

A

CM35BLADE RESET

BLADE RESET

BLADE RESET

B

1-236 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1004.fm


NOTE: For the Trunk Restriction Class, refer to CLASS OF SERVICE. Page 1-146

DESCRIPTION DATA

According to the characteristics of each C.O. line, assign the data for DP/DTMF Sender to each route.

For the details of the command, refer to the Command Manual.

•

••

••

••


Y=021 Sender Prepause Timing Y=023 DP-Inter Digital Pause

Y=024 DTMF-Inter Digital PauseY=025 DP-Make Ratio

Y=026 DTMF Signal WidthY=046 DP/DTMF Sender Release Timing

Specify the timing for Interdigit Pause on out-going C.O. call.

•(1)(2)

Y=02703-14: 3-14 seconds

(1 second increment)If no data is set, the default setting is 7 sec-onds.

Assign the access code to each route. •(1)(2)

Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3 X-XXXX: Access Code100-163: Trunk Route No. 00-63

Assign the trunk appearance line key on a Multiline Terminal, if provided.

•(1)(2)

Y=00My Line No. + + Key No.D000-D511: Trunk No.

B

CM35BLADE RESET

BLADE RESET

BLADE RESET

CM41

CM20

CM90,

END

1-237 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1004.fm

DIRECT STATION SELECTION/BUSY LAMP FIELD (DSS/BLF) CONSOLE


PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION DATA


•(1)

(2)


Assign the DSS Console number to itsassociated Physical Port number.

•(1)

(2)

Y=00XX YY ZZ: Physical Port No.XX: 01-50: Unit No.YY: 01-18: Slot No.ZZ : 01-32: Circuit No.E100-E131: DSS Console No.

Assign the DSS Console to be equipped with the DT700 Series through the LAN connection (Side Connection).

•(1)

(2)

Y=010000-1499: Virtual Port No.

(For IP terminal)E100-E131: DSS Console No.

Assign a single-line station, Multiline Termi-nal, or DESKCON to work in conjunction with the DSS Console.

(1)

(2)

00-31: DSS Console No.(Last two digits of E100-E131assigned by CM10 Y=00)

X-XXXXXXXX: Station No./My Line No. of Multiline Terminal

E000-E007 : ATTCON No.

Assign the station and trunk numbers, asneeded, to the keys on each DSS Console.

(1)

(2)

DSS Console No. (00-31) + + DSS Key No. (00-59)X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.D000-D511 : Trunk No.

START

CM05

BLADE RESET

CM10

CM96

CM97 ,

A

1-238 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1004.fm


HARDWARE REQUIRED DSS ConsoleDLC blade

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign function keys on each DSS Console, if needed.

(1)

(2)

DSS Console No. (00-31) + + DSS Key No. (57-59)F1300-F1363: Day/Night Mode Change by

Tenant 00-63 TenantF1049 : Message Waiting Set/ResetF1048 : Room Cutoff-Set/ResetF1050 : Call RecordingF1051 : Check-In/OutF1053 : Do Not Disturb Set/ResetF1054 : No Answer Indication for

Wake Up CallF1055 : Function Button used for

busy out display from UCD Group

Assign a changing Function key on each DSS Console.

(1)

(2)

DSS Console No. (00-31) + + DSS Key No. (56)F1052: Function Change

Specify the type of busy indication on the BLF of the DSS console as station base or extension base.

(1)(2)

2690 : Station base1 : Extension base

A

CM97 ,

,

CM08

END

1-239 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1004.fm

DISTINCTIVE RINGING

DISTINCTIVE RINGING

PROGRAMMING

[For North America](1) For Station-to-Station calls

DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify the interval of ringing tones for sta-tion-to-station calls (for Multiline Terminal).

(1)(2)

1380 : 2 seconds ON-4 seconds OFF1 : 1 second ON-2 seconds OFF

Specify the Single Line Telephone ringing sig-nal for station-to-station connection.

•(1)(2)









START

CM08

CM04

END

1-240 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1004.fm

DISTINCTIVE RINGING

(2) For C.O./Tie line calls (except for Direct-in Termination/Direct Inward Dialing/DISA/CCIS calls)

(3) For Direct-in Termination calls

DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify the interval of ringing tones for station on incoming calls.

NOTE: For incoming calls to a Trunk-Direct Appearances key on Multi-line Terminals, the special ringing; 0.2 seconds ON-0.2 seconds OFF will be applied.

•(1)(2)

Y=03300-63: Trunk Route No.0 : 0.4 seconds ON-0.2 seconds OFF-

0.4 seconds ON-2 seconds OFF 1 : 0.4 seconds ON-0.2 seconds OFF-

0.4 seconds ON-2 seconds OFF2 : 1 second ON-2 seconds OFF3 : 2 seconds ON-4 seconds OFF

DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify the interval of ringing tones for Direct-in Termination calls.

(1)(2)

1790 : As per CM35 Y=0331 : 0.4 seconds ON-0.2 seconds OFF-0.4

seconds ON-2 seconds OFF

START

CM35

END

START

CM08

END

1-241 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1004.fm

DISTINCTIVE RINGING

(4) For Direct Inward Dialing calls • To distinguish by the trunk route

• To distinguish by the terminating DID number

DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify the interval of ringing tones for Direct Inward Dialing calls.

(1)(2)


0.4 seconds ON-2 seconds OFF1 : As per CM35 Y=033

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the interval of ringing tones as “As per CM76 Y=22”.

(1)(2)

1801 : As per CM76 Y=22

Specify the ringing tone interval of SLT or Multiline Terminal on DID calls.For this assignment, do not set CM76 Y=22 to 3 (As per CM35 Y=033 (Multiline Terminal or SLT)).

•(1)

(2)


assigned by CM76 Y=00/900: 0.5 seconds ON-0.5 seconds OFF

(Multiline Terminal)1.0 second ON-2.0 seconds OFF (SLT)

1: 0.5 seconds ON-0.5 seconds OFF-0.5 seconds ON-1.5 seconds OFF (Multiline Terminal) 0.4 seconds ON-0.2 seconds OFF-0.4 seconds ON-2.0 seconds OFF (SLT)

2: 1.0 second ON-2.0 seconds OFF (Multiline Terminal or SLT)

START

CM08

END

START

CM08

CM76

END

1-242 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1004.fm

DISTINCTIVE RINGING

(5) For DISA/Automated Attendant calls

(6) For C.O. calls transferred to another station from a station/Attendant Console

DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify the interval of ringing tones for DISA/Automated Attendant calls.

(1)(2)


0.4 seconds ON-2 seconds OFF1 : As per CM35 Y=033

DESCRIPTION DATA

Select the kind of the ringing for station/atten-dant calls with trunk lines placed on Consulta-tion Hold.

(1)(2)

1370 : Change from Internal Ringing

(CM08>138/CM04 Y=00>05) to External Ringing (CM35 Y=033) when caller goes on-hook or presses RLS key


START

CM08

END

START

CM08

END

1-243 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1004.fm

DISTINCTIVE RINGING

(7) For ISDN Indial calls• To distinguish by the trunk route

• To distinguish by the terminating ISDN Indial number

DESCRIPTION DATA


NOTE: For incoming calls to a Trunk-Direct Appearances key on Multi-line Terminals, the special ringing; 0.2 seconds ON-0.2 seconds OFF will be applied.

•(1)(2)




DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the interval of ringing tones as “As per CM76 Y=22”.

(1)(2)

1801 : As per CM76 Y=22

Specify the ringing tone interval of SLT or Multiline Terminal on ISDN Indial calls.For this assignment, do not set CM76 Y=22 to 3 (As per CM35 Y=033 (Multiline Terminal or SLT)).

•(1)

(2)


assigned by CM76 Y=00/900: 0.5 seconds ON-0.5 seconds OFF

(Multiline Terminal)1.0 second ON-2.0 seconds OFF (SLT)

1: 0.5 seconds ON-0.5 seconds OFF-0.5 seconds ON-1.5 seconds OFF (Multiline Terminal) 0.4 seconds ON-0.2 seconds OFF-0.4 seconds ON-2.0 seconds OFF (SLT)

2: 1.0 second ON-2.0 seconds OFF (Multiline Terminal or SLT)

START

CM35

END

START

CM08

CM76

END

1-244 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1004.fm

DISTINCTIVE RINGING

To provide a distinctive LED indication for Multiline Terminals during a call termination, do the followingprogramming:

DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify the lamp color for an incoming exter-nal call.

NOTE: The lamp color for incoming inter-nal calls is red (120 IPM flashing). For indicating the termination of a transferred external incoming call, the flashing lamp color depends on CM08>137.

•(1)(2)

Y=03200-63: Trunk Route No.0 : Green (120 IPM)1 : Red (120 IPM)

START

CM35

END

1-245 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1004.fm

DISTINCTIVE RINGING

To provide the distinctive ringing patterns to Multiline Terminals in behind PBX, in order to distinguishbetween an internal call from the main PBX and an external incoming call:

DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify the interval of ringing tones for sta-tion-to-station calls (for Multiline Terminal).

(1)(2)

1380 : 2 seconds ON-4 seconds OFF1 : 1 second ON-2 seconds OFF

Specify the interval of ringing tones until de-tecting a ringing frequency from the main PBX (Centrex). Ringing is sent from Multiline Ter-minal until detection of the ringing frequency.

(1)(2)

3800 : As per CM08>3811 : As per CM35 Y=033

(1)(2)

3810 : No Ringer1 : Ringing Tone (0.5 seconds) is sent

once

Specify the LED indication of Multiline Ter-minal until detecting the kind of incoming call from the main PBX (Centrex).The lamp is lit until detection of the ringing frequency.

(1)(2)

3820 : Red Steady Light1 : 120 IPM Flash (As per CM35 Y=032)

NOTE 1: When the ringer is for an internal call, interval of ringing signal: CM08>138Multiline Terminal lamp color: Change to redMultiline Terminal tone ringer: CM35 Y=034, 164, CM65 Y=40

NOTE 2: When the ringer is for an external call, interval of ringing signal: CM35 Y=033Multiline Terminal lamp color: CM35 Y=032Multiline Terminal tone ringer: CM35 Y=034, 164, CM65 Y=40

START

CM08

A

1-246 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1004.fm

DISTINCTIVE RINGING

DESCRIPTION DATA


NOTE 1: The lamp color for incoming inter-nal calls is red (120 IPM flashing).

NOTE 2: For indicating the termination of a transferred external incoming call, the flashing lamp color depends on CM08>137.

•(1)(2)


Specify the interval of ringing tones to a Multiline Terminal on an incoming call.

NOTE: For incoming calls to Trunk Line Appearance Key on Multiline Ter-minal, the special ringing; 0.2 sec-onds ON-0.2 seconds OFF will be applied.

•(1)(2)




Specify the Ringer Tone Pattern of the Multi-line Terminal to each trunk route.

•(1)(2)

Y=034, 16400-63: Trunk Route No.See the table below.

A

CM35

Y=034 Y=164: 0 Y=164: 10 Ringer Tone Pattern 3 Ringer Tone Pattern 01 Ringer Tone Pattern 6 Ringer Tone Pattern 12 Ringer Tone Pattern 5 Ringer Tone Pattern 23 Ringer Tone Pattern 4 Ringer Tone Pattern 7

B

1-247 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1004.fm

DISTINCTIVE RINGING

DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify the ring frequency of the Multiline Terminal.

•(1)

(2)

Y=4000-63: Tenant No. assigned by CM30

Y=01/CM12 Y=04See the table below.

NOTE: This data is effective only for Dterm Series i.When using Electra Terminal/Elite Terminal/Dterm Series E, the second data is fixed to 1.

B

CM65

Ringer Tone Pattern No. Y=40: 0

Y=40: 1

Electra Terminal Elite Terminal/Dterm Series E/Dterm Series i

0 Door Phone Ringer Tone

1024 + 1285 [Hz]/16 [Hz] Modulating Signal


1 Ringer Tone 1 480 + 606 [Hz]/8 [Hz] Modulating Signal




3 Ringer Tone 3 1024 [Hz] Envelop 1100 [Hz] Envelop4 Ringer Tone 4 500 [Hz] 540 [Hz]5 Ringer Tone 5 1024 [Hz] 1100 [Hz]6 Not used 1285 + 1024 [Hz] 1400 + 1100 [Hz]

7 Not used 480 + 606 [Hz]/16 [Hz] Modulating Signal


C

1-248 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1004.fm

DISTINCTIVE RINGING

DESCRIPTION DATA

Provide the distinctive ringing patterns to a Multiline Terminal in behind PBX.

•(1)(2)


Specify the terminating system for incoming C.O. calls.

••••

(1)(2)

Y=02 in Day ModeY=03 in Night ModeY=40 in Mode AY=41 in Mode B000-511: Trunk No.02: Trunk-Direct Appearances03: Trunk-Direct Appearances + TAS

Provide the Trunk-Direct Appearances on Multiline Terminal.

•(1)(2)

Y=18000-511: Trunk No.0 : To provide1 : Not provided

Assign the ringing detect timer for incoming trunk calls.

•(1)(2)

Y=25001-99: 8-792 ms.


C

CM35

CM30

CM41

BLADE RESET

D

1-249 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1004.fm

DISTINCTIVE RINGING

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the Trunk Line Appearance key to a Multiline Terminal.

•(1)(2)


D

CM90,

END

1-250 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1004.fm

DISTINCTIVE RINGING

(8) For Single Line Telephone ringing signal

DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify the Single Line Telephone ringing sig-nal from a trunk.

•(1)(2)










START

CM04

A

1-251 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1004.fm

DISTINCTIVE RINGING

DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify the special ringing signal for Single Line Telephone ring.

•(1)(2)









OFF-0.25 seconds ON-0.125 sec-onds OFF-0.25 seconds ON-2 sec-onds OFF

A

CM04

END

1-252 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1004.fm

DISTINCTIVE RINGING

[For other than North America](1) For Station-to-Station calls

DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify the interval of ringing tones for station-to-station calls (for Multiline Termi-nal).

(1)(2)

1380 : External Ringing1 : Internal Ringing

(See Interval of Ringing Tones by CM08>392/CM08>396/CM08>397 below)

Specify the Single Line Telephone ringing sig-nal for station-to-station connection.

•(1)(2)









START

CM08

CM04

END

JULY/18/2008

1-253 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1004.fm

DISTINCTIVE RINGING

Interval of Ringing Tones for Multiline Terminal by CM08>392/CM08>396/CM08>397

: Default

COMMAND SETTING DATACM08>392 0 1

CM08>396 1 0

CM08>397 0 0

Internal Ringing

SLT 1sON-4sOFF 0.3sON-0.2sOFF-0.3sON-4.2sOFF

Multiline Terminal 1sON-4sOFF 0.25sON-0.25sOFF-0.25sON-4.25sOFF

External Ringing

SLT 0.3sON-0.2sOFF-0.3sON-4.2sOFF

1sON-4sOFF

Multiline Terminal 0.25sON-0.25sOFF-0.25sON-4.25sOFF

1sON-4sOFF

Special Ringing

SLT 0.2sON-0.2sOFF-0.2sON-0.2sOFF-0.2sON-4sOFF

0.2sON-0.2sOFF-0.2sON-0.2sOFF-0.2sON-4sOFF

Multiline Terminal 0.25sON-0.125sOFF-0.25sON-0.125sOFF-0.25sON-2sOFF

0.25sON-0.125sOFF-0.25sON-0.125sOFF-0.25sON-2sOFF

RESET

RESET

RESET

1-254 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1004.fm

DISTINCTIVE RINGING

(2) For C.O./Tie line calls (except for Direct-in Termination/Direct Inward Dialing/DISA/CCIS calls)

(3) For Direct-in Termination calls

DESCRIPTION DATA


NOTE: For SLT, Internal Ringing is ap-plied. For Multiline Terminal, the special ringing; 0.25 seconds ON-0.25 seconds OFF-0.25 seconds ON-0.25 seconds OFF is applied.

•(1)(2)

Y=03300-63: Trunk Route No.0 : Rering NOTE1 : Special Ringing2 : Internal Ringing3 : External Ringing

(See Interval of Ringing Tones for Multiline Terminal by CM08>392/CM08>396/CM08>397.

Page 1-253Interval of Ringing Tones for Single Line Telephone by CM04 Y=00>05, 06, 07)

DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify the interval of ringing tones for Direct-in Termination calls.

(1)(2)

1790 : As per CM35 Y=0331 : Special Ringing


Page 1-253Interval of Ringing Tones for Single Line Telephone by CM04 Y=00>07)

START

CM35

END

START

CM08

END

1-255 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1004.fm

DISTINCTIVE RINGING

(4) For Direct Inward Dialing calls • To distinguish by the trunk route

• To distinguish by the terminating DID number

DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify the interval of ringing tones for Direct Inward Dialing calls.

(1)(2)

1800 : Special Ringing



1 : As per CM35 Y=033

DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify the interval of ringing tones as “As per CM76 Y=22”.

(1)(2)

1801 : As per CM76 Y=22

Specify the ringing tone interval of SLT or Multiline Terminal on DID calls.For this assignment, do not set CM76 Y=22 to 3 (As per CM35 Y=033 (Multiline Terminal or SLT)).

NOTE: For SLT, Internal Ringing is applied. For Multiline Terminal, the special ringing; 0.25 seconds ON-0.25 seconds OFF-0.25 seconds ON-0.25 seconds OFF is applied.

•(1)

(2)


assigned by CM76 Y=00/900 : Internal Ringing NOTE1 : Special Ringing2 : Internal Ringing3 : External Ringing



START

CM08

END

START

CM08

CM76

END

1-256 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1004.fm

DISTINCTIVE RINGING

(5) For DISA/Automated Attendant calls

(6) For C.O. calls transferred to another station from a station/Attendant Console

DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify the interval of ringing tones for DISA/Automated Attendant calls.

(1)(2)

1800 : Special Ringing



1 : As per CM35 Y=033

DESCRIPTION DATA

Select the kind of the ringing for station/atten-dant calls with trunk lines placed on Consulta-tion Hold.

(1)(2)

1370 : Change from Internal Ringing

(CM08>138/CM04 Y=00>05) to Ex-ternal Ringing (CM35 Y=033) when caller goes on-hook or presses RLS key


START

CM08

END

START

CM08

END

1-257 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1004.fm

DISTINCTIVE RINGING

(7) For ISDN Indial calls• To distinguish by the trunk route

• To distinguish by the terminating ISDN Indial number

DESCRIPTION DATA



•(1)(2)




DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify the interval of ringing tones as “As per CM76 Y=22”.

(1)(2)

1801 : As per CM76 Y=22

Specify the ringing tone interval of SLT or Multiline Terminal on ISDN Indial calls.For this assignment, do not set CM76 Y=22 to 3 (As per CM35 Y=033 (Multiline Terminal or SLT)).


•(1)

(2)


assigned by CM76 Y=00/900 : Internal Ringing NOTE1 : Special Ringing2 : Internal Ringing3 : External Ringing



START

CM35

END

START

CM08

CM76

END

1-258 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1004.fm

DISTINCTIVE RINGING

To provide the distinctive ringing patterns to Multiline Terminals in behind PBX, in order to distinguishbetween an internal call from the main PBX and an external incoming call:

DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify the interval of ringing tones for station-to-station calls (for Multiline Termi-nal).

(1)(2)

1380 : External Ringing1 : Internal Ringing


Page 1-253 )

Specify the interval of ringing tones until detecting a ringing frequency from the main PBX (Centrex). Ringing is sent from Multiline Terminal until detection of the ringing fre-quency.

(1)(2)

3800 : As per CM08>3811 : As per CM35 Y=033

(1)(2)

3810 : No Ringer1 : Ringing Tone (0.5 seconds) is sent

once

Specify the LED indication of Multiline Ter-minal until detecting the kind of incoming call from the main PBX (Centrex).The lamp is lit until detection of the ringing frequency.

(1)(2)

3820 : Red Steady Light1 : 120 IPM Flash (As per CM35 Y=032)

NOTE 1: When the ringer is for an internal call, interval of ringing signal: CM08>138Multiline Terminal lamp color: Change to red Multiline Terminal tone ringer: CM35 Y=034, 164, CM65 Y=40

NOTE 2: When the ringer is for an external call, interval of ringing signal: CM35 Y=033Multiline Terminal lamp color: CM35 Y=032Multiline Terminal tone ringer: CM35 Y=034, 164, CM65 Y=40

START

CM08

A

1-259 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1004.fm

DISTINCTIVE RINGING

DESCRIPTION DATA


NOTE 1: The lamp color for incoming inter-nal calls is red (120 IPM flashing).

NOTE 2: For indicating the termination of a transferred external incoming call, the flashing lamp color depends on CM08>137.

•(1)(2)


Specify the interval of ringing tones to a Multiline Terminal on an incoming call.


•(1)(2)



Page 1-253 )


•(1)(2)


A

CM35


B

1-260 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1004.fm

DISTINCTIVE RINGING

DESCRIPTION DATA


•(1)

(2)




B

CM65


Y=40: 1












C

1-261 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1004.fm

DISTINCTIVE RINGING

DESCRIPTION DATA

Provide the distinctive ringing patterns to a Multiline Terminal in behind PBX.

•(1)(2)


Specify the terminating system for incoming C.O. calls.

••••

(1)(2)

Y=02 in Day ModeY=03 in Night ModeY=40 in Mode AY=41 in Mode B000-511: Trunk No.02: Trunk-Direct Appearances03: Trunk-Direct Appearances + TAS

Provide the Trunk-Direct Appearances on Multiline Terminal.

•(1)(2)

Y=18000-511: Trunk No.0 : To provide1 : Not provided

Assign the ringing detect timer for incoming trunk calls.

•(1)(2)

Y=25001-99: 8-792 ms.


C

CM35

CM30

CM41

BLADE RESET

D

1-262 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1004.fm

DISTINCTIVE RINGING

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the Trunk Line Appearance key to a Multiline Terminal.

•(1)(2)


D

CM90,

END

1-263 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1004.fm

DISTINCTIVE RINGING

(8) For Single Line Telephone ringing signal

DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify the Single Line Telephone ringing sig-nal from a trunk.

•(1)(2)










START

CM04

A

1-264 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1004.fm

DISTINCTIVE RINGING

DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify the special ringing signal for Single Line Telephone ring.

•(1)(2)









OFF-0.25 seconds ON-0.125 sec-onds OFF-0.25 seconds ON-2 sec-onds OFF

A

CM04

END

1-265 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1004.fm

DO NOT DISTURB

DO NOT DISTURB

PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION DATA


•(1)(2)


Allow Do Not Disturb in Service Restriction Class A assigned by CM12 Y=02.

•(1)

(2)



Assign the group of stations in Do Not Disturb. Do Not Disturb is set to these stations (as-signed by this command) simultaneously by operation from an Attendant Console.

•(1)(2)


Assign the access code for Do Not Disturb Set/Cancel.

•(1)(2)

Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3X-XXXX: Access CodeA022: Do Not Disturb Set A023: Do Not Disturb Cancel

Assign the destination of the call when called station is set to Do Not Disturb.

•(1)(2)

Y=10 00-63: Tenant No. X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.E000 : Attendant Console

Assign a Do Not Disturb function key to the Multiline Terminal, if required.

•(1)(2)

Y=00 My Line No. + + Key No. F0022: Do Not Disturb Set/ResetF1080: Do Not Disturb Override

Assign Do Not Disturb and Do Not Disturb Override function keys to the DESKCON.

•(1)

(2)

Y=00 ATTCON No. (E000-E007) + + Key No. F6102: Do Not DisturbF6103: Do Not Disturb OverrideF6104: ResetF6108: Do Not Disturb Override

START

CM12

CM15

CM13

CM20

CM51

CM90,

,

A

1-266 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1004.fm

DO NOT DISTURB

DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify Call Forwarding-Busy Line/Station Hunting for a station with Do Not Disturb set.

(1)(2)

240 0 : Available 1 : Not available

For a system with multiple-tenant, specify the destination of a call transferred in CM51 Y=10.

(1)(2)

241 0 : Tenant of called station1 : Tenant of calling station

Select the Dial Tone on setting Do Not Disturb. •(1)(2)

Y=2 14: Dial Tone on setting Do Not Disturb0 : Special Dial Tone (Stutter Dial Tone)1 : Dial Tone

A

CM08

CM48

END

1-267 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1004.fm

DO NOT DISTURB

To set an outside party as a destination of transferred call:

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the Virtual Line station number to the required Virtual Port number.

(1)(2)

0000-0999: Virtual Port No.X-XXXXXXXX: Virtual Line Station No.

Assign Service Restriction Class A to each sta-tion.

•(1)

(2)

Y=02X-XXXXXXXX: Virtual Line Station No.

assigned by CM11XXZZXX: 00-15 : Service Restriction Class A

Assign Call Forwarding-All Calls-Outside to Service Restriction Class A assigned by CM12 Y=02.

•(1)

(2)



Assign Call Forwarding-All Calls-Outside to the Virtual Line station number assigned by CM11.

•(1)

(2)

Y=00 Call Forwarding-All CallsX-XXXXXXXX: Virtual Line Station No.

assigned by CM11Destination No.: X-XXXX + + YY···Y

X-XXXX: Outgoing Trunk/LCR Group Access Code (1-4 digits)

: Separate MarkYY···Y : Called No.

(Maximum 26 digits)

For system with multiple-tenant, specify the tenant of calling station as the destination of a call transferred in CM51 Y=10.

(1)(2)

2411 : Tenant of calling station

Assign the destination of the call when called station is set to Do Not Disturb as Virtual Line station assigned by CM11.

•(1)(2)

Y=1000-63: Tenant No. X-XXXXXXXX: Virtual Line Station No.

assigned by CM11

START

CM11

CM12

CM15

CME6

,

,

CM08

CM51

END

1-268 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1004.fm

DO NOT DISTURB

To provide timer for Do Not Disturb group set/cancel:

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the group of stations in Do Not Disturb. •(1)(2)



•(1)(2)

Y=00My Line No. + + Key No.F0022: Do Not Disturb Set/Reset

Assign a Do Not Disturb function key on each DSS Console, if needed.

(1)

(2)

DSS Console No. (00-31) + + DSS Key No. (57-59)F1053: Do Not Disturb Set/Reset

START

CM13

CM90,

CM97 ,

END

1-269 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1004.fm

DO NOT DISTURB

To set the Do Not Disturb feature to the stations of SLT/sub line of Multiline Terminal/Virtual line stationsthat are accommodated to the Multiline Terminal multiline as the sub line, and to display the Do Not Dis-turb Set/Reset status of the stations on the lamp of Multiline Terminal:

NOTE: To make this feature available, do the programming both of the setting side (Multiline Termi-nal) and the set side (stations of SLT, sub line of Multiline Terminal or virtual line stations).

• For Setting Side (Multiline Terminal)

DESCRIPTION DATA


•(1)(2)


Allow Do Not Disturb Setting in Service Re-striction Class C assigned by CM12 Y=07.

•(1)

(2)

Y=18800-15: Service Restriction Class C assigned

by CM12 YY=070 : Allow1 : Restricted

Provide the system with Message Waiting indi-cation on Line Key of Multiline Terminal.

(1)(2)

1400: Available

Assign the Do Not Disturb LED Indication on Line/Trunk/Feature keys of Multiline Termi-nal.

•(1)(2)

Y=62X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.0 : Not indicated1 : Not used2 : Do Not Disturb LED Indication3 : Message Waiting LED Indication

(effective when CM08>140: 0)

START

CM12

CM15

CM08

CM12

END

1-270 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1004.fm

DO NOT DISTURB

• For Set Side (stations of SLT, sub line of Multiline Terminal or virtual line stations)

DESCRIPTION DATA


•(1)

(2)

Y=02X-XXXXXXXX: Station No./Sub Line

No./Virtual Line Station No.

XX ZZXX: 00-15 : Service Restriction Class A


•(1)

(2)

Y=01900-15: Service Restriction Class A assigned

by CM12 Y=020 : Restricted1 : Allow


•(1)

(2)

Y=07X-XXXXXXXX: Station No./Sub Line No./

Virtual Line Station No.00-15 : Service Restriction Class C

Allow Do Not Disturb to be set in Service Re-striction Class C assigned by CM12 Y=07.

•(1)

(2)



Provide Do Not Disturb feature to each tenant. •(1)(2)

Y=1900-63: Tenant No.0 : Not provided1 : To provide


(1)(2)

1400: Available

Assign the Do Not Disturb LED Indication on Line/Trunk/Feature keys of Multiline Termi-nal.

•(1)

(2)



0 : Not indicated1 : Not used2 : Do Not Disturb LED Indication3 : Message Waiting LED Indication


START

CM12

CM15

CM12

CM15

CM65

CM08

CM12

END

1-271 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1004.fm

ENHANCED 911

ENHANCED 911[For North America]

PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION DATA

Set the trunk route that no answer signal ar-rives from the distant office for outgoing con-nection.

•(1)(2)

Y=004 Answer Signal from distant office00-63: Trunk Route No.3: No Answer signal (Polarity Reversal is

ignored)

Specify incoming connection signaling.

NOTE: DTI blade must be set to Wink Start. ODT blade and COT blade must be set to Ring Down. Enhanced 911 will not function if ODT blade is set to Wink Start.

•

(1)(2)


00-63: Trunk Route No.03 : Wink Start15 : Ring Down

Provide SMDR/Centralized Billing for outgo-ing call.

•(1)(2)

Y=014 SMDR for outgoing call00-63: Trunk Route No.1 : To provide

Specify sender start condition.

NOTE: Digital and Analog Tie Lines are set to Wink Start. Analog Loop Start Lines are set to Timing Start.

•

(1)(2)


00-63: Trunk Route No.00 : Wink Start15 : Timing Start

Specify the trunk seizure pattern. •(1)(2)

Y=036 Trunk seizure pattern00-63: Trunk Route No.0: After dialing maximum number of digits

Provide the trunk route with Enhanced 911. •(1)(2)

Y=038 Enhanced 91100-63: Trunk Route No.0: Available

Specify the sending method of calling number to the network.

•(1)(2)

Y=129 Sending method of calling number00-63: Trunk Route No.3: Enhanced 911

Assign the Area Code Development Pattern number for maximum digit analysis.

•(1)(2)

Y=076 Area Code Development Pattern00-63: Trunk Route No.00-07: Area Code Development Pattern

No. 0-7

START

CM35

BLADE RESET

BLADE RESET

A

JULY/18/2008

1-272 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1004.fm

ENHANCED 911

DESCRIPTION DATA

Define the maximum number of sending digits which can be sent to the network.

•

(1)

(2)

Y=0-7 Area Code Development Pattern No. 0-7X-XXX...: Area Code/Office Code or

its part (Maximum 8 digits)01-24 : 1-24 digits25-79 : 25-79 digits

Assign the access code for LCR Group 0-3. •(1)

(2)

Y=0-3 Numbering Group No. 0-3X-XXXX: Access Code

(Maximum 4 digits)A126-A129: Access Code for LCR Group

0-3

Assign the LCR data, as the occasion demands. YYYY(1)(2)

See CM8A in the Command ManualSee CM8A in the Command Manual

Assign the calling station number sent to the network.“*”, “#” are not available for the sending num-ber.

•(1)(2)

Y=12 Calling Number assignmentX-XXXXXXXX: Station No.X-XXXX: Sending No.

Assign the Local Office Code Table number for sending the calling office code to the net-work.

•(1)(2)

Y=13 Local Office Code Table No.X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.00-14: Local Office Code Table No. 00-1415 : No data

Assign the Local Office Code Table number used for tandem connection.

NOTE: This command is not used for the SV8300 containing the MF Sender for Enhanced 911. This command is used for an incoming CCIS voice route or incoming Tie Line route. The selected table number must be different from the tables selected by CM12 Y=13. The table selected for the incoming CCIS/Tie route must contain the main telephone number (area code, office code, and last four digits) of the distant PBX.

•

(1)(2)

Y=003 Local Office Code Table No. on tan-dem connection00-63: Trunk Route No.00-14: Local Office Code Table No. 00-1415 : Not sent

A

CM85

CM20

CM8A

CM12

CM35

B

1-273 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1004.fm

ENHANCED 911

To provide 911 Notification on DESKCON:

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the Local Office Code sent to the net-work.“*”, “#” is not available for the sending num-ber.

•(1)(2)

Y=05 Local Office Code assignment00-14: Local Office Code Table No. 00-14X-XXX...: Sending No.

(Maximum 12 digits)

DESCRIPTION DATA

Provide 911 Notification on the DESKCON. •

(1)(2)

Y=5000-5255LCR Pattern No. 000-255166: 911 Notification on DESKCON0: To provide

To display the local office code on the DESKCON for C.O. tandem 911 calls, assign the incoming C.O. trunk to the local office code.

•(1)(2)

Y=19000-511: Trunk No. XXXX: Trunk ID Code (Local Office

Code)

Assign the 911 Notification key on the DESKCON.

NOTE: Do not assign this data to the Multi-Function keys.

•(1)

(2)

Y=00ATTCON No. (E000-E007) + + Key No. F6124: 911 Notification

To allow an attendant to interrupt the 911 call, assign the Busy Verification key on the DESKCON.

•(1)

(2)

Y=00ATTCON No. (E000-E007) + + Key No. F6107: Busy Verification

B

CM50

C

C

CM8A

CM30

CM90,

,

D

1-274 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1004.fm

ENHANCED 911

To provide 911 Notification on Multiline Terminal:

DESCRIPTION DATA

Provide 911 Notification on the Multiline Ter-minal.

•

(1)

(2)

Y=5000-5255LCR Pattern No. 000-255166: 911 Notification on Multiline Termi-

nal0: To provide

Assign the 911 Notification key to the Multi-line Terminal.

•(1)(2)

Y=00My Line No. + + Key No. F5025: 911 Notification

To allow a station to interrupt the 911 call, assign the Executive Override key to the Mul-tiline Terminal.

•(1)(2)

Y=00My Line No. + + Key No. F0006: Executive Override

D

CM8A

CM90,

,

END

1-275 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1004.fm

EXECUTIVE CALLING

EXECUTIVE CALLING

PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign VIP class to the required stations. •(1)(2)


START

CM13

END

1-276 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1004.fm

EXECUTIVE OVERRIDE

EXECUTIVE OVERRIDE

PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign Service Restriction Class A to required stations.

•(1)(2)


Allow Executive Override in Service Restric-tion Class A assigned by CM12 Y=02.The setting of data for both called side and calling side of Executive Override (CM15 Y=005 and CM15 Y=009) are required.

•(1)

(2)

Y=005 Calling Side and Y=009 Called Side00-15: Service Restriction Class A


Assign the access code for Executive Override. •(1)(2)

Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3X-XXXX: Access CodeA006: Executive Override

Assign an Executive Override key to the Mul-tiline Terminal, as needed.

•(1)(2)

Y=00 My Line No. + + Key No. F0006: Executive Override

Specify the Waiting Tone sent to connected parties during Executive Override.

(1)(2)

045 0 : Only once1 : Every 4 seconds

START

CM12

CM15

CM20

CM90,

CM08

END

1-277 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1004.fm

EXTERNAL PAGING WITH MEET-ME


PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION DATA



•(1)

(2)



•(1)

(2)


Assign the Kind of PGD(2)-U10 station. •(1)(2)

Y=65X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.1: Paging

Assign the Kind of paging.

NOTE: This data is valid when 2nd data: 1 (Paging) is assigned in CM12 Y=65.

•(1)(2)

Y=67X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.0 : Call ringing only1 : Non-delay answer2 : Non-delay and delay answer3 : Ordinary station

Specify the Paging Zone.


•(1)(2)

Y=68X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.00-09 : Paging Zone Group No.NONE : No data

START

CM05

BLADE RESET

CM10

CM12

A

JULY/18/2008

1-278 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1004.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

Provide the PGD(2)-U10 ADP for the Dual Port Mode.

NOTE: The setting of the Dual port mode is required when using 2 paging equip-ment on the PGD(2)-U10 ADP.For details, refer to “Setting Meth-od of Port number/Station number in Dual port mode” in CM10 of the Command Manual.

•(1)(2)

Y=32X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.0 : To connect1 : Not connected

Assign the Port Mode of the PGD(2)-U10 ADP.

•(1)(2)

Y=33X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.0 : Dual port mode1 : Single port mode

Design the station connected to Dual port mode of the PGD(2)-U10 ADP.

•(1)(2)

Y=34X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.0 : Station connected to Dual port mode

of the PGD(2)-U10 ADP 1 : Station not connected to the PGD(2)-

U10 ADP


•(1)(2)




Assign the access code for Paging Access and Answer.

•(1)(2)

Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3X-XXXX: Access CodeA070-A079: For Paging Answer

(Zone 0-9)

A

CM13

RESET

BLADE RESET

CM20

B

JULY/18/2008

1-279 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1004.fm


HARDWARE REQUIRED

PGD(2)-U10 ADP/External Relay Interface on CPUPaging Equipment provided locally

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the paging function to the PGD(2)-U10 ADP.

•(1)

(2)

Y=00XX YXX: 00-31: Relay Group No.Y : 0-3: Circuit No. of PGD(2)-U10 ADP02XX: Speaker Paging StartXX : 00-09: Speaker Paging Zone 0-9


•(1)(2)


B

CM44

END

JULY/18/2008

1-280 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1005.fm

FAX ARRIVAL INDICATOR


PROGRAMMING

Hotlines or House Phone feature assignment is used to implement this feature.The number of facsimile station numbers and facsimile call station numbers that can be assigned varieswith each of the following cases.

• When Hotlines-Inside/Outside are used, a maximum of 100 facsimile stations can be assigned. In ad-dition, a maximum of 100 facsimile call stations can be assigned.

• When House Phone groups are used, a maximum of four facsimile stations can be assigned. In addi-tion, there is no limit to the number of facsimile call stations that can be assigned to each facsimilestation.

(1) Hotlines

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign a Unit and Slot number to the DLC/LC blade.

•(1)

(2)

Y=0XX ZZXX: 01-50: Unit No.ZZ : 01-18: Slot No.10: DLC blade20: LC blade

Assign the fax call station number. This num-ber is used as the fax call indicator button on the Multiline Terminal. Also this is the number to which the incoming fax call is directed.

•(1)

(2)

Y=00XX YY ZZ: Physical Port No.XX: 01-50: Unit No.YY: 01-18: Slot No.ZZ : 01-32: Circuit No.X-XXXXXXXX : Single Line Station

No. FX-FXXXXXXXX: My Line No.

Assign a virtual number to be used as a fax call station number. (Similar to CM10 Y=00 above but using a virtual extension instead of a real station number.)

(1)(2)

0000-0999: Virtual Port No.X-XXXXXXXX: Virtual Extension No.

Assign the function of fax call station to the station or extension assigned above in either CM10 Y=00 or CM11.

•(1)(2)

Y=29X-XXXXXXXX: Station No. 0 : Fax call station 1 : Ordinary station

START

CM05

BLADE RESET

CM10

CM11

CM13

A

1-281 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1005.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the fax call station and fax station using Hotlines feature.

•(1)

(2)

Y=00-99 0: Fax Call Station (calling side)

This is the extension to which the call is directed and will be the fax call indicator on the Multiline Terminal.

X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.

(1)

(2)

1: Fax Station (called side) This is the actual single line port to be connected to the facsimile machine.


Specify the accommodation of the fax call station to the Multiline Terminal.

NOTE: This command needs to be set when assigning a single line station as a fax call station number by CM10 Y=00.

•(1)(2)

Y=05X-XXXXXXXX: Fax Call Station No. 0 : Accommodated 1 : Not accommodated

Assign the fax call station number as the arrival indicator to the Multiline Terminal.

•(1)(2)

Y=00My Line No. + + key No.X-XXXXXXXX: Fax Call Station No.

A

CM52

CM12

CM90,

END

1-282 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1005.fm


(2) House Phone

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign a Unit and Slot number to the DLC/LC blade.

•(1)

(2)

Y=0XX ZZXX: 01-50: Unit No.ZZ : 01-18: Slot No.10: DLC blade20: LC blade

Assign the fax call station number. This num-ber is used as the fax call indicator button on the Multiline Terminal. Also this is the number to which the incoming fax call is directed.

•(1)

(2)

Y=00XX YY ZZ: Physical Port No.XX: 01-50: Unit No.YY: 01-18: Slot No.ZZ : 01-32: Circuit No.X-XXXXXXXX : Single Line Station

No. FX-FXXXXXXXX: My Line No.

Assign a virtual number to be used as a fax call station number. (Similar to CM10 Y=00 above but using a virtual extension instead of a real station number.)

(1)(2)

0000-0999: Virtual Port No.X-XXXXXXXX: Virtual Extension No.

Assign the function of fax call station to the station or extension assigned above in either CM10 Y=00 or CM11.

•(1)(2)

Y=29X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.0 : Fax call station 1 : Ordinary station

Assign the fax call station numbers to a House Phone group.

•(1)(2)

Y=03X-XXXXXXXX: Fax Call Station No.00-03: Fax Call Group No.

Specify the accommodation of the fax call station to the Multiline Terminal.

NOTE: This command needs to be set when assigning a single line station as a fax call station number by CM10 Y=00.

•(1)(2)

Y=05X-XXXXXXXX: Fax Call Station No.0 : Accommodated 1 : Not accommodated

START

CM05

BLADE RESET

CM10

CM11

CM13

CM12

A

1-283 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1005.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign fax station using House Phone feature. •(1)

(2)

Y=14 00-03: Fax Station (This is the actual single

line port to be connected to the facsimile machine.)


Assign the fax call station number as the arrival indicator to the Multiline Terminal.

•(1)(2)

Y=00My Line No. + + key No.X-XXXXXXXX: Fax Call Station No.

A

CM51

CM90,

END

1-284 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1005.fm

FLEXIBLE LINE KEY ASSIGNMENT


PROGRAMMING

For the applicable feature programming on Flexible Line Key, refer to each feature:

• DO NOT DISTURB Page 1-265• HOTLINE-INSIDE/OUTSIDE Page 1-305• INTERCOM Page 1-310• MULTILINE TERMINAL Page 1-337• SAVE AND REPEAT Page 1-479• STATION SPEED DIALING Page 1-513• TRUNK-DIRECT APPEARANCES Page 1-556

To indicate the busy/idle status of the extensions accommodated to the Flexible Line Keys on the Series ETerminal without the One Touch Speed Dial Keys, assign the following data. Station Speed Dialing mem-ory and One Touch Key memory assignment are used to implement this feature.

DESCRIPTION DATA


•(1)(2)


Allow Station Speed Dialing in Service Re-striction Class A assigned by CM12 Y=02.

•(1)

(2)



START

CM12

CM15

A

JULY/18/2008

1-285 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1005.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

Allocate the memory area for Station Speed Dialing to each station. The same memory area must be assigned on CM73 and CM94.

The memory area for storing one called num-ber of Station Speed Dialing is called a “Mem-ory Parcel”. An assembly of 10 Memory Parcels is called a “10-Slot Memory Block,” and one hundred 10-Slot Memory Blocks are called a “1000-Slot Memory Block”.

(1)(2)

X-XXXXXXXX: My Line No.WW XX Y ZZWW: 00-03: 1000- Slot Memory Block

No. NOTEXX : 00-99: Memory Start Block No.

(10-Slot Memory Block)Y : Facility for programming the dialed

number from the station 0/1: Effective/Ineffective


NOTE: 1000-Slot Memory Block number 04-19 (16000 Memory Parcels) cannot be used to pro-vide BLF function on Multiline Terminal line key.


A

CM73

00

~

03

04


0

9

1

Memory Parcel

00

99

01

10-SlotMemory Block

~19

4000Memory Parcels

16000Memory Parcels




(1st Data)300301302303

(2nd Data: WW)00000000

(2nd Data: XX)00010306

(2nd Data: ZZ)01020301

B

1-286 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1005.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA


B

CM73

0


Memory Parcel

Number

10-Slot Memory

Block

(Abbreviated Code)

1

2

3

4

5

~

9

0

1

2

3

4

5

~

9

0


Memory Parcel

Number

10-Slot Memory

Block

(Abbreviated Code)

1

9

0

1

~

9

00

01

09

10

11

~19

~ ~

10-Slot Memory

Block

C

1-287 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1005.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

Allocate the memory area for Station Speed Dialing to each station. The same memory area must be assigned on CM73 and CM94, to provide BLF function on Multiline Terminal line key.

NOTE: 1000-Slot Memory Block number 04-19 (16000 Memory Parcels) can-not be used to provide BLF function on Multiline Terminal line key.

(1)(2)

X-XXXXXXXX: My Line No.XX YY 0 ZZXX: 00-03: 1000-Slot Memory Block

No. NOTEYY: 00-99: 10-Slot Memory Start Block


Blocks

Assign Station Speed Dialing keys on each Multiline Terminal.

For the key number and the last two digits of the second data, assign the same number as fol-lows.

•(1)(2)


NOTE 1: For detail of Multiline Terminal key layout set by CM12 Y=24, re-fer to the Command Manual.

NOTE 2: A station user should set the required extension number to the line key on Multiline Terminal.

Specify the type of busy indication on the BLF of the Multiline Terminal line key as station base or extension base.

(1)(2)

2690 : Station base1 : Extension base

C

CM94

CM90

1st Data 2nd DataXXXXXXXX, 01XXXXXXXX, 02XXXXXXXX, 03

XXXXXXXX, 16

F1101F1102F1103

F1116

......

,

CM08

END

1-288 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1005.fm

FLEXIBLE NUMBERING PLAN


PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign a Numbering Plan Group to each Ten-ant.

(1)(2)


Specify the number of digits for station num-bers.

Example: For setting Station No. “2XXX”(1) 2 (2) 804

NOTE: For the following features, do not assign 5 or more digits station num-ber.• SMDR/PMS• Front Desk Terminal (Multiline

Terminal)

•(1)(2)

Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3X: 1st digit of Station No.801: 1 digit 802: 2 digits803: 3 digits804: 4 digits805: 5 digits806: 6 digits807: 7 digits808: 8 digits

Assign a Unit and Slot number to the LC blade. •(1)

(2)

Y=0XX ZZXX: 01-50: Unit No.ZZ : 01-18: Slot No.20: LC blade

Assign station numbers to the required Physi-cal Port number according to the Numbering Plan specified by CM20. For feature and trunk access codes, refer to the programming of indi-vidual features.

•(1)

(2)


START

CM29

CM20

CM05BLADE RESET

CM10

END

1-289 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1005.fm


To provide Single-Digit Feature Access Code:

DESCRIPTION DATA

To activate this feature, set the data for 050, 051, 069 and 148 to “1”.

(1)(2)

050: * Button as Switch Hook Flash. 1 : Ineffective

(1)(2)

051: * Button as Switch Hook Flash. 1 : Ineffective

(1)

(2)

069: Single-Digit Dialing on BT Connec-tion

1 : Step Call

(1)

(2)

148: Same Last-Digit Redialing on BT Connection

1 : Ineffective

Provide the System with the Single-Digit Fea-ture Access Code on RBT (or Voice Call Con-nection).

(1)(2)

156 0: Available

Provide the System with the Single-Digit Fea-ture Access Code on BT Connection.

(1)(2)

208 0: Available

START

CM08

END

1-290 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1005.fm

FLEXIBLE RINGING ASSIGNMENT


PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify the method of tone ringer selection. (1)(2)

390 1 : As per CM15 Y=083, 089, 093, CM35

Y=34, 164, CM65 Y=40

Assign Service Restriction Class C for the ring tone for Multiline Terminals on internal calls to required stations.

•(1)(2)


Specify the Ringer Tone Pattern of the Multi-line Terminal for terminating calls from a sta-tion.

•(1)

(2)

Y=083, 084, 09300-15: Service Restriction Class C

assigned by CM12 Y=07 See the table below.


•(1)(2)


START

CM08RESET

CM12

CM15

Y=083 Y=084 Y=093: 0 Y=093: 10 0 Ringer Tone Pattern 3 Ringer Tone Pattern 70 1 Ringer Tone Pattern 6 Ringer Tone Pattern 11 0 Ringer Tone Pattern 5 Ringer Tone Pattern 01 1 Ringer Tone Pattern 4 Ringer Tone Pattern 2

CM35


A

1-291 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1005.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA


•(1)

(2)




Assign Service Restriction Class B for Off-Hook Ringing to required stations.

•(1)(2)

Y=02X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.XX ZZZZ: 00-15 : Service Restriction Class B

A

CM65


Y=40: 1












CM12

B

1-292 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1005.fm


HARDWARE REQUIRED


DESCRIPTION DATA

Allow Off-Hook Ringing for incoming calls to Line/Trunk Keys on Multiline Terminals in Service Restriction Class B assigned by CM12 Y=02.

NOTE: This data is effective in the following status.• Hook Switch-OFF HOOK • SPEAKER Lamp-OFF

•(1)

(2)

Y=068 00-15: Service Restriction Class B


B

CM15

END

1-293 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1005.fm


To set the ringing tone setting by Day Mode/Night Mode, do the following programming.

DESCRIPTION DATA

Provide the change the ringing tone depend on Day Mode/Night Mode Change.

(1)(2)

5770: To provide

Apply Day Mode/Night Mode to all Multiline Terminals.

NOTE 1: This data is effective only when the 2nd data is set to 0.

NOTE 2: This command is performed after CM08>577 is set, or when the station tenant number of My Line is changed by CM12 Y=04.

•(1)(2)

Y=900 : Start to apply1 : Now applying3 : Stand by

Assign the setting of Multiline Terminal ring-ing tone by Day Mode/Night Mode.

•(1)(2)

Y=01My Line No. + + Key No. (01-24)0 : Day Mode: No ringing/Night Mode:

Ringing1 : Day Mode: Ringing/Night Mode:

No ringing2 : Day Mode: No ringing/Night Mode:

No ringing3 : Day Mode: Ringing/Night Mode:

Ringing

START

CM08

CMEC

CM90,

END

1-294 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1005.fm

FORCED ACCOUNT CODE

FORCED ACCOUNT CODE

PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION DATA

Provide the system with Forced Account Code. (1)(2)


Specify whether Service Set Tone is provided after dialing the access code for Forced Account Code.

(1)(2)

3620 : No tone1 : Service Set Tone

Assign Service Restriction Class A for Forced Account Code to required stations.

•(1)(2)


Allow Forced Account Code in Service Restriction Class A assigned by CM12 Y=02.

•(1)

(2)


assigned by CM12 Y=02 1 : Allow

Specify the entry of Forced Account Code after dialing an LCR access code and desired number.

NOTE: To provide this operation, the following data assignments are required.- Toll restriction

(CM12 Y=01, CM8A Y=5XXX: 000, CM81)

- LCR origination(CM20: A126/A127/A128/A129, CM8A Y=5XXX: 180, CM85)

•(1)

(2)


assigned by CM12 Y=021 : Allow7 : Restricted

Assign the access code for Forced Account Codes.

•(1)(2)


START

CM08

CM12

CM15

CM20

A

1-295 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1005.fm

FORCED ACCOUNT CODE

DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify the maximum number of digits for Forced Account Code with CPU.

(1)(2)


Assign the ID Code Development number for Forced Account Code.

•(1)(2)

Y=A010-9: ID Code Development No. 00-09

Assign the ID Code for Forced Account Code. •

(1)

(2)

Y=00-09ID Code Development No. 00-09X-XX...XX (Maximum 16 digits): ID Code for Forced Account Code0000-2999: ID Code Pattern No.

Assign the Valid range of ID Code. •(1)(2)



1 : Authorization Code/Forced Account Code

3 : Invalidate the ID Code


•(1)(2)

Y=110000-2999: ID Code Pattern No.1 : Unrestricted (RCA)2 : Non-Restricted-1 (RCB)3 : Non-Restricted-2 (RCC)4 : Semi-Restricted-1 (RCD)5 : Semi-Restricted-2 (RCE)6 : Restricted-1 (RCF)7 : Restricted-2 (RCG)8 : Fully-Restricted (RCH)

A

CM42

CM2A

B

1-296 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1005.fm

FORCED ACCOUNT CODE

NOTE: Approximately 3000 Forced Account Codes including Authorization Codes and DISA codes can be defined.

Number of the codes varies with the number of digits assigned to each code. For details, refer to “BUSINESS/HOTEL/DATA FEATURES AND SPECIFICATIONS”.

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the desired Service Restriction Class A to each ID Code Pattern number. The features available in each class are assigned by CM15.

•(1)(2)


Assign the desired Service Restriction Class B to each ID Code Pattern number. The features available in each class are assigned by CM15.

•(1)(2)


Assign the desired Service Restriction Class C to each ID Code. The features available in each class are assigned by CM15.

•(1)(2)


B

CM2A

END

1-297 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1005.fm

GROUP CALL BY PILOT NUMBER DIALING


PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the Virtual Line station number for Group Call Pilot Station to the required Virtual Port number.

NOTE: This Virtual Line station must be ex-clusively used for Group Call Pilot Station.

(1)(2)


Provide the Virtual Line station with Group Call By Pilot Number Dialing function.

•(1)

(2)


assigned by CM110: To provide

Specify the group number which is the destina-tion of a call from the Group Call Pilot Station.

•(1)

(2)


assigned by CM1100-19: Group Call No. 00-19

To provide the Station Hunting group of the Group Call Pilot Stations, assign station num-bers, one by one, as shown below.

(1)Virtual Line Station A(2)Virtual Line Station B(1)Virtual Line Station B(2)Virtual Line Station C

NOTE: The number of Virtual Line stations per Station Hunting group set by CM18 becomes the maximum num-ber of simultaneous calling in each group of Group Call By Pilot Num-ber Dialing.

•(1)

(2)


assigned by CM11X-XXXXXXXX: Another Virtual Line

Station No. assigned by CM11

START

CM11

CM13

CM12

CM18

1st Operation

2st Operation

A

1-298 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1005.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the Pilot Station to required station number within the Station Hunting group. For the member stations, set the data to “0”.

NOTE: The maximum number of stations that can be included on one Station Hunting group is 32 including the Pilot Station.

•(1)

(2)


assigned by CM11For PS station : Station No. assigned by

CM10 Y=040 : Member Station1 : Pilot Station

Assign the station numbers which are to be in-cluded in the Group Call group, and their serial numbers in the group.

•(1)(2)

Y=10-29 Group Call No. 00-1900-31: Serial No. within the GroupX-XXXXXXXX: Station No. assigned by

CM10 Y=00For PS station : Station No. assigned by

CM10 Y=04

NOTE: The maximum number of Group Call stations per group is as follows: Single line station/Multiline Terminal (My Line/Virtual Line): 32 stationsPS station: 8 stations (except the PS in roaming state)

A

CM18

CM57

B

JULY/18/2008

1-299 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1005.fm


To provide Calling Name Display to a PS station:

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign Service Restriction Class A to a PS station.

•(1)

(2)

Y=02X-XXXXXXXX: PS station No. assigned

by CM10 Y=04XX ZZXX: 00-15 : Service Restriction Class A

Allow Calling Name Display-PS in Service Restriction Class A assigned by CM12 Y=02.

•(1)

(2)



B

CM12

CM15

END

JULY/18/2008

1-300 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1005.fm

GROUP LISTENING

GROUP LISTENING

PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign Service Restriction Class B for Group Listening to the required Multiline Terminals.

•(1)(2)


Allow Group Listening in Service Restriction Class B assigned by CM12 Y=02.

•(1)

(2)

Y=07000-15: Service Restriction Class B

assigned by CM12 Y=020: Allow

START

CM12

CM15

END

1-301 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1005.fm

HOLDAUTOMATIC HOLD

HOLDAUTOMATIC HOLD

PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify the operation at pressing another Line/Trunk key while talking on the station/trunk using Trunk-Direct Appearances.

•(1)(2)

Y=58X-XXXXXXXX: My Line No.0: Hold the call and seize the Line/Trunk

key

START

CM13

END

JULY/18/2008

1-302 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1005.fm

HOLDCALL HOLD

CALL HOLD

PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION DATA


•(1)(2)


Allow Call Hold in Service Restriction Class A assigned by CM12 Y=02.

•(1)

(2)



Assign the access code for Call Hold. •(1)(2)

Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3 X-XXXX: Access Code A046: Call Hold

Assign a Call Hold key to the Multiline Termi-nal, if needed.

NOTE 1: This line key is not the same key normally assigned to the key labeled HOLD. That key is normally assigned to the Non Exclusive/Exclusive Hold feature.

NOTE 2: When a station has a Camp-on Call, flashing the switchhook and dialing the Call Hold feature results in the connecting to the camped-on party.

•(1)(2)

Y=00 My Line No. + + Key No. F0046

START

CM12

CM15

CM20

CM90,

END

JULY/18/2008

1-303 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1005.fm

HOLDDUAL HOLD

DUAL HOLD

PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign Service Restriction Class B for this fea-ture to required stations.

•(1)(2)

Y=02 X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.XX ZZZZ: 00-15 : Service Restriction Class B

Allow Dual Hold in Service Restriction Class B assigned by CM12 Y=02.

•(1)

(2)



START

CM12

CM15

END

1-304 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1005.fm

HOLDEXCLUSIVE HOLD

EXCLUSIVE HOLD

PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION DATA

Provide the system with Exclusive Hold. (1)(2)

130 1 : Available

Specify the Recall timing on Exclusive Hold. •(1)(2)

Y=0 0601-98: 4-392 seconds


START

CM08

CM41

END

1-305 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1005.fm

HOTLINE-INSIDE/OUTSIDE


PROGRAMMING

For internal Hotline:

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the Hotline station to the required sta-tions.

•(1)(2)

Y=03X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.04: Hotline Station

Set up the Hotline pair. Bidirectional Hotlines should be assigned as follows:

NOTE 1: There is a maximum of 100 assign-ments for Hotline destination. If in-ternal bidirectional Hotline calling is required, two assignments (one for each direction) must be made. A maximum of 50 bidirectional Hot-lines can be assigned.

NOTE 2: When assigning a station number to a Calling Side, the second data of CM12 Y=03 must be set to “04”.

•(1)(2)

Y=00-99 Hotline Pair No.0: Calling Side X-XXXXXXXX: Station No. /Data Station

No. assigned by CM12 Y=03

(1)(2)

1: Called SideX-XXXXXXXX: Station No. /Data Station

No.E000-E007 : Attendant Console No.


Specify the result of a Switch Hook Flash on each Hotline station.

To allow Hotline stations to transfer a call or access a feature, set the data to “0”.

(1)(2)

057 0 : Special Dial Tone1 : Attendant Recall

START

CM12

CM52

Hotline Pair No. Calling Side Called Side0001

Station AStation B

Station BStation A

CM08

END

1-306 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1005.fm


For Hotline-Outside:

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign a Hotline to the required stations. •(1)(2)

Y=03X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.04: Hotline

Allocate the memory area for the Hotline-Out-side call. For example, to assign the 10 Hot-line-Outside calls into No. 100 through No. 109 Memory Slots, 2nd data is “100010”. Ab-breviated Codes are automatically assigned as shown below:

(1)(2)

65: For Hotline-OutsideXXX YYYXXX: 000-299: Starting Memory Slot No.

in blocksYYY: 001-100: Number of Memory Slots

to be assigned in blocks

Set the outside party’s number to each Memory Slot number.

•(1)(2)

Y=0000-299: Memory Slot No. XXXX + + YY...Y: Outside Party’s No. XXXX : Access Code (Maximum 4 dig-

its): Separator Mark

YY...Y : Outside Party’s No. (Maximum 26 digits)

NONE : No data

•(1)(2)

Y=1000-299: Memory Slot No.XXX...X: Station Name Character Code

(Maximum 32 digits: 16 charac-ters)


Page A-2

•(1)(2)

Y=2000-299: Memory Slot No.XXX...X: Station Name Character by

PCPro/CAT (Maximum 16 char-acters)

NONE : No data

START

CM12

CM71

Abbreviated CodeMemory Slot 100 00

Memory Slot 109 09

CM72

,

,

A

1-307 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1005.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

Define the Hotline pairs.


•(1)

(2)

Y=00-99 Hotline pair No.0: Calling Station 1: Called Outside party Station No. (For Calling Station) C XX (For Called Outside party) XX: Abbreviated Code given by CM71


A

CM52

END

1-308 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1005.fm


For Brokerage Hotline:

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the Virtual station numbers to the re-quired Virtual Port number.

(1)(2)

0000-0999: Virtual Port No.X-XXXXXXXX: Virtual Station No.

Assign the Hotline to the Virtual station num-ber assigned by CM11.

•(1)(2)

Y=03X-XXXXXXXX: Virtual Station No. 04: Hotline

Define the Hotline pairs.


•(1)(2)

Y=00-99 Hotline Pair No. 0: Calling party X-XXXXXXXX: Virtual Station No.

(1)(2)

1: Called partyX-XXXXXXXX: Station No.C XX (For Outside party) XX: Abbreviated Code given by CM71

(See Hotline-Outside)


Assign the Virtual Line station number and Release keys on the Multiline Terminal.

•(1)(2)

Y=00 My Line No. + + Key No. X-XXXXXXXX: Virtual Station No.F1020 : Release key

START

CM11

CM12

CM52

CM90,

END

1-309 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1005.fm

INTERCEPT ANNOUNCEMENT

INTERCEPT ANNOUNCEMENT

PROGRAMMING

NOTE: Only one common message can be provided for the different intercept conditions.

HARDWARE REQUIRED

CPU blade (built-in VRS)

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign Service Restriction Class A to the required stations.

•(1)(2)

Y=02 X-XXXXXXXX: Station No. XX ZZXX: 00-15 : Service Restriction Class A

Allow Voice Response System access in Service Restriction Class A assigned by CM12 Y=02.

•(1)

(2)



Assign the function to each Voice Response System.

•(1)(2)

Y=00 000-007: Built-in VRS on CPU blade0A00: Call Forwarding-Intercept

Announcement

Assign a Voice Response System as the desti-nation of the call intercepted on each Tenant.

•(1)(2)

Y=0700-63: Tenant No. EB000-EB007: Voice Response System

No.

To record, replay, or delete a message, assign the appropriate Voice Response System access codes.

•(1)(2)

Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3X-XXXX: Access CodeA100: Voice Response System access

(Record) A101: Voice Response System access

(Replay)A102: Voice Response System access

(Delete)

START

CM12

CM15

CM49

CM51

CM20

END

1-310 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1005.fm

INTERCOMMANUAL INTERCOM

INTERCOMMANUAL INTERCOM

PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign a Manual Intercom number to the Virtual Port number. The last two digits of each Manual Intercom number represent the Manual Intercom Group number.

NOTE: A Manual Intercom group can consist of two to six Multiline Termi-nals. A maximum of 25 Manual In-tercom groups can be assigned per system.

(1)(2)

0000-0999: Virtual Port No.A200-A224 A300-A324 A400-A424 A500-A524 A600-A624 A700-A724 (Manual Intercom Number)

A X YYX : 2-7: Serial No. in a GroupYY: Manual Intercom Group No.

Assign the Manual Intercom station. •(1)

(2)

Y=03A200-A724: Manual Intercom No.

assigned by CM1106: Manual Intercom

Assign the My Line No. of each Multiline Ter-minal to each Manual Intercom number.

•(1)

(2)

Y=11 A200-A724: Manual Intercom No.

assigned by CM11X-XXXXXXXX: My Line No.

Assign the MANUAL INTERCOM key to each Multiline Terminal.

•(1)(2)

Y=00 My Line No. + + Key No.A200-A724: Manual Intercom No. of each

Multiline Terminal

Specify the Manual Intercom access capability when a called intercom station has set Do Not Disturb.

(1)(2)

238 0 : No Ring on1 : Ring on (Allowed)

START

CM11

GROUP No. INTERCOM No.0001

24

A200, A300, A400, A500, A600, A700A201, A301, A401, A501, A601, A701

A224, A324, A424, A524, A624, A724

~ ~

CM12

CM56

CM90,

CM08

END

1-311 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1005.fm

INTERCOMAUTOMATIC INTERCOM

AUTOMATIC INTERCOM

PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign an Automatic Intercom number to the Virtual Port number. The Automatic Intercom stations are paired as shown below.

NOTE: The maximum number of Automatic Intercom paired stations per system is 32.

(1)(2)

0000-0999: Virtual Port No.A000-A031 A100-A131 (Automatic Intercom Number)

A X YYX : 0/1 to be made one pair.YY: 00-31: Automatic Intercom Group No.

Assign each Automatic Intercom station. •(1)

(2)

Y=03A000-A031, A100-A131:Automatic Inter-

com No. as-signed by CM11

05: Automatic Intercom

Assign the My Line number to each Automatic Intercom number.

•(1)

(2)

Y=10A000-A031, A100-A131:Automatic Inter-

com No. as-signed by CM11

X-XXXXXXXX: My Line No.

Assign the AUTOMATIC INTERCOM key to each Multiline Terminal.

•(1)(2)

Y=00 My Line No. + + Key No.A000-A031, A100-A131:Automatic Inter-

com No. of each Multiline Termi-nal

Specify the Automatic Intercom access capa-bility when a called intercom station has set Do Not Disturb.

(1)(2)


START

CM11


31

A000, A100A001, A101

A031, A131

~ ~

CM12

CM56

CM90,

CM08

A

1-312 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1005.fm

INTERCOMAUTOMATIC INTERCOM

NOTE: To activate the Voice Announcement call, refer to INTERNAL TONE/VOICE SIGNALING. Page 1-315

DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify the busy indication on the Automatic Intercom LED when the other Multiline Ter-minal of the same Automatic Intercom Group is busy.

•(1)(2)

Y=11X-XXXXXXXX: My Line No.0 : Allowed1 : Restricted

A

CM13

END

1-313 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1005.fm

INTERCOMDIAL INTERCOM

DIAL INTERCOM

PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign a Dial Intercom number to the Virtual Port number. The last two digits of each Dial Intercom number represent the Dial Intercom Group number.The first digit is the intercom code (0-9) as-signed to the associated virtual extension.

NOTE: A maximum of 25 Dial Intercom groups are available per system. A maximum of ten Multiline Terminals can belong to a Dial Intercom group.

(1)(2)

0000-0999: Virtual Port No.B000-B024B100-B124 B200-B224B300-B324 B400-B424 B500-B524 B600-B624 B700-B724 B800-B824 B900-B924(Dial Intercom Number)

B X YYX : 0-9: Intercom CodeYY: 00-24: Dial Intercom Group No.

Assign the Dial Intercom station. •(1)

(2)

Y=03B000-B924: Dial Intercom No. assigned by

CM1107: Dial Intercom

Assign the My Line number to each Dial Inter-com number.

•(1)(2)

Y=12B000-B924: Dial Intercom No.X-XXXXXXXX: My Line No.

Assign the DIAL INTERCOM key to each Multiline Terminal.

•(1)(2)

Y=00My Line No. + + key No.Dial Intercom No. of each Multiline Termi-nal

If the Private Dial Intercom is provided, assign Service Restriction Class A to each Dial Inter-com number.

•(1)

(2)

Y=02B000-B924: Dial Intercom No. assigned by

CM11XX ZZXX: 00-15 : Service Restriction Class A

START

CM11


24

B000, B100, B200 — B900B001, B101, B201 — B901

B024, B124, B224 — B924

~ ~

CM12

CM56

CM90,

CM12

A

1-314 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1005.fm

INTERCOMDIAL INTERCOM

NOTE: To activate the Voice Announcement call, refer to INTERNAL TONE/VOICE SIGNALING. Page 1-315

DESCRIPTION DATA

Restrict Executive Override in Service Restric-tion Class A assigned by CM12 Y=02.

•(1)

(2)


signed by CM12 Y=02 0: Restricted

Specify the Dial Intercom access capability when a called intercom station has set Do Not Disturb.

(1)(2)

239 0 : Restricted1 : Allowed

A

CM15

CM08

END

1-315 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1005.fm

INTERNAL TONE/VOICE SIGNALING


PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION DATA

To activate the Single-Digit Feature Access Code feature, set the data for 050, 051, 069, 148 and 543 to “1”.

(1)(2)

050: * Button as Switch Hook Flash.1 : Ineffective

(1)(2)

051: # Button as Switch Hook Flash.1 : Ineffective

(1)

(2)


1 : Step Call

(1)

(2)


1 : Ineffective

(1)(2)

543: Step Call1 : Allow

Provide the system with the Single-Digit Feature Access Code on RBT or Voice Call connection.

(1)(2)

1560: Available

Specify if Voice Call is provided when calling a Multiline Terminal is set to Voice First from a Single-Line Telephone or a Multiline Termi-nal without an LCD.

(1)(2)

2700 : Not provided (Busy Tone)1 : To provide

Provide the system with the Single-Digit Feature Access Code on BT connection.

(1)(2)

2080: Available

Specify whether the access codes of Single-Digit Feature Access Code feature are fixed or not.

(1)(2)

5700 : Programmable Access Code1 : Fixed Access Code

When using programmable access code (CM08>570 is set to 0), assign the Single-Digit Feature Access Code for the RBT con-nection.

•(1)(2)

Y=5X: Access code (0-9, A (*), B (#))1 : Internal Tone/Voice SignalingNONE : Single-Digit Feature Access

Code is not available

START

CM08

CM20

A

1-316 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1005.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign Service Restriction Class B for Voice Call (called side) to the required Multiline Ter-minal.

•(1)(2)

Y=02X-XXXXXXXX: My Line No.XX ZZZZ: 00-15 : Service Restriction Class B

Allow Voice Call (called side) in Service Restriction Class B assigned by CM12 Y=02.

•(1)

(2)



Assign Service Restriction Class C for Voice Call Mike Off (called side) to the required Multiline Terminal.

•(1)(2)

Y=07X-XXXXXXXX: My Line No.00-15 : Service Restriction Class C

Allow Voice Call Mike Off (called side) in Service Restriction Class C assigned by CM12 Y=07.

•(1)

(2)

Y=09900-15: Service Restriction Class C

assigned by CM12 Y=070: Available

Assign the Voice Call/Ring Tone Program-ming access code.

•(1)(2)

Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3X-XXXX: Access CodeA163: Voice Call/Ring Tone Programming

A

CM12

CM15

CM12

CM15

CM20

END

1-317 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1005.fm

INTERNAL ZONE PAGING WITH MEET-ME


PROGRAMMING

To provide Internal Zone Paging with Meet-Me:

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign Service Restriction Class A for Internal Zone Paging to the required stations.

•(1)(2)


Allow Internal Zone Paging in Service Restric-tion Class A assigned by CM12 Y=02.

•(1)

(2)



Assign Internal Zone Paging access codes and Meet-Me answer codes, as required.

•(1)(2)

Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3X-XXXX: 50-54, 55-59: Access codeA130-A137: Group 0-7 (Paging Access)A138-A145: Group 0-7 (Meet-Me Answer)

Assign the Multiline Terminal into the re-quired Internal Zone Paging Groups.

NOTE: A maximum of 8 internal zone pag-ing is available. Up to 16 Multiline Terminals can be grouped per zone.

•(1)(2)

Y=00-07 Paging Group Number00-15: Serial No. in a Paging GroupX-XXXXXXXX: My Line No.

Assign Internal Zone Paging to each button on the Multiline Terminal.

•(1)

(2)

Y=00 X-XXXXXXXX: My Line No. + +

Key No.F1270-F1277: Group 0-7

START

CM12

CM15

CM20

CM56

CM90,

END

1-318 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1005.fm


To provide All Zone Internal Paging:

DESCRIPTION DATA

Provide the system with All Zone Internal Pag-ing.

(1)(2)

158 1 : Available

Assign Service Restriction Class A for All Zone Internal Paging to the required stations.

•(1)(2)


Allow All Zone Internal Paging in Service Restriction Class A assigned by CM12 Y=02.

•(1)

(2)



Assign an All Zone Internal Paging access code.

•(1)(2)

Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3X-XXXX: Access code (1-4 digits) A164: All Zone Internal Paging Access

Assign Group for Internal Zone Paging to the required Multiline Terminals.

NOTE: A maximum of 6 zones (0-5) internal paging groups are available. Up to 16 Multiline Terminals can be grouped per zone.

•(1)(2)

Y=00-05 Paging Group Number00-15: Serial No. in a Paging GroupX-XXXXXXXX: My Line No.

Assign an All Zone Internal Paging function key to a line button on the desired Multiline Terminals.

•(1)

(2)

Y=00 X-XXXXXXXX: My Line No. + +

Key No.F1299: All Zone Internal Paging

START

CM08

CM12

CM15

CM20

CM56

CM90,

END

1-319 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1005.fm

LAST NUMBER REDIAL

LAST NUMBER REDIAL

PROGRAMMING

NOTE: Refer to the OUTGOING CALL HISTORY (STACK DIAL) for details on programming Stack Dial. Page 1-104

DESCRIPTION DATA

Provide the system with Last Number Redial for Single Line Telephone.

(1)(2)

1770: Available

Assign the access code for Last Number Redial.

•(1)(2)


Assign the Last Number Redial or Stack Dial feature access key to each Multiline Terminal, as required.

NOTE

•(1)(2)

Y=00My Line No. + +Key No.F0069: Last Number Redial F1000: Stack Dial

Assign the Last Number Redial/Stack Dial key to each DESKCON, as required.

NOTE

•(1)

(2)

Y=00ATTCON No. (E000-E007) + + Key No.F6121: Last Number Redial/Stack Dial

START

CM08

CM20

CM90,

,

END

JULY/18/2008

1-320 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1005.fm

LEAST COST ROUTING-3/6 DIGIT


PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION DATA


Y=0-3 Number Plan Group 0-3X-XXXX: Access CodeA126: LCR Group 0A127: LCR Group 1 A128: LCR Group 2

Assign the Toll Restriction Patterns with eight kinds of Trunk Restriction Classes assigned by CM12 Y=01.Toll Restriction Pattern 00-15 are preassigned as shown below.If a new Restriction Pattern is required, change the data for Restriction Pattern 01-13 (00, 14 and 15 are fixed).

•

(1)(2)

Y=01-13Toll Restriction Pattern No. 01-131-8: Trunk Restriction Class0: Restricted 3: Allowed

START

CM20

CM81


TRUNKRESTRICTION

CLASS

Y

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 00


01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 00

1 RCA 3 0 3 3 3 0 0 0 3 3 3 3 3 0 3 0

2 RCB 3 0 3 3 0 0 0 0 3 3 0 0 0 0 3 0

3 RCC 3 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 3 0

4 RCD 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0

5 RCE 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0

6 RCF 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0

7 RCG 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0

8 RCH 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0

A

1-321 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1005.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign an Area Code Development Pattern number to each LCR Group.

•(1)(2)

Y=A0000-2: LCR Group 0-24005-4007: Area Code Development Pat-

tern No. 5-7

Assign a Route Pattern number to each area code for the Area Code Development Pattern number assigned by CM8A Y=A000.

•

(1)(2)

Y=4005-4007 Area Code Development Pattern No. 5-7X...X: Area Code, Maximum 8 digits0000-0255: Route Pattern No. 000-255

Specify the order of LCR selection for the Route Pattern number assigned by CM8A Y=4005-4007.

•

(1)

(2)

Y=0000-0255Route Pattern No. 000-2551-4: Order of LCR Selection

1: 1st2: 2nd3: 3rd4: 4th

XXX ZZXXX: 000-255: LCR Pattern No. 000-255ZZ : 00-63: Trunk Route No. 00-63

For area code deletion, designate the digits to be deleted.To delete all digits of the area code.

•

(1)

(2)

Y=5000-5255LCR Pattern No. 000-255152: Deletion of all digits of the area code

assigned by CM8A Y=4005-40070: To delete

To delete the designated digit of an area code assigned by CM8A Y=4005-4007.

•(1)

(2)

Y=5000-5255153: Designation of digit to be deleted for

area code assigned by CM8A Y=4005-4007

00 : No digit deletion01-10 : First digit deleted -First 10 digits

deleted NONE : No digit deletion

A

CM8A

B

1-322 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1005.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

For area code addition, designate the digits to be added.

•(1)

(2)

Y=5000-5255100: Designation of digit Addition Pattern

No.9000-9255: Digit Addition Pattern No.

000-255CCC : No digit addition

•

(1)(2)

Y=9000-9255Digit Addition Pattern No. 000-2550X-X...X: Digits to be added (Maximum 32

digits)X=0-9, A (*), B (#), C (Fixed Pause)

If three-digit Toll Restriction is provided, as-sign the Toll Restriction Pattern number to the LCR Pattern number.

•

(1)(2)

Y=5000-5255LCR Pattern No. 000-255000 00-15: Toll Restriction Pattern No. speci-

fied by CM81

B

CM8A

C

1-323 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1005.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

If six-digit Toll Restriction is provided, assign the following data to the LCR Pattern number and set up the six-digit Toll Restriction Pattern Tables.

(1) Specify the Trunk Restriction Classes to which 6-digit Toll Restriction applies.

Example: 412-211

RCA: No restrictions (three-digit TR)RCB: 412-211 is allowed (six-digit TR)RCC: 412-211 is allowed (six-digit TR)RCD: 412 is restricted (three-digit TR)RCE: 412 is restricted (three-digit TR)

•

(1)

(2)

Y=5000-5255LCR Pattern No. 000-255021-028: Trunk Restriction Class assigned

by CM12 Y=01021 : Unrestricted (RCA) 022 : Non-Restricted 1 (RCB) 023 : Non-Restricted 2 (RCC) 024 : Semi-Restricted 1 (RCD)025 : Semi-Restricted 2 (RCE)026 : Restricted 1 (RCF) 027 : Restricted 2 (RCG) 028 : Fully-Restricted 2 (RCH) 0 : 6-digit Toll Restriction Pattern1 : 3-digit Toll Restriction Pattern as per

CM8A Y=5000-5255>000

(2) Assign the six-digit Toll Restriction Pat-tern number to the LCR Pattern number.

•(1)(2)

Y=5000-52550208000-8049: 6-digit Toll Restriction Pattern

No. 00-49

(3) Assign the Office code (three-digits) and the availability to access the office code to the six-digit Toll Restriction Pattern num-ber assigned by (2).

•

(1)(2)

Y=8000-80496-digit Toll Restriction Pattern No. 00-49XXX: 3-digits of Office Code0 : Restricted1 : Allowed

C

CM8A

Area OfficeCode Code

021022023024025

5000 10011

CM8A

TRUNK RESTRICTION DATAYCLASS

D

1-324 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1005.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

If the prefix is to be added, assign the follow-ing data to the LCR Pattern number.

(1) Assign the 6-digit Prefix Pattern number to the LCR Pattern number.

•

(1)(2)

Y=5000-5255LCR Pattern No. 000-255150 8050-8099: 6-digit Prefix Pattern No. 00-

49CCC : No Prefix

(2) Assign the office code (three-digits) requir-ing the Prefix to the six-digit Prefix Pattern number.

•(1)(2)

Y=8000-8049XXX: 3-digit of Office Code1 : Allowed

Specify the maximum number of sending dig-its to be dialed by calling party.The maximum number of sending digits in-cluding the area codes should be assigned to each area code.

•

(1)

(2)

Y=5-7 Area Code Development Pattern No. 5-7 assigned by CM8A Y=A000X-X...X: Area Code dialed, Maximum 8

digits01-24 : 1 digit-24 digits 25-79 : 25 digits-79 digits

Provide the Toll Restriction feature to the re-quired trunk routes.

•(1)(2)


Specify route access capability for each re-striction class.

•(1)(2)

Y=051-05800-63: Trunk Route No.0 : Restricted1 : Allow

Assign the Area Code Development Pattern number for Toll Restriction and Maximum Digit Analysis to each trunk route.

•(1)(2)

Y=07600-63: Trunk Route No.05-07: Area Code Development Pattern

No. 5-7

D

CM8A

CM85

CM35

END

1-325 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1005.fm


To provide LCR with Time of Day Routing, add the following system data programming.

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the Date Pattern number to each area code for the Area Code Development Pattern number assigned by CM8A Y=A000.

•

(1)(2)

Y=4005-4007 Area Code Development Pattern No. 5-7X-X...X: Area Code Maximum 8 digits3000-3003: Date Pattern No. 0-3

Assign the Time Pattern number to each day of the week for the Date Pattern number assigned by CM8A Y=4005-4007.

•(1)

(2)

Y=3000-3003 Date Pattern No. 0-30: SUN1: MON 2: TUE 3: WED 4: THU 5: FRI 6: SAT 2000-2007: Time Pattern No. 0-7

START

CM8A

A

1-326 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1005.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the Route Pattern number to the re-quired time of day for the Time Pattern number assigned by CM8A Y=3000-3003.To define the following Time Pattern:

•(1)

(2)

Y=2000-2007 Time Pattern No. 0-7 HH MM (Time)HH : 00-23: HoursMM: 00/30: Minutes0000-0255: Route Pattern No. 000-255If Tenant Pattern is required, set 1000-1015 (Tenant Pattern No. 00-15).

If the Tenant Pattern number is assigned by CM8A Y=2000-2007, assign the Route Pattern number to the required Tenant number for the Tenant Pattern number.

•(1)(2)

Y=1000-1015 Tenant Pattern No. 00-1500-63: Tenant No.0000-0255: Route Pattern No. 000-255

A

CM8A

0:00 8:00 20:00 23:30

Route Route RoutePattern 00Pattern 01Pattern 00

Y TIME (1) ROUTE PATTERN (2)

2000 (Time Pattern No. 0) 00000030010001300200

0730

20002030

2330

0000 (Route Pattern No. 000)

2000 (Time Pattern No. 0)08000830

1930

0001 (Route Pattern No. 001)

0:00 a.m.-8:00 a.m.

8:00 p.m.-0:00 a.m.

8:00 a.m.-8:00 p.m.

END

1-327 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1005.fm


To provide C.O. operator call with LCR, assign the following system data.

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the access code for LCR Group 0. •(1)(2)

Y=0-3 Number Plan Group 0-3X-XXXX: Access CodeA126: LCR Group

Assign the Toll Restriction Patterns with eight kinds of Trunk Restriction Classes assigned by CM12 Y=01. Toll Restriction Pattern 00-15 is already programmed as shown below. If a new Restriction Pattern is required, change the data of the Restriction Pattern 01-13 (00, 14 and 15 are fixed).

•(1)(2)

Y=01-13 Toll Restriction Pattern No. 01-131-8: Trunk Restriction Class0: Restricted 3: Allowed

Assign the Route Pattern number to each area code for the Area Code Development Pattern number assigned by CM8A Y=A000.

•(1)

(2)

Y=4010 Area Code for C.O. Operator X-XXXXXXXX: Area Code for C.O.

Operator This data is only effective for an access code assigned to CM20>A126.0000-0255: Route Pattern No. 000-255

START

CM20

CM81


TRUNKRESTRICTION

CLASS

Y

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 00


01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 00

1 RCA 3 0 3 3 3 0 0 0 3 3 3 3 3 0 3 0

2 RCB 3 0 3 3 0 0 0 0 3 3 0 0 0 0 3 0

3 RCC 3 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 3 0

4 RCD 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0

5 RCE 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0

6 RCF 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0

7 RCG 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0

8 RCH 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0

CM8A

A

1-328 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1005.fm


NOTE: See Examples in the following pages.

LCR Development Sequence

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the 1st order of LCR selection for the Route Pattern number assigned by CM8A Y=4010.

•(1)(2)

Y=0000-0255 Route Pattern No. 000-2551: 1st order of LCR selectionXXX ZZ XXX: 000-255: LCR Pattern No.ZZ : 00-63: Trunk Route No.

Assign the Toll Restriction Pattern number to the LCR Pattern number assigned by CM8A Y=4010.

•(1)(2)

Y=5000-5255 LCR Pattern No. 000-255000 00-13, 15: Toll Restriction Pattern No.

specified by CM81

A

CM8A

END

CM8A

LCRACCESS

CODEA000

AREA CODE 4005

4007

2000

2007

3000

3003

1000

1015

0000

0255

5000

5255TIME PATTERN

DATE PATTERN

TENANT PATTERN

AREA CODEDEVELOPMENT PATTERN

ROUTE PATTERN

LCR PATTERN DIGIT ADDITION

TRUNK ROUTE SELECTION

TRUNK RESTRICTIONPATTERN 00-15

DIGIT DELETION

DIGIT ADDITION

9000

9255

1ST

2ND

3RD

4TH

1-329 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1005.fm


Example 1:

Conditions:(1) Order of LCR Selection:

1st... Route 02 (FX)2nd...Route 01 (WATS)3rd... Route 00 (DDD)

(2) Dialed Number:9-212-NXX-XXXX

9 : Access Code212 : Area CodeNXX : Office CodeXXXX: Telephone Number

(3) Toll Restriction Pattern:–: Allowed

×: Restricted

RCA RCB RCC RCD RCE00 – – – – –01 – – – × ×

02 – – × × ×

9-212-NXX-XXXX

RT00

RT01

RT02

DDD

WATS

FXC.O. AREA CODE

212

NXX-XXXX

CLASSROUTE

1-330 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1005.fm


Programming for Example 1:

STEP1: Assign “9” to the access code of LCR Group 0 in Numbering Plan Group 0.+ 200 + + 9 + + A126 +

STEP2: Assign Area Code Development Pattern No. 5 to LCR Group 0.+ 8AA000 + + 0 + + 4005 +

STEP3: Assign Route Pattern No. 00 to area code (212) for Area code Development Pattern No. 5.+ 8A4005 + + 212 + + 0000 +

STEP4: In Route Pattern No. 00, specify the order of LCR selection as shown below.1st: Route 02 (FX)

+ 8A0000 + + 1 + + 000 02 +LCR Pattern No. 000

2nd: Route 01 (WATS)+ 8A0000 + + 2 + + 001 01 +

LCR Pattern No. 0013rd: Route 00 (DDD)

+ 8A0000 + + 3 + + 002 00 +LCR Pattern No. 002

STEP5: In LCR Pattern No. 000 (for FX), delete the area code dialed.+ 8A5000 + + 151 + + 0 +

LCR Pattern No. 000 To delete

STEP6: Assign the Toll Restriction Pattern to each Route (LCR Pattern No.).For LCR Pattern No. 000 (Route 02):

+ 8A5000 + + 000 + + 10 +Toll Restriction Pattern No. specified by CM81

For LCR Pattern No. 001 (Route 01):+ 8A5001 + + 000 + + 09 +

For LCR Pattern No. 002 (Route 00):+ 8A5002 + + 000 + + 01 +

STEP7: Assign the maximum number of digits dialed. + 855 + + 212 + + 10 +

Area Code 10 digits (including the area code)

ST DE DE EXE

ST DE DE EXE

ST DE DE EXE

ST DE DE EXE

ST DE DE EXE

ST DE DE EXE

ST DE DE EXE

ST DE DE EXE

ST DE DE EXE

ST DE DE EXE

ST DE DE EXEArea CodeDevelopmentPattern No. 5

1-331 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1005.fm


Example 2:

Conditions: (1) Order of LCR Selection:

1st... Route 02 (FX)2nd...Route 01 (WATS)3rd... Route 00 (DDD)

(2) Dialed Number:• 9-214-232/236-XXXXNOTE: 236 is a Toll Office.

• 9-213-NXX-XXXX

(3) Toll Restriction Pattern:

NOTE: Area Code 213 is restricted.

–: Allowed×: Restricted

RCA RCB RCC RCD RCE00 – – – – –01 – – × ×

02 – × × ×

RT00

RT01

RT02DDD

WATS

FX

C.O.

AREA CODE 214

236

2321-236-XXXX

213-NXX-XXXX

AREA CODE 213

CLASSROUTE

NOTE–

NOTE–

1-332 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1005.fm



STEP1: Assign “9” to the access code of LCR Group 0 in Numbering Plan Group 0.+ 200 + + 9 + + A126 +

STEP2: Assign Area Code Development Pattern No. 5 to LCR Group 0.+ 8AA000 + + 0 + + 4005 +

STEP3: Assign Route Pattern Nos. 00 and 01to area codes 214 and 213 respectively.+ 8A4005 + + 214 + + 0000 +

Route Pattern No. 00

+ 8A4005 + + 213 + + 0001 +Route Pattern No. 01

STEP4: Specify the order of LCR selection to each Route Pattern.For Route Pattern 00:1st: Route 00 (FX)

+ 8A0000 + + 1 + + 000 00 +LCR Pattern No. 000

2nd: Route 01 (WATS)+ 8A0000 + + 2 + + 001 01 +


+ 8A0000 + + 3 + + 002 02 +LCR Pattern No. 002

For Route Pattern 01:1st: Route 00 (FX)

+ 8A0001 + + 1 + + 003 00 +LCR Pattern No. 003

2nd: Route 01 (WATS)+ 8A0001 + + 2 + + 004 01 +


+ 8A0001 + + 3 + + 005 02 + LCR Pattern No. 005

ST DE DE EXE

ST DE DE EXE

ST DE DE EXE

ST DE DE EXE

ST DE DE EXE

ST DE DE EXE

ST DE DE EXE

ST DE DE EXE

ST DE DE EXE

ST DE DE EXE

1-333 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1005.fm


STEP5: In LCR Pattern No. 000 and 003, delete the area code dialed.+ 8A5000 + + 151 + + 0 +

LCR Pattern No. 000 To be deleted+ 8A5003 + + 151 + + 0 +

LCR Pattern No. 003 To be deleted

STEP6: Assign the Toll Restriction Pattern to each LCR Pattern No. For LCR Pattern No. 000:

+ 8A5000 + + 000 + + 01 +LCR Pattern No. 000 Toll Restriction Pattern No. specified by CM81

For LCR Pattern No. 001:+ 8A5001 + + 000 + + 03 +





–: Allowed×: Restricted

AREACODE

ROUTEPATTERN No.

ORDEROF LCR ROUTE LCR

PATTERN No. RCA RCB RCC RCD RCE

214 001st 00 000 – – – – –2nd 01 001 – – – × ×

3rd 02 002 – – × × ×

213 011st 00 003 – – – – –2nd 01 004 – – × × ×

3rd 02 005 – × × × ×

TOLL RESTRICTION

ST DE DE EXE

ST DE DE EXE

ST DE DE EXE

ST DE DE EXE

ST DE DE EXE

ST DE DE EXE

ST DE DE EXE

ST DE DE EXE

1-334 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1005.fm


STEP7: In LCR Pattern No. 000, designate the prefix “1”, in addition to the office code 236, by the six-digit Prefix Pattern.

• Designation of 6-digit Prefix Pattern No.+ 8A5000 + + 150 + + 8050 +

6-digit Prefix Pattern No. 00

• Designation of office code requiring Prefix Pattern.+ 8A8000 + + 236 + + 1 +

6-digit Prefix Pattern No. 00

STEP8: Assign the maximum number of digits dialed.+ 855 + + 21 + + 10 +

Area Code 10 digits

ST DE DE EXE

ST DE DE EXE

ST DE DE EXE

Area CodeDevelopmentPattern No. 5

1-335 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1005.fm

LINE LOCKOUT

LINE LOCKOUT

PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION DATA

Provide the system with Howler Tone sent to locked-out stations, if required.

(1)(2)


Assign the line lockout indication on the DSS Console.

(1)(2)


When the Howler Tone is provided (CM08>153=1), assign Howler Tone sending to required stations.

•(1)(2)

Y=04X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.1 : To provide

Specify the number of stations in Line Lockout to give a Alarm.

(1)(2)

0101-99 : 1 station-99 stationsNONE : No “Lockout Alarm Display”

START

CM08

CM13

CM42

END

1-336 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1005.fm

LINE PRESELECTION

LINE PRESELECTION

PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify the operation of Line Preselection on a Multiline Terminal.

(1)(2)

1990 : Only desired line key1 : Speaker key is required after pressing

the desired line key

Provide Group Feature Key on Multiline Ter-minal with Line Preselection function, if re-quired.

NOTE: Set the second data of CM08>199 to 0 when the second data of this com-mand is set to 0.

(1)(2)


START

CM08

END

1-337 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1005.fm

MULTILINE TERMINAL

MULTILINE TERMINAL

PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION DATA


•(1)

(2)


Assign the Multiline Terminal station number to the associated Physical Port number.

NOTE 1: When DLC blade is accommodated, the Multiline Terminal station num-ber must be assigned for the all lines of the blade.

NOTE 2: For the following features, do not assign 5 or more digits station num-ber.• SMDR/PMS• Front Desk Instrument (Multiline

Terminal)

•(1)

(2)

Y=00XX YY ZZ: Physical Port No.XX: 01-50: Unit No.YY: 01-18: Slot No.ZZ : 01-32: Circuit No.FX-FXXXXXXXX: Multiline Terminal Station No.X-XXXXXXXX represents My Line No.

Allow the accommodation of Dterm70. •(1)(2)



NOTE 2: When the second data is set to “0”, Dterm70 cannot be accommodated with Dterm75 under the same DLC blade (DT300 Series can be accommodated with Dterm85).

Allow the accommodation of Single Line Tele-phone to Multiline Terminal multiline, if re-quired (Assignment for Single Line Telephone only).

•(1)(2)

Y=05X-XXXXXXXX: Station No. 0: Accommodated

Assign the station numbers, trunk numbers or service access keys on each Multiline Termi-nal, if required.

•(1)(2)

Y=00My Line No. + + Key No.Refer to Command Manual (CM90)

START

CM05

BLADE RESET

CM10

CM13BLADE RESET

CM12

CM90,

A

JULY/18/2008

1-338 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1005.fm

MULTILINE TERMINAL

DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify the kind of Multiline Terminal. •(1)(2)

Y=24 X-XXXXXXXX: My Line No.0 : B mode7 : A mode

NOTE 1: The table below shows the combination of Line/Trunk/Feature Keys and One Touch Keys of the Multiline Terminals. For key layout, refer to the Command Manual.

NOTE 2: After the 2nd data of CM12 Y=24 is changed, pull out and reconnect the modular connec-tor of the Multiline Terminal.

Specify whether call termination on each line key is indicated on the Call Indicator Lamp or not.

•(1)(2)

Y=03My Line No. + + Key No.0 : Not indicated 1 : To indicate

Assign the Outgoing Call Preset/Answer Pre-set functions to Multiline Terminal, if required.

(1)(2)


Specify whether the answer key rings on TAS and Pooled Line or not.

(1)(2)


Specify the Delayed Ringing timing. •(1)(2)

Y=10901-20: 1024-20480 ms.


A

CM12

CM12 Y=24: 7 (A mode) CM12 Y=24: 0 (B mode)

Line/Trunk/Feature Keys

One Touch Keys

Line/Trunk/Feature Keys

One Touch Keys

DT330/DT730 (12D) 12 0 12 0

DT330/DT730 (24D) 18 6 24 0

DT330/DT730/DT750 (8LD [DESI-LESS])

16 16 24 8

Dterm Series i/DtermIP/Dterm75 16 16 24 8

CM90,

CM08

CM41

B

JULY/18/2008

1-339 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1005.fm

MULTILINE TERMINAL

DESCRIPTION DATA

Provide Trunk-Direct Appearances to the trunk number.

•(1)(2)



(1)(2)

19001-31 : PAD data





B

CM30

CM42~

~

END

JULY/18/2008

1-340 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1005.fm

MULTILINE TERMINAL

To provide the Digital Single Line on Multiline Terminal, do the following programming.

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign Service Restriction Class C to each sta-tion.

•(1)(2)


Disable Dial Tone Activation when pressing one-touch speed key while terminal is idle.

•

(1)

(2)

Y=084 One-Touch activates DT when Ter-minal Idle

00-15: Service Restriction Class C assigned by CM12 Y=07

0 : Remain Idle1 : Off-Hook and Dial Tone

Assign and delete feature keys.

NOTE: Use Key number 93 for Redial key. Use Key number 96 for Flash key.

Prime line should be assigned to Key 9.

Digital Single Line is a Multiline Terminal and can use any key assigned in CM90. However, the Digital Single Line Terminal has no LEDs, speaker, or microphone. Assign any features that can be used without these devices.

•(1)

(2)

Y=00 Key DataX-XXXXXXXX: My Line No. + +

Key No.F1100-F1199: Station Speed Dialing 00-99F1012 : Conference key

This key is required to pro-gram speed dial keys.

F0069 : Last number redial (Key No. 93)

F1004 : Transfer key (Key No. 96)

Assign prime line to My Line. (1)(2)

X-XXXXXXXX: My Line No.X-XXXXXXXX: Prime Line

START

CM12

CM15

CM90,

CNF

TRF

CM93

END

JULY/18/2008

1-341 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1005.fm

MULTILINE TERMINAL

If the Dterm Series i is not used for a certain time, the luminosity of a lamp on the Multiline Terminal canbe lower automatically for the power saving.To provide the power saving for the Dterm Series i, do the following programming.

NOTE: This data is effective only for the Dterm Series i. For IP Station, this data is not effective.

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the time to start the power saving to the required stations.

•(1)(2)

Y=44X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.0 : 1 minute later1 : 2 minutes later2 : 4 minutes later3 : 8 minutes later4 : 16 minutes later5 : 32 minutes later6 : 64 minutes later7 : Not use the power saving

START

CM12

END

JULY/18/2008

1-342 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1005.fm

MULTILINE TERMINAL

To provide Multiline Terminal (DESI less), do the following programming.

DESCRIPTION DATA


•(1)(2)


Specify the indication when a station is set to the Line Key of Multiline Terminal (DESI less).

•

(1)

(2)

Y=207 Indication when a station is set to the Line Key of Multiline Terminal (DESI less)

00-15: Service Restriction Class A assigned by CM12 Y=02

0 : Station Number1 : Station Name

Assign Trunk Indication Code to each trunk, if required.

•(1)(2)

Y=19000-511: Trunk No.XXXX: Trunk ID Code

Assign a trunk name number to each trunk route, if required.

•(1)(2)


CM35 Y=000 is displayed16-63: Trunk Name No. 16-63

Specify the indication when a trunk is set to the Line Key of Multiline Terminal (DESI less).

•(1)(2)

Y=20100-63: Trunk Route No.0 : Trunk Route Name (4 characters)1 : Trunk Route No. (2 digits) +

Trunk No. (4 digits)3 : Trunk Route Name (4 characters) +

Trunk No. (4 digits)

START

CM12

CM15

CM30

CM35

A

JULY/18/2008

1-343 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1005.fm

MULTILINE TERMINAL

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the stored number to each Memory Slot number, if required.

•(1)

(2)

Y=0XX YY ZXX: 00-19: 1000-Slot Memory Block No.YY: 00-99: 10-Slot Memory Block No.Z : 0-9: Memory Parcel No.Stored No.:Outgoing Call Access Code (Maximum 4 digits) + + Called Party’s No. (Maxi-mum 26 digits)/Station No. (Maximum 8 digits)NONE : No data

Assign the station name to be displayed to each Memory Slot number, by character codes or character, if required.

•(1)

(2)


20-7F (Maximum 32 digits, 16 characters)


Page A-2

•(1)

(2)



A

CM74

,

B

JULY/18/2008

1-344 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1005.fm

MULTILINE TERMINAL

DESCRIPTION DATA

Enter the desired station user’s name to each station number by CM77 Y=0 or CM77 Y=1, if required.

•(1)(2)

Y=0 By Character CodeX-XXXXXXXX: Station No. Character Code 20-7F (Maximum 32 dig-its)See APPENDIX A: Character Code Table.

Page A-2

•(1)(2)

Y=1 By CharacterX-XXXXXXXX: Station No. A-Z, 0-9: Character


Assign the desired trunk route name to each trunk route by CM77 Y=2 or CM77 Y=3, if re-quired.

•(1)

(2)

Y=2 By Character Code00-14, 16-63: Trunk Route Name No.

assigned by CM35 Y=003Character Code 20-7F (Maximum 8 digits)See APPENDIX A: Character Code Table.

Page A-2

•(1)

(2)

Y=3 By Character00-14, 16-63: Trunk Route Name No.

assigned by CM35 Y=003A-Z, 0-9: Character


Assign the station numbers, trunk numbers or service access keys on each Multiline Termi-nal, if required.

•(1)(2)

Y=00My Line No. + + Key No.Refer to Command Manual (CM90)

B

CM77

CM90,

C

JULY/18/2008

1-345 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1005.fm

MULTILINE TERMINAL

DESCRIPTION DATA

When connecting D16 (LD)-R ADM to Dterm Series i 16LD and using it as One Touch keys/Directories, allocate the memory area for Mul-tiline Terminal One Touch keys to each station.

(1)(2)

X-XXXXXXXX: My Line No.WW XX 0 ZZ WW : 00-19: 1000-Slot Memory Block

No.XX : 00-99: 10-Slot Memory Start

Block No.ZZ : 01/02: Number of 10-Slot Mem-

ory Blocks (10 memories/20 memories)

NONE : No data

NOTE 1: Station Speed Dialing and Multiline Terminal One Touch keys uses the common memory area. Be sure to allocate the different memory area by CM94 from the memory area set by CM73.

NOTE 2: If the station number is assigned to One Touch keys using 1000-Slot Memory Block number 04-19, the lamp does not show the busy state.

Provide to send the indication data to Line Key LCD of Multiline Terminal (DESI less)

•(1)(2)

Y=29X-XXXXXXXX: My Line No.0: To send indication data

C

CM94

0

9

1

Memory Parcel

00

99

01

10-SlotMemory Block

00

~~

03

04


4000 Memory

19

Parcels

6000 MemoryParcels

CM12

END

JULY/18/2008

1-346 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1005.fm

MULTILINE TERMINAL

To specify the display language for each station, do the following programming:

To specify the display language for each system, do the following programming:

DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify the display language for a Multiline Terminal to each station.

•(1)(2)

Y=63X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.00 : Japanese01 : EnglishNONE : As per CM04 Y=00>00

NOTE: When the setting of the SIP Multiline Terminal is changed, a reset of the terminal is re-quired.

Specify whether the monetary unit for ISDN call charge is displayed or not.

NOTE: When setting the second data to 1 and CM04 Y=00>00 is set to 01, 31, $ is displayed.

(1)(2)

8200 : Monetary unit is not displayed1 : As per CM04 Y=00>00

DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify the display language for a Multiline Terminal to each station.

•(1)(2)

Y=63X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.NONE : As per CM04 Y=00>00

Display language for Digital Multiline Termi-nal/Attendant console/DESKCON LCD (Sys-tem Base).

•(1)(2)

Y=000000 : Japanese01 : English31 : English

NOTE: When changing the data with online, the data is valid after the DLC blade is unplugged and plugged in or pull out and reconnect the modular connector of the terminal.

Specify whether the monetary unit for ISDN call charge is displayed or not.

NOTE: When setting the second data to 1 and CM04 Y=00>00 is set to 01, 31, $ is displayed.

(1)(2)

8200 : Monetary unit is not displayed1 : As per CM04 Y=00>00

START

CM12

CM08

END

START

CM12

CM04

CM08

END

JULY/18/2008

1-347 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1005.fm

MULTILINE TERMINAL

To control the volume (Side Tone level) of Multiline Terminal, use the following command.

DESCRIPTION DATA

Set the volume (Side Tone level) of Multiline Terminal.

(1)(2)

68: Dterm75 (Series E)/Dterm85 (Series i)00 : -54 dB01 : -48 dB02 : -42 dB03 : -36 dB04 : -30 dB05 : -24 dB06 : -18 dBNONE : -30dB

NOTE 1: Do not change this data normally, incorrect data settings may cause howler of low-level speech.

NOTE 2: For the volume control (Side tone level) of the DT300/DT700 Series, set the data by CM42>198.

(1)(2)

198: DT300/DT700 Series00 : -54 dB01 : -48 dB02 : -42 dB03 : -36 dB04 : -30 dB05 : -24 dB06 : -18 dBNONE : -18 dB

NOTE: For the volume control (Side tone level) of the Multiline Terminal, set the data by CM42>68.

START

CM42

RESET

END

JULY/18/2008

1-348 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1005.fm

MULTILINE TERMINALAUTOMATIC IDLE RETURN

AUTOMATIC IDLE RETURN

PROGRAMMING

HARDWARE REQUIRED


DESCRIPTION DATA

Provide the system with this feature. (1)(2)

172 1 : Available

Specify whether this feature is available or not, in case the PBR time out occurs after the Redial/Speaker key is pressed with the Multi-line Terminal is on-hook condition.

(1)(2)


START

CM08

END

JULY/18/2008

1-349 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1005.fm

MULTILINE TERMINALCALLING NAME AND NUMBER DISPLAY

CALLING NAME AND NUMBER DISPLAY

PROGRAMMING

Refer to ALPHANUMERIC DISPLAY. Page 1-6

HARDWARE REQUIRED


JULY/18/2008

1-350 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1005.fm

MULTILINE TERMINALDYNAMIC DIAL PAD

DYNAMIC DIAL PAD

PROGRAMMING

Do the following programming to make an outgoing call. Press any key on the dial pad of a Multiline Ter-minal without pressing a Speaker key or going off-hook.

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign a Prime line to the Multiline Terminal. (1)(2)

X-XXXXXXXX: My Line No. X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.


•(1)(2)


Allow Dynamic Dial Pad in the Service Re-striction Class A assigned by CM12 Y=02.

•(1)(2)

Y=12000-15: Service Restriction Class A0: Allow

START

CM93

CM12

CM15

END

JULY/18/2008

1-351 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1005.fm

MULTILINE TERMINALGROUP FEATURE KEY

GROUP FEATURE KEY

PROGRAMMING

To provide the Group Feature Key for the sub line of Multiline Terminal, do the following programming.

DESCRIPTION DATA

Provide Group Feature Key for the sub line of Multiline Terminal, when the Multiline Termi-nal belongs to the group of stations and accom-modates the station number/My line number of group members to the Multiline Terminal mul-tiline as the sub line.

NOTE: Do not set the second data 0 to the My line number of Multiline Termi-nals.

•(1)(2)

Y=04Sub Line No. + + Key No.0 : To provide1 : Not provided

Specify the operation of Group Feature Key on Multiline Terminal when an incoming call/holding call cannot be seized with My line be-cause it is used by the other Multiline Terminal on multiline.

(1)(2)

5570 : Group Feature Key is unavailable1 : Group Feature Key is available by

seizing Sub line

Specify whether the service which is set to a group member station is effective when the group members are called by Group Feature Key.

NOTE: When the second data of CM08>585 is set to 0, the following services are effective.Call Forwarding-All Calls/Split Call Forwarding-All Calls/Call Forwarding-All Calls of Mobility Access/Do Not Disturb/Transfer the call to station set Do Not Disturb (CM51 Y=10)/Call Forwarding-Logout

(1)(2)

5850 : Effective1 : Ineffective

START

CM90,

CM08

END

JULY/18/2008

1-352 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1005.fm

MULTILINE TERMINALMUTE KEY

MUTE KEY

PROGRAMMING

HARDWARE REQUIRED


DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the MUTE Key to the Multiline Termi-nal.

•(1)(2)

Y=00My Line No. + + Key No.F5013: MUTE Key

START

CM90,

END

JULY/18/2008

1-353 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1005.fm

MULTILINE TERMINALMY LINE NUMBER DISPLAY

MY LINE NUMBER DISPLAY

PROGRAMMING

HARDWARE REQUIRED


DESCRIPTION DATA


•(1)(2)


Allow the My Line number display in the Ser-vice Restriction Class A assigned by CM12 Y=02.

•(1)(2)

Y=210 00-15: Service Restriction Class A1 : Allow

Specify whether Calling number will be dis-played when a calling station abandons a call before the call is answered.

(1)(2)


After the above data setting is completed,allow the system to request the My Line num-ber information of 3 station by CM12 Y=29.The My Line number information is sent to a Multiline Terminal control section of the sys-tem according to CM15 Y=210 data setting.When sending the My Line number informa-tion is completed, 2nd data of CM15 Y=210 returns to 1 from 0.

•(1)(2)

Y=29X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.0 : Allow1 : Not allowed

NOTE 1: When you change CM15 Y=210 data under On-line mode (without CM12 Y=29 data set-ting), you need to wait several hours until the My Line number display is activated.

NOTE 2: To activate the My Line number display immediately after setting CM15 Y=210 under On-line mode, set 2nd data of CM12 Y=29 to 1(Request a Multiline Terminal station to send the My Line number).

NOTE 3: The My Line number display is activated immediately after plugging or unplugging Mul-tiline Terminal cable or resetting the system.

START

CM12

CM15

CM08

CM12

END

JULY/18/2008

1-354 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1005.fm

MULTILINE TERMINALPRESET DIALING

PRESET DIALING

PROGRAMMING

HARDWARE REQUIRED


DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign Service Restriction Class A for Preset Dialing to the required stations.

•(1)(2)


Allow Preset Dialing on Multiline Terminal in Service Restriction Class A assigned by CM12 Y=02.

•(1)

(2)


signed by CM12 Y=020 : Restricted1 : Allow

Specify that the Soft Key feature is available to each Multiline Terminal.

•(1)(2)

Y=22X-XXXXXXXX: My Line No.1 : Available

START

CM12

CM15

CM12

END

JULY/18/2008

1-355 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1005.fm

MULTILINE TERMINALPRIME LINE PICKUP

PRIME LINE PICKUP

PROGRAMMING

HARDWARE REQUIRED


DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign station or trunk to desired Multiline Terminal station as Prime Line. It is recom-mended that the My Line be assigned as the Prime Line.

(1)(2)

X-XXXXXXXX: My Line No. X-XXXXXXXX: Station No. NOTED000-D511: Trunk No.

NOTE: My Line number or Virtual Line number can be assigned to the Prime Line. However, the data station and Single Line Tele-phone cannot be assigned to the Prime Line.

START

CM93

END

JULY/18/2008

1-356 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1005.fm

MULTILINE TERMINALRECALL KEY

RECALL KEY

PROGRAMMING

For internal call: RECALL Key is initially assigned to all Multiline Terminals.

For outside call:

HARDWARE REQUIRED


DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the data for hookflash signal sending to the route number assigned by CM30 Y=00.

•(1)(2)

Y=01600-63: Trunk Route No.1 : Sending

Assign a Flash Over Trunk key to the required Multiline Terminal.

•(1)(2)

Y=00My Line No. + + Key No.F1009

Specify duration of the hookflash signal to trunks.

•(1)(2)

Y=25601-98: 32-3136 ms.

(32 ms. increments)99 : 4080 ms.

If no data is set, default setting is 640 ms.

START

CM35

CM90,

CM41

END

JULY/18/2008

1-357 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1005.fm

MULTILINE TERMINALRELAY CONTROL FUNCTION KEY

RELAY CONTROL FUNCTION KEY

PROGRAMMING

To use the External Relay Interface on CPU:

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the function of relay control via Multi-line Terminal to the External Relay Interface on CPU.

•(1)(2)

Y=00312, 313: External Relay Interface on CPU15XXXX: 00: Relay Control (On/Off) Function

Key via Multiline Terminal

Assign the Relay Control (ON/OFF) key on the required Multiline Terminal.

•(1)(2)

Y=00My Line No. + + Key No.F7 XX Z312, 313: External Relay Interface on CPU

assigned by CM44

START

CM44

CM90,

END

JULY/18/2008

1-358 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1005.fm


To use the PGD(2)-U10 ADP:

DESCRIPTION DATA



•(1)

(2)



•(1)

(2)




•(1)(2)



•(1)(2)




START

CM05

BLADE RESET

CM10

CM12

CM13

BLADE RESET

A

JULY/18/2008

1-359 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1005.fm


HARDWARE REQUIREDPGD(2)-U10 ADP/External Relay Interface on CPUExternal equipment provided locally Multiline Terminal and DLC blade

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the function of relay control via Multi-line Terminal to the PGD(2)-U10 ADP.

•(1)

(2)

Y=00XX YXX: 00-31: Relay Group No.Y : 0-3: Circuit No.15XXXX: 00: Relay Control (On/Off) Function

Key via Multiline Terminal


•(1)(2)


Assign the Relay Control (ON/OFF) key on the required Multiline Terminal.

•(1)(2)

Y=00My Line No. + + Key No.F7 XX ZXX: 00-31: Relay Group No. assigned by

CM44Z : 0-3: Circuit No. assigned by CM44

A

CM44

CM90,

END

JULY/18/2008

1-360 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1005.fm

MULTILINE TERMINALRING FREQUENCY CONTROL

RING FREQUENCY CONTROL

PROGRAMMING

To control the ring frequency by system data programming:

DESCRIPTION DATA

Enable the frequency control by system data programming.

(1)(2)

3901 : As per CM15 Y=083, 084, 093, CM35

Y=034, 164, CM65 Y=40


•(1)(2)


Specify the Ringer Tone Pattern of the Multi-line Terminal for terminating calls from a sta-tion in the Service Restriction Class C assigned by CM12 Y=07.

•(1)

(2)

Y=083, 084, 09300-15: Service Restriction Class C

assigned by CM12 Y=07See the table below.


•(1)(2)


START

CM08

RESET

CM12

CM15

Y=083 Y=084 Y=093: 0 Y=093: 10 0 Ringer Tone Pattern 3 Ringer Tone Pattern 70 1 Ringer Tone Pattern 6 Ringer Tone Pattern 11 0 Ringer Tone Pattern 5 Ringer Tone Pattern 01 1 Ringer Tone Pattern 4 Ringer Tone Pattern 2

CM35


A

JULY/18/2008

1-361 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1005.fm


To specify the ringer tone pattern of the Multiline Terminal to each DID number:

DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify the Ringer Tone Pattern of the Multi-line Terminal on DID calls.For this assignment, do not set CM76 Y=23 to 7 (As per CM35 Y=034/164).

•(1)

(2)


assigned by CM76 Y=00/90 0: Ringer Tone Pattern 01: Ringer Tone Pattern 12: Ringer Tone Pattern 23: Ringer Tone Pattern 34: Ringer Tone Pattern 45: Ringer Tone Pattern 56: Ringer Tone Pattern 6

A

CM76

B

JULY/18/2008

1-362 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1005.fm


To set the ring frequency of the Multiline Terminal:

DESCRIPTION DATA


•(1)(2)

Y=4000-63: Tenant No. See the table below.


B

CM65


Y=40: 1












END

JULY/18/2008

1-363 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1005.fm


To control the ring frequency at the Multiline Terminal:

HARDWARE REQUIRED


DESCRIPTION DATA

Disable ring frequency by system data pro-gramming.

(1)(2)

390 0: By pressing feature key and dialing 3

(1)(2)

2620: Available

START

CM08

RESET

END

JULY/18/2008

1-364 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1005.fm

MULTILINE TERMINALRINGING LINE PICKUP

RINGING LINE PICKUP

PROGRAMMING

HARDWARE REQUIRED


DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign Service Restriction Class C for Ringing Line Pickup.

•(1)(2)


Allow Ringing Line Pickup in Service Restric-tion Class C assigned by CM12 Y=07.

•(1)

(2)



Assign Service Restriction Class C for Ring-ing-Line Pickup by Speaker key, if required.

•(1)

(2)


signed by CM12 Y=07 0: Ringing Line Pickup by Speaker key is

provided

START

CM12

CM15

END

JULY/18/2008

1-365 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1005.fm

MULTILINE TERMINALSOFT KEY

SOFT KEY

PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify whether the Soft Key feature is avail-able to each Multiline Terminal.

•(1)(2)

Y=22X-XXXXXXXX: My Line No. 1 : Available

Assign Soft Key Pattern number to each Mul-tiline Terminal.

•(1)(2)

Y=23X-XXXXXXXX: My Line No. 0 : Pattern No. 01 : Pattern No. 12 : Pattern No. 23 : Pattern No. 3

START

CM12

A

JULY/18/2008

1-366 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1005.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the function of each Soft Key on each status of the Multiline Terminal.

To the 2nd data of this command, the 2nd data (F0XXX, F1XXX, F50XX) of CM90 should be assigned except for Scroll key data (F5002).

The LCD shows a maximum of 4 Soft Keys at once. If assigning more than 4 Soft Keys on one status, it is necessary to assign Scroll key at every 4 keys (on 1st through 4th display).

NOTE 1: Scroll key must be assigned as a key for each active display.

NOTE 2: Help key is only available in Pattern No. 3.

NOTE 3: Pattern No. 3 is fixed.

NOTE 4: For Dial By Name assignment, refer to DIAL BY NAME.

Page 1-176

NOTE 5: The button numbers can be assigned by CM9A are as follows.F0000-F0099F0100-F0163F0200-F0231F0A00-F0A99F0B00-F0B49F1000-F1099F1100-F1199F1200-F1299F1300-F1363F5000-F5099

•

(1)

Y=00-03 Soft Key Pattern No. 0-3 assigned by CM12 Y=23aa bb aa: 00-15: Status No.

00: Idle State01: During dialing (Holding no call)02: During dialing (Holding station/

trunk)03: During calling (Holding no call)04: During calling (Holding station/

trunk) 05: Being called 06: When called party is busy

(Holding no call)07: When called party is busy

(Holding station/trunk) 08: When called party sets DND09: Trunk Busy10: During Speaking (Holding no call)11: During Speaking (Holding station/

trunk)bb: Soft Key No. 00-15

00-03: Indicated on 1st display04-07: Indicated on 2nd display08-11: Indicated on 3rd display12-15: Indicated on 4th display

(2) F5002 : Scroll key to change Soft Key Indication

F5029 : Call HistoryFXXXX : Setting of each function

(Same as “F0XXX, F1XXX, F50XX” of CM90)

NONE : No data

A

CM9A

B

JULY/18/2008

1-367 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1005.fm


HARDWARE REQUIRED

Multiline Terminal with Soft Keys and DLC blade

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the characters indicated on each status of the Multiline Terminal, corresponding to the Soft Key function assigned by CM9A Y=00-03.

•

(1)(2)

Y=10-13 Soft Key Pattern No. 0-3 assigned by CM12 Y=23Same as Y=00-03XX...XX: Soft Key name indicated on

LCD (Maximum 12 characters)


Page A-2

B

CM9A

END

JULY/18/2008

1-368 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1005.fm

MULTILINE TERMINALVOLUME CONTROL

VOLUME CONTROL

PROGRAMMING

HARDWARE REQUIRED


DESCRIPTION DATA


•(1)(2)

Y=02X-XXXXXXXX: My Line No. XX ZZXX: 00-15 : Service Restriction Class A

Allow or restrict the system to keep the volume level changed by the volume button on Multi-line Terminal, after the call is finished.

•(1)

(2)



START

CM12

CM15

END

JULY/18/2008

1-369 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1006.fm

MESSAGE CENTER INTERFACE (MCI)SYSTEM OUTLINE

MESSAGE CENTER INTERFACE (MCI)SYSTEM OUTLINEThe Message Center Interface (MCI) provides an interface with a customer supplied Voice Mail System(VMS) which can send Message Waiting lamp control data to the PBX.The MCI can provide the following operations.

• Incoming call information is sent to the VMS when a call to the VMS terminates.• Control of Message Waiting lamps is based on information sent from the VMS.

The MCI interface is a half duplex EIA-RS232C asynchronous data link that operates under a specificmessage protocol and format.The system outline of the MCI is shown below.

MCI with CPUThe Central Processing Unit (CPU) is required to make a data link with a customer supplied VMS and theanalog line circuit (LC) to interface with the VMS.

• CPU blade:The CPU stores call information for stations and provides the RS-232C ports for a VMS.The CPU keeps supervising the status of the VMS. If the VMS is not ready for receiving information(Busy Status), the CPU temporarily stores the call information into its internal memory. The CPUstores call information of a maximum of 15 calls.

• LC blade:The LC is used for the VMS stations. The UCD or Station Hunting feature is usually provided withthe VMS stations.

1-370 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1006.fm

MESSAGE CENTER INTERFACE (MCI)SYSTEM OUTLINE

System Outline of MCI with CPU

LC

DLC

DLC

PBX

LC

LC

TDSW

CPU

VMS

Single Line Telephonewith Message Waiting Lamp

Multiline Terminal

Attendant Console

UCD Groupor Hunting Group

TRK NETWORK

DLC : Digital Line Circuit BladeLC : Analog Line Circuit BladeCPU : Central Processing UnitTRK : COT, DTI, PRT, BRT BladeVMS : Voice Mail SystemTDSW: Time Division Switch

RS-232C Cable

1-371 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1006.fm

MESSAGE CENTER INTERFACE (MCI)HARDWARE REQUIRED

HARDWARE REQUIREDMCI with CPUCPU bladeLC blade (for VMS station)Single Line Telephone with MW lamp8LC or 4LCD bladeRS RVS-4S CA-A/RS RVS-15S CA-A or RS NORM-4S CA-AVoice Mail System

1-372 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1006.fm

MESSAGE CENTER INTERFACE (MCI)SYSTEM OPERATION

SYSTEM OPERATIONAs shown below, a direct call or a forwarded call from a station/trunk/Attendant to the VMS station inUCD group or Hunting group terminates.When the call to the VMS is terminated, the CPU sends a call connection status information to the VMSthrough the MCI. If the ANI information is sent from the network, the ANI information can be added tothe call connection status information by the system data programming (this feature is not available whenthe call is received from the CCIS trunk to the VMS). When the station/trunk/Attendant leaves a messagein the VMS, the VMS sends a Message Waiting lamp ON data for the appropriate station through the PBX.After the station retrieves the messages, the VMS sends a Message Waiting lamp OFF data for the appro-priate station through the PBX.

MCI System Operation (MCI with CPU)

LC

DLC

PBX

TDSW

CPU

VMS

Single Line

Multiline Terminal

UCD Groupor Hunting Group

RS-232C Cable

TRK NETWORK

Message Waitinglamp on/off data

LC

LC

Telephone

(Call Forwarding Set)1

2

1 : Forwarded Call from a trunk

2 : Direct Call from a station

Connection Status data

1-373 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1006.fm


Connecting PatternsSTA : StationATT : Attendant TRK: Trunk

CALLINGPARTY

CALLED PARTY

CONDITION OF CALLTERMINATION TO VMS CONNECTING PATTERNS

STA. A STA. B STA. A calls STA. B set For-warding-All Calls/Busy Line/No Answer to the VMS.

STA. A – STA.A calls the VMS directly.

STA. A STA. B After terminating a call from STA. A to the VMS and trans-ferring the call to STA. B, STA. A recalls the VMS.

Continued on next page

STA. A

STA. B

VMS

CF

STA. A

VMS

STA. A

VMS

STA. BRecall

Transfer

1-374 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1006.fm



CALLINGPARTY

CALLED PARTY


ATT STA. B ATT calls STA. B set Call For-warding-All Calls/Busy Line/No Answer to the VMS.

ATT – ATT calls the VMS directly.

STA. A STA. B After holding a call from STA. C, STA. A calls STA. B set Call Forwarding-All Calls/Busy Line/No Answer to the VMS.


ATT

STA. B

VMS

CF

ATT

VMS

STA. A

STA. B

VMS

CF

STA. C

1-375 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1006.fm



CALLINGPARTY

CALLED PARTY


STA. A STA. C After holding a call from STA. C, STA. A calls the VMS directly.

STA. A STA. B After holding a call from TRK, STA. A calls STA. B set Call Forwarding-All Call/Busy Line/No Answer to the VMS.

STA. A TRK After holding a call from TRK, STA. A calls the VMS directly.


STA. A

VMS

CF

STA. C

STA. A

STA. B

VMS

CF

TRK

STA. A

VMS

TRK

1-376 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1006.fm



CALLINGPARTY

CALLED PARTY


TRK STA. B A TRK party calls STA. B set Call Forwarding-All Calls/Busy Line/No Answer to the VMS.

TRK – A TRK party calls the VMS directly.

TRK STA. B After terminating a call from TRK to the VMS and transfer-ring the call to STA. B, TRK recalls to the VMS.


STA. B

VMS

CF

TRK

VMS

TRK

STA. B

VMS

TRK

Transfer

Recall

1-377 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1006.fm



CALLINGPARTY

CALLED PARTY


STA. C STA. B In CCIS application, STA. C calls STA. B set Call Forward-ing-All Calls/Busy Line/No Answer to the VMS.

STA. C STA. D In CCIS application, STA. C calls STA. D set Call Forward-ing-All Calls/Busy Line/No Answer to STA. B. (The call is forwarded to the VMS by the Multiple Call Forwarding).

STA. C – In CCIS application, STA. C calls the VMS directly.


STA. B

VMS

CF

TRK STA. CTRKCCIS

STA. B

VMS

CF

TRK STA. CTRKCCIS

STA. D

CF

VMS

TRK STA. CTRKCCIS

1-378 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1006.fm



CALLINGPARTY

CALLED PARTY


STA. C STA. B In CCIS application, after hold-ing a call from STA. D, STA. C calls STA.B set Call Forward-ing-All Calls/Busy Line/No Answer to the VMS.

TRK1 – In CCIS application, a TRK1 party dials the VMS directly.

TRK1 STA. D In CCIS application, a TRK1 party calls STA. D set Call For-warding-All Calls/Busy Line/No Answer to STA. B. (The call is forwarded to the VMS by the Multiple Call Forwarding).

STA. B

VMS

CF

TRK STA. CTRKCCIS

STA. D

VMS

TRK3 TRK2CCIS

TRK1

CF

CF

VMS

TRK3 TRK2CCIS

TRK1

1-379 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1006.fm


When the PBX receives Message Waiting lamp control data from the VMS, the Message Waiting lampsof the called stations turn on or off. When the same Message Waiting lamp control data produces on Mul-tiline Terminal, the call indicator lamp on the Multiline Terminal turns on and the “MSG” is displayed onthe Multiline Terminal as follows:

MSG9:21 AM WED 8

1-380 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1006.fm

MESSAGE CENTER INTERFACE (MCI)PROGRAMMING

PROGRAMMING

Precaution

Before programming the system data for MCI, confirm that the system is under the following status.

• The system is under On-Line mode (“RUN” LED is flashing on the CPU blade).• All the system data pertaining to the station, trunks, and services are already programmed.

1-381 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1006.fm


MCI Programming

Call Forwarding to the VMS stations, and UCD Group/Station Hunting Group set to the VMS stations arerequired. For these feature programming, refer to each feature in this manual.

DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify the type of VMS which is accommo-dated to the system.

NOTE: For VMS with MCI, set the 2nd data “0”.

(1)(2)

4430 : Depends on CM12 Y=251 : VMS with DTMF

Specify the type of the VMS Station.

NOTE: CM12 Y=25 is effective only when CM08>443 is set to “0”.

•(1)

(2)

Y=25 X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.

(VMS station)0 : VMS with DTMF3 : VMS with MCI

Specify Message Waiting control from VMS with MCI to all stations.

NOTE: MW lamp control is only available to the stations in the opposite PBX connected with CCIS via MCI. Station dialing MW access codes are not allowed over CCIS.

(1)(2)


Specify whether Message Waiting from the VMS is provided for the called station when a forwarded call is terminated to the VMS via CCIS.

(1)(2)


START

CM08

CM12

CM08

A

1-382 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1006.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

Provide Message Waiting for a station with MW lamp.

•(1)(2)

Y=03 X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.0: To provide

Provide VMS service for a station port interface with the VMS (VMS station).

•(1)

(2)

Y=10 X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.

(VMS station)0: To provide

Provide Momentary Open for a station port in-terface with the VMS (VMS station), as re-quired.

•(1)

(2)

Y=22X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.

(VMS station)0: To provide

Assign the data to provide the MW lamp on a Multiline Terminal, if required.

•(1)(2)


Assign the calling party number sent to MCI when accessing VMS from a sub line assigned on Multiline Terminal.

•(1)(2)

Y=3400-63: Tenant No.0 : Sub Line station No.1 : My Line station No.

Assign the connection port for MCI. •(1)(2)

Y=0101: Connection port for MCI0 : RS1 on CPU1 : RS2 on CPU7 : No data

Assign the number of digits for station number in MCI message format sent to the VMS from the CPU RS-232C port.

(1)(2)

708 0 : 6 digits1 : 8 digits

A

CM13

CM90,

CM65

CM04

CM08

B

1-383 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1006.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the function of RS-232C ports.

NOTE: When a port is used for MCI exclu-sively, assign the 2nd data=10.When a port is used for both MCI and SMDR, assign the 2nd data=11.

•(1)

(2)

Y=00 0: Port 11: Port 210: MCI NOTE11: MCI and SMDR NOTE

Assign the attribute data, depending on the VMS.

•(1)(2)

Y=01-06, 08See the following table.See the following table.

NOTE: The data should be assigned depending on the attribute of the VMS.

B

CM40

: Default

Y 1st DATA 2nd DATA

No. MEANING DATA PORT LOCATION No. DATA MEANING

01 Data length 01

Port 1Port 2

01

7 bit8 bit

02 Parity check 01

Port 1Port 2

01

EffectiveIneffective

03 Kind of parity 01

Port 1Port 2

01

Odd parityEven parity

04 Stop bit 01

Port 1Port 2

01

1-Stop bit2-Stop bit

05 DTR signal sent to terminal

01

Port 1Port 2

01

LowHigh

06 RTS signal sent to terminal

01

Port 1Port 2

01

LowHigh

08 Data speed 01

Port 1Port 2

12345

NONE

1200 bps2400 bps4800 bps9600 bps19200 bps9600 bps

C

1-384 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1006.fm


To add Automatic Number Identification (ANI) information to the MCI message format when the ANI in-formation is sent from the network, do the following programming.

DESCRIPTION DATA

Provide sending of ANI information from net-work to the VMS with MCI.

•(1)(2)

Y=13800-63: Trunk Route No.0: To send

For MCI with CPU, specify the MCI message format sent to the VMS from the CPU RS-232C port as Format with ANI.

(1)(2)

7090: Format with ANI

C

CM35

CM08

END

1-385 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1006.fm

MESSAGE REMINDER

MESSAGE REMINDER

PROGRAMMING

To provide Message Reminder service for each station:

DESCRIPTION DATA

To activate Single-Digit Feature Access Code (1, 2, 3 and 6) feature, set the data for 050, 051, 069 and 148 to “1”.

NOTE: A single digit access code “6” is fix-edly assigned to set Message Re-minder.

(1)(2)

(1)(2)

(1)

(2)

(1)

(2)

050: * Button as Switch Hook-Flash1 : Ineffective


069: Single-Digit Dialing on BT Connec-tion

1 : Step Call


1 : Ineffective

Provide the system with Single-Digit Feature Access Code on RBT or Voice Call Connec-tion.

(1)(2)

156 0: Available

Provide the system with Single-Digit Feature Access Code on busy Connection.

(1)(2)

208 0: Available


(1)(2)

234 0 : To delete1 : Not delete

(To delete only when answering)

Whether delete all stored Call History-No An-swer/Message Waiting of the calling station when answering the call.

(1)(2)


Specify the sending of Special Dial Tone for Attendant Console or station when dialing a feature access code.

(1)(2)

236 0 : Tone is not sent1 : Tone is sent

START

CM08

A

1-386 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1006.fm

MESSAGE REMINDER

DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify the time display for Message Remind-er on Multiline Terminal with LCD.

(1)(2)

280 0 : 24-Hour1 : 12-Hour

Specify Message Waiting LED indication on the station to which Message Reminder is set.

(1)(2)

294 0 : Flashing (60 IPM)1 : Steady Lighting

Provide Message Reminder for each station. •(1)(2)

Y=03X-XXXXXXXX: Station No. 0 : To provide (for stations with MW

lamp or Multiline Terminal with LCD) 1 : Not Provided

Assign Service Restriction Class A for Mes-sage Reminder to required stations.

•(1)(2)


Allow Message Reminder in Service Restric-tion Class A assigned by CM12 Y=02.

••

(1)

(2)

Y=047 Message Reminder (Setting Side) Y=048 Message Reminder (Set Side) 00-15: Service Restriction Class A as-

signed by CM12 Y=02 1 : Allow

Assign the access code for Message Reminder Search, Retrieve, Set, or Cancel.

•(1)(2)

Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group (0-3)X-XXXX: Access CodeA146: Message Reminder SearchA147: Message Reminder RetrieveA148: Message Reminder Set A149: Message Reminder Cancel

Assign the MSG key to each Multiline Termi-nal.

•(1)(2)

Y=00My Line No. + + Key No. F0A46: Call History Screen StartF1005 : Message Reminder Retrieve

A

CM08

CM13

CM12

CM15

CM20

CM90,

END

1-387 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1006.fm

MESSAGE REMINDER

To provide CID Call Back, add the following programming:

DESCRIPTION DATA

Set to store the call record when answering a trunk call/handling of an unanswered trunk call.

•(1)(2)

Y=15000-63: Trunk Route No.0 : To store1 : Not stored

Set to store the call record when answering a trunk call.

•(1)(2)


Set to store the call record when handling of an unanswered trunk call.

•(1)(2)


Assign the number of stored call records for each Multiline Terminal station.

•(1)(2)

Y=38X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.01-50 : Number of stored call recordsNONE : 10 calls

START

CM35

CM13

CM12

END

1-388 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1006.fm

MESSAGE REMINDER

To store the calling number automatically when the station call via CCIS is abandoned, do the followingprogramming:

HARDWARE REQUIRED

Single-Line Telephone with MW Lamp8LC or 4LCD blade

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the data so as to store the calling num-ber automatically when the station call via CCIS is abandoned.

(1)(2)

5830: To store

Assign the Pattern number for adding an access code for outgoing call to the calling number stored by Message Reminder when terminating a tandem call via CCIS.

•(1)(2)

Y=27900-63: Trunk Route No.0-7 : Pattern No. 0-7NONE : No data

Set to store the call record when answering a trunk call/handling of an unanswered trunk call.

•(1)(2)

Y=15000-63: Trunk Route No.0: To store

Assign the Pattern number for adding an access code for outgoing call to the calling number stored by Message Reminder when terminating a tandem call via CCIS.

•(1)

(2)

Y=110-7: Pattern No. 0-7 assigned by CM35

Y=279X-XXXXXX: Access Code for outgoing

callX: 0-9, A (*), B (#)

START

CM08

CM35

CM50

END

1-389 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1006.fm

MESSAGE WAITING

MESSAGE WAITING

PROGRAMMING

Refer to the DSS/BLF Console feature to program the DSS/BLF as a Message Front Station.

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign Service Restriction Class A for Mes-sage Waiting to required stations as shown be-low.

•(1)(2)


Allow Message Waiting in Service Restriction Class A assigned by CM12 Y=02.

•

•(1)(2)

Y=024 Administrative station allowing Message Waiting Set/Reset to station Y=040 Station setting MW 00-15: Service Restriction Class A0 : Restricted1 : Allow

Provide each station with Message Waiting. (Multiline Terminal or Single-Line Telephone

with Message Waiting Lamp)

•(1)(2)

Y=03 X-XXXXXXXX: Station No. 0: To provide

Assign an Access Code for Message Waiting Set/Reset/Retrieve.

•(1)(2)

Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3X-XXXX: Access Code A040: MW Lamp Control Set A041: MW Lamp Control Reset A147: MW Retrieve

Assign the Message Front destination of the MW retrieve call from the station to which Message Waiting is set.By pressing MW Retrieve access code or MW key on Multiline Terminal, the call is routed to the destination.

•(1)

(2)

Y=15 00-63: Tenant No. to which MW set Multi-

line Terminal belongs X-XXXXXXXX: Message Front Station

No./My Line No.E000 : Attendant Console

START

CM12

CM15

STATION/ADMINISTRATIVE CM15Y=024

CM15Y=040

Station w/o MW Lamp 0 0Station with MW Lamp 0 1Administrative station 1 0

CM13

CM20

CM51

A

1-390 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1006.fm

MESSAGE WAITING

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the Lamp color on Multiline Terminal when Message Waiting is set.

NOTE: When the second data is set to “0” (Green), the Icon to be displayed on multiline terminal normally is not displayed.

(1)(2)

144 0 : Green1 : Red

Specify the Message LED Indication Pattern on Multiline Terminal.

(1)(2)

294 0 : Flashing (60 IPM)1 : Steady Lighting

If an Attendant Console is assigned as the Message Front destination by CM51 Y=15, set the data for 233 to 0. With this setting, Mes-sage Waiting is automatically reset when the attendant answers.

(1)(2)

233 0: Available


(1)(2)




(1)(2)


Assign the Message Waiting function key to required Multiline Terminal and the adminis-trative stations.

•(1)(2)

Y=00 My Line No. + + Key No.For administrative station F0040: Message Waiting Set F0041: Message Waiting Reset

For set station without MW LampF1005: Message Waiting Lamp

Assign the Message Waiting key to DESKCON.

•(1)

(2)

Y=00ATTCON No. (E000-E007) + + Key No.F6101: Message WaitingF6104: Reset

A

CM08

CM90,

,

B

1-391 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1006.fm

MESSAGE WAITING

HARDWARE REQUIRED

Single-Line Telephone with the MW Lamp8LC or 4LCD bladeMultiline Terminal and DLC blade, if required.

DESCRIPTION DATA

Select the Dial Tone on setting Message Wait-ing.

•(1)(2)

Y=2 12: Dial Tone on setting Message Waiting0 : Special Dial Tone (Stutter Dial Tone)1 : Dial Tone

B

CM48

END

1-392 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1006.fm

MISCELLANEOUS TRUNK ACCESSCCSA ACCESS

MISCELLANEOUS TRUNK ACCESSCCSA ACCESS

PROGRAMMING

In addition to the programming of Tie Lines, assign CCSA line to the required routes, as shown below.

HARDWARE REQUIRED

ODT blade

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign CCSA line to required routes. •(1)(2)

Y=00000-63: Trunk Route No. (06)03: CCSA line

Assign the ICI key to the DESKCON, to which a CCSA incoming call will terminate.

•(1)

(2)

Y=00ATTCON No. (E000-E007) + + key No.ICI key F6030-F6037: Call Termination from

CCSA Line 0-7

Assign the CCSA access code. •(1)(2)

Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3X-XXXX: Access Code100-163: Trunk Route No. 00-63 (06)

START

CM35BLADE RESET

CM90,

CM20

END

1-393 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1006.fm

MISCELLANEOUS TRUNK ACCESSCODE CALLING EQUIPMENT ACCESS

CODE CALLING EQUIPMENT ACCESS

PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION DATA



•(1)

(2)



•(1)

(2)






•(1)(2)




•(1)(2)


START

CM05

BLADE RESET

CM10

CM12

A

JULY/18/2008

1-394 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1006.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA



•(1)(2)



•(1)(2)



•(1)(2)



U10 ADP


•(1)(2)





•(1)(2)


(Zone 0-9)

A

CM13

RESET

BLADE RESET

CM20

B

JULY/18/2008

1-395 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1006.fm


NOTE: For assigning the Class of Service for this feature, refer to CLASS OF SERVICE.Page 1-146

DESCRIPTION DATA


•(1)

(2)

Y=00XX YXX: 00-31: Relay Group No.Y : 0-3: Circuit No. of PGD(2)-U10 ADP02 XX: Paging ZoneXX : 00-09: Speaker Paging Zone 0-9


•(1)(2)


B

CM44

END

JULY/18/2008

1-396 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1006.fm

MISCELLANEOUS TRUNK ACCESSDICTATION EQUIPMENT ACCESS

DICTATION EQUIPMENT ACCESS

PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign a Unit and Slot number to the COT blade.

•(1)

(2)

Y=0XX ZZXX: 01-50: Unit No.ZZ : 01-18: Slot No.30: COT blade

Assign the trunk number to the required Phys-ical Port number.

•(1)

(2)

Y=00XX YY ZZ: Physical Port No.XX: 01-50: Unit No.YY: 01-18: Slot No.ZZ : 01-32: Circuit No.D000-511: Trunk No.

Assign the trunk data to the trunk number. •

(1)(2)

Y=00 Trunk route allocation

000-511: Trunk No.00-63: Trunk Route No.Dedicated route number for this service should be assigned.

•(1)(2)

Y=01 Tenant allocation000-511: Trunk No.00-63: Tenant No.

Assign the route data to the trunk route speci-fied by CM30 Y=00.

•

(1)(2)

Y=000 Kind of Route

00-63: Trunk Route No.05

•

(1)(2)

Y=001 Type of Signal to be sent out

00-63: Trunk Route No.4: DTMF

•(1)(2)

Y=008 Dial Pulse Sending00-63: Trunk Route No.3 : To send

START

CM05

BLADE RESET

CM10

CM30BLADE RESET

CM35BLADE RESET

BLADE RESET

A

1-397 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1006.fm

MISCELLANEOUS TRUNK ACCESSDICTATION EQUIPMENT ACCESS


DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the access code for this service. •(1)(2)

Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3X-XXXX: Access Code100-163: Trunk Route No. 00-63 assigned

by CM30 Y=00

A

CM20

END

1-398 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1006.fm

MISCELLANEOUS TRUNK ACCESSFOREIGN EXCHANGE (FX) ACCESS

FOREIGN EXCHANGE (FX) ACCESS[For North America]

PROGRAMMING

In addition to the programming of Direct Outward Dialing, assign an FX line to the required trunk routesas shown below:


DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign an FX line to the required trunk route. •(1)(2)

Y=000 00-63: Trunk Route No.01: FX line

START

CM35BLADE RESET

END

JULY/18/2008

1-399 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1006.fm

MISCELLANEOUS TRUNK ACCESSRADIO PAGING EQUIPMENT ACCESS

RADIO PAGING EQUIPMENT ACCESS

PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION DATA



•(1)

(2)



•(1)

(2)






•(1)(2)




•(1)(2)


START

CM05

BLADE RESET

CM10

CM12

A

JULY/18/2008

1-400 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1006.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA



•(1)(2)



•(1)(2)



•(1)(2)



U10 ADP


•(1)(2)





•(1)(2)


(Zone 0-9)

A

CM13

RESET

BLADE RESET

CM20

B

JULY/18/2008

1-401 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1006.fm


HARDWARE REQUIRED

PGD(2)-U10 ADP Radio Paging Equipment provided locally

DESCRIPTION DATA


•(1)

(2)

Y=00XX YXX: 00-31: Relay Group No.Y : 0-3: Circuit No. of PGD(2)-U10 ADP02XX: Speaker Paging StartXX : 00-09: Speaker Paging Zone 0-9


•(1)(2)


B

CM44

END

JULY/18/2008

1-402 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1006.fm

MISCELLANEOUS TRUNK ACCESSWIDE AREA TELEPHONE SERVICE (WATS) ACCESS

WIDE AREA TELEPHONE SERVICE (WATS) ACCESS[For North America]

PROGRAMMING

In addition to the programming of Direct Outward Dialing, assign an WATS line to the required trunkroute, as shown below:


DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign a WATS line to the required trunk route.

•(1)(2)

Y=000 00-63: Trunk Route No. (05) 02: WATS line

START

CM35

BLADE RESET

END

JULY/18/2008

1-403 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1006.fm

MOBILITY ACCESS

MOBILITY ACCESS

PROGRAMMING

In addition to the ISDN-BRI/ISDN-PRI programming, do the following programming.As for the ISDN-BRI/ISDN-PRI programming, refer to the ISDN FEATURES. Page 3-1

DESCRIPTION DATA


••••

(1)

(2)


Y=0018: ISDN Indial

Assign the data for DID to the trunk routes as-signed by CM30.

•

(1)(2)

Y=000 Kind of Trunk

00-63: Trunk Route No.00: DID

•(1)(2)

Y=002 OG/IC00-63: Trunk Route No.3 : Bothway Trunk

•(1)(2)

Y=005 Release Signal Condition00-63: Trunk Route No.1 : Release signal arrives

•

(1)(2)

Y=009 Incoming Connection Signaling

00-63: Trunk Route No.08: ISDN

START

CM30

CM35BLADE RESET

BLADE RESET

A

1-404 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1006.fm

MOBILITY ACCESS

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the data for DID Digit Conversion to the trunk routes assigned by CM30.

•(1)(2)

Y=018 Digit Conversion on DID call00-63: Trunk Route No.0: To provide

•(1)(2)

Y=170 Development Table00-63: Trunk Route No. 0 : Development Table 13 : Development Table 0

•(1)(2)

Y=012 Number of digits to be received00-63: Trunk Route No.0 : 1 digit1 : 2 digits2 : 3 digits3 : 4 digits

•

(1)(2)

Y=078 Number of digits to be converted for Development Table 0

00-63: Trunk Route No.0 : Leading 2-4 digits1 : All digits of DID are converted by

CM76

•

(1)(2)


00-63: Trunk Route No. 01-08: 1-8 digits15 : 4 digits


•(1)(2)

Y=00 X-XXXX: DID No.000-999: Number Conversion Block No.


•(1)(2)

Y=90 X-XXXXXXXX: DID No.000-999: Number Conversion Block No.

A

CM35

CM76

B

1-405 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1006.fm

MOBILITY ACCESS

DESCRIPTION DATA


••••

(1)

(2)


assigned by CM76 Y=00/90NONE : No data

For a mobile phone of Mobility Access, allow tandem connection between the incoming trunk route and the outgoing trunk route.

•(1)

(2)

Y=0XX ZZXX: 00-63: Incoming Trunk RouteZZ : 00-63: Outgoing Trunk Route0: Allow

Specify the destination of DID call transfer to an attendant by CM51 Y=00/03/06 in system.

(1)(2)

2410: Tenant of called station

Assign the destination of DID call transferred when the station is busy/unassigned/no an-swer.

NOTE: The 1st data is set to the tenant No. of called station.

•••

(1)(2)

Y=00 No AnswerY=03 BusyY=06 Unassigned00-63: Tenant No.Destination:X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.E000: Attendant Console

Provide release of ISDN trunk when receiving the ISDN DISCONNECT message with Progress Description=08 from ISDN (effective for an outgoing call to ISDN).

•(1)(2)


Provide release of ISDN trunk when receiving the ISDN DISCONNECT message with Progress Description=08 from ISDN (effective for an incoming call to ISDN).

•(1)(2)


B

CM76

CM36

CM08

CM51

CM35

C

1-406 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1006.fm

MOBILITY ACCESS

NOTE: Set CM35 Y=233/266 2nd data=0 to both the incoming trunk route and the outgoing trunk route of Mobility Access.

DESCRIPTION DATA

Provide release of ISDN trunk when receiving the ISDN DISCONNECT message with Progress Description=08 from ISDN because the called party is busy in tandem connection (ISDN to ISDN). NOTE

•(1)(2)


Provide relay of the ALERT message to the calling party in tandem connection (ISDN to ISDN). NOTE

•(1)(2)


C

CM35

END

1-407 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1006.fm

MOBILITY ACCESS

To provide Mobility Access (MA), do the following programming.

DESCRIPTION DATA


•(1)(2)


Allow Mobility Access mode in Service Re-striction Class A assigned by CM12 Y=02.

NOTE: This command is set to the Mobility Access station.

•(1)

(2)



Assign the following Mobility Access function to each DID Number.- For MA termination : 1 (2nd data=0)- For MA mode setting: 1 (2nd data=1)- For MA mode cancel: 1 (2nd data=2)- For MA station : Same number of MA

station (2nd data=7)

•(1)

(2)


assigned by CM76 Y=00/900 : To use Mobility Access termination1 : To set Mobility Access Mode2 : To cancel Mobility Access Mode7 : Not used Mobility Access function

Assign a trunk access code for call forwarding in Mobility Access mode.

•(1)(2)

Y=1000-63: Tenant No.X-XXXX: Trunk Access Code (1-4 digits)NONE : No data

START

CM12

CM15

CM76

CM64

END

1-408 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1006.fm

MOBILITY ACCESS

• To set or cancel Mobility Access mode from a mobile phone:

• To set or cancel Mobility Access mode from a station:

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign an access code for Mobility Access. •(1)(2)

Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3X-XXXX: Access CodeA231: Station Authorization Code Set/

Change

Assign a Station Authorization Code to each station.

•(1)(2)

Y=00X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.X-XXXXXXXX: Authorization Code

NOTE: The maximum number of digits for Authorization Code is set by CM42>73.

Specify the number of digits for Station Autho-rization Code.

(1)(2)

7301-08 : 1-8 digitsNONE : 4 digits

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign an access code for Mobility Access. •(1)(2)

Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3X-XXXX: Access CodeA256: Mobility Access Mode SetA257: Mobility Access Mode Cancel

Assign the function key of Mobility Access mode Set/Cancel to the designed station.

•(1)(2)

Y=00My Line No. + + Key No.F0B56: Mobility Access Mode Set/Cancel

START

CM20

CM2B

CM42

END

START

CM20

CM90,

END

1-409 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1006.fm

MOBILITY ACCESS

• To set or cancel Mobility Access mode from PCPro:

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign a mobile phone No. link up with a Mobility Access station number.

•(1)

(2)

Y=50X-XXXXXXXX: Mobility Access Station

No.X-XX...XX: Mobile phone No.

(Maximum 26 digits)

NOTE 1: Station number cannot be as-signed to 2nd data.

NOTE 2: When the mobile phone number has been already assigned to oth-er station number, “ASSIGNED ALREADY” is displayed.

NOTE 3: Outgoing Trunk Access Code (1-4 digits) must be assigned by CM64 Y=10.

START

CME6

END

1-410 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1006.fm

MOBILITY ACCESS

• To assign a calling party number (DID number) of Mobility Access station displayed on the mobilephone:

NOTE: A calling party number displayed on Mobility Access station is the following:ISDN subscriber number assigned by CM12 Y=12 + ISDN Local Office Code assigned by CM50 Y=05.

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign an ISDN subscriber number to a Mobil-ity Access station.

•(1)

(2)


No.X-XXXXXXXX: ISDN subscriber No.

Assign an ISDN Local Office Code Table to a Mobility Access station.

•(1)

(2)


No.00-14: ISDN Local Office Code Table No.15 : Not used ISDN Local Office Code

Table

Assign an ISDN Local Office Code to a Mobil-ity Access station.

•(1)

(2)

Y=0500-14: ISDN Local Office Code Table No.

00-14X-XX...XX: ISDN Local Office Code

(Maximum 12 digits)

START

CM12

CM50

END

1-411 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1006.fm

MOBILITY ACCESS

• To specify a Multiline Terminal ringer tone pattern of Mobility Access call, do the following pro-gramming.

DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify the Ringer Tone Pattern of the Multi-line Terminal on DID calls.

•(1)(2)

Y=23000-999: Number Conversion Block No.0 : Ringer Tone Pattern 01 : Ringer Tone Pattern 12 : Ringer Tone Pattern 23 : Ringer Tone Pattern 34 : Ringer Tone Pattern 45 : Ringer Tone Pattern 56 : Ringer Tone Pattern 67 : As per CM35 Y=34/164


•(1)(2)


START

CM76

CM35


A

1-412 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1006.fm

MOBILITY ACCESS

DESCRIPTION DATA


•(1)(2)

Y=4000-63: Tenant No.See the table below.


A

CM65


Y=40: 1












END

1-413 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1006.fm

MOBILITY ACCESS

To set Call Forwarding-All Calls of Mobility Access call from a mobile phone, do the following program-ming.

DESCRIPTION DATA


•(1)

(2)


No.XX ZZXX: 00-15 : Service Restriction Class A

Allow Call Forwarding-All Calls of Mobility Access call in Service Restriction Class A as-signed by CM12 Y=02.

NOTE: This command is set to the Mobility Access station.

•(1)

(2)




•(1)

(2)


No.00-15 : Service Restriction Class C

START

CM12

CM15

CM12

A

1-414 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1006.fm

MOBILITY ACCESS

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the priority for Call Forwarding-All Calls of Mobility Access call.

NOTE: Set the 2nd data to “0” to Mobility Access station number for Call Forwarding-All Calls of Mobility Access call.

•(1)

(2)

Y=48400-15 : Service Restriction Class C as-

signed by CM12 Y=070 : See the table below.3 : See the table below.


•(1)(2)



•(1)(2)


Cancel

A

CM15

PRIORITY 2ND DATA=0 2ND DATA=3

HIGH

LOW

Restriction of Inter-tenant Connection Restriction of Inter-tenant ConnectionCall Forwarding-All Calls/Split Call Forwarding-All Calls

Call Forwarding-All Calls of Mobility Access

Call Forwarding-All Calls of Mobility Access Alternative ISDN Connection when Remote Unit in survival mode (CID Call Routing per each sta-tion)

Alternative ISDN Connection when Remote Unit in survival mode (CID Call Routing per each sta-tion)

Alternative ISDN Connection when Remote Unit in survival mode (CID Call Routing per each ten-ant)

Alternative ISDN Connection when Remote Unit in survival mode (CID Call Routing per each ten-ant)

Call Forwarding-Logout (IP Station)

Call Forwarding-Logout (IP Station) Call Forwarding-All Calls/Split Call Forwarding-All Calls

UCD (Uniform Call Distribution) UCD (Uniform Call Distribution)Do Not Disturb Do Not DisturbStation Hunting Station HuntingCall Forwarding-Busy Line/Split Call Forward-ing-Busy Line

Call Forwarding-Busy Line/Split Call Forward-ing-Busy Line

CM20

CM90,

END

1-415 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1006.fm

MOBILITY ACCESS

To set Call Forwarding-Busy Line for call forwarding in Mobility Access mode, do the following program-ming.

DESCRIPTION DATA


•(1)

(2)


No.XX ZZXX: 00-15 : Service Restriction Class A

Allow Call Forwarding-Busy Line for call for-warding in Mobility Access mode in Service Restriction Class A assigned by CM12 Y=02.

•(1)

(2)



Assign the access code for Call Forwarding-Busy Line, Set and Cancel, respectively.

•(1)(2)



Line Cancel

Assign Call Forwarding-No Answer keys to the Multiline Terminal, as required.

•(1)(2)


Line Set/Cancel

START

CM12

CM15

CM20

CM90,

END

1-416 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1006.fm

MOBILITY ACCESS

To provide Mobility Access hooking, do the following programming.[For other than North America]

To provide Mobility Access Prefix, do the following programming.[For EU]

DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify the output message which is sent from PBX to ISDN network when the 2nd line is re-leased by Mobility Access hooking.

(1)(2)

6760 : As per CM08>6771 : CALL PROC+DISC

Specify the output message which is sent from PBX to ISDN network when the 2nd line is re-leased by Mobility Access hooking.

NOTE: This data is effective only when the 2nd data of CM08>676 is set to 0.

(1)(2)

6770 : CALL PROC+ALERT+DISC1 : CALL PROC+ALERT+CONNECT+

DISC

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign Country Code for Addressing. •(1)(2)

Y=22400-63: Trunk Route No.X-XXXX: Country CodeX: 0-9, A (*), B (#)

Assign Area Code for Addressing. •(1)(2)

Y=22500-63: Trunk Route No.X-XXXXXX: Area CodeX: 0-9, A (*), B (#)

Assign Local Area Code and Mobility Access Prefix.

•(1)(2)

Y=120 X-XXXXXXXX: Local Area Code +

Mobility Access PrefixX: 0-9, A (*), B (#)

START

CM08

END

START

CM35

CM50

END

JULY/18/2008

1-417 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1006.fm

MULTILINE TERMINAL ATTENDANT POSITION


PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION DATA


•(1)

(2)


Assign the My Line number to the required Physical Port number.

•(1)

(2)

Y=00XX YY ZZ: Physical Port No.XX: 01-50: Unit No.YY: 01-18: Slot No.ZZ : 01-32: Circuit No.FX-FXXXXXXXX: My Line No.

Assign Service Restriction Class B for the At-tendant Position to the required Multiline Ter-minal.

•(1)(2)

Y=02 X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.XX ZZZZ: 00-15 : Service Restriction Class B

Allow the Attendant Position in Service Re-striction Class B assigned by CM12 Y=02.

NOTE: The Service Restriction Class number for the Attendant Position should be different from an ordinary station.

•(1)

(2)


signed by CM12 Y=020: Attendant Position

Assign the required number of Loop, ICI (In-coming Call Identification) and OPR (Opera-tor Call) lines to the Virtual Port number.

NOTE: Usually, ICI/OPR numbers are as-signed on a per-Attendant-Position-Group.

(1)(2)

0000-0999: Virtual Port No.AA X Y: Loop Line No.

X: 0-7: Attendant Position No.Y: 1-5: Loop No.

AB00-AB99: ICI/OPR Line No.

Assign each Loop Line number assigned by CM11 as an Attendant Loop Line.

•(1)

(2)

Y=03AA01-AA75: Loop Line No. assigned by

CM1108: Attendant Position Loop Line

START

CM05

BLADE RESET

CM10

CM12

CM15

CM11

CM12

A

1-418 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1006.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign Service Restriction Class B for the ICI key to the required ICI/OPR line numbers as-signed by CM11.

•(1)

(2)

Y=02 AB00-AB99: ICI/OPR Line No. assigned

by CM11XX ZZZZ: 00-15 : Service Restriction Class B

Allow the ICI/OPE key in Service Restriction Class B assigned by CM12 Y=02.

NOTE: The Service Restriction Class num-ber for the Attendant Position should be different from an ordinary station.

•(1)

(2)


signed by CM12 Y=020: ICI/OPE key

Assign a Hotline station to each ICI/OPR line number. With this assignment, each ICI/OPR line is restricted from call origination.

•(1)(2)

Y=03AB00-AB99: ICI/OPR No.04: Hotline

Assign a UCD station to each ICI/OPR line number. With this assignment, ICI/OPR lines are provided the call-queuing facility individu-ally.

•(1)(2)

Y=1AB00-AB99: ICI/OPR Line No.1: Pilot station

•(1)(2)

Y=2AB00-AB09: ICI/OPR Line No.00-15: UCD Group No.

NOTE: Individual UCD Group number must be assigned to each ICI/OPR Line number.

Assign the access code for Priority Call 0 used for Attendant Position access.

•(1)(2)

Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3 X-XXXX: Attendant Position Access CodeA088

Assign the destination of Priority Call 0 to each OPR line.

•(1)(2)

Y=1200-63: Tenant No.AB00-AB99: OPR Line No.

Destination of Priority Call 0. (1)(2)

250 0: Same station as Off-Hook Alarm

A

CM12

CM15

CM12

CM17

CM20

CM51

CM08

B

1-419 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1006.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

On the required trunks, assign the destination of DIT to each ICI line.

•(1)(2)

Y=02000-511: Trunk No.04: Direct-in Termination

•(1)(2)

Y=04000-511: Trunk No.AB00-AB99: ICI Line No.

Provide the system with Day/Night Mode Change by an NT key on Attendant Position.

(1)(2)

244: Terminating system change0: Available

(1)(2)

245: Trunk Restriction Class change0: Available

Assign Service Restriction Class B for Day/Night Mode Change by station dialing to At-tendant Position.

•(1)(2)

Y=02 X-XXXXXXXX: My Line No.XX ZZZZ: 00-15 : Service Restriction Class B

Allow Day/Night Mode Change by station di-aling in Service Restriction Class B assigned by CM12 Y=02.

•(1)

(2)



Assign the Loop keys to each Multiline Termi-nal, and assign the function keys required for the Attendant Position to the Multiline Termi-nal.

•(1)(2)

Y=00 My Line No. + + Key No. AA01-AA75 : Loop Key AB00-AB99 : ICI/OPR KeyF1020 : Release KeyF1080 : Do Not Disturb OverrideF0300 : Operator Call KeyF1300-F1363: Night Key

Specify Line Preselection on a Multiline Ter-minal after pressing the desired LINE/TRUNK key.

NOTE: To provide a Trunk Name/Station Name, refer to ALPHANUMERIC DISPLAY. Page 1-6

(1)(2)

199 0 : Not required1 : Required

B

CM30

CM08

CM12

CM15

CM90,

CM08

END

1-420 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1006.fm


To use a DSS Console with the Multiline Terminal Attendant Position, add the following programming.

DESCRIPTION DATA


•(1)

(2)


Assign the DSS Console number to the re-quired Physical Port number.

•(1)

(2)

Y=00XX YY ZZ: Physical Port No.XX: 01-50: Unit No.YY: 01-18: Slot No.ZZ : 01-32: Circuit No.E100-E131 : DSS Console No.

Assign the My Line number of the Attendant Position associated with each DSS Console.

(1)

(2)

00-31: DSS Console No. assigned by CM10 Y=00 (E100-E131)

X-XXXXXXXX: My Line No. of Atten-dant Position

Assign station numbers to the DSS keys. Assign the MW, DND, NT keys as function keys.

(1)

(2)

For DSS key:DSS Console No. (00-31) + + DSS key No. (00-59)X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.

(1)

(2)

For Function key:DSS Console No. (00-31) + + DSS key No. (57-59)F1049: Message WaitingF1053: Do Not DisturbF0043: Night Key

START

CM05

BLADE RESET

CM10

CM96

CM97,

,

END

1-421 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1006.fm


To restrict the termination of the call to Multiline Terminal Attendant Position which is set to Night Mode:

To provide the Attendant Night Transfer when a station/trunk call to Multiline Terminal Attendant Positionwhich is set to Night Mode is terminated:

DESCRIPTION DATA

Restrict the termination of the call to Multiline Terminal Attendant Position which is set to Night Mode.

•(1)(2)

Y=56X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.0: Restricted

Provide the Attendant Night Transfer when a station/trunk call to Multiline Terminal Atten-dant Position which is set to Night Mode is ter-minated.

(1)(2)

5760: To provide

Not assign transfer destination of station/trunk call to Multiline Terminal Attendant Position which is set to Night Mode.

•(1)(2)

Y=0900-63: Tenant No.NONE : No data

DESCRIPTION DATA

Allow the termination of the call to Multiline Terminal Attendant Position which is set to Night Mode.

•(1)(2)

Y=56X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.1 : Allowed

Provide the Attendant Night Transfer when a station/trunk call to Multiline Terminal Atten-dant Position which is set to Night Mode is ter-minated.

(1)(2)

5760: To provide

Assign the transfer destination of station/Priority Call to Multiline Terminal Attendant Position which is set to Night Mode.

orAssign the transfer destination of DID/Tie Line/station call when the called station is set to Call Forwarding-Busy Line/-No Answer and the destination of forwarded call is set to the Multiline Terminal Attendant Position which is set to Night Mode.

•(1)(2)


START

CM13

CM08

CM51

END

START

CM13

CM08

CM51

END

1-422 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1006.fm


Example:

Conditions(1) Operator Access Code: 0(2) My Line No.: 200(3) ICI/Function Keys

– DDD Line : TRUNK 000-004 (ICI Line No.=AB20)– FX Line : TRUNK 005 (ICI Line No.=AB21) – WATS Line: TRUNK 006 (ICI Line No.=AB22)– CCSA Line: TRUNK 007 (ICI Line No.=AB23)– TIE Line : TRUNK 008-010 (ICI Line No.=AB24)– OPR Line : Operator Call from Stations (OPR Line No.=AB10)– OVR Key : Executive Override– NT Key : Night Key

(4) Number of Loop: 5 (Loop Line No.=AA01-AA05)(5) Tenant No.: 00 (6) Numbering Plan Group: 0(7) Type of Multiline Terminal: DTP-16D-1

WATS ICI Keys

:

:

:

:

:

L1-L5

DDD

FX

CCSA

TIE

RLS

OPR

200

OVR

NT

: Release Key

: Operator Call Key

: My Line

: Executive Override

: Night Key

SpeakerAnswerTransferHold

OVR NTL5

CCSADDD FX

OPR 200TIE RLS

L3 L4L1 L2

Recall(90)

CNF(92)

LNR/SPD(93)

(94)(95)(96)(97)

Feature(91)

WATS

: Loop Keys

1-423 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1006.fm


Programming for Example:COMMAND CODE 1ST DATA 2ND DATA REMARKS

11 000 AA01001 AA02002 AA03 Loop Line Number003 AA04004 AA05

005 AB10 OPR Line Number006 AB20 DDD007 AB21 FX008 AB22 WATS ICI Line Number009 AB23 CCSA010 AB24 TIE

12-02 200 1500 Service Class for Attendant Position

AB10 1501AB20 1501AB21 1501AB22 1501AB23 1501AB24 1501

12-03 AA01 08AA02 08AA03 08 Service Class for Loop LineAA04 08AA05 08

AB10 04AB20 04AB21 04AB22 04 Hotline AssignmentAB23 04AB24 04200 15

15-071 00 0 Attendant Position Class

15-073 01 0 ICI/OPR Key Class

17-1 AB10 1AB20 1AB21 1 Assign UCD Pilot Station to the ICI/OPR

AB22 1 Line NumbersAB23 1AB24 1

Service Class for ICI Line

1-424 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1006.fm


COMMAND CODE 1ST DATA 2ND DATA REMARKS 17-2 AB10 00

AB20 01AB21 02 Assign UCD Group to the ICI/OPR Line

AB22 03 NumbersAB23 04AB24 05

20-0 0 A088 Operator Access Code

51-12 00 AB10Operator Call Termination to OPR Line

08 250 0

30-02 000 04001 04002 04003 04 DIT004 04005 04006 04

30-04 000 AB20001 AB20002 AB20003 AB20 Incoming Call Termination to ICI Line004 AB20005 AB21006 AB22

90-00 200,01 AA01200,02 AA02200,03 AA03 LOOP Key200,04 AA04200,05 AA05

200,07 F0006 OVR Key200,08 F1300 NT Key200,09 AB20 DDD Key200,10 AB21 FX Key200,11 AB22 WATS Key200,12 AB23 CCSA Key200,13 AB24 TIE Key 200,14 F1020 RLS Key200,15 AB10 OPR Key200,16 200 My Line Key

08 244 008 245 0 Definition of NT key function

1-425 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1006.fm

MUSIC ON HOLD

MUSIC ON HOLD

PROGRAMMING

To provide Hold Tone Source on the CPU blade:

To provide Internal Hold Tone:

DESCRIPTION DATA

Set the music for Internal Hold Tone.


•(1)(2)




•(1)

(2)

Y=000: C.O. Line Call01: Tie Line Call02: Internal Call1400: Hold Tone Source on CPU blade

DESCRIPTION DATA

Define the type of call to be provided with Hold Tone.

•(1)

(2)

Y=000: C.O. Line Call01: Tie Line Call02: Internal Call1500: Hold Tone

START

CM48

END

START

CM48

END

1-426 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1006.fm

MUSIC ON HOLD

To provide External Hold Tone Source through Pin JACK on the CPU blade:

DESCRIPTION DATA


•(1)

(2)

Y=000: C.O. Line Call01: Tie Line Call02: Internal Call1300: Hold Tone Source on CPU blade/

External Hold Tone Source

Specify Hold Tone Source per tenant. •(1)(2)

Y=100-63: Tenant No.11 : Hold Tone Source No.NONE : Hold Tone Source on CPU Blade

Specify which tenant External Hold Tone is sent from.

(1)(2)

3880 : Tenant of held station/trunk1 : Tenant of holding station

START

CM48

CM64

CM08

END

JULY/18/2008

1-427 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1006.fm

MUSIC ON HOLD

To provide External Hold Tone Source through the PGD(2)-U10 ADP:

DESCRIPTION DATA



•(1)

(2)



•(1)

(2)



NOTE: Set the second data to “1” when combining external relay/external key with paging. Set the second data to “3” only when using this feature.

•(1)(2)



•(1)(2)




START

CM05

BLADE RESET

CM10

CM12

CM13

BLADE RESET

A

JULY/18/2008

1-428 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1006.fm

MUSIC ON HOLD

DESCRIPTION DATA

Set the function of External Hold Tone Source interface to the PGD(2)-U10 ADP.

•(1)

(2)

Y=00XX YXX: 00-31: Relay Group No.Y : 0-3: Circuit No.00XXXX:00-63: External Hold Tone for Music

on Hold


•(1)(2)



•(1)

(2)

Y=000: C.O. Line Call01: Tie Line Call02: Internal Call0200 : External Hold ToneNONE : Internal Tone Generator


Y=100-63: Tenant No.00-09 : External Hold Tone

(PGD[2]-U10 ADP)NONE : Hold Tone Source on CPU Blade

A

CM44

CM48

RESET

CM64

END

JULY/18/2008

1-429 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1006.fm

MUSIC ON HOLD

To provide the Message on Hold by the Voice Response System (VRS):

DESCRIPTION DATA


•(1)(2)


Allow Voice Response System access (Record/Replay/Delete) in Service Restriction Class A assigned by CM12 Y=02.

•(1)

(2)

Y=033XX: Service Restriction Class A assigned

by CM12 Y=021 : Allow

Define the type of call to be provided with Hold Message.

•(1)

(2)

Y=000: C.O. Line Call01: Tie Line Call02: Internal Call0500: Hold Message

Assign the data for Message on Hold Service to the Voice Response System.

•(1)(2)

Y=00000-007: Built-in VRS on CPU blade05XX: Message on HoldXX : 00-63: Message No.

•(1)(2)


Y=00

To record, replay and delete a message, assign the appropriate Voice Response System access code respectively.

•(1)(2)


START

CM12

CM15

CM48

CM49

CM20

END

1-430 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1006.fm

MUSIC ON HOLD

To provide External Hold Tone Source through TNT:

HARDWARE REQUIRED

To provide External Hold Tone Source through the PGD(2)-U10 ADP:External Hold Tone Source provided locally

To provide Message on Hold by Voice Response System:CPU blade (built-in VRS)

To provide the External Hold Tone Source through the TNT:• Through Pin Jack on CPU blade• External Tone Source provided locally

DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify Hold Tone Source per each tenant. •(1)(2)

Y=100-63: Tenant No.11 : Hold Tone Source No.NONE : Hold Tone Source on CPU Blade

Specify which tenant External Hold Tone is sent from.

(1)(2)

3880 : Tenant of held station/trunk1 : Tenant of holding station

START

CM64

CM08

END

1-431 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1007.fm

NIGHT SERVICECALL REROUTING

NIGHT SERVICECALL REROUTING

PROGRAMMING

Refer to the following.DIRECT INWARD DIALING (DID) Page 1-211DIRECT INWARD TERMINATION (DIT) Page 1-232TRUNK ANSWER ANY STATION (TAS) Page 1-447TIE LINES Page 1-537

1-432 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1007.fm

NIGHT SERVICEDAY/NIGHT MODE CHANGE BY STATION DIALING

DAY/NIGHT MODE CHANGE BY STATION DIALING

PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION DATA

Provide the system with Day/Night Mode Change by Station Dialing.

(1)

(2)

244: Change of Terminating System Incoming Trunk

0: Available

(1)(2)

245: Change Trunk Restriction Class 0: Available

Assign the data for terminating system in Day Mode/Night Mode/Mode A/Mode B, to each Loop/Ground Start trunk, respectively.

••••

(1)(2)

Y=02 Day ModeY=03 Night ModeY=40 Mode AY=41 Mode B000-511: Trunk No.04: Direct-In Termination

Assign the station number to be terminated by DIT in Day Mode/Night Mode/Mode A/Mode B respectively.

••••

(1)(2)

Y=04 Day ModeY=05 Night ModeY=42 Mode AY=43 Mode B000-511: Trunk No.X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.

When using Mode A or Mode B, assign the Day/Night Mode.

•(1)(2)




Assign Service Restriction B to each station. •(1)(2)


Allow Day/Night Mode Change by Station Dialing in Service Restriction B assigned by CM12 Y=02.

•(1)

(2)

Y=06000-15: Service Restriction Class B as-


START

CM08

CM30

CM65

CM12

CM15

A

1-433 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1007.fm

NIGHT SERVICEDAY/NIGHT MODE CHANGE BY STATION DIALING

NOTE: The following trunk data (CM30) can be changed by this feature (depending upon program-ming).

Day (Y) Night (Y) Mode A (Y) Mode B (Y)02 03 40 4104 05 42 4313 1415 1630 31

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the access code for Day/Night Mode Change by Station Dialing.

•(1)(2)

Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3X-XXXX: Access CodeA043: Day/Night Mode Change by Station

Dialing

Assign the Day/Night Mode Change by Tenant key on the Multiline Terminal, if required.

•(1)(2)

Y=00My Line No. + + Key No.F1300-F1363: Day/Night Mode Change by

Tenant 00-63

To the key which is set by CM90 Y=00>F13XX, specify the call indicator lamp control as “not available”.

•(1)(2)

Y=03My Line No. + + Key No.0: Not available

Assign the Day/Night Mode Change by Tenant key on the DSS Console, if required.

(1)

(2)

DSS Console No. (00-31) + DSS key No. (00-59)F1300-F1363: Day/Night Mode Change by

Tenant 00-63

A

CM20

CM90,

,

CM97

END

1-434 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1007.fm

NIGHT SERVICEDAY/NIGHT MODE CHANGE BY SYSTEM CLOCK

DAY/NIGHT MODE CHANGE BY SYSTEM CLOCK

PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the system clock data. (1)(2)

0: Calendar Year2007-2099

(1)(2)

1: DateMM DD WWMM : 01-12 (Month)DD : 01-31 (Date)WW: 00 (Sun)

01 (Mon)02 (Tue)03 (Wed)04 (Thu)05 (Fri)06 (Sat)

(1)(2)

2: TimeHH MM SSHH : 00-23 (Hour)MM: 00-59 (Minute)SS : 00-59 (Second)


•(1)(2)

Y=29 00-63: Tenant No.0 : Two kinds of mode

(Day Mode, Night Mode)1 : Four kinds of mode

(Day Mode, Night Mode, Mode A, Mode B)

Assign whether the Trunk Restriction Class is changed according to the schedule of Day/Night Mode Change by System Clock.

•(1)(2)

Y=36 00-63: Tenant No.0 : Provide

(Day Mode/Night Mode only)1 : Not provided

NOTE: In four kinds of mode change, the trunk restriction class is changed as follows:• Day Mode Day Mode• Night Mode/Mode A/Mode B Night Mode

START

CM02

CM65

A

1-435 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1007.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the Default Pattern number to each ten-ant to simplify the schedule assignment, if re-quired.See “Default Pattern of Time Schedule”.

Page 1-440

NOTE 1: When CM4A Y=90 is assigned, pre-viously assigned system data is overwritten.

NOTE 2: The schedule of each Default Pat-tern can be changed after the De-fault Pattern has been assigned.

•(1)(2)

Y=90 00-63: Tenant No.00: Default Pattern No. 001: Default Pattern No. 102: Default Pattern No. 203: Default Pattern No. 3

Assign the calendar number to each tenant number.

•(1)(2)

Y=00 00-63: Tenant No. 00-03: Calendar No. 1-4

Assign the week schedule number to the date to change schedule, in each calendar number assigned by CM4A Y=00.

••••

(1)

(2)

Y=01 Calendar No. 1Y=02 Calendar No. 2Y=03 Calendar No. 3Y=04 Calendar No. 4XX ZZ: DateXX: 01-12: MonthZZ : 01-31: Date10 : Week Schedule No. 011 : Week Schedule No. 112 : Week Schedule No. 213 : Week Schedule No. 3NONE : Week Schedule No. 0

A

CM4A

OFF LINE

B

1-436 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1007.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

If you want to assign the exceptional schedule for a date, assign the time schedule number to the date, in each calendar number assigned by CM4A Y=00.

••••

(1)

(2)

Y=01 Calendar No. 1Y=02 Calendar No. 2Y=03 Calendar No. 3Y=04 Calendar No. 4XX ZZ: DateXX: 01-12: MonthZZ : 01-31: Date20 : Time Schedule No. 021 : Time Schedule No. 122 : Time Schedule No. 223 : Time Schedule No. 324 : Time Schedule No. 425 : Time Schedule No. 526 : Time Schedule No. 627 : Time Schedule No. 7NONE : Week Schedule No. 0

Assign the time schedule number to each day in the week schedule assigned by CM4A Y=01-04.

••••

(1)

(2)

Y=10 Week Schedule No. 0Y=11 Week Schedule No. 1Y=12 Week Schedule No. 2Y=13 Week Schedule No. 30: Sunday1: Monday2: Tuesday3: Wednesday4: Thursday5: Friday6: Saturday20 : Time Schedule No. 021 : Time Schedule No. 122 : Time Schedule No. 223 : Time Schedule No. 324 : Time Schedule No. 425 : Time Schedule No. 526 : Time Schedule No. 627 : Time Schedule No. 7 NONE : Time Schedule No. 0

B

CM4A

C

1-437 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1007.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the time and its mode for the time schedule assigned by CM4A Y=10-13 or Y=01-04.

NOTE 1: Only “0” or “5” is available for the last digit number of minute at the 1st data of CM4A Y=20-27.When the following last digit num-ber is assigned, the number is cor-rected and set as follows:assigned number corrected to

1-4 06-9 5

NOTE 2: Actually, the mode is changed after 4-8 seconds of the assigned time.

••••••••

(1)

(2)

Y=20 (Time Schedule No. 0)Y=21 (Time Schedule No. 1)Y=22 (Time Schedule No. 2)Y=23 (Time Schedule No. 3)Y=24 (Time Schedule No. 4)Y=25 (Time Schedule No. 5)Y=26 (Time Schedule No. 6)Y=27 (Time Schedule No. 7)XX ZZ: TimeXX: 00-23: HourZZ : 00-55: Minute NOTE 1, NOTE 200 : Day Mode01 : Night Mode02 : Mode A03 : Mode BNONE : Day Mode

C

CM4A

END

1-438 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1007.fm


To provide an external Key (To use the PGD(2)-U10 ADP):

DESCRIPTION DATA



•(1)

(2)



•(1)

(2)



NOTE: Set the second data to “1” when combining external key with paging. Set the second data to “3” only when using this feature.

•(1)(2)


Specify the External Key group number. •(1)(2)

Y=66X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.00-63 : External Key Group No.


•(1)(2)




START

CM05

BLADE RESET

CM10

CM12

CM13

BLADE RESET

A

JULY/18/2008

1-439 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1007.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

To cancel the Day/Night Mode Change by System Clock temporarily, assign the external key as the cancel key.

•(1)

(2)

Y=30 XX ZXX: 00-63: External key Group No.

assigned by CM12 Y=66Z : 0-3: Circuit No.01: Day/Night Mode Change by System

Clock Cancel Key

A

CM61

END

JULY/18/2008

1-440 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1007.fm


Default Pattern of Time ScheduleBy assigning CM4A Y=90; Default Pattern No. 0-3, you can simplify the schedule assignment for eachtenant. The schedule of each Default Pattern can be changed after the Default Pattern has been assigned.

The following shows the summary of the Default Pattern and the schedule set by each Default Pattern.

Summary of Default Pattern


Tenant No. Calendar No. 1-4

00

63

Week Schedule X

Week Schedule X

1/1

12/31

Sunday

Monday

Tuesday

Wednesday

Thursday

Friday

Saturday

Time Schedule 7

Time Schedule X

Time Schedule X

Time Schedule X

Time Schedule X

Time Schedule X

Time Schedule 7

Week Schedule

X: DEFAULT Pattern NO. 0-3

Night Mode

Day Mode

Night Mode

Time Schedule X

Night Mode

Time Schedule 7

0:00

9:00

17:00

24:00

0:00

24:00

1-441 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1007.fm


Default Pattern of Time Schedule (CM4A Y=90)

• Default Pattern No. 0 (CM4A Y=90 2nd data: 00)


CM4A Y No. 1ST 2ND MEANING OF SETTING00 00-63 00 Calendar No. 1 is used for the tenant

01 0101-1231 10 Week schedule No. 0 is used for all date

10 1-5 20 Time schedule No. 0 is used for Monday through Friday

10 0, 6 27 Time schedule No. 7 is used for Saturday and Sunday

20 0000-0855 01 0:00-9:00 is Night Mode for time schedule No. 0

20 0900-1655 00 9:00-17:00 is Day Mode for time schedule No. 0











1-442 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1007.fm


Default Pattern of Time Schedule (CM4A Y=90)



















1-443 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1007.fm

NIGHT SERVICEOVERFLOW FOR TAS QUEUE

OVERFLOW FOR TAS QUEUE

PROGRAMMING

In addition to the TAS programming ( Page 1-447 ), do the following programming.

HARDWARE REQUIRED

When a VRS is used as the destination of Call Forwarding: CPU blade (built-in VRS)

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the destination of Call Forwarding by Overflow for TAS Queue.

••••

(1)(2)

Y=26 Day ModeY=27 Night ModeY=28 Mode AY=29 Mode B00-63: Tenant No. X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.E000 : Attendant ConsoleEB000-EB007 : Voice Response System

No.

Specify the timing of Call Forwarding by Overflow for TAS Queue.

•(1)(2)

Y=04201-98: 4-392 seconds


When a call is forwarded to the VMS/station/Attendant Console by Overflow for TAS Queue, assign the Call Forwarding setting sta-tion number, which is sent to the destination.

•(1)(2)


When a Voice Response System is set as the destination of Call Forwarding, set the func-tion of the Voice Response System as an-nouncement service for Overflow for TAS Queue.

•(1)(2)

Y=00000-007: Built-in VRS on CPU blade1800: Announcement Service for Overflow

for TAS Queue

START

CM51

CM41

CM51

CM49

END

1-444 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1007.fm

NIGHT SERVICEQUEUE LIMIT FOR TAS

QUEUE LIMIT FOR TAS

PROGRAMMING

In addition to the TAS programming ( Page 1-447 ), do the following programming.

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the number of Queue Limit for TAS to each mode and tenant.

••••

(1)(2)

Y=3 Day ModeY=4 Night ModeY=5 Mode AY=6 Mode B00-63: Tenant No. 01-99 : 1-99 linesNONE : No limit

Specify the terminating system as TAS. ••••

(1)

(2)


assigned by CM76 Y=00/90D13: TAS

Specify whether the incoming call of each DID number is restricted by Queue Limit for TAS.

NOTE: When there are two or more DID numbers for one tenant, and if you want to set the Queue Limit only for one DID number, set “0” to the DID number, and set “3” for the other DID numbers.If you want to set the Queue Limit for one DID number and the other DID numbers concurrently, set “0” to the DID number, and set “2” to the other DID numbers.

•(1)

(2)


assigned by CM76 Y=00/900 : Restricted2 : Not restricted

(countable for Queue Limit)3 : Not restricted

(uncountable for Queue Limit)

START

CM64

CM76

A

1-445 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1007.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the destination of Call Forwarding by Queue Limit for TAS.

••••

(1)(2)

Y=26 Day ModeY=27 Night ModeY=28 Mode AY=29 Mode B00-63: Tenant No.X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.E000 : Attendant Console EB000-EB007 : Voice Response System

No.

When a call is forwarded to the VMS/station/VRS/Attendant Console by Queue Limit for TAS, assign the Call Forwarding setting sta-tion number, which is sent to the destination.

•(1)(2)


When a Voice Response System is set as the destination of Call Forwarding, set the func-tion of the Voice Response System as an-nouncement service for Queue Limit for TAS.

•(1)(2)

Y=00000-007: Built-in VRS on CPU blade1800: Announcement Service for Queue

Limit for TAS

Provide the system with reset of the Queue Limit counter for TAS per tenant.

(1)(2)

6021 : To provide

The system will reset the counter when the fol-lowing operation has not occurred for about one hour.• Increase/decrease of counter• Incoming calls restricted by Queue Limit • Call Forwarding to a station/Attendant/

VRS by Queue Limit

Specify the timing of Call Forwarding by Queue Limit for TAS.

•(1)(2)

Y=04201-98: 4-392 seconds


A

CM51

CM49

CM08

CM41

END

1-446 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1007.fm


HARDWARE REQUIRED

When a VRS is used as the destination of Call Forwarding: CPU blade (built-in VRS)

1-447 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1007.fm

NIGHT SERVICETRUNK ANSWER ANY STATION (TAS)

TRUNK ANSWER ANY STATION (TAS)

PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign a Trunk Restriction Class to each sta-tion.

•(1)(2)

Y=01X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.X ZZ: 1-8: Night Trunk Restriction Class

1: Unrestricted (RCA)2: Non-Restricted 1 (RCB)3: Non-Restricted 2 (RCC)4: Semi-Restricted 1 (RCD)5: Semi-Restricted 2 (RCE)6: Restricted 1 (RCF)7: Restricted 2 (RCG)8: Fully Restricted (RCH)

Assign Service Restriction Class B for the TAS to required stations.

•(1)(2)


Allow TAS service in Service Restriction Class B assigned by CM12 Y=02.

•(1)

(2)



Assign the TAS to the terminating system in Day/Night Mode/Mode A/Mode B for re-quired trunks.

••••

(1)(2)

Y=02 Day ModeY=03 Night ModeY=40 Mode AY=41 Mode B000-511: Trunk No.03: Trunk-Direct Appearances + TAS08: Dial-in13: TAS18: ISDN Indial

Assign the TAS group number to the trunks as-signed by CM30 Y=02/03/40/41.

•(1)(2)

Y=17000-511: Trunk No.00-63: TAS group No.

START

CM12

CM15

CM30

A

1-448 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1007.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the data for interpreting the digits re-ceived.CM35 Y=018 must be set to “0” (Received Digits Conversion is to be provided).

••••

(1)

(2)




D03: Trunk-Direct Appearances + TAS

D13: TAS

A

CM76

B

1-449 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1007.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify the function of each type of TAS with-in a system.

•(1)

(2)

(1)(2)

Y=0-4 TAS Answer A-EType of Call 0: C.O. Incoming Call1: Tie Line/DID3: C.O. Incoming Call in Night Mode4: Overflowed DIT Call 0 : Cannot be answered1 : Can be answered

7: A call terminated to different tenant0 : Can be answered1 : Cannot be answered

Assign the access code for each type of TAS (TAS Answer A-E) assigned by CM53.

•(1)(2)

Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3X-XXXX: Access CodeA047: TAS Answer A A048: TAS Answer B A049: TAS Answer C A050: TAS Answer D A051: TAS Answer E

Specify the tenants allowing TAS Answer be-tween them.

•(1)

(2)

Y=0 XX ZZXX: 00-63: Tenant No. of TAS Answer sta-

tionZZ : 00-63: Tenant No. of Trunk0 : Allow1 : Restricted

B

CM53

(1)Y 0 1 3 4 7

0 TASAnswer A 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1

1 TASAnswer B 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1

2 TASAnswer C 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1

3 TASAnswer D 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1

4 TASAnswer E 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1

CM20

CM63

END

1-450 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1007.fm


To provide the External TAS Indicator (To use the External Relay Interface on CPU):

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the TAS BUZZER to the required trunks.

•(1)(2)

Y=13 Day Mode/14 Night Mode000-511: Trunk No.01: TAS BUZZER

Assign the TAS Group number assigned by CM30 Y=17 to circuit number of the External Relay Interface on CPU.

•(1)(2)

Y=00312, 313: External Relay Interface on CPU.13XXXX: 00-63: TAS Group No. 00-63 assigned

by CM30 Y=17

Specify the indication pattern on External TAS Indicator.

(1)(2)



OFF)

START

CM30

CM44

CM59

END

JULY/18/2008

1-451 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1007.fm


To provide the External TAS Indicator (To use the PGD(2)-U10 ADP):

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the TAS BUZZER to the required trunks.

•(1)(2)

Y=13 Day Mode/14 Night Mode000-511: Trunk No.01: TAS BUZZER



•(1)

(2)



•(1)

(2)


Assign the Kind of PGD(2)- U10 station.


•(1)(2)



•(1)(2)




START

CM30

CM05

BLADE RESET

CM10

CM12

CM13

BLADE RESET

A

JULY/18/2008

1-452 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1007.fm


HARDWARE REQUIRED

To provide the External TAS Indicator:– PGD(2)-U10 ADP/External Relay Interface on CPU– IndicatorRequirement for External Indicator

Control Method: Ground/Battery (-24 V) (Maximum 125 mA)Type : Visual and/or Audible type with volume control

To provide the telephone set for TAS Indication:– LC blade– Conventional telephone sets

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the TAS Group number assigned by CM30 Y=17 to circuit number of PGD(2)-U10 ADP.

•(1)

(2)

Y=00XX YXX: 00-31: Relay Group No.Y : 0-3: Circuit No.13XXXX: 00-63: TAS Group No. 00-63 assigned

by CM30 Y=17


•(1)(2)


Specify the indication pattern on External TAS Indicator.

(1)(2)



OFF)

A

CM44

CM59

END

JULY/18/2008

1-453 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1007.fm

OFF-HOOK ALARM

OFF-HOOK ALARM

PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION DATA

Provide Off-Hook Alarm for the required sta-tions.

•(1)(2)


Assign the destination for Off-Hook Alarm to a station or Attendant Console.

•(1)(2)

Y=12 00-63: Tenant No.X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.E000 : Attendant Console

If the Attendant Console is designated as the destination of Off-Hook Alarm by CM51 Y=12, assign Off-Hook Alarm to the ICI key.

•(1)(2)

Y=00ATTCON No. (E000-E007) + + Key No.F6066: Off-Hook Alarm

Specify the timing for Off-Hook Alarm. •(1)(2)

Y=0 2201-08: 4-32 seconds

(4 second increments)If no data is set, default setting is 28-32 seconds.

Specify Service Restriction Class C for Off-Hook Alarm to busy destination.

•(1)

(2)

Y=07 X-XXXXXXXX: Station No. of destina-

tion00-15 : Service Restriction Class C

Allow the Off-Hook Alarm call in Service Re-striction Class C assigned by CM12 Y=07.

•(1)

(2)

Y=097, 098 00-15: Service Restriction Class C as-

signed by CM12 Y=07See left column.

START

CM13

CM51

CM90,

CM41

CM12

CM15

YMEANING OF DATA

097 098

0 0

UCD Call Waiting (CM08>212: 0) Call Waiting is automatically selected, if UCD is not pro-vided in the system.

0 1 UCD (CM08>212: 1)1 0 Call Waiting1 1 Hunting

END

1-454 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1007.fm

OFF-PREMISES EXTENSIONS

OFF-PREMISES EXTENSIONS

PROGRAMMING

HARDWARE REQUIRED

LLC blade

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign a Unit and Slot number to the LLC blade.

•(1)

(2)

Y=0XX ZZXX: 01-50: Unit No.ZZ : 01-18: Slot No.21: LLC blade

Assign the station number of Long Line Cir-cuit (LLC blade) to required Physical Port number.

•(1)

(2)

Y=00XX YY ZZ: Physical Port No.XX: 01-50: Unit No.YY: 01-18: Slot No.ZZ: 01-32: Circuit No.X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.

Remove the PAD on Off-Premises Extensions. •(1)(2)

Y=09X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.0: No PAD

START

CM05

BLADE RESET

CM10

CM13

END

1-455 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1007.fm

PAD LOCK

PAD LOCK

PROGRAMMING

(1) To change the Station Class with Station Authorization Code

DESCRIPTION DATA


•(1)(2)


Allow Authorization Code in Service Restric-tion Class A assigned by CM12 Y=02.

•(1)

(2)

Y=031 Authorization Code00-15: Service Restriction Class A as-


Allow Authorization Code operation after op-erating trunk call originating in Service Re-striction Class A assigned by CM12 Y=02.

•(1)

(2)



Specify the number of digits for Station Autho-rization Code.

(1)(2)


Assign the access code for Station Class change with Station Authorization Code.

•(1)(2)

Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3X-XXXX: Access CodeA230: Station Class change with Station

Authorization Code

Assign the temporary Trunk Restriction Class to be applied to each station after the station class is changed.

•(1)(2)

Y=01 X-XXXXXXXX: Station No. 1-8: Trunk Restriction Class 1 : Unrestricted (RCA) 2 : Non-Restricted 1 (RCB) 3 : Non-Restricted 2 (RCC) 4 : Semi-Restricted 1 (RCD) 5 : Semi-Restricted 2 (RCE) 6 : Restricted 1 (RCF) 7 : Restricted 2 (RCG) 8 : Fully-Restricted (RCH)

START

CM12

CM15

CM42

CM20

CM2B

A

1-456 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1007.fm

PAD LOCK

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the temporary Service Restriction Class A/B/C to be applied to each station after the station class is changed.

•(1)(2)

Y=02X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.00-15 : Service Restriction Class A

•(1)(2)

Y=03X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.00-15 : Service Restriction Class B

•(1)(2)


Select the timing when the temporary service class returns to proper service class.

(1)(2)

2580 : When called number has been dialed1 : When station goes on-hook

A

CM2B

CM08

END

1-457 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1007.fm

PAD LOCK

(2) To set/change Station Authorization Code from each station

NOTE: One Station Authorization Code can be assigned per station.

DESCRIPTION DATA


•(1)(2)


Allow Station Authorization Code Set/Change in Service Restriction Class A assigned by CM12 Y=02.

•

(1)

(2)

Y=141 Station Authorization Code Set/Change00-15: Service Restriction Class A as-


Assign the access code for Station Authoriza-tion Code Set/Change.

•(1)(2)

Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3X-XXXX: Access CodeA231: Station Authorization Code Set/

Change

Specify whether the mask indication (*) is pro-vided for Station Authorization Code entry.

NOTE: When CM08>508 2nd data=0 (To provide) is set, the mask indication for Authorization Codes, Forced Account Codes and DISA codes are also provided.

(1)(2)


START

CM12

CM15

CM20

CM08

END

1-458 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1007.fm

PAD LOCK

(3) To provide Pad Lock Set/Reset from the station

(4) To set/clear/display Station Authorization Code on the PCPro

DESCRIPTION DATA


•(1)(2)

Y=02X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.00-15 : Service Restriction Class A

Allow Pad Lock Set/Reset by Station Authori-zation Code in Service Restriction Class A assigned by CM2B Y=02.

•

(1)

(2)

Y=140 Pad Lock Set/Reset by Station Au-thorization Code00-15: Service Restriction Class A as-

signed by CM2B Y=020: Allow

Assign the access code for Pad Lock Set/Reset by Station Authorization Code.

•(1)(2)

Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3X-XXXX: Access CodeA232: Pad Lock Set by Station Authoriza-

tion CodeA233: Pad Lock Reset by Station Authori-

zation Code

DESCRIPTION DATA

Set/clear/display Station Authorization Code. •(1)(2)

Y=00X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.X-XXXXXXXX: Station Authorization

CodeCCC : Clear

START

CM2B

CM15

CM20

END

START

CM2B

END

1-459 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1007.fm

PC PROGRAMMING

PC PROGRAMMING

PROGRAMMING

To provide password service:

DESCRIPTION DATA


••••••••••••••

(1)

(2)

Y=00: Password Level 0-6 Y=01: Password Level 1-6 Y=02: Password Level 2-6 Y=03: Password Level 3-6 Y=04: Password Level 4-6 Y=05: Password Level 5-6 Y=06: Password Level 6 Y=10: Password Level 0Y=11: Password Level 1Y=12: Password Level 2Y=13: Password Level 3Y=14: Password Level 4Y=15: Password Level 5Y=16: Password Level 602-F8: Command Code exclusive of 03,

E7, E90 : Allowed1 : Restricted

START

CME7

A

JULY/18/2008

1-460 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1007.fm

PC PROGRAMMING

NOTE: If the Password Service is provided, enter the predetermined password (assigned by CME9>0-7) by CM03 before programming from the PCPro.

+ 03 + + Password Level No. (0-7) + + Password +– “OK” will be displayed, if accepted.– “DATA ERROR” will be displayed if the password is incorrect.

HARDWARE REQUIRED

Refer to “PC Programming Manual”.

DESCRIPTION DATA


(1)(2)

8 0 : Allowed1 : Restricted



A password for Password Level 7 should be as-signed in advance because of providing the password service by Function No. 9 of CME9.The following passwords are not available.“CCCCCCCC”“FFFFFFFF”


Provide the system with Password Feature. Af-ter setting this data, access to system program-ming is only available with password entry.

(1)(2)

9 0: Provided

A

CME9

END

ST DE DE EXE

JULY/18/2008

1-461 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1007.fm

PC PROGRAMMINGFAULT MESSAGE

FAULT MESSAGE

PROGRAMMING

Refer to “System Maintenance Manual”.

JULY/18/2008

1-462 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1007.fm

PC PROGRAMMINGFAULT REPORT SCHEDULING

FAULT REPORT SCHEDULING

PROGRAMMING


JULY/18/2008

1-463 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1007.fm

PC PROGRAMMINGPASSWORDS

PASSWORDS

PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION DATA


••••••••••••••

(1)

(2)

Y=00: Password Level 0-6Y=01: Password Level 1-6Y=02: Password Level 2-6Y=03: Password Level 3-6Y=04: Password Level 4-6Y=05: Password Level 5-6Y=06: Password Level 6Y=10: Password Level 0Y=11: Password Level 1Y=12: Password Level 2Y=13: Password Level 3Y=14: Password Level 4Y=15: Password Level 5Y=16: Password Level 6XX: 02-F8: Command Codes exclusive of

03, E7, E90 : Allowed1 : Restricted

START

CME7

A

JULY/18/2008

1-464 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1007.fm

PC PROGRAMMINGPASSWORDS

DESCRIPTION DATA


(1)(2)




A password for Password Level 7 should be as-signed in advance because of providing the password service by Function No. 9 of CME9.The following passwords are not available.“CCCCCCCC”“FFFFFFFF”


Provide the system with Password feature. Af-ter setting this data, access to system program-ming will be available with password entry.

(1)(2)

90: Provided

A

CME9

END

JULY/18/2008

1-465 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1007.fm

PC PROGRAMMINGPEG COUNT

PEG COUNT

PROGRAMMING

Refer to “Command Manual”. (CMB0, CMB3)

JULY/18/2008

1-466 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1007.fm

PC PROGRAMMINGREMOVE AND RESTORE SERVICE

REMOVE AND RESTORE SERVICE

PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION DATA

Set or cancel make-busy to stations and trunks. •(1)(2)

Y=0X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.0 : Make-busy set1 : Make-busy cancel

•(1)(2)

Y=1000-511: Trunk No.0 : Make-busy set1 : Make-busy cancel

START

CME5

END

JULY/18/2008

1-467 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1007.fm

PC PROGRAMMINGSTATION LINE STATUS DISPLAY

STATION LINE STATUS DISPLAY

PROGRAMMING


JULY/18/2008

1-468 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1007.fm

PERIODIC TIME INDICATION TONE

PERIODIC TIME INDICATION TONE

PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION DATA

Provide the system with this feature.And specify availability of this service on Tie Line call.

(1)(2)

135: On outgoing C.O. line call0: To provide

(1)(2)

136: On outgoing Tie line call0 : To provide1 : Not provided

Assign Service Restriction Class B for this feature to required stations.

•(1)(2)


Allow Periodic Time Indication Tone in Service Restriction Class B assigned by CM12 Y=02.

•(1)

(2)

Y=06100-15: Service Restriction Class B as-


Assign required stations as Ordinary Station.If assigned to 0 (Analog Data Station), this feature will not be applied to the station.

•(1)(2)

Y=07X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.1 : Ordinary Station

Specify the timing interval for Periodic Time Indication Tone.

•(1)(2)

Y=00901-17: 32-548 seconds


START

CM08

CM12

CM15

CM13

CM41

END

1-469 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1007.fm

POOLED LINE ACCESS

POOLED LINE ACCESS

PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the Pooled Lines (Virtual Line station number) to the required Virtual Port number.

(1)(2)


The Virtual Port numbers have no relation with the Physical Port number used in CM10 Y=00. There-fore, any Virtual Port numbers can be assigned to each Virtual Line station number.However, the Virtual Line station number should be different from the Single Line number assigned by CM10 Y=00.

Assign the Pooled Line keys to each Multiline Terminal. Pooled Lines 00-63 can answer a call terminated to tenants 00-63 respectively, and can originate a call using trunk routes 00-63 respectively.

Pooled Line Origination Termination00 Trunk Route 00 Tenant 0001 01 01

63 Trunk Route 63 Tenant 63

•(1)(2)

Y=00My Line No. + + Key No. F4100-F4163: Pooled Line 00-63

Assign a trunk route number and Tenant No. to the trunks in the Pooled Line group.

•

(1)(2)

Y=00 Trunk Route Allocation


•(1)(2)

Y=01 Allocation of tenants to trunks 000-511: Trunk No.00-63: Tenant No. (00)

Specify the terminating system, including TAS, of the trunks in the Pooled Line group.

••••

(1)(2)

Y=02 Terminating System in Day ModeY=03 Terminating System in Night ModeY=40 Terminating System in Mode AY=41 Terminating System in Mode B000-511: Trunk No.03: Trunk-Direct Appearances and TAS10: Attendant Console + TAS12: Attendant Console + Trunk Direct

Appearances + TAS

START

CM11

CM90

~ ~ ~,

CM30BLADE RESET

A

1-470 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1007.fm

POOLED LINE ACCESS

HARDWARE REQUIRED


DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify whether call terminating is indicated on the Pooled Line keys assigned by CM90>F4100-F4163.

(1)(2)


A

CM08

END

1-471 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1007.fm

PRIORITY CALL

PRIORITY CALL

PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign Service Restriction Class A for Priority Call to the required stations.

•(1)(2)


Allow Priority Call in Service Restriction Class A assigned by CM12 Y=02.

••

(1)

(2)

Y=017 Priority Call 0Y=018 Priority Call 100-15: Service Restriction Class A as-


Assign the access code for Priority Calls 0 and 1 respectively.

•(1)(2)

Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3X-XXXX: Access CodeA088: Priority Call 0 A089: Priority Call 1

Specify the destination for Priority Calls 0 and 1.

(1)(2)

250: For Priority Call 0 0 : Same Station as Off-Hook Alarm 1 : Attendant Console

(1)(2)

251: For Priority Call 10 : Same station as Off-Hook Alarm 1 : Attendant Console

If CM08>250/251 is set to “1”, assign the Pri-ority Calls 0 and 1 to any Priority Call Keys on DESKCON.

•(1)

(2)

Y=00ATTCON No. (E000-E007) + + Key No.F6054: Priority Call 0 F6055: Priority Call 1

If CM08>250/251 is set to “0”, assign the des-tination of Priority Calls 0 and 1 to the desired station.

•(1)(2)


START

CM12

CM15

CM20

CM08

CM90,

CM51

END

1-472 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1007.fm

PRIVACY

PRIVACY

PROGRAMMING

To provide the Privacy feature for each station:

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign Service Restriction Class B to the re-quired stations.

•(1)(2)

Y=02X-XXXXXXXX: My Line No. XX ZZZZ: 00-15 : Service Restriction Class B

Restrict Privacy Release in Service Restriction Class B assigned by CM12 Y=02.

•(1)

(2)


signed by CM12 Y=020: Restricted

START

CM12

CM15

END

1-473 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1007.fm

PRIVACY

To provide the Privacy Release feature for each station:

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign Service Restriction Class B to each sta-tion.

•(1)(2)

Y=02X-XXXXXXXX: My Line No. XX ZZZZ: 00-15 : Service Restriction Class B

Allow Privacy Release in Service Restriction Class B assigned by CM12 Y=02.

•(1)

(2)




•(1)(2)

Y=07X-XXXXXXXX: My Line No. XX: 00-15 : Service Restriction Class C

Specify the way of Privacy Release. •(1)

(2)


signed by CM12 Y=070 : Direct Privacy Release1 : Manual Privacy Release

When providing the Privacy Release feature which does not use My line of the third party, set this data to 0.

(1)(2)

5220: To provide

START

CM12

CM15

CM12

CM15

CM08

END

1-474 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1007.fm

PRIVATE LINES

PRIVATE LINES

PROGRAMMING

When providing Private Lines for a single line or Multiline Terminal, do the following Trunk-Direct Ap-pearances programming.

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the trunks to be seized on a per-station basis.

•(1)(2)

Y=16X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.D000-D511: Trunk No.

Specify the designated seizure of trunks on a per-trunk route basis.

•(1)(2)

Y=09800-63: Trunk Route No.0 : Private Lines1 : No Private Lines

Specify the number of times to hunt through the trunks within the trunk route.

(1)(2)

0801-16 : One time-16 timesNONE : Not Seized

If data is not set, the default setting is 00 (no sei-zure when the designated trunk is busy). To as-sign default setting, assign “CCC”.

START

CM12

CM35

CM42

END

1-475 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1007.fm

REMOTE HOLD

REMOTE HOLD

PROGRAMMING

Remote Hold from a Multiline Terminal:

DESCRIPTION DATA


•(1)(2)


Allow Remote Hold in Service Restriction Class A assigned by CM12 Y=02.

•(1)

(2)



Specify the recall timing for Remote Hold. •(1)(2)

Y=00601-98: 4-392 seconds



Assign a Hold key to the Multiline Terminal. •(1)(2)


START

CM12

CM15

CM41

CM90,

END

1-476 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1007.fm

REMOTE HOLD

Remote Hold from a DESKCON:

DESCRIPTION DATA

Provide Remote Hold from DESKCON ser-vice.

(1)(2)

705 0: Available

Specify the recall timing for Remote Hold from DESKCON.

•(1)(2)

Y=00001-14: 2.4-33.6 seconds


(9.6 second increments)If no data is set, default setting is 31.2-33.6 sec-onds.

START

CM08

CM41

END

1-477 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1007.fm

RETURN MESSAGE SCHEDULE DISPLAY

RETURN MESSAGE SCHEDULE DISPLAY

PROGRAMMING

HARDWARE REQUIRED


DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign Service Restriction Class A for setting a Return Message Schedule.

•(1)(2)


Allow Return Message Schedule Display in Service Restriction A assigned by CM12 Y=02.

•(1)

(2)



Assign whether the call to a station, set for Re-turn Message Schedule Display, gets ringing or Reorder Tone.

(1)(2)

334 0 : Available (Ringing) 1 : Not available (ROT Connection)

Assign an access code for Return Message Schedule set and cancel, respectively.

•(1)(2)

Y=0-3 Number Plan Group 0-3X-XXXX: Access CodeA154: Return Message Schedule Display

SetA023: Return Message Schedule Display

Cancel

START

CM12

CM15

CM08

CM20

END

1-478 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1007.fm

ROUTE ADVANCE

ROUTE ADVANCE

PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the access code to Route Advance Block 00-31.

•(1)(2)

Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3X-XXXX: Route Advance Access Code200-231: Route Advance Block 00-31

Specify the alternative routes with the order of priority to be seized. Up to seven alternative routes can be set by using two Route Advance Blocks, as shown below.

•

(1)

(2)

Y=00-31 Route Advance Block assigned by CM20>200-2310-3: Order of Priority0 : 1st1 : 2nd2 : 3rd3 : 4th100-163 : Trunk Route 00-63200-231 : Route Advance Block 00-31NONE : No data

START

CM20

CM22

01230123

000102

03040506

100101102201103104105106

PRIORITY ROUTE DATA

1st2nd3rd

4th5th6th7th

RouteAdvanceBlock 00

RouteAdvanceBlock 01

To Route AdvanceBlock 01

END

1-479 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1007.fm

SAVE AND REPEAT

SAVE AND REPEAT

PROGRAMMING

HARDWARE REQUIRED


DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the SAVE & REPEAT key to the Mul-tiline Terminal.

NOTE: Up to three Save and Repeat keys can be assigned per Multiline Ter-minal.

•(1)(2)

Y=00My Line No. + + Key No. F1001, F1013, F1014

START

CM90,

END

1-480 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1007.fm

SECURITY ALARM

SECURITY ALARM

PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the Hot Line to the station connected to the contact.

•(1)(2)

Y=03X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.04: Hot Line

Assign the Attendant Console as the Hot Line destination of the station.

NOTE: When assigning a station number to a Calling Side, the second data of CM12 Y=03 must be set to “04”.

•(1)(2)

Y=00-99 Hot Line Pair No. 0: Calling Side X-XXXXXXXX: Station No. associated

with the contact closure

(1)(2)

1: Called Side E00XX: 0-7: ATTCON No. assigned by CM10

Y=00

START

CM12

CM52

END

1-481 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1007.fm

SEMI-AUTOMATIC CAMP-ON


PROGRAMMING

To reenter a Camped-On trunk from an Attendant before Automatic Recall:

DESCRIPTION DATA

As a type of Camp-On operation from Atten-dant Console, specify Semi-Automatic Camp-On.

(1)(2)

542 0 : Semi-Automatic Camp-On1 : Attendant Camp-On

Specify the Camp-On Tone sent to busy station.

(1)(2)

068 0 : Camp-on Tone is sent out only once.1 : Camp-on Tone is repeated at an inter-

val of 4 seconds.

Specify the recall timing of Camp-On. •(1)(2)

Y=0 0001-14: 2.4-33.6 seconds


(9.6 second increments)If no data is set, the default setting is 31.2-33.6 seconds.

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the access code for Call Pickup-Direct. •(1)(2)

Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3X-XXXX: Access CodeA021: Call Pickup-Direct

START

CM08

CM41

END

START

CM20

END

1-482 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1007.fm


To display the busy station number and name on an Attendant Console when reentering a Camped-Ontrunk by pressing the loop key:

DESCRIPTION DATA

Provide the Attendant Console with the busy station number/name display when reentering a Camped-On trunk.

(1)(2)


START

CM08

END

1-483 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1007.fm

SET RELOCATION

SET RELOCATION

PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign Service Restriction Class A for Set Re-location to the required stations.

•(1)(2)


Allow Set Relocation (Setting Side). •(1)

(2)



Allow being moved and changed by Set Relo-cation operation.

•(1)

(2)



Allow Authorization Code operation after op-erating trunk call originating in Service Re-striction Class A assigned by CM12 Y=02.

•(1)

(2)



Assign the access code for Authorization Code.

•(1)(2)


Set the Authorization Code for Service Re-striction Class A assigned by CM15 Y=131.

NOTE: For setting the Authorization Code, refer to AUTHORIZATION CODE.

Page 1-22

Assign the access code for Set Relocation. •(1)(2)


START

CM12

CM15

CM20

CM2A

CM20

END

1-484 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1007.fm

SHORT MESSAGE SERVICE (SMS)

SHORT MESSAGE SERVICE (SMS)[For EU]

PROGRAMMING

To restrict a toll call, do the programming of CODE RESTRICTION. Page 1-149And to provide the caller ID-station, do the programming of CALLER ID-STATION (ETSI-FSK).

Page 1-126

HARDWARE REQUIRED

Analog telephone with LCD which supports Caller IDLLC bladeShort Message Service Center (SM-SC)

1-485 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1007.fm

SINGLE DIGIT FEATURE ACCESS CODE


PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION DATA

To activate the Single-Digit Feature Access Code feature, set the data for 050, 051, 069, 148 and 543 to “1”.

(1)(2)

050: * Button as Switch Hook Flash.1 : Ineffective

(1)(2)

051: # Button as Switch Hook Flash.1 : Ineffective

(1)

(2)


1 : Step Call

(1)

(2)


1 : Ineffective

(1)(2)

543: Step Call1 : Allow

Provide the system with the Single-Digit Fea-ture Access Code on RBT or Voice Call con-nection.

(1)(2)

1560: Available

Provide the system with the Single-Digit Fea-ture Access Code on BT connection.

(1)(2)

2080: Available

Specify whether the access codes of Single-Digit Feature Access Code feature are fixed or not.

(1)(2)

5700 : Programmable Access Code1 : Fixed Access Code

START

CM08

A

1-486 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1007.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

When using programmable access code (CM08>570 is set to 0), assign the Single-Digit Feature Access Code for the BT connec-tion.

•(1)(2)

Y=4 X: Access code (0-9, A (*), B (#))2 : Call Back/Trunk Queuing-

Outgoing 3 : Executive Override4 : Camp-On5 : Call Waiting6 : Message Reminder Set7 : Step Call8 : Message Waiting Record9 : Voice Mail TransferNONE : Single-Digit Feature Access


When using programmable access code (CM08>570 is set to 0), assign the Single-Digit Feature Access Code for the RBT con-nection.

•(1)(2)

Y=5X: Access code (0-9, A (*), B (#))1 : Internal Tone/Voice Signaling2 : Call Back/Trunk Queuing-

Outgoing 6 : Message Reminder Set8 : Message Waiting Record9 : Voice Mail TransferNONE : Single-Digit Feature Access


A

CM20

END

1-487 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1007.fm


When CM08>570 is set to 1, the associated access codes become as shown below, and these access codescannot be changed.

On Busy Tone Connection On Ring Back Tone Connection

1. None 1. Internal Tone/Voice Signaling NOTE 42. Call Back/Trunk Queuing-Outgoing 2. Call Back-Don’t Answer NOTE 1, 2, 4 NOTE 1, 2 3. None3. Executive Override NOTE 1, 2 4. None4. Camp-On 5. None5. Call Waiting 6. Message Reminder/Message Waiting Set NOTE 46. Message Reminder/Message Waiting Set 7. None7. Step Call (7 + Last one digit) NOTE 3 8. Message Waiting Record NOTE 48. Message Waiting Record 9. None9. None

NOTE 1: This feature cannot be set from Attendant Console.NOTE 2: This feature cannot be set from a station having a held call.NOTE 3: This feature can be set only from a station having a held incoming call.NOTE 4: From a DTMF telephone, a hooking operation is required before dialing the single digit access

code.

This feature is mutually exclusive with Step Call.However, 2 digit dialing Step Call can be provided by using this feature.

1-488 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1007.fm

SOFTWARE LINE APPEARANCE (VIRTUAL EXTENSIONS)

SOFTWARE LINE APPEARANCE (VIRTUAL EXTENSIONS)

PROGRAMMING

HARDWARE REQUIRED


DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign a Software Line Appearance (Virtual Line station number) to the required Virtual Port number.

(1)(2)

0000-0999: Virtual Port No.X-XXXXXXXX: Virtua1 Line Station No.

The Virtual Port number has no relation with the Physical Port number used in CM10 Y=00. There-fore, any Virtual Port number can be assigned to each Virtual Line station number. However, the Vir-tual Line station number should be different from the Single Line number assigned by CM10 Y=00.

Assign the Station Class data to each Virtual Line station number.

••••

(1)(2)

Y=01 Trunk Restriction ClassY=02 Service Restriction ClassY=03 Kind of TelephoneY=04 Tenant AllocationX-XXXXXXXX: Virtual Line Station No.Refer to CLASS OF SERVICE.

Page 1-146

Assign the Virtual Line station to a Multiline Terminal. One Virtual Line station number may be assigned to plural Multiline Terminals.

•(1)(2)

Y=00My Line No. + + Key No.X-XXXXXXXX: Virtual Line Station No.

START

CM11

CM12

CM90,

END

1-489 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1007.fm

STATION HUNTINGSTATION HUNTING-CIRCULAR


PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION DATA

To set up each Station Hunting group, assign station numbers, one by one, in order of the Hunting as shown below.

Example: For setting station number 200, 201, 202 into one Hunting group.

1st Operation (1) 200 (2) 201

2nd Operation (1) 201(2) 202

3rd Operation (1) 202(2) 200

•(1)

(2)


ed in Station Hunting Group

X-XXXXXXXX: Another Station No. to be linked

Specify the Hunting capability of each station. To continue the hunt in the original direction, if the station is busy, set to “1”; to reverse the direction (last station only), set to “5”.

NOTE 1: The maximum number of stations per hunt group is 60. And there is no limit to the number of Circular Hunt groups within the system.

NOTE 2: Each station can belong to only one hunt group.

NOTE 3: The Attendant Console cannot be member of a hunt group.

•(1)(2)

Y=1X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.1: If busy, hunt in original direction5: If busy, hunt in reverse direction

Allow or restrict the ability to set Station Hunt-ing-Circular for a station with Do Not Disturb set.

(1)(2)

2400 : Allow1 : Restricted

START

CM18

3rd1st

2nd

200

202201

CM08

A

JULY/18/2008

1-490 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1007.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA


(1)(2)



(1)(2)


A

CM08

END

JULY/18/2008

1-491 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1007.fm

STATION HUNTINGSTATION HUNTING-TERMINAL

STATION HUNTING-TERMINAL

PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION DATA

To set up each Station Hunting group, assign station numbers, one by one, as shown below.

1st Operation (1) Station A(2) Station B

2nd Operation (1) Station B(2) Station C

•(1)

(2)


ed in Station Hunting Group

X-XXXXXXXX: Another Station No. to be included in the Same Hunting Group

Assign the pilot station to required station number within the Hunting group. For the member stations, set the data to “0”.

NOTE: The maximum number of stations that can be included on one Station Hunting group is 60 including the Pilot Station.And there is no limit to the number of Terminal Hunt groups within the system.

•(1)(2)

Y=1X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.0 : Member Station1 : Pilot Station

Allow or restrict the ability to set Station Hunt-ing-Terminal for a station with Do Not Disturb set.

(1)(2)



(1)(2)



(1)(2)


START

CM18

CM08

END

JULY/18/2008

1-492 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1007.fm

STATION HUNTINGSTATION HUNTING-SECRETARIAL

STATION HUNTING-SECRETARIAL

PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign a secretary station serial number to each Station Hunting group.

NOTE: A maximum of 31 stations can be members of the Secretarial Hunt group.

•(1)

(2)

Y=2X-XXXXXXXX: Pilot Station No. (Termi-

nal)/All Member Station No. (Circular)

00-30: Secretary Station Serial No.

Assign a station number to each secretary sta-tion serial number assigned by CM18 Y=2.

•(1)(2)

Y=000-30: Secretary Station Serial No.X-XXXXXXXX: Secretary Station No.

Specify the Hunting capability of each secre-tary station.

•(1)(2)

Y=100-30: Secretary Station Serial No.5: Hunting (As per CM19 Y=2)7: No hunting

Set up the order of Secretary Hunting.Assign secretary station serial numbers, one by one, in order of the desired Secretary Hunting, as shown below.

1st Operation (1) Station Serial No. A (2) Station Serial No. B

2nd Operation (1) Station Serial No. B (2) Station Serial No. C

•(1)(2)

Y=200-30: Secretary Station Serial No. (A)00-30: Secretary Station Serial No. (B)

Allow or restrict the ability to set Station Hunt-ing-Secretarial for a station with Do Not Dis-turb set.

(1)(2)



(1)(2)



(1)(2)


START

CM18

CM19

CM08

END

JULY/18/2008

1-493 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1007.fm

STATION MESSAGE DETAIL RECORDING (SMDR)SYSTEM OUTLINE

STATION MESSAGE DETAIL RECORDING (SMDR)SYSTEM OUTLINEThe Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) feature allows the system to send a raw data of the trunkoutgoing/incoming call information. The SMDR data can be received by a personal computer (PC) whichruns an RS-232C or a LAN terminal emulation software. (referred to the rest of this manual as simply“SMDR terminal”)

Call information is sent out from the CPU to the SMDR terminal when each call is completed. If theSMDR terminal is not connected to the system or if the SMDR terminal is not ready for receiving infor-mation, the call information is temporarily stored in the CPU. As soon as the SMDR terminal becomesready to receive information, the call information temporarily stored in the CPU is sent out to the SMDRterminal.

1-494 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1007.fm


(1) SMDR on RS-232CThe system outline of the SMDR on RS-232C is shown below. The SMDR on RS-232C consists ofthe CPU blade and the external SMDR terminal.

• CPU blade:The CPU stores various kinds of information on an event basis. When a call is completed, the CPUsends out the call information pertaining to that specific call to the SMDR terminal.Two RS-232C ports can be used for the SMDR terminal interface.

The CPU keeps supervising the status of the SMDR terminal. If the SMDR terminal is not readyto receive information (Busy Status), the CPU temporarily stores the call information into itsinternal memory.When the number of the call records stored in the CPU reaches the maximum, new call recordswill be lost.

The call record memory will be cleared by CPU reset.

• SMDR Terminal:An Asynchronous Personal Computer is used as the SMDR terminal for receiving and processingthe call information via RS-232C.Only one SMDR terminal is available.

System Outline of SMDR on RS-232C

SMDR

LC TRUNK

STATION

SMDR TERMINAL 0/1

RS-232C

PORT 0/1

CPU

TDSW

CPU: Central Processing Unit

1-495 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1007.fm


(2) SMDR on IPThe system outline of the SMDR on IP is shown below. The SMDR on IP consists of the CPU bladeand the external SMDR terminal.

• CPU blade:The CPU stores various kinds of information on an event basis. When a call is completed, the CPUsends out the call information pertaining to that specific call to the SMDR terminal.Two LAN port can be used for the SMDR terminal interface.

The CPU keeps supervising the status of the SMDR terminal. If the SMDR terminal is not readyto receive information (Busy Status), the CPU temporarily stores the call information into itsinternal memory.When the number of the call records stored in the CPU reaches the maximum, new call recordswill be lost.

The call record memory will be cleared by CPU reset.

• SMDR Terminal:A Personal Computer with LAN port is used as the SMDR terminal for receiving and processingthe call information via LAN.Only one SMDR terminal is available.

1-496 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1007.fm


System Outline of SMDR on IP

SMDR

LC TRUNK

STATION

SMDR TERMINAL

LAN

CPU

TDSW

CPU: Central Processing Unit

ETHER/

SWITCHINGHUB

10/100/1000 BASE-T/10/100 BASE-TX

VOIP

1-497 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1007.fm

STATION MESSAGE DETAIL RECORDING (SMDR)SYSTEM CAPACITY

SYSTEM CAPACITY(1) SMDR on RS-232C

• The maximum of trunk calls simultaneously: 255 trunk calls• The maximum of call record: 1024 call record

(2) SMDR on IP• The maximum of trunk calls simultaneously: 255 trunk calls• The maximum of call record: 1024 call record

1-498 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1007.fm

STATION MESSAGE DETAIL RECORDING (SMDR)COMBINATION OF SMDR SERVICE

COMBINATION OF SMDR SERVICEBy system data programming, the same call record can be output to multiple SMDR terminals simulta-neously. Following table shows the combination pattern of call record output available at the same timeregardless of the type of Message Format.

Combination of SMDR Service×: Available–: Not available

SMDR TYPE PATTERN A PATTERN BSMDR on RS-232C × –

SMDR on IP – ×

1-499 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1007.fm

STATION MESSAGE DETAIL RECORDING (SMDR)HARDWARE REQUIRED

HARDWARE REQUIRED(1) SMDR on RS-232C

CPU bladeRS RVS-4SCA-C/RS RVS-15S CA-A or RS NORM-4S CA-ASMDR terminal

(2) SMDR on IPCPU bladeSMDR terminal

1-500 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1007.fm

STATION MESSAGE DETAIL RECORDING (SMDR)PROGRAMMING SUMMARY

PROGRAMMING SUMMARY

Programming Summary for SMDR

END

START

SMDR on

RS-232C or

SMDR on IP?

SMDR Service Programming

SMDR on

RS-232C Programming

SMDR on

IP Programming

Page 1-501

Page 1-507

Page 1-504

1-501 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1007.fm

STATION MESSAGE DETAIL RECORDING (SMDR)PROGRAMMING

PROGRAMMING

Precaution

Before programming the system data for SMDR, confirm that the system is under the following status.

• The system is under On-Line mode. (“RUN” lamp is flashing on the CPU blade.)• All the system data pertaining to the station, trunks, and services are already programmed.

SMDR on RS-232C Programming

DESCRIPTION DATA



(1)(2)



(1)(2)


START

CM02

A

1-502 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1007.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify SMDR terminal via RS port as the des-tination to send a call information.

•(1)

(2)

Y=0105: Destination to send a call information0 : SMDR terminal via LAN port1 : PMS via LAN port7 : SMDR terminal via RS port

Specify the Message Format for SMDR on RS-232C according to the SMDR terminal specifi-cation.

•(1)

(2)

Y=0107: Message Format for SMDR on RS-

232C00 : Extended 2400 IMS Format15 : Former 2400 IMS Format

Specify the function for the RS ports.

NOTE: When a port is used for SMDR, assign the 2nd data=14. When a port is used for both MCI and SMDR, assign the 2nd data=11.

•(1)

(2)

Y=00 Function0: Port 11: Port 211: MCI and SMDR14: SMDR

Assign the attribute data for RS ports accord-ing to the SMDR terminal specifications.

•(1)

(2)

Y=01 Data length0: Port 11: Port 20 : 7 bits1 : 8 bits

•(1)

(2)

Y=02 Parity check0: Port 11: Port 20 : Effective1 : Ineffective

•(1)

(2)

Y=03 Kind of parity0: Port 11: Port 20 : Odd parity1 : Even parity

A

CM04

CM40

B

1-503 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1007.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

•(1)

(2)

Y=04 Stop bit0: Port 11: Port 20 : One-stop bit1 : Two-stop bits

•(1)

(2)

Y=05 DTR signal0: Port 11: Port 20 : Low1 : High

•(1)

(2)

Y=06 RTS signal0: Port 11: Port 20 : Low1 : High

•(1)

(2)

Y=08 Data speed0: Port 11: Port 21 : 1200 bps2 : 2400 bps3 : 4800 bps4 : 9600 bps5 : 19200 bpsNONE : 9600 bps

Assign Service Restriction Class A for SMDR service for station to station calls to the re-quired stations.

•(1)(2)

Y=02X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.XX ZZXX: 00-15: Service Restriction Class A

Allow SMDR service for station-to-station calls in Service Restriction Class A assigned by CM12 Y=02.

•(1)

(2)



B

CM40

CM12

CM15

END

1-504 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1007.fm


SMDR on IP Programming

NOTE: The CPU blade (or the CPU blade in a Main Unit when Remote UNIT over IP feature is pro-vided) communicates with the SMDR terminal. For the settings in the SMDR terminal side, set IP address assigned by CM0B Y=0XX/1XX>00 (or CM0B Y=0XX/1XX>50 when VLAN is pro-vided) as a destination of the SMDR terminal, and set “60010” as the port number.

DESCRIPTION DATA



(1)(2)



(1)(2)


Assign the IP Address for the system.

NOTE 1: This data cannot be entered from the CAT.

NOTE 2: When entering the IP address by this data, a period (.) must be entered between the numbers (example: 255.255.255.254).

•

(1)(2)

Y=0XX (Maintenance Port [0] + Unit No. [01-50])

1XX (VOIP Port [1] + Unit No. [01-50])

00XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX: 0.0.0.0-255.255.255.254:IP Address for the system (Maximum 15 digits)

START

CM02

CM0BRESET

A

1-505 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1007.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the Subnet Mask for the system.


NOTE 2: When entering the Subnet Mask by this data, a period (.) must be en-tered between the numbers (example: 255.255.255.252).

•

(1)(2)



01XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX: 255.0.0.0-255.255.255.252:Subnet Mask for the system (Maximum 15 digits)

Assign the Default Gateway Address for the system.


NOTE 2: When entering the Default Gateway by this data, a period (.) must be en-tered between the numbers (example: 255.255.255.254).

NOTE 3: There are the following conditions when setting the Default Gateway Address by this command.• Only one Default Gateway

Address can be set for the system.• Set the Default Gateway Address

to the Maintenance port (Y=0XX) when not using VoIPDB.

• Set the Default Gateway Address to the VOIP port (Y=1XX/2XX) when using VoIPDB.

•

(1)(2)



02XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX: 0.0.0.0-255.255.255.254:Default Gateway Address for the system (Maximum 15 digits)

Select the port for SMDR. •(1)(2)

Y=001920 : Maintenance Port1 : VOIP Port

A

CM0BRESET

RESET

RESET

B

JULY/18/2008

1-506 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1007.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify SMDR terminal via LAN port as the destination to send a call information.

•(1)(2)

Y=0105: Destination to send a call information0 : SMDR terminal via LAN port7 : SMDR terminal via RS port

Specify the Message Format SMDR on IP ac-cording to the SMDR terminal specification.

•(1)(2)

Y=0108: Message Format SMDR on IP00 : Extended 2400 IMS Format15 : Former 2400 IMS Format

Assign Service Restriction Class A for SMDR service for station-to-station calls to the re-quired stations.

•(1)(2)

Y=02X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.XX ZZXX: 00-15: Service Restriction Class A

Allow SMDR service for station-to-station calls in Service Restriction Class A assigned by CM12 Y=02.

•(1)

(2)



Specify whether the parity check is provided (for SMDR-LAN).

(1)(2)

8270 : Not provided (None parity)1 : To provide (Parity as for CM08>828)

Specify the kind of parity (for SMDR-LAN). (1)(2)

8280 : Odd parity1 : Even parity

B

CM04

CM12

CM15

CM08

END

1-507 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1007.fm


SMDR Service Programming

To provide an SMDR service, do the following programming in addition to the programming for theSMDR on RS-232C or SMDR on IP.

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the Pseudo-Answer signal function when the answer signal (Battery Reversal) has not been detected within the time assigned by CM41 Y=0>03 after making an outgoing trunk call.

NOTE: This data is effective when CM35 Y=004 is set to “1”.

(1)(2)


Provide the SMDR service for outgoing calls to the required stations.

•(1)(2)

Y=06X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.1 : To provide

Specify the type of answer signal from distant office in outgoing connection for each trunk route.

•(1)(2)

Y=00400-63: Trunk Route No.1 : Battery Reversal from C.O. line2 : Answer signal arrives from Tie line/

ISDN7 : Answer signal does not arrive

Provide the SMDR service for outgoing calls to the required trunk routes.

•(1)(2)

Y=01400-63: Trunk Route No.1 : To provide

Assign a trunk access code sent to SMDR for outgoing calls.

•(1)(2)

Y=04400-63: Trunk Route No.00-99: Trunk access code

Specify the timing of SMDR valid call timer (pseudo-answer timer).

•(1)(2)

Y=003: Pseudo-answer timer00-08: 8-40 seconds

(4 second increments)If no data is set, the default data is 20-24 sec-onds.

START

CM08

CM13

CM35

CM41

A

1-508 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1007.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify the method of charging a transferred call.

The following table shows the station to which call charging is to be made in the case of vari-ous transfer patterns.

(1)(2)

424: Charging method0 : Charging to transferring station or des-

tination station1 : Split charging to both transferring sta-

tion and transfer destination station

(1)(2)

425: Charging destination0 : Charging to transferring station1 : Charging to transfer destination sta-

tion

Assign tenant number to each station. •(1)(2)

Y=04X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.00-63: Tenant No.01 : Tenant No.

A

CM08

STA: StationATT: Attendant Console

TRANSFER PATTERN CM08>424=1

CM08>424=0 CM08>424=0

FROM TO CM08>425=1 CM08>425=0

STA A STA B Split charging to STA A and STA B STA B STA A

STA ATT STA STA STAATT STA STA STA STA

ATT A ATT B Split charging to ATT A and ATT B ATT B ATT A

CM12

B

1-509 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1007.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign trunk route and tenant number to each trunk.

•

(1)(2)

Y=00 Trunk Route


•(1)(2)

Y=01 Tenant Allocation000-511: Trunk No.00-63: Tenant No.

Specify the setting for when SMDR billing memory overflow occurs.

(1)(2)

8860 : To clear the oldest billing memory and

to store the latest one1 : To clear the latest billing memory

B

CM30BLADE RESET

CM08

C

JULY/18/2008

1-510 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1007.fm


For Incoming Call Record, do the following programming.

DESCRIPTION DATA

Provide the SMDR service for incoming calls to the required stations.

•(1)(2)


Provide the SMDR service for incoming calls to the required trunk routes.

•(1)(2)


Specify whether the SMDR service is effective only for incoming calls with Account Code or not.

(1)(2)

426: SMDR for incoming call0 : Effective for all incoming calls1 : Effective only for incoming calls with

Account Code

Specify whether the ANI/Caller ID is sent to SMDR.

NOTE 1: When providing incoming calls with ANI, assign this data in addition to the programming for AUTOMATIC NUMBER IDENTIFICATION (ANI). Page 1-55

NOTE 2: When this data is assigned to 1, SMDR service for incoming calls is not provided even if CM13 Y=05 is 0 (To provide).

(1)(2)

463: ANI/Caller ID to SMDR0 : To send1 : Not sent

C

CM13

CM35

CM08

D

1-511 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1007.fm


To provide SMDR for tandem calls, do the following programming.

To provide SMDR for Call Forwarding-All Calls/Busy Line/No Answer-Outside calls from virtual stationnumber, do the following programming.

DESCRIPTION DATA

Provide the system with SMDR service for tandem calls.

(1)(2)

0400: Available

Specify whether the SMDR output for tandem calls is divided into terminating trunk and orig-inating trunk.

(1)(2)

8030 : To provide1 : Not provided (Originating trunk only)

DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify whether the virtual station number (CM11) is sent to SMDR when the call to the virtual station is transferred by Call Forward-ing-All Calls/Busy Line/No Answer-Outside.

NOTE: When the second data of CM08>849 is set to 1, originating station number/incoming trunk number is sent to SMDR.

(1)(2)


D

CM08

E

E

CM08

F

1-512 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1007.fm


To provide SMDR for abandoned incoming calls, do the following programming:

NOTE: To provide SMDR output of abandoned incoming call, the following conditions are required.- SMDR format : Extended NEAX2400 IMS format

DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify the Message Format for SMDR on RS-232C/IP according to the SMDR terminal specification.

•(1)

(2)

Y=0107: Message Format for SMDR on RS-

232C08: Message Format for SMDR on IP01: Extended 2400 IMS Format (with trunk

seizure timer)

Specify whether the SMDR service for incom-ing calls of each station (assigned by CM13 Y=05) is effective or not.

NOTE: To provide the SMDR for abandoned incoming calls, assign the second data of CM08>823 to 0 (Ineffec-tive).

(1)(2)

8230 : Ineffective1 : Effective

Specify whether to send SMDR output of abandoned incoming call when no answer is received, if required.

(1)(2)

8330 : To send1 : Not send

Specify whether to send SMDR output of abandoned incoming call when an internal call is terminated from a trunk and the station/trunk is busy, if required.

(1)(2)


Specify whether to send SMDR output of abandoned outgoing call, if required.

(1)(2)


Specify whether to send SMDR output of abandoned incoming call to the trunk route, if required.

•(1)(2)

Y=20500-63: Trunk Route No.0 : To send1 : Not send

F

CM04

CM08

CM35

END

JULY/18/2008

1-513 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1007.fm

STATION SPEED DIALING

STATION SPEED DIALING(1) To provide Single Line Telephone or Multiline Terminal:

DESCRIPTION DATA


•(1)(2)



•(1)(2)

Y=00700-15: Service Restriction Class A1 : Allow

Assign access codes for Station Speed Dialing, Origination, Entry and Cancel, respectively.

•(1)(2)

Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3X-XXXX: Access CodeA064: Origination A065: Entry A066: Cancel


(1)(2)

0350 : Not provided1 : To provide

Specify whether to set “#” dialing as paused data (1.5 seconds) or called number to C.O. line when DTMF station or Multiline Terminal dials “#” in the setting of Station Speed Dialing feature.

(1)(2)


Specify “*” dialing is set as programmable pause by CM41 Y=0>38 or dialed digit when the DTMF station or Multiline Terminal dials “*” in the setting of the Station Speed Dialing feature.

(1)(2)



Assign the Programmable pause of Station Speed Dialing.

•(1)(2)

Y=03800-07: 1.5-12 seconds

(1.5 second increments)If no data is set, the default setting is 1.5 seconds.

START

CM12

CM15

CM20

CM08

CM41

BLADE RESET

A

1-514 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1007.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

Allocate the memory area for Station Speed Dialing to each station.

(1)(2)

X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.WW XX Y ZZWW: 00-19: 1000-Slot Memory Block No.XX : 00-99: Memory Start Block No.

(10-Slot Memory Block) Y : Facility for programming the dialed




A

CM73

B

1-515 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1007.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

The memory area for storing one called number of Station Speed Dialing is called a “Memory Par-cel”. An assembly of 10 Memory Parcels is called a “10-Slot Memory Block,” and one hundred 10-Slot Memory Blocks are called a “1000-Slot Memory Block”.


1000-Slot Memory Memory Start Block No. Number of 10-SlotStation No. Block No. (10-Slot Memory Block) Memory Block(1st Data) (2nd Data: WW) (2nd Data: XX) (2nd Data: ZZ)

300 00 00 01301 00 01 02302 00 03 03303 00 06 01

B

CM73

00

~

03

04


0

9

1

Memory Parcel

00

99

01

10-SlotMemory Block

~

19

4000Memory Parcels

16000Memory Parcels

C

1-516 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1007.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA


C

CM73

0


Memory Parcel

Number

10-Slot Memory

Block

(Abbreviated Code)

1

2

3

4

5

~

9

0

1

2

3

4

5

~

9

0


Memory Parcel

Number

10-Slot Memory

Block

(Abbreviated Code)

1

9

0

1

~

9

00

01

09

10

11

~

19

~ ~

10-Slot Memory

Block

D

1-517 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1007.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA


•(1)

(2)

Y=0XX YY Z XX: 00-19: 1000-Slot Memory Block No.YY: 00-99: 10-Slot Memory Block No.Z : 0-9: Memory Parcel No.Stored No.:Outgoing Call Access Code (Maximum 4 digits) + + Called Party’s No. (Maxi-mum 26 digits)To set a pause into the Stored No., enter “C” (Fixed Pause=1.5 seconds) or “D” (Pro-grammable Pause specified by CM41 Y=0>38) after desired digits.NONE : No data


•(1)

(2)




Page A-2

•(1)

(2)



D

CM74

,

E

1-518 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1007.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign Station Speed Dialing keys on each Multiline Terminal, if required.

•(1)(2)


NOTE: For detail of Multiline Terminal key layout set by CM12 Y=24, refer to the Command Manual.

E

CM90,

END

1-519 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1007.fm


(2) To provide Multiline Terminal with One Touch keys:

DESCRIPTION DATA


•(1)(2)



•(1)

(2)




(1)(2)


Specify whether to set “#” dialing as paused data (1.5 seconds) or called number to C.O. line when Multiline Terminal dials “#” in the setting of Station Speed Dialing feature.

(1)(2)


Specify whether to set “*” dialing as program-mable pause by CM41 Y=0>38 or dialed digit when DTMF station or Multiline Terminal di-als “*” in the setting of Station Speed Dialing feature.

(1)(2)



Assign the pause for Station Speed Dialing. •(1)(2)

Y=03800-07: 1.5-12 seconds

(1.5 second increments)If no data is set, the default setting is 1.5 seconds.

START

CM12

CM15

CM08

CM41BLADE RESET

A

1-520 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1007.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

Allocate the memory area for Station Speed Dialing by Multiline Terminal One Touch keys to each station.

The memory block for storing one called num-ber of Station Speed Dialing is called a “Mem-ory Parcel”. An assembly of 10 Memory Parcels is called a “10-Slot Memory Block,” and one hundred 10-Slot Memory Blocks are called a “1000-Slot Memory Block”.

(1)(2)


No.ZZ : 01/02: Number of 10-Slot Memory

Blocks (10 memories/20 memories)

NOTE 1: Station Speed Dialing by dial access and by Multiline Terminal One Touch keys uses the common memory area. Be sure to allocate the different memory area by CM94 from the memory area set by CM73.

NOTE 2: If the station is assigned to One Touch keys using 1000-Slot Memory Block number 04-19, the lamp does not show the busy state.

A

CM94

0

9

1

Memory Parcel

00

99

01

10-SlotMemory Block

00~

~

03

04


4000 Memory

19

Parcels

16000 MemoryParcels

END

1-521 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1007.fm


(3) To provide the One Touch key to send “Hooking Signal + Called Number” to a Centrex, set thefollowing data in addition to the programming (2).

(4) To provide the One Touch key to send “Called Number + DTMF Signal” for such as VMS operation,set the following data in addition to the programming (2), when the called number includes a trunkaccess code. If the called number includes no trunk access code, this data is not required.

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the access code for sending of a Hook-ing signal to a Centrex.Maximum of two digits are available.

•(1)(2)

Y=0-3X-XXXX: Access codeA158: Hooking signal to a Centrex

Assign a RECALL key on the Multiline Termi-nal. RECALL key is used to return to a former line.

•(1)(2)

Y=00My Line No. + + Key No. (90)F1015: RECALL

Provide Centrex trunk route with Centrex function.

•(1)(2)

Y=08600-63: Trunk Route No.0: Centrex

DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify whether to set consecutive dialing “* #” as a delimiter between the called number and the DTMF signal.

(1)(2)

4480 : * # set as dialed digit1 : Delimiter between called number and

DTMF signal

START

CM20

CM90,

CM35

END

START

CM08

END

1-522 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1007.fm

STEP CALL

STEP CALL

PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION DATA

Provide the system with the Step Call feature.

NOTE: This feature is mutually exclusive with the single digit feature access code.

(1)(2)

069: For internal Call1 : Available

(1)(2)

163: For Tie Line incoming call1 : Available

(1)(2)

208 NOTE1 : Not available

START

CM08

END

1-523 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1007.fm

SUPERVISORY CONTROL OF PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT

SUPERVISORY CONTROL OF PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT

PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION DATA

Provide the station connected to the peripheral equipment with momentary reversal/open ca-pability.

•(1)(2)


START

CM13

END

1-524 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1007.fm

SYSTEM CLOCK SETUP BY STATION DIALING

SYSTEM CLOCK SETUP BY STATION DIALING

PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign Service Restriction Class A to a re-quired stations.

•(1)(2)


Allow System Clock Setup by Station Dialing in Service Restriction Class A assigned by CM12 Y=02.

•(1)

(2)



Assign the access code for System Clock Setup by Station Dialing.

•(1)(2)

Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3X-XXXX: Access CodeA197: System Clock Setup by Station Dial-

ing

Assign a System Clock Setup by Station Dial-ing key to Multiline Terminal, if required.

•(1)(2)

Y=00My Line No. + + Key No.F0A97: System Clock Setup by Station

Dialing

START

CM12

CM15

CM20

CM90,

END

1-525 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1007.fm

SYSTEM SPEED DIALING


PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION DATA


•(1)(2)



•(1)

(2)



Assign the Access Code for System Speed Di-aling.

•(1)(2)

Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3X-XXXX: Access CodeA067: System Speed Dialing origination

(300-Slot Memory Block)

Assign an access key for System Speed Dial-ing to the Multiline Terminals, as needed.

•(1)(2)

Y=00My Line No. + + Key No. F0067: System Speed Dialing origination


START

CM12

CM15

CM20

CM90,

A

1-526 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1007.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

Allocate the memory block for System Speed Dialing. 300 memory slots are available per system. The number of slots available for each Tenant is also 300. Note that the memory blocks for Hot Line-Outside and Route Ad-vance (from Tie Line to C.O. Line) are includ-ed in 300 memory slots.

Abbreviated Codes for this feature are auto-matically determined by assigning this com-mand, on each Tenant as shown in the following example.

(1)

(2)

00-63: For stations in Tenant 00-6364 : For Attendant ConsoleXXX YYYXXX: 000-299: First Memory Slot No. in

BlockYYY: 001-300: Number of Slots to be allo-

cated in BlockFor example, to provide 20 memory slots starting at Slot 60: Data: 060020

Assign the station number to be called to the Memory Slot number allocated by CM71.

•(1)(2)

Y=0000-299: Memory Slot No.Stored No.:Outgoing Access Code (Maximum 4 digits) + + Called Party’s No. (Maximum 26 digits)To set a pause into the Stored No., enter “C” (Fixed pause=1.5 seconds) or “D” (Pro-grammable pause specified by CM41 Y=0>38) after desired digits (more than 2 digits). NONE : No data

A

CM71

Tenant 00

Slot 000

Slot 019

20MemorySlots

00

19

AbbreviatedCodes

Tenant 01

Slot 020

Slot 034

15MemorySlots

00

14

AbbreviatedCodes

CM72

,

B

1-527 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1007.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the station name for display, to the Memory Slot number allocated by CM71, by character codes or character.

•(1)(2)




Page A-2

•(1)(2)

Y=2000-299: Memory Slot No.XX...XX: Station Name Character


Specify System Speed Dialing security. (Stored number displays on Multiline Terminal for an outgoing call by System Speed Dialing.)

(1)(2)

043 0 : Not displayed1 : To display

Specify Toll Restriction for an outgoing call by System Speed Dialing, if required.

(1)(2)

044 0 : Not provided1 : To provide

B

CM72

CM08

END

1-528 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1007.fm


To use the 1000-Slot Memory Block number (00-03) for Station Speed Dialing as the Memory Block forSystem Speed Dialing, add the following programming.

DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify the 1000-Slot Memory Block number 00-03.

(1)(2)

112: 1000-Slot Memory Block No. 00 0 : Available1 : Not available

(1)(2)


(1)(2)


(1)(2)



•(1)(2)

Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3X-XXXX: Access CodeA152: 1000-Slot Memory Block No. 0 A151: 1000-Slot Memory Block No. 1A068: 1000-Slot Memory Block No. 2A150: 1000-Slot Memory Block No. 3


•(1)(2)

Y=00My Line No. + + Key No. F0068: System Speed Dialing origination


START

CM08

CM20

CM90,

A

1-529 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1007.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the stored number to each Memory Slot number.

•(1)

(2)

Y=0XX YY ZXX: 00-19: 1000-Slot Memory Block No.YY: 00-99: 10-Slot Memory Block No.Z : 0-9: Memory Parcel No.Stored No.:Outgoing Call Access Code (Maximum 4 digits) + + Called Party’s No. (Maxi-mum 26 digits)To set a pause into the stored No., enter “C” (Fixed Pause=1.5 seconds) or “D” (Pro-grammable Pause specified by CM41 Y=0>38) after desired digits.NONE : No data


•(1)

(2)




Page A-2

•(1)

(2)



A

CM74

,

END

1-530 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1007.fm


To provide System Speed Dialing with 1-8-digits abbreviated code, do the following programming.

DESCRIPTION DATA


•(1)(2)



•(1)

(2)



Specify the number of digits for the abbreviat-ed code of System Speed Dialing origination.

(1)(2)



•(1)(2)


(4-digits/1-8-digits Abbreviated Code: depends on CM42>77)


•(1)(2)

Y=00My Line No. + + Key No. F0B43: System Speed Dialing origination

(4-digits Abbreviated Code)

START

CM12

CM15

CM42

CM20

CM90,

A

1-531 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1007.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the stored number to each Memory Slot number.

•(1)

(2)

Y=0XX YY ZXX: 00-19: 1000-Slot Memory Block No.YY: 00-99: 10-Slot Memory Block No.Z : 0-9: Memory Parcel No.Stored No.:Outgoing Call Access Code (Maximum 4 digits) + + Called Party’s No. (Maxi-mum 26 digits)To set a pause into the stored No., enter “C” (Fixed Pause=1.5 seconds) or “D” (Pro-grammable Pause specified by CM41 Y=0>38) after desired digits.NONE : No data


•(1)

(2)




Page A-2

•(1)

(2)



A

CM74

,

B

JULY/18/2008

1-532 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1007.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the abbreviated code to each Memory Slot number that is assigned the stored number by CM74 Y=0.

•(1)

(2)

Y=5X-XXXXXXXX: Abbreviated CodeX: 0-9XX YY ZXX: 00-19: 1000-Slot Memory Block No.YY: 00-99: 10-Slot Memory Block No.Z : 0-9: Memory Parcel No.NONE : No data

NOTE 1: Memory area of System Speed Dialing with 1-8 digits abbreviated code is also used as the memory area of Station Speed Dialing. Do not assign the same Memory Slot number of System Speed Dialing with 1-8 digits abbreviated code (set by CM74 Y=0) as Memory Slot number of Station Speed Dialing (set by CM73).

NOTE 2: Set the same number of digits as the digits of abbreviated code assigned by CM42>77 to the second data.

NOTE 3: When setting the number of digits for abbreviated code to 5-8, the minimum number of the abbreviated code that can be registered to the memory area is as follows.• 5-digit abbreviated code: 500• 6-digit abbreviated code: 333• 7-digit abbreviated code: 250• 8-digit abbreviated code: 200

Specify System Speed Dialing security. (Stored number displays on Multiline Terminal for an outgoing call by System Speed Dialing.)

(1)(2)

043 0 : Not displayed1 : To display

Specify Toll Restriction for an outgoing call by System Speed Dialing, if required.

(1)(2)

044 0 : Not provided1 : To provide

B

CM74

CM08

END

JULY/18/2008

1-533 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1008.fm

TENANT SERVICE

TENANT SERVICE

PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign a Tenant number to each station. •(1)(2)

Y=04X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.00 : Tenant No. 0001 -63: Tenant No. 01-63

Assign a Tenant number to each trunk. •(1)(2)

Y=01000-511: Trunk No.00 : Tenant No. 0001 -63: Tenant No. 01-63

Assign a Numbering Plan Group number to each Tenant.

(1)(2)


Assign required access codes for each Num-bering Plan Group. To provide a trunk route for each Tenant, as-sign Tenant Block 00-23 to desired Trunk Route access code.

•(1)(2)

Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3X-XXXX: Access CodeA004-A097801-818A100-A152 100-163 300-323: Tenant Block 00-23

When Tenant Block 00-23 is assigned by CM20, assign a trunk route and Tenant number to the Tenant Block.

•(1)(2)

Y=00-23 Tenant Block 00-2300-63: Tenant No.100-163: Trunk Route 00-63

Specify the Tenants to be handled by each ATTCON Group.

•

(1)(2)

Y=0-3 ATT Group 0-3 assigned by CM60 Y=0000-63: Tenant No.0 : To handle1 : Not handled

START

CM12

CM30

CM29

CM20

CM23

CM62

RESET

A

JULY/18/2008

1-534 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1008.fm

TENANT SERVICE

DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify whether Inter-Tenant connection is available for station to station calling, Incom-ing Call Termination and TAS answer.

•(1)

(2)

Y=0 TAS AnswerXX ZZXX: Tenant No. of TAS Answer StationZZ : Tenant No. of Trunk 0 : Allow1 : Restricted

•(1)

(2)

Y=1 Station-to-Station CallingXX ZZXX: Tenant No. of Calling StationZZ : Tenant No. of Called Station0 : Restricted1 : Allow

•(1)

(2)

Y=2 Incoming Call TerminationXX ZZXX: Tenant No. of Called StationZZ : Tenant No. of Trunk 0 : Restricted1 : Allow

A

CM63

END

1-535 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1008.fm

TENANT SERVICE

To provide an External Key (To use the PGD(2)-U10 ADP):

DESCRIPTION DATA



•(1)

(2)



•(1)

(2)



NOTE: Set the second data to “1” when combining external key with paging. Set the second data to “3” only when using this feature.

•(1(2)


Specify the External Key group number. •(1)(2)

Y=66X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.00-63 : External Key Group No.


•(1)(2)




START

CM05

BLADE RESET

CM10

CM12

CM13

BLADE RESET

A

JULY/18/2008

1-536 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1008.fm

TENANT SERVICE

DESCRIPTION DATA

To provide external keys for Day/Night Mode change or Class of Service change, assign a Tenant number to the External Key.

•(1)

(2)

Y=00 XX ZXX: 00-63: External key Group No.

assigned by CM12 Y=66Z : 0-3: Circuit No.00-63: Tenant No.

A

CM61

END

JULY/18/2008

1-537 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1008.fm

TIE LINES

TIE LINES

PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign a Unit and Slot number to the ODT blade.

•(1)

(2)

Y=0XX ZZXX: 01-50: Unit No.ZZ : 01-18: Slot No.31: ODT blade

Assign a trunk number for the ODT blade to the required Physical Port number.

•(1)

(2)


Assign a trunk route access code to each Tie Line trunk route.

•(1)(2)

Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3X-XXXX: Access Code100-163: Trunk Route 00-63 (01/02)

Assign a trunk route and tenant number to each trunk.

•

(1)(2)

Y=00

000-511: Trunk No.00-63: Trunk Route No. (01/02)

•(1)(2)

Y=01000-511: Trunk No.00-63: Tenant No. (00/00)

Assign trunk route data to the trunk route num-ber assigned by CM30 Y=00.

NOTE: All circuits in one ODT blade must be set to same type interface (2-wire or 4-wire).

•(1)(2)

Y=105 2-wire E&M/4-wire E&M Trunk00-63: Trunk Route No.0 : 2-wire E&M Trunk 1 : 4-wire E&M Trunk

•(1)(2)

Y=104 Polarity of E&M Trunk00-63: Trunk Route No.1 : E wire (Open), M wire (Open), Signal-

ing (Type V)2 : E wire (Ground), M wire (Battery),

Signaling (Type I)3 : E wire (Ground), M wire (Ground),

Signaling (Type V/Type II)

START

CM05

BLADE RESET

CM10

BLADE RESET

CM20

CM30BLADE RESET

CM35

A

1-538 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1008.fm

TIE LINES

DESCRIPTION DATA


•

(1)(2)


00-63: Trunk Route No. (01/02) 04: Tie Line

•

(1)

(2)

Y=001

00-63: Trunk Route No. (01/02) < Incoming > < Outgoing >

2 : DP-10PPS DP-10PPS 4 : DTMF DTMF7 : DTMF/DP DTMF

•(1)(2)

Y=002 IC/OG00-63: Trunk Route No. (01/02) 1 : Incoming trunk2 : Outgoing trunk3 : Bothway trunk

•(1)(2)

Y=004 Answer Signal from distant office00-63: Trunk Route No. (01/02) 2 : Arrive7 : Not arrive

•(1)(2)

Y=005 Release Signal from distant office00-63: Trunk Route No. (01/02) 1 : Arrive

•(1)(2)

Y=008 Sending of Dial Pulse00-63: Trunk Route No. (01/02) 3 : Send

•

(1)(2)


00-63: Trunk Route No. (01/02) 03: Wink Start 04: Delay Dial 05: Immediate Start06: 2nd Dial Tone/Timing Start

•(1)(2)

Y=010 2nd DT sending on call termination00-63: Trunk Route No. (01/02) 0 : No Tone1 : 2nd Dial Tone

A

CM35BLADE RESET

BLADE RESET

BLADE RESET

B

1-539 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1008.fm

TIE LINES

DESCRIPTION DATA

•

(1)(2)

Y=013 Maximum Number of Sending Dig-its00-63: Trunk Route No.001-254: 1-254 digits

If no data is set, sender is released when time out occurs or the called station answers.

Assign the appropriate data for the characteris-tic of the distant PBX.

•

(1)(2)


00-63: Trunk Route No. (01/02) 00 : Wink Start01 : Delay Dial 15 : Timing Start (Prepause per CM35

Y=021) The above data should be set to each route ac-cording to the data for CM35 Y=009, as shown below.

Data for Data forCM35 Y=009 CM35 Y=020

03 → 00 04 → 0105 → 1506 → 15

•(1)(2)

Y=021 Sender Prepause Timing00-63: Trunk Route No.00 : 0 second 01 : 0.5 seconds02 : 1.0 second03 : 1.5 seconds04 : 2.0 seconds05 : 2.5 seconds06 : 4.0 seconds07 : 5.0 seconds08 : 6.0 seconds09 : 7.0 seconds10 : 8.0 seconds 11 : 9.0 seconds 12 : 10.0 seconds 13 : 11.0 seconds14 : 12.0 seconds 15 : 3.0 seconds

B

CM35

BLADE RESET

C

1-540 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1008.fm

TIE LINES

DESCRIPTION DATA

When CM35 Y=001 is 2, assign the data for the DP Sender Characteristics.

•(1)(2)

Y=023 DP Sender Inter Digital Pause00-63: Trunk Route No.0 : 300 ms. 1 : 400 ms. 2 : 500 ms. 3 : 600 ms. 4 : 700 ms. 5 : 900 ms. 6 : 1100 ms. 7 : 800 ms.

•(1)(2)

Y=025 DP Sender Make Ratio00-63: Trunk Route No.0 : 39 % Make Ratio1 : 33 % Make Ratio

When CM35 Y=001 is 4, assign data for the DTMF Sender Characteristics.

•(1)(2)

Y=024 DTMF Sender Inter Digital Pause00-63: Trunk Route No.0 : 32 ms.1 : 64 ms. 2 : 80 ms. 3 : 96 ms. 4 : 160 ms. 5 : 192 ms.6 : 240 ms.7 : 128 ms.

•(1)(2)

Y=026 DTMF Sender Signal Width00-63: Trunk Route No.0 : 64 ms.1 : 128 ms.

•(1)(2)

Y=046 DP/DTMF Sender Release Timing00-63: Trunk Route No.0 : 2 seconds 1 : 4 seconds 2 : 6 seconds 3 : 8 seconds4 : 12 seconds 5 : 14 seconds 6 : 16 seconds7 : 10 seconds

C

CM35

BLADE RESET

D

1-541 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1008.fm

TIE LINES

DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify the desired Station Ringing Cadence. •(1)(2)

Y=033 Ringing Cadence00-63: Trunk Route No.2 : 1 second ON-2 seconds OFF3 : 2 seconds ON-4 seconds OFF

To make this data assignment effective en-ter the data “1” for CM08>180.


•(1)(2)

Y=034, 164 Ringer Tone Pattern00-63: Trunk Route No.See the table below.


•(1)

(2)




D

CM35


CM65


Y=40: 1












E

1-542 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1008.fm

TIE LINES

DESCRIPTION DATA


•(1)(2)



15: -1 dB16: 0 dB17: +1 dB




•(1)(2)



15: -1 dB16: 0 dB17: +1 dB



E

CM35

~~

~~

F

1-543 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1008.fm

TIE LINES

DESCRIPTION DATA


•(1)

(2)








Specify the restriction of incoming call termi-nation to different tenants.

•(1)

(2)

Y=2 XX ZZXX: Tenant No. of called stationZZ : Tenant No. of Trunk Route0 : Restricted1 : Allowed

F

CM36

~~

CM63

END

1-544 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1008.fm

TIE LINE TANDEM SWITCHING

TIE LINE TANDEM SWITCHING

PROGRAMMING

HARDWARE REQUIRED

ODT blade

DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify the combination of Trunk Routes al-lowing the Tandem connection. The incoming trunk route must provide a release signal for the Tandem Connection. (See CM35 Y=005)

•(1)

(2)

Y=0XX ZZXX: 00-63: Incoming Trunk RouteZZ : 00-63: Outgoing Trunk Route0 : Allow1 : Restricted

START

CM36

END

1-545 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1008.fm

TIMED FORCED RELEASE


PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION DATA

Provide the outgoing trunk route with forced release in designated time.

•(1)(2)


Provide the incoming trunk route with forced release in designated time.

•(1)(2)


Specify the warning SST sending timer for forced release, Timer A, B and C respectively.

NOTE: Set the time from the start of commu-nications to the warning SST is sent.Forced release is executed at 16 sec-onds later from the warning SST is sent.

•(1)

(2)

Y=0114: Timer A115: Timer B116: Timer C01-99: 64-6336 seconds

(64 second increments)NONE : No data

Specify the warning SST sending timer for forced release to the required stations.

NOTE: This data is effective when the forced release is provided to the des-tination trunk route (CM35 Y=247 and CM35 Y=248 is set to 0).

•(1)(2)

Y=61X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.0 : Depends on Timer A1 : Depends on Timer B2 : Depends on Timer C3 : Forced Release is not provided

START

CM35

CM41

CM12

A

1-546 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1008.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify the warning SST sending timer for forced release to the incoming trunk route of tandem connection.

NOTE: This data is effective when the forced release is provided to the out-going trunk route of tandem connec-tion (CM35 Y=247 is set to 0).

•(1)(2)

Y=24900-63: Trunk Route No.0 : Depends on Timer A1 : Depends on Timer B2 : Depends on Timer C3 : Forced Release is not provided

Specify whether the operation of hooking/call holding after a station receives the warning SST is restricted, or not.

(1)(2)


Specify whether the shift from the communi-cation between station and Trunk to Confer-ence (Three/Four Party) while the timer for forced release is in progress is restricted, or not.

(1)(2)


A

CM35

CM08

END

1-547 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1008.fm

TIMED QUEUE

TIMED QUEUE

PROGRAMMING

HARDWARE REQUIRED


DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify the timer data for this feature.If no data is set, the following data is applied:

• Number of Call Attempts: 3 times• Interval Time of Call Attempt: 120-124 sec-

onds• Duration of Calling: 32 seconds

•(1)(2)

Y=035: Number of Times of Call Attempt01-07: Once-7 times

If no data is set, the default setting is 3 times.

(1)(2)

36: Interval time of Call Attempt11-31: 44-124 seconds


(1)(2)

37: Duration of Calling05-31: 20-124 seconds

(4 second increments)If no data is set, the default setting is 32 seconds.

Assign the Call Back feature to the required key on the Multiline Terminals, as required.

•(1)(2)


START

CM41

CM90,

END

1-548 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1008.fm

TIMED REMINDER

TIMED REMINDER

PROGRAMMING

To provide the internal Music Source on the CPU blade:

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign Service Restriction Class A for Timed Reminder to required stations.

•(1)(2)


Allow Timed Reminder in Service Restriction Class A assigned by CM12 Y=02.

•(1)

(2)



Assign the access code for Timed Reminder set and cancel.

•(1)(2)

Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3X-XXXX: Access CodeA024: Timed Reminder SetA025: Timed Reminder Cancel

Designate the type of tone source to be con-nected when answering a Timed Reminder call.

•(1)(2)

Y=100: Tone Source of Timed Reminder1301: External Hold Tone Source1400: Hold Tone Source on CPU blade

Assign the Timed Reminder feature access key to a Multiline Terminal, if required.

•(1)(2)


Specify the timing for Timed Reminder Start. (1)(2)

228: Timed Reminder Start timing0 : At preset time1 : Before 5 minutes of preset time

Specify the ringing duration of a Timed Re-minder call.

•(1)(2)

Y=02302-14: 8-56 seconds


START

CM12

CM15

CM20

CM48

CM90,

CM08

CM41

A

1-549 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1008.fm

TIMED REMINDER

DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify the number of Timed Reminder attempts before abandonment.

(1)(2)

0301-05 : 1 call-5 callsNONE : 5 calls

A

CM42

END

1-550 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1008.fm

TIMED REMINDER

To provide an External Announcement Machine via PGD(2)-U10 ADP:

DESCRIPTION DATA



•(1)

(2)



•(1)

(2)



NOTE: Set the second data to “1” when combining external relay with paging. Set the second data to “3” only when using this feature.

•(1)(2)



•(1)(2)




START

CM05

BLADE RESET

CM10

CM12

CM13

BLADE RESET

A

JULY/18/2008

1-551 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1008.fm

TIMED REMINDER

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the External Announcement Machine start function to the PGD(2)-U10 ADP.

•(1)

(2)

Y=00XX YXX: 00-31: Relay Group No.Y : 0-3: Circuit No.01XXXX: 00: External Announcement Machine

for Timed Reminder Calling


•(1)(2)



•(1)

(2)

Y=000: C.O. Line Call01: Tie Line Call02: Internal Call0200 : External Hold ToneNONE : Internal Tone Generator




A

CM44

CM48

RESET

CM64

END

JULY/18/2008

1-552 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1008.fm

TIMED REMINDER

To provide the internal announcement source by Voice Response System (VRS):

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign Service Restriction Class A for Timed Reminder set and cancel.

•(1)(2)


Allow Timed Reminder in Service Restriction Class A assigned by CM12 Y=02.

•(1)

(2)



Assign the access code for Timed Reminder set and cancel.

•(1)(2)

Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3X-XXXX: Access CodeA024: Timed Reminder SetA025: Timed Reminder Cancel

Designate the type of tone source to be con-nected when answering a Timed Reminder call.

•(1)(2)

Y=100: Tone source of Timed Reminder0500: Voice Response System


•(1)(2)

Y=00000-007: Built-in VRS on CPU blade0C XX: Answering Message on Timed Re-

minderXX : 00-63: Message No.

•(1)(2)


Y=00

Assign the Timed Reminder feature access key to a Multiline Terminal, if required.

•(1)(2)


Specify the timing for Timed Reminder start. (1)(2)

228: Timed Reminder start timing0 : At preset time1 : Before 5 minutes of preset time

START

CM12

CM15

CM20

CM48

CM49

CM90,

CM08

A

1-553 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1008.fm

TIMED REMINDER

DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify the duration of a Timed Reminder call. •(1)(2)

Y=023: Timed Reminder call duration02-14: 8-56 seconds


Specify the duration of massage replay for Timed Reminder.

•(1)(2)

Y=05201-99: 4-396 seconds


Specify the number of Timed Reminder call attempts before abandonment.

(1)(2)

0301-05 : 1 call-5 callsNONE : 5calls

Specify the maximum number of Timed Reminder setting at the same time.

NOTE 1: Assign the maximum number of Wake Up Call for the same time per every minute.

NOTE 2: The command is ineffective when setting from PMS (operated as NONE “No limit”).

(1)(2)


A

CM41

CM42

B

JULY/18/2008

1-554 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1008.fm

TIMED REMINDER

DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify the operation Timed Reminder call setting over the limitation assigned by CM42>181.

NOTE 1: If one minute ahead also exceeds the limitation on the number of Wake Up Call, it is set to one more minute ahead. If the attempt cannot be set up to 10 minutes.

NOTE 2: CM42>181 is ineffective when Wake Up Call is set from PMS. Therefore, this command is also in-effective (Wake Up Call is executed at the preset time).

(1)(2)

8500 : Set it to one minute ahead1 : Restricted

Assign the restriction announcement for Timed Reminder to the CPU built-in VRS.

•(1)(2)

Y=00000-007: Built-in VRS on CPU blade1900: Restriction Announcement for

Timed Reminder

To record, replay, or delete a message, assign the appropriate Voice Response System access code.

•(1)(2)


B

CM08

CM49

CM20

END

JULY/18/2008

1-555 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1008.fm

TIMED REMINDER

HARDWARE REQUIRED

To provide the Internal Music Source:CPU blade

To provide the External Announcement Machine:PGD(2)-U10 ADPExternal Announcement Machine provided locally

To provide the internal digital announcement source:CPU blade (built-in VRS)

JULY/18/2008

1-556 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1008.fm

TRUNK-DIRECT APPEARANCES


PROGRAMMING

To provide Trunk-Direct Appearances on Analog trunk:

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the terminating system for required C.O. trunks to Trunk-Direct Appearances.

••••

(1)(2)

Y=02 Day ModeY=03 Night ModeY=40 Mode AY=41 Mode B000-511: Trunk No.02: Trunk-Direct Appearances

Provide the Trunk-Direct Appearances feature to the required C.O. trunk assigned by CM30 Y=02.

•(1)(2)


Assign the Trunk-Direct Appearances key to each Multiline Terminal, as required.

•(1)(2)

Y=00My Line No. + + Key No. D000-D511: Trunk No.

Assign a Hold key for holding the Trunk-Di-rect Appearances call, to each Multiline Termi-nal, as required.By this assignment, the held Trunk-Direct Ap-pearances call can be transferred by voice call, and can be answered by the Trunk-Direct Ap-pearances key on the destination station.

•(1)(2)

Y=00My Line No. + + Key No. F0058: Hold Key

Specify whether a Dial Tone is sent when the call is held by the Hold key for Trunk-Direct Appearances (CM90 Y=00>F0058).

(1)(2)

365 0 : To send1 : Not sent

Specify whether Hold Transfer for a trunk line placed in Consultation Hold is available or not.

(1)(2)

161 0 : Available (Hold Transfer)1 : Not available (Consultation Hold)

START

CM30

CM90,

,

CM08

END

1-557 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1008.fm


To provide enhanced Trunk-Direct Appearances on Analog trunk:

NOTE: If the incoming call is routed via the Internal Automated Attendant feature (VRS), the tenant number programmed in CM49 Y=01 must match the tenant number programmed in CM20 Y=01 for the incoming trunk.

DESCRIPTION DATA

Program enhanced Hold key to each Multiline Terminal.

•(1)(2)

Y=00My Line No. + + Key No.F0058: Hold Key

Program Trunk Answer key. (1)(2)

My Line No. + + Key No.F0059: Trunk Answer Key

Assign Trunk Answer to be used for analog telephones.

•(1)(2)

Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3X-XXXX: Access CodeA059: Trunk Answer

Assign Trunk Hold to be used for analog telephones.

(1)(2)

X-XXXX: Access CodeA058: Trunk Hold

Assign ID code for each C.O. trunk. •(1)(2)

Y=19000-511: Trunk No.ABCD: Trunk ID code

Assign Answer preference. (1)(2)

1140 : Answer by 2-digit Trunk ID code

[Answer Code+Trunk ID Code (CD)]1 : Answer by 4-digit Trunk ID code

[Answer Code+Trunk ID Code (AB-CD)]

Assign Hold Recall to alternate destination. •(1)(2)


START

CM90,

,

CM20

CM30

CM08

CM51

END

1-558 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1008.fm


The table below shows the availability of the HOLD key (CM90 Y=00>F0058) on each condition.

Trunk-Direct Appearances (CM30 Y=18)

Trunk ID Code Assignment (CM30 Y=19)

Kind of Trunks Trunk ID Code Display Availability of HOLD Key

(CM90 Y=00>F0058)

0 (Provide) – – – Available

1 (Not provided) Not assigned – – Not available

Assign CCIS trunk – Not available

ISDN trunk CM35 Y=146 is set to 0.(Trunk ID Code is displayed.)

Available

CM35Y=146 is set to 1.(Calling/called sub-address is dis-played)

Not available

Other trunks CM35 Y=075 is set to 0.(DID incoming LDN is displayed.)

Not available

CM35 Y=075 is set to 1.(Trunk ID Code is displayed.)

Available

1-559 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1008.fm


To provide Trunk-Direct Appearances on ISDN BRI trunk:

NOTE: ISDN Trunk Connection is required before setting following programming. Refer to “ISDN FEATURES” Page 3-1

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the terminating system for required C.O. trunks to Trunk-Direct Appearances.

••••

(1)(2)

Y=02 Day ModeY=03 Night ModeY=40 Mode AY=41 Mode B000-511: Trunk No.02 : Trunk-Direct Appearances03 : Trunk-Direct Appearances+TAS06 : Direct-In Termination+Trunk-Direct

Appearances11 : Attendant Console+Trunk-Direct

Appearance12 : Attendant Console+Trunk-Direct

Appearance+TAS31 : DID, Tie Line and the call which is


Provide the Trunk-Direct Appearances feature to the required C.O. trunk assigned by CM30 Y=02.

•(1)(2)



•(1)(2)



•(1)(2)

Y=90 X-XXXXXXXX: DID No.000-999 : Number Conversion Block No.NONE : No data

START

CM30

CM76

A

1-560 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1008.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA


••••

(1)

(2)




D02: Trunk-Direct AppearancesD03: Trunk-Direct Appearances+

TASD06: Direct-In Termination+

Trunk-Direct Appearances

Assign a Trunk-Direct Appearances key to each Multiline Terminal, as required.

•(1)(2)


Assign a trunk access code sent to SMDR for outgoing call.

NOTE: This command is effective when CM35 Y=189 is not assigned.

•(1)(2)

Y=04400-63: Trunk Route No.00-99: Trunk Access Code

Assign a trunk access code for Trunk-Direct Appearances Multiline Operation.

•(1)(2)

Y=18900-63: Trunk Route No.X-XX: Trunk Access CodeX=0-9, A (*), B (#)

Specify the Timing Start when making ISDN call from a Single Line Telephone (PB/DP), Multiline Terminal or Attendant Console.

•(1)(2)

Y=05003-14: 3-14 seconds


Specify the ORT timer when sending LCR. •(1)(2)

Y=011102-15: 2-15 seconds


A

CM76

CM90,

CM35

CM41

B

1-561 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1008.fm


HARDWARE REQUIRED

Multiline Terminal, DLC blade, and COT blade

DESCRIPTION DATA

Allow second Dial Tone for ISDN trunk route. •(1)(2)

Y=204: 2nd DT on ISDN trunks0: For ISDN trunk route, 2nd Dial Tone is

provided.

To provide outgoing calls by pressing “#” key. •(1)(2)

Y=5000-5255 LCR Pattern No. 000-2551800 : To provide1 : Not provided

B

CM48

CM8A

END

1-562 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1008.fm

TRUNK QUEUING-OUTGOING

TRUNK QUEUING-OUTGOING

PROGRAMMING

NOTE: To provide Trunk Queuing-Outgoing in conjunction with Least Cost Routing-3/6 Digit, you must set Route Pattern No. 000-126 (CM8A Y=0000-0126). Route Pattern No. 127-255 cannot be used for Trunk Queuing-Outgoing with Least Cost Routing-3/6 Digit.

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign Service Restriction Class A for Trunk Queuing-Outgoing to the required stations.

•(1)(2)


Allow Trunk Queuing-Outgoing in Service Restriction Class A assigned by CM12 Y=02.

•(1)

(2)



Assign the access code for setting and resetting this service.

•(1)(2)

Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3X-XXXX: Access CodeA004: SetA005: Reset

Assign the Trunk Queuing-OG (Call Back) key to the required Multiline Terminal.

•(1)(2)

Y=00My Line No. + + Key No.F0004: Trunk Queuing-OG/Call Back

Specify the Trunk Queuing-Outgoing capabil-ity for each trunk route.

•(1)(2)

Y=02800-63: Trunk Route No.0 : Restricted1 : Allow

START

CM12

CM15

CM20

CM90,

CM35

END

1-563 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1008.fm

TRUNK-TO-TRUNK CONNECTION


PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION DATA


•(1)(2)


Provide the switch hook flash capability dur-ing C.O. line connection, to the required sta-tions.

•(1)

(2)

Y=090, 09100-15: Service Restriction Class C as-


Specify the combination of trunk routes allow-ing the Trunk-to-Trunk Connection.

•(1)

(2)

Y=0XX ZZXX: 00-63: Incoming trunk routeZZ : 00-63: Outgoing trunk route0 : Allow1 : Restricted

Provide the system with Ring Transfer for Call Transfer-All Calls to a trunk when a station holds another station or trunk.

(1)(2)

253 0: Available

Provide the system with forced release when a tandem call duration passes a predetermined time.

(1)(2)

029 0 : To disconnect1 : To continue

Allow or restrict forced release of tandem con-nection for the incoming trunk route.This data is available when CM08>029 is set to 0.

•(1)(2)

Y=11900-63: Trunk Route No.0 : Allow1 : Restricted

Specify the forced release timing for tandem call.

•(1)(2)

Y=05401-06: 64-224 minutes

(32 minute increments)If no data is set, the default setting is 96-128 minutes

START

CM12

CM15

CM36

CM08

CM35

CM41

A

1-564 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1008.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

Provide the system with Trunk-to-Trunk Con-nection transferred by a station or an attendant, when no answer signal arrives and release sig-nal arrives from the outgoing trunk route.

(1)(2)


Specify the forced release timing for tandem connection when the called party does not an-swer.This data is available when no release signal arrives from incoming trunk route.

•(1)(2)

Y=05501-13: 12-60 seconds


A

CM08

CM41

END

1-565 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1008.fm

UNIFORM CALL DISTRIBUTION (UCD)


PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION DATA

For each UCD group, assign station numbers, one by one, in the order of hunting.

NOTE: Up to 60 stations can be assigned into a single UCD group.

Example: For setting station numbers 200, 201, 202 into one UCD group.

1st Operation (1) 200 (2) 201

2nd Operation (1) 201(2) 202

3rd Operation (1) 202(2) 200

•(1)(2)


be linked

Assign the Pilot station and Member station. •(1)(2)

Y=1X-XXXXXXXX: UCD Station No.0 : Member station1 : Pilot station

Assign the UCD group number. •(1)(2)

Y=2X-XXXXXXXX: UCD Station No.00-15: UCD Group 00-15

Specify the UCD service for each type of call. •(1)

(2)

Y=4 Internal CallX-XXXXXXXX: Pilot Station No. of UCD


•(1)

(2)

Y=5 C.O. (DDD/FX/WATS) Incoming CallX-XXXXXXXX: Pilot Station No. of UCD


START

CM17

3rd1st

2nd

200

202201

A

1-566 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1008.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

•(1)

(2)

Y=6 Tie Line incoming callX-XXXXXXXX: Pilot Station No. of UCD


•(1)

(2)

Y=7 DID/Automated Attendant CallX-XXXXXXXX: Pilot Station No. of UCD


•

(1)

(2)

Y=B Designation of number of queuing in each UCD groupX-XXXXXXXX: Pilot Station No. of UCD

group0 : To provide (See CM42>16)1 : Not provided (No limit)

Specify the maximum number of queuing in each UCD group.

(1)(2)


Specify the call waiting time before answer or abandonment for PEG Count analysis.

•(1)(2)

Y=01601-30: 4-120 seconds


Assign the access code for UCD station Busy Out Set and Reset.

•(1)(2)

Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3X-XXXX: Access CodeA044: Busy Out SetA045: Busy Out Reset

Assign the UCD Busy Out key on the Multi-line Terminal, if required.

•(1)(2)

Y=00My Line No. + + Key No. F0044: UCD Busy Out

Assign the Release key on the Multiline Termi-nal, if required.

•(1)(2)

Y=00My Line No. + + Key No. F1020: Release

A

CM17

CM42

CM41

CM20

CM90,

,

B

1-567 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1008.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify the processing for an incoming call when all UCD stations are busy.

(1)(2)

212 0 : Busy Tone Connection 1 : Queuing

Specify the processing for a held call after set-ting the UCD Busy Out.

(1)(2)

214: For the held call from Tie Line0 : Reconnected by Switch Hook Flash1 : Disconnected

(1)(2)

215: For the held call from C.O. Line0 : Reconnected by Switch Hook Flash1 : Disconnected

Specify that the transferred C.O. call from a station or an attendant is placed into queuing mode when all UCD stations are busy.

NOTE: This data is only effective when CM08>212 is set to 1.

(1)(2)

227 0 : The call is placed into queuing mode

NOTE1 : Recall to the transferring station when

the call is transferred from station, or Attendant Camp-On is set when the call is transferred from Attendant

Enable the UCD Busy Out set and reset from the secondary extension.

(1)(2)


B

CM08

END

1-568 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1008.fm

UNIFORM CALL DISTRIBUTION (UCD)BUSY IN/BUSY OUT-UCD

BUSY IN/BUSY OUT-UCD

PROGRAMMING

To provide UCD Busy Out indication on DSS Console:

DESCRIPTION DATA

Provide the system with UCD Busy Out indication on DSS Console.

(1)(2)

2650: To provide

Assign the function key on each DSS Console. (1)

(2)

DSS Console No. (00-31) + + Function Key No. (57-59)F1055: UCD Busy Out

START

CM08

CM97 ,

END

1-569 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1008.fm

UNIFORM CALL DISTRIBUTION (UCD)CALL WAITING INDICATION-UCD

CALL WAITING INDICATION-UCDTo provide the LEDs on the Multiline Terminal for UCD Call Waiting Indication:

PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the incoming call to queuing mode when all UCD stations are busy.

(1)(2)

2121 : Queuing

Specify the maximum number of queuing in each UCD group for controlling call waiting lamp of a Multiline Terminal.

(1)(2)


NOTE: Depending on the number of queuing station/trunk, LED Indication pattern on a Multiline Terminal is different as shown below:


Assign the Call Waiting Indication LED to the required Multiline Terminal.

•(1)(2)

Y=00My Line No. + + Key No.F1500-F1515: UCD Group 0-15

START

CM08

CM42

CONDITIONS LED INDICATION

2nd Data=01 Steady on red irrespective of number of queuing station/trunk

1≤N<2nd Data (2nd Data≠01) Steady on red

2nd Data≤N (2nd Data≠01) Flashing red

CM90,

END

JULY/18/2008

1-570 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1008.fm


To provide an external indicator for UCD Call Waiting:

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the incoming call to queuing mode when all UCD stations are busy.

(1)(2)

2121 : Queuing

Specify the maximum number of queuing in each UCD group for controlling external indi-cator.

(1)(2)


NOTE: Depending on the number of queuing station/trunk, LED Indication pattern on the external indicator is different as shown below:


Specify the UCD Call Waiting Indicator indi-cation pattern.

(1)(2)



OFF)

START

CM08

CM42

CONDITIONS LED INDICATION

2nd Data=01 Lamp on irrespective of number of queuing station/trunk (For the indi-cation pattern, see CM59 in next page.)

N<2nd Data (2nd Data≠01) Lamp off

2nd Data≤N (2nd Data≠01) Lamp on (For the indication pattern, see CM59 in next page.)

CM59

A

To use the External Relay Interface on CPU

B

To use the PGD(2)-U10 ADP

JULY/18/2008

1-571 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1008.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

Set the function of UCD Call Waiting Indica-tion to the External Relay Interface on CPU.

•(1)(2)

Y=00312, 313: External Relay Interface on CPU14XXXX: 00-15: UCD Group No. assigned by

CM17

A

CM44

END

JULY/18/2008

1-572 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1008.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA



•(1)

(2)



•(1)

(2)




•(1)(2)



•(1)(2)




B

CM05

BLADE RESET

CM10

CM12

CM13

BLADE RESET

C

JULY/18/2008

1-573 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1008.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

Set the function of UCD Call Waiting Indica-tion to the PGD(2)-U10 ADP.

•(1)

(2)

Y=00XX YXX: 00-31: Relay Group No.Y : 0-3: Circuit No.14XXXX: 00-15: UCD Group No. assigned by

CM17


•(1)(2)


C

CM44

END

JULY/18/2008

1-574 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1008.fm

UNIFORM CALL DISTRIBUTION (UCD)DELAY ANNOUNCEMENT-UCD

DELAY ANNOUNCEMENT-UCD

PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign Service Restriction Class A for Voice Response System Access (Record/Replay/De-lete) to the required stations.

•(1)(2)


Assign Voice Response System Access in Ser-vice Restriction Class A assigned by CM12 Y=02.

•(1)

(2)



Specify the pattern of message sent to each UCD group.

•(1)

(2)

Y=AX-XXXXXXXX: Pilot Station No. of UCD

group0 : To send periodically1 : To send only once

If the data for CM17 Y=00A is “0”, set the in-terval time for UCD Delay Announcement.

•(1)(2)

Y=04701-30: 4-120 seconds


Specify the UCD Delay Announcement con-nection timer.

•(1)(2)

Y=06701-32: 4-128 seconds


Specify the maximum UCD call waiting time before answer or abandonment for UCD PEG Count, and waiting time before UCD Delay Announcement.

•(1)(2)

Y=01601-30: 4-120 seconds


START

CM12

CM15

CM17

CM41

A

1-575 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1008.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the UCD Delay Announcement func-tion to the required Voice Response System.

•(1)(2)

Y=00000-007: Built-in VRS on CPU blade0B0XX: UCD Delay Announcement11XX : UCD Second Delay Announce-

mentXX : 00-15: UCD group No.

To record, replay and delete a message, assign the Voice Response System access code, re-spectively.

•(1)(2)

Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3X-XXXX: Access codeA100: RecordA101: ReplayA102: Delete

When transferring the call to a station or Atten-dant after the 1st interval time of UCD Delay Announcement, assign the destination.

•(1)(2)

Y=1700-63: Tenant No.Destination: X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.E000 : Attendant Console

Specify a diversion display on a Multiline Ter-minal or Attendant Console when transferring a UCD call.

(1)(2)


A

CM49

CM20

CM51

CM08

END

1-576 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1008.fm


To set an outside party as the UCD overflow destination after the delay announcement:

DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify the pattern of message sent to each UCD group to send periodically.

•(1)

(2)

Y=AX-XXXXXXXX: Pilot Station No. of UCD

group0: To send periodically

When transferring the call to an outside party after the 1st interval time of UCD Delay An-nouncement, assign the destination.

•(1)(2)

Y=1700-63: Tenant No.Destination:X-XXXXXXXX: Virtual Line Station No.

assigned by CM11

Assign the Virtual Line station number to the required Virtual Port number.

(1)(2)


Assign Service Restriction Class A to the Vir-tual Line station.

•(1)

(2)


assigned by CM11XX ZZXX: 00-15 : Service Restriction Class A

Allow Call Forwarding-All Calls-Outside in Service Restriction Class A assigned by CM12 Y=02.

•(1)

(2)



Set Call Forwarding-All Calls-Outside to the Virtual Line station number assigned by CM11.

•(1)

(2)


assigned by CM11Destination No. : X-XXXX + + YY...YX-XXXX : Outgoing Trunk/LCR

Group Access Code (1-4 digits)

: Separate MarkYY...Y : Called No. (Maximum 26

digits)

To apply Call Forwarding-All Calls-Outside, set the trunk route combinations for Tandem Connection.

•(1)(2)


•(1)

(2)


START

CM17

CM51

CM11

CM12

CM15

CME6

,

,

CM35

CM36

END

1-577 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1008.fm

UNIFORM CALL DISTRIBUTION (UCD)HUNT PAST NO ANSWER-UCD

HUNT PAST NO ANSWER-UCD

PROGRAMMING

Refer to CALL FORWARDING-NO ANSWER. Page 1-76

1-578 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1008.fm

UNIFORM CALL DISTRIBUTION (UCD)IMMEDIATE OVERFLOW-UCD

IMMEDIATE OVERFLOW-UCD

PROGRAMMING

Refer to CALL FORWARDING-BUSY LINE. Page 1-73

1-579 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1008.fm

UNIFORM CALL DISTRIBUTION (UCD)PRIORITY QUEUING-UCD

PRIORITY QUEUING-UCD

PROGRAMMING

To assign Priority Queuing per trunk route

To assign Priority Queuing per DID incoming LDN

DESCRIPTION DATA



DESCRIPTION DATA

Provide DID digit conversion to the trunk route number.

•(1)(2)





•(1)(2)


Assign Priority Queuing per DID incoming LDN.

•(1)

(2)


assigned by CM76 Y=00/900 : Not provided1 : To provide

START

CM35

END

START

CM35

CM76

END

1-580 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1008.fm

UNIFORM CALL DISTRIBUTION (UCD)QUEUE SIZE CONTROL-UCD

QUEUE SIZE CONTROL-UCD

PROGRAMMING

Refer to UNIFORM CALL DISTRIBUTION (UCD). Page 1-565

1-581 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1008.fm

UNIFORM CALL DISTRIBUTION (UCD)SILENT MONITOR-UCD

SILENT MONITOR-UCD

PROGRAMMING

To monitor a UCD call, with or without a warning tone:

NOTE: Monitoring telephone conversations may be illegal under certain circumstances and laws. Con-sult a legal advisor before implementing the monitoring of telephone conversations. Some fed-eral and state laws require a party monitoring a telephone conversation to use beep-tones, to notify all parties to the telephone conversation, and/or obtain consent from all parties to the telephone conversation. Some of these laws provide strict penalties for illegal monitoring of telephone conversations.

DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify the warning tone sent to connected stations when monitoring a station-to-station or station-to-trunk call.

(1)(2)

259 0 : No tone1 : One warning tone

Specify whether the warning tone is sent to the outside party when monitoring a station-to-trunk call.

(1)(2)


Assign Service Restriction Class A for monitoring stations.

•(1)(2)


Allow monitoring stations in Service Restric-tion Class A assigned by CM12 Y=02.

•(1)

(2)



Assign Service Restriction Class A for monitored stations.

•(1)(2)


Allow being monitored in Service Restriction Class A assigned by CM12 Y=02.

•(1)

(2)



START

CM08

CM12

CM15

CM12

CM15

A

1-582 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1008.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the access code for monitor, if required. •(1)(2)

Y=0-3 Number Plan Group 0-3X-XXXX: Access CodeA033: Monitor

Assign a monitoring function key to the re-quired Multiline Terminals.

•(1)(2)

Y=00My Line No. + + Key No.F0033: Monitoring

Specify the action of monitoring station after the hold/hooking key is pressed in the moni-tored station or the monitored station becomes idle.

(1)(2)

5600 : Keep monitoring1 : Stop monitoring

When setting the second data of CM08>560 to 0 (keep monitoring), set the music for Internal Hold Tone that is sent to monitoring station.

NOTE 1: For CPU blade, the tone source “If you love me (2nd data 09)” is not available. “Minuet” will be set instead of the tone source.

NOTE 2: This data setting is effective only for the legacy terminal.For IP Station, this data setting is not effective. IP Station uses the tone source in IP Adapter (Minuet).

•(1)(2)




•(1)(2)

Y=002: Internal Call1400: Hold Tone Source on CPU blade

A

CM20

CM90,

CM08

CM48

END

1-583 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1008.fm


HARDWARE REQUIRED

To provide the delay announcement for UCD: CPU blade (built-in VRS)

To provide the LEDs on the Multiline Terminal:Multiline Terminal and DLC blade

To provide the external Call Waiting Indicator: CPU (built-in External Equipment Interface)External Indicator provided by the customer

Requirement for External Indicator: Control Method: Ground/Battery (Maximum 125 mA) Type: Visual and/or Audible type with volume control

1-584 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1008.fm

UNIFORM NUMBERING PLAN (UNP)-VOICE AND DATA


PROGRAMMING

For an open numbering system:

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign an access code for LCR Group 0-3. •(1)(2)

Y=0-3 Numbering Group 0-3X-XXXX: Access CodeA126: LCR Group 0A127: LCR Group 1 A128: LCR Group 2 A129: LCR Group 3


•(1)(2)

Y=A0000-3: LCR Group 0-3 4005-4007: Area Code Development Pat-

tern No. 5-7


•

(1)

(2)

Y=4005-4007 Area Code Development Pattern No. 5-7NXX/1NXX: Area Code (Maximum 8 dig-

its)0000-0255: Route Pattern No. 000-255

Assign an area code for Intra-office termina-tions, if required.

•

(1)(2)

Y=4005-4007 Area Code Development Pattern No. 5-7X-XXXXXXXX: Area Code (1-8 digits) 8000 : Intra-office termination8001-8008: 1-8 digits Intra-office station


•

(1)

(2)


1: 1st2: 2nd3: 3rd4: 4th

XXX ZZ XXX: 000-255: LCR Pattern No.ZZ : 00-63: Trunk Route No.

START

CM20

CM8A

A

1-585 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1008.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the digits to be deleted from the calls to distant offices. To delete all digits of an area code:

•(1)

(2)

Y=5000-5255 LCR Pattern No. 000-255151: Deletion of all digits of area code

(NXX, 1NXX) assigned by CM8A Y=4000-4007

0: To delete

To delete the designated digit of an area code: •(1)(2)

Y=5000-5255153: Designation of digit to be deleted00 : No digits deleted 01-10: First digit deleted-First 10 digits de-

letedCCC : No digits deleted

Assign the digits to be added to the digits sent to the distant office.

•(1)

(2)

Y=5000-5255100: Designation of Digit Addition Pattern

No. 9000-9255 : Digit Addition Pattern No.

000-255CCC : No digits added

•

(1)(2)

Y=9000-9255 Digit Addition Pattern No. 000-2550: Entry of digit code to be addedX-X...X: Digits to be added (Maximum 32

digits)X=0-9, A (*), B (#), C (Fixed Pause),

D (Programmable Pause)

Assign the digits to be added to the required trunk routes when adding digits to those re-ceived from a distant office.

•(1)(2)

Y=017 00-63: Trunk Route No.00-09: Add “0”-Add “9”10 : Add 2 digits per CM50 Y=00>0

Assign the data for digit deletion to the re-quired trunk routes for deleting the first one or two digits received from a distant office.

•(1)(2)

Y=01700-63: Trunk Route No.11: Delete first digit12: Delete first 2 digits

If two digits are to be added (CM35 Y=017, 2nd data=10), assign the digits to be added.

•(1)(2)

Y=000 XX: Digits to be added

A

CM8A

CM35

CM50

END

1-586 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1008.fm


Example 1: When the PBX is an end office in a network employing an Open Numbering System, officeA requires all the digits dialed on an incoming call from the PBX.


COMMAND CODE 1ST DATA 2ND DATA REMARKS20 Y=0 8 A126 Assignment of Access Code 8 of LCR Group 0.

8A Y=A000

8A Y=4005 8A Y=4005 8A Y=4005

8A Y=0000

0

212223

1

4005

000000000000

00000

Assignment of Area Code Development Pattern No. 5.Assignment of Route Pattern No. 00 to Area Codes 21, 22, and 23.

Assignment of the order of LCR selection (1st) for Route Pattern No. assigned by Y=4005.

8A Y=5000 100 9000 Assignment of Digit Addition Pattern No. 000.

8A Y=9000 0 8 Assignment of the digital code to be added for each area code.

22-200OFFICE

B

OFFICEC

OFFICEA

21-200

200

8XX-XXXX

8XX-XXXX

23-200PBX

Trunk Route : 0Tie Line Access Code : 8Area Code of Office A : 21Area Code of Office B : 22Area Code of Office C : 23Numbering Plan Group : 0

1-587 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1008.fm


Example 2: When the PBX is a Tandem Office in the network.



8A Y=A000 0 4005 Assignment of Area Code Development Pattern No. 5.

8A Y=4005 21 0001 Assignment of Route Pattern No. 001 to Area Code 21 of office B.

8A Y=4005 838 8000 Assignment of Intra-Office Termination to the office code 838.

8A Y=0000 1 00001 Assignment of the order of LCR selection (1st) for Route Pattern No. assigned by Y=4005.

OFFICEB

OFFICEA

XXXX

PBX

DIAL NO.821-XXXX/8838-XXX

TRUNK ROUTE 01

21-XXXX/838-XXX

821-XXXX

XXX

838-XXX

Trunk Route to Office B: 01Tie Line Access Code : 8Area Code of Office B : 21Intra-Office Termination: 838

1-588 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1008.fm


• For Closed Numbering System

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign an access code for LCR Group 3. •(1)(2)

Y=0-3 Numbering Group 0-3X-XXXX: Access CodeA129: LCR Group 3

Assign an Area Code Development Pattern number to LCR Group 3.

•(1)(2)

Y=A0003: LCR Group 3 4005-4007: Area Code Development Pat-

tern No. 5-7


•

(1)

(2)

Y=4005-4007 Area Code Development Pattern No. 5-7NXX/1NXX: Area Code, Maximum 8 dig-

its0000-0255: Route Pattern No. 000-255

Assign an area code (station number) for Intra-Office Terminations, if required.

•

(1)

(2)

Y=4005-4007 Area Code Development Pattern No. 5-7X-XXXXXXXX: Area Code (Maximum 8

digits)8001-8008: 1-8 digits Intra-office station


•(1)

(2)

Y=0000-0255 Route Pattern No. 000-2551-4: Order of LCR Selection

1: 1st2: 2nd3: 3rd4: 4th

XXX ZZ XXX: 000-255: LCR Pattern No.ZZ : 00-63: Trunk Route No.

Assign the digits to be deleted when deleting digits of an area code sent to a distant office. To delete all digits of an area code:

•(1)

(2)

Y=5000-5255 LCR Pattern No. 000-255151: Deletion of all digits of area code

(NXX, 1NXX) assigned by CM8A Y=4005-4007

0: To delete

START

CM20

CM8A

A

1-589 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1008.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

To delete the designated digits of an area code: •(1)(2)

Y=5000-5255153: Designation of digit to be deleted00 : No digits deleted 01-10: First digit deleted-First 10 digits de-

leted CCC : No digits deleted

Assign the digits to be added when adding dig-its to those sent to a distant office.

•(1)

(2)



000-255CCC : No digits added

•

(1)(2)

Y=9000-9255 Digit Addition Pattern No. 000-2550 X-X...X: Digits to be added (Maximum 32



Assign the digit to be added to the required trunk routes when adding digits to those re-ceived from a distant office.

•(1)(2)

Y=01700-63: Trunk Route No.00-09: Add “0”-Add “9”10 : Add 2 digits per CM50 Y=00>0

Assign the data for digit deletion to required trunk routes for deleting the first one or two digits received from a distant office.

•(1)(2)

Y=017 00-63: Trunk Route No.11: Delete first digit 12: Delete first 2 digits

If two digit addition is required (CM35 Y=017, 2nd data=10), assign the digits to be added.

•(1)(2)

Y=000XX: Digits to be added

A

CM8A

CM35

CM50

END

1-590 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1008.fm


Example 1: When the PBX is an end office in a network employing a Closed Numbering System.


COMMAND CODE 1ST DATA 2ND DATA REMARKS20 Y=020 Y=0

8A Y=A000

780

A129A1294005

Assignment of Access Code (7, 8) to LCR Group 3.Assignment of Area Code Development Pattern No. 5.

8A Y=4005 8A Y=4005 8A Y=4005 8A Y=4005

72738

715

0000000000008004

Assignment of Route Pattern No. 000 to Area Code (72, 73, 8).

Assignment of the 4-digit Intra-Office Station to the Area Code 715.

8A Y=0000 1 00000 Assignment of the order of LCR selection (1st) for Route Pattern No. assigned by CM8A Y=4005.

73XXOFFICE

B

OFFICEC

OFFICEA

72XX

714X72XX/73XX/8XXX

8XXX

Trunk Route to Office AArea Code of Office AArea Code of Office BArea Code of Office CArea Code of Intra-Office StationNumbering Plan Group

PBX

715X: 00: 72: 73: 8: 715: 0

1-591 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1008.fm


Example 2: When the PBX is a Tandem Office in the network.



8A Y=A000 3 4005 Assignment of Area Code Development Pattern No. 5.

8A Y=4005 740 0001 Assignment of Route Pattern No. 001 to Area Code 740 of Office B.

8A Y=4005 735 8004 Assignment of the 4-digit Intra-Office Station to the Area Code 735.

8A Y=0000 1 00001 Assignment of the order of LCR selection (1st) for Route Pattern No. assigned by CM8A Y=4005.

OFFICEB

OFFICEA

Trunk Route to Office BArea Code of Office BArea Code of Intra-Office StationNumbering Plan Group

PBX

DIAL NO.7400/7350

TRUNK ROUTE 01

73507350

7400

7400/7350

7400

: 01: 740: 735: 0

1-592 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1008.fm

VARIABLE TIMING PARAMETERS

VARIABLE TIMING PARAMETERS

PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify the Timing Parameters according to the user’s requirements. If no data is set (Dis-played “NONE”) the standard timing which is initially set is applied.

•(1)(2)

Y=0-3XX: See the Command Manual.XX: See the Command Manual.

START

CM41

END

1-593 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1008.fm

VOICE GUIDE

VOICE GUIDE

PROGRAMMING

To provide the message that is sent when a station goes off-hook while Message Waiting/Call Forwarding-All Calls/Do Not Disturb service is set to the station:

DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify the multiple connections of the Voice Response System (VRS) on Announcement Service.

(1)(2)

124 0 : Available1 : Not available (Single connection)

Assign Service Restriction Class A for An-nouncement Service to the required stations.

•(1)(2)


Allow Announcement Service in Service Re-striction Class A assigned by CM12 Y=02.

••••••

(1)

(2)

Y=034 Group 0Y=035 Group 1Y=036 Group 2Y=037 Group 3Y=038 Group 4Y=039 Recording for Announcement

Service (Group 0-4)00-15: Service Restriction Class A as-


Assign access codes for Announcement Ser-vice.

•(1)(2)

Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3 X-XXXX: Access Code A103: Record (Group 0-4) A104: Replay (Group 0)A105: Replay (Group 1)A106: Replay (Group 2) A107: Replay (Group 3)A108: Replay (Group 4)A109: Delete (Group 0-4)

Specify the dial tone, which is sent when a sta-tion goes off-hook while the service is set for the station, as Special Dial Tone.

•(1)

(2)

Y=212: Dial Tone on setting Message Waiting13: Dial Tone on setting Call Forwarding-

All Calls14: Dial Tone on setting Do Not Disturb0: Special Dial Tone

START

CM08

CM12

CM15

CM20

CM48

A

1-594 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1008.fm

VOICE GUIDE

NOTE 1: While both Message Waiting and Call Forwarding-All Calls/Do Not Disturb Service are set to the station, the message assigned by CM49 Y=13>00 is sent.

NOTE 2: While Message Reminder (from station/attendant) Service is set to the station, the message assigned by CM49 Y=13>00 is sent.

NOTE 3: While Split Call Forwarding-All Calls Service is set to the station, the message assigned by CM49 Y=13>03 is sent.

DESCRIPTION DATA

Allow Voice Guide set by CM48 Y=2>12, 13, 14 in Service Restriction Class A assigned by CM12.

•(1)

(2)


signed by CM121 : Allow

Assign the Voice Guide function for each Voice Response System.

•(1)(2)

Y=00000-007: Built-in VRS on CPU blade17XX: Voice GuideXX : 00-63: Message No.

Assign the Message sent when the station goes off-hook.This data is not available for IP Station.

•(1)

(2)

Y=1300: Message sent when Message Waiting is

set03: Message sent when Call Forwarding-

All Calls/Do Not Disturb is set00-63: Message No.

A

CM15

CM49

END

1-595 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1008.fm

VOICE GUIDE

To provide the Message which is sent when the service setting to the station is completed or canceled:

HARDWARE REQUIREDCPU blade (Built-in VRS)

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the Voice Guide function for each Voice Response System.

•(1)(2)

Y=00000-007: Built-in VRS on CPU blade17XX: Voice GuideXX : 00-63: Message No.

Assign the Message number when service set-ting is completed or canceled to station.This data is not available for IP Station.

•(1)

(2)

Y=1301: Message sent when service is set02: Message sent when service is canceled00-63: Message No.

Message Replay Timer for Announcement Service.

•(1)(2)

Y=05301-99: 4-396 seconds


START

CM49

CM41

END

1-596 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1008.fm

VOICE MAIL INTEGRATION (ANALOG)


PROGRAMMING

In addition to the programming of CALL FORWARDING-ALL CALLS/BUSY LINE/NO ANSWER, dothe following programming.

DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify whether Ringing Transfer to an Atten-dant via VMS is available.

(1)(2)

0630 : Available1 : Not

Specify the sending of the Mail Box number to the VMS when the VMS is recalled after trans-ferring a call to an unanswered station.

(1)(2)


Provide Message Waiting service for a station with MW lamp.

•(1)(2)


Provide VMS service for a station port inter-faced with the VMS (VMS station).

•(1)(2)


Provide Message Waiting service for a VMS station port.

•(1)(2)


Assign Service Restriction Class A for Mes-sage Waiting to a station with a MW lamp and a VMS station port.

•(1)(2)



••

(1)

(2)

Y=024 Station with MW lampY=040 VMS Station00-15: Service Restriction Class A as-


START

CM08

CM13

CM12

CM15

A

JULY/18/2008

1-597 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1008.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the access code for MW lamp set/reset from a VMS station port.

•(1)(2)

Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3X-XXXX: Access codeA040: SetA041: Reset

Assign the access code to retrieve a message from the VMS and search Message Reminder/Message Waiting.

•(1)(2)

Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3X-XXXX: Access codeA146: SearchA147: Retrieve

Assign the access code to be sent out to a VMS after/before a Mail Box number, if required.

NOTE 1: “C” or “D” should not be assigned as the first digit of an access code, to insert prepause timing. Prepause timing is assigned by CM41 Y=0>44.

NOTE 2: If “C” is inserted in the access code, it can be used as a pause (1.5 sec-onds). To provide a programmable pause, insert “D” instead of “C” (Programmable Pause: CM41 Y=0>38).

•(1)

(2)

Y=003: Access Code to be sent out before a Mail

Box No. NOTE 14: Access Code to be sent out after a Mail

Box No.XX-XXXX: Access code to be sent out to a

VMSX: 0-9, A (*), B (#), C/D (Pause) NOTE 2NONE : Not sent out

Specify the prepause timing, DTMF signal width, and Inter-digital pause for VMS.

•(1)(2)

Y=044: Prepause Timing00-12, 13: 0-12, 0.5 seconds

If no data is set, the default setting is 1 second.

Specify the DTMF signal width for VMS. •(1)(2)

Y=04800: 64 ms.01: 128 ms.


Specify the DTMF inter-digital pause for VMS.

•(1)(2)

Y=04900: 32 ms. 04: 120 ms01: 64 ms. 05: 160 ms.02: 80 ms. 06: 200 ms.03: 100 ms. 07: 240 ms.


A

CM20

CM50

CM41

B

JULY/18/2008

1-598 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1008.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign VMS display, if required. •(1)(2)

Y=0 By Character CodeX-XXXXXXXX: Station No.564D53: VMS character code

•(1)(2)

Y=1 By CharacterX-XXXXXXXX: Station No.VMS (Character)

Assign the VMS station as the destination of a call from a station which is set Message.

•(1)(2)

Y=1500-63: Tenant No.X-XXXXXXXX: VMS Station No.

Assign the MW lamp on a Multiline Terminal, if required.

•(1)(2)


To access the VMS from DESKCON, assign Out Pulse (DTMF signal) -short/long key.

•(1)

(2)

Y=00ATTCON No. (E000-E007) + + Key No.F6112: Out Pulse (DTMF signal)-shortF6113: Out Pulse (DTMF signal)-long

When Out Pulse (DTMF signal)-long is desig-nated by CM90, assign the DTMF signal width.

NOTE: When Out Pulse (DTMF signal)-short is designated by CM90, DTMF signal width is set to 128 ms. (Fixed).

To allow Voice Mail Private Password:

•(1)(2)

Y=014: DTMF signal width01-50: 64-3200 ms.

(64 ms. increments)If no data is set, default setting is 512 ms.

Assign Password Privacy for the Tenant num-ber of the VMS ports.

NOTE: This is effective for ports assigned as VMS ports in CM13 Y=10.

•(1)(2)

Y=3000-63: Tenant No. of VMS ports0 : Allow1 : Not allowed

B

CM77

CM51

CM90,

,

CM41

CM65

END

JULY/18/2008

1-599 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1008.fm


To provide the Message Waiting Indication per line when a Multiline Terminal accommodates multiline:

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign a Virtual Line station number to re-quired Virtual Port number.

(1)(2)

0000-0999: Virtual Port No.X-XXXXXXXX: Virtual Line station No.

The Virtual Port number has no relation with the Physical Port number used in CM10 Y=00. There-fore, any Virtual Port number can be assigned to each Virtual Line station number.However, the Virtual Line station number should be different from Single line number assigned by CM10 Y=00.

Accommodate the Virtual Line to the Multiline Terminal.

•(1)(2)

Y=00My Line No. + + Key No.X-XXXXXXXX: Virtual Line station No.


(1)(2)

1400: Available

Specify the Message Waiting LED Indication on Line/Trunk/Feature keys of Multiline Ter-minal.

•(1)(2)

Y=62X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.0 : Not indicated3 : Message Waiting LED Indication


START

CM11

CM90,

CM08

CM12

END

JULY/18/2008

1-600 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch1008.fm

WHISPER PAGE

WHISPER PAGE

PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign Service Restriction Class A for re-quired stations.

•(1)(2)


Specify Service Restriction Class A for whis-pering station and whispered station.

••

(1)

(2)

Y=111 Whispering stationY=112 Whispered station00-15: Service Restriction Class A as-


Assign the access code for Whisper Page. •(1)(2)

Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3X-XXXX: Access codeA188: Whisper Page

Provide the Multiline Terminal (whispering side) with a Whisper Page key, if required.

•(1)(2)

Y=00My Line No. + + Key No.F0A88: Whisper Page

Specify whether the call termination to My Line is restricted or allowed, while the station user makes a call with a Sub Line or trunk line on the Multiline Terminal.

(1)(2)

268 0 : Restricted1 : Allow

Specify Busy/Idle status check method as “Station Base” or “Extension Base”.

NOTE: When CM08>268 and CM08>269 is set to “0”, Whisper Page is avail-able for the extension which is mak-ing a call with a secondary extension or trunk line on the Multi-line Terminal.

(1)(2)

269 0 : Station base1 : Extension base

Specify the dial tone, which is sent to the other party when the whispered station answers the Whisper Page.

•(1)(2)

Y=217 0 : No Tone1 : Hold Tone

START

CM12

CM15

CM20

CM90,

CM08

CM48

END


2-1 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch2001.fm

Chapter

2

HOTEL FEATURES

This chapter explains the system outline, system capacity, systemspecifications, system programming and hardware requirements forthe Hotel System.

2-2 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch2001.fm

HOTEL SYSTEM OUTLINE

HOTEL SYSTEM OUTLINEThe figure below shows the system outline of hotel system.

System Outline of Hotel System

COT

COT

LC

LC

PBX

C.O. LINE

EXTERNAL TONE SOURCEFOR AUTOMATIC WAKE UP

ADMINISTRATIVETELEPHONE

DLC

CPU

HOTEL/MOTEL FRONTDESK TERMINAL

DLC

HOTELPRINTER

GUEST ROOM TELEPHONEWITH MESSAGEWAITING LAMP

HOTEL CONSOLE

TDSW

(Multiline Terminal)

(DESKCON)

SMDR/PMS

SWITCHING HUBLAN

PMSSMDR(Refer to the “SMDR” in Chapter 1.)

COT : C.O. Trunk BladeDLC : Digital Line Circuit Blade

(for Multiline Terminal/DESKCON)LC : Line Circuit Blade (for Single Line Telephone)CPU : Central Processing UnitPMS : Property Management SystemSMDR: Station Message Detail Recording

SMDR(Refer to the “SMDR” in Chapter 1.)

RS-232C

2-3 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch2001.fm


Application Processor/Central Processing Unit

• CPU built-in PMS on IPThe Central Processing Unit (CPU) manages guest or administration room status and stores call infor-mation on each guest or administrative station. The CPU also provides a LAN interface port for a Prop-erty Management System (PMS) terminal or a Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) terminal.

Hotel Console

The DESKCON is programmed as a Hotel Console. The Hotel Console can access Room Cutoff (individ-ual and group), Automatic Wake Up, Message Waiting, or Do Not Disturb (individual and group) with thefunction keys; in addition to the attendant features and functions.

Hotel/Motel Front Desk Terminal

The Multiline Terminal can be programmed to function as a Hotel/Motel Front Desk Terminal. This allowssetting and canceling of the following hotel features:

• Automatic Wake Up• Check In/Check Out NOTE• Do Not Disturb• Do Not Disturb-Override• Message Waiting• Room Cutoff• Room Status NOTE• Hotel/Motel Toll Restriction Change-Guest Station

NOTE: When CPU built-in PMS on IP is provided, you can set and cancel these hotel features only from PMS.• Check In/Check Out• Room Status

2-4 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch2001.fm


Property Management System (PMS)

The PBX provides a data link interface to the customer supplied Property Management System (PMS) ac-commodating hotel management features. The PMS can be any computer connected to the PBX via a LANinterface. It communicates with the PBX using the specified protocols.

The data link interface allows the PMS to accommodate both front- and back-office hotel management fea-tures, by providing a means of communication between the PMS and the PBX for features such as CheckIn/Check Out, Message Waiting, Station Message Detail data, and control functions such as Do Not Dis-turb and Room Cutoff.

The PMS can communicate with the PBX to obtain the following information:

(1) Maid StatusThis information can be entered from either a guest room telephone or Front Desk Terminal, and willautomatically be transmitted to the PMS for data update.

(2) Message Waiting Lamp Status ChangeThis information can be entered from the Attendant Console or Front Desk Terminal. It is thenautomatically transmitted to the PMS for data update. If the automatic MW lamp off feature isactivated, MW data is cleared and status is sent to PMS.

(3) Station Message Detail DataThis information is transmitted to the PMS after completion of each local and toll call.

(4) Wake Up ServiceThis information can be entered from the Attendant Console, Front Desk Terminal or guest roomstation, and will be automatically transmitted to the PMS for data update.

(5) Do Not Disturb/Room CutoffThis information can be entered from the Attendant Console or Front Desk Terminal, and will betransmitted to the PMS by request from the PMS.

(6) Check In/Check OutThis information can be entered only from the PMS and will be transmitted to the PBX for statusupdate.

(7) Room data image messages indicating requests for data base updates and data base images.

2-5 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch2001.fm


(8) Room change, room swap and room copy for data update.

(9) Room occupancy change and room data change for data update.

(10) Routine activity checks between the PMS and the PBX.

(11) Hotel/Motel DID Number Allocation to Guest StationHotel/Motel DID Number Allocation to Guest Station is set/canceled from PMS.This information is sent to PMS when the DID number is set/canceled.

The PMS can send the following information to the PBX.

(1) Maid status(2) MW lamp status changes(3) Telephone restriction status changes(4) Check In/Out messages(5) Room data image inquiry(6) Wake Up status changes(7) Room change, room swap and room copy(8) Room occupancy and room data change(9) Status inquiry for routine activity checks(10) Guest Name and Guest Room Information to be displayed on Administrative Station, Front Desk

Terminal and Hotel Console(11) Hotel/Motel DID Number Allocation to Guest Station

2-6 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch2001.fm


Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

The Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) sends out the outgoing/incoming C.O. call information toan external SMDR terminal (Personal Computer). The SMDR is usually used in conjunction with the PMSand used for the following purposes.

• Management of guest/administrative station call The PMS does not manage the guest/administrative station call.

• Backup of guest/administrative station call for a PMS failure

• Management of either guest or administrative station call For example, the SMDR manages an administrative station call, and the PMS manages a guest sta-tion call

Hotel Printer

If the print out function key is provided on the Front Desk Terminal, the status of the following featuresare printed out when the feature is set or reset and Room Status print out is activated:

• Automatic Wake Up• Check In/Check Out• Do Not Disturb• Message Waiting• Room Cutoff• Room Status-individual guest station/all guest stations

2-7 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch2001.fm

HOTEL SYSTEM CAPACITY

HOTEL SYSTEM CAPACITYITEM CAPACITY

Guest/Administrative Station 1020

Front Desk Terminal 8

Hotel Console 8

Hotel Printer 1

I/O port for PMS/SMDR/Hotel Printer 1

I/O port for SMDR/PMS via LAN 1

I/O port for Hotel Printer 1

2-8 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch2001.fm

HOTEL SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS

HOTEL SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS• SMDR Interface via RS-232C/Hotel Printer Interface

• PMS/SMDR Interface via LAN

NOTE: The CPU blade in Main unit communicates with the SMDR/PMS terminal. Therefore, in the communication settings in SMDR/PMS terminal side, set the IP address to be connected to the address specified by system data (CM0B Y=0XX/1XX>00), and application port number shown in the above table.

ITEMSPECIFICATIONS

SMDR INTERFACE HOTEL PRINTER INTERFACEPhysical Interface RS-232C RS-232C

Synchronization Asynchronous Asynchronous

Protocol IMS Procedure -

Transmission Speed 300/1200/2400/4800/9600/19200 bps 1200/2400/4800 bps

I/O port No. 1/2 port of CPU blade No. 1/2 port of CPU blade

ITEM SPECIFICATIONSPhysical layer Ethernet

Connection layer The Ethernet packet format complies with the DIX standard.

TCP/IP protocol ARP, IP, ICMP, UDP, TCP

Socket interface Complies with 4.3 BSD socket interface

Transport protocol TCP stream type protocol

Application port number SMDR: 60010 (fixed)PMS : 60050 (fixed)

Number of connection 1

Client/Server Client : SMDR/PMS terminalServer: PBX

Transmission code 7-bit ASCII code

Quasi-normal restriction condition 1. When connection is closed2. Status monitoring text

2-9 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch2001.fm

HOTEL FEATURE LIST

HOTEL FEATURE LIST

Hotel Feature List×: Applicable –: Not applicable

NOTE 1: Only PMS can set/cancel this feature to a guest station.NOTE 2: Front Desk Terminal, Hotel Console or administrative station can set/cancel this feature to a

guest station.

FEATURE NAME

APPLICATION

GUEST ADMINISTRATIVEFRONT DESK

TERMINAL

HOTELCONSOLE PMS

Automatic Wake Up × × × × ×

Check In/Check Out NOTE 1 – – × – ×

Direct Data Entry × – – – ×

Do Not Disturb-Hotel/Motel × × × × ×

Do Not Disturb-System NOTE 2 – – × × –

Hotel/Motel Attendant Console – – – × –

Hotel/Motel DID Number Allocation to Guest Station

× – – – ×

Hotel/Motel Front Desk Instru-ment

– – × – –

Hotel/Motel Toll Restriction Change-Guest Station

× – × × –

House Phone × × × × –

Maid Status × × × – ×

Message Registration – – × – ×

Message Waiting NOTE 2 – × × × ×

Property Management System Interface

– – – – –

Room Cutoff NOTE 2 – – × × ×

Room Status NOTE 2 – – × × –

Single Digit Dialing × × × × –

2-10 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch2001.fm

HOTEL SYSTEM PROGRAMMING SUMMARY

HOTEL SYSTEM PROGRAMMING SUMMARY

Programming Summary for Hotel System

SMDR Programming

START

HOTEL FEATUREPROGRAMMING

TO SMDRTO PMS

Page 2-12

END

Page 1-493

PMS INTERFACE Programming

Where is the callinformation sent?

Page 2-50

2-11 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch2001.fm

HOTEL SYSTEM PROGRAMMINGPRECAUTION

HOTEL SYSTEM PROGRAMMINGPRECAUTIONBefore programming the system data for the Hotel feature, confirm that the system is under the followingstatus.

• The system is under On-Line mode. (“RUN” lamp is flashing on the CPU blade.)• All the system data pertaining to the station, trunks, and services have already been programmed.

2-12 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch2001.fm

HOTEL SYSTEM PROGRAMMINGHOTEL FEATURE PROGRAMMING

HOTEL FEATURE PROGRAMMING• AUTOMATIC WAKE UP Page 2-13• CHECK IN / CHECK OUT Page 2-22• DIRECT DATA ENTRY Page 2-26• DO NOT DISTURB-HOTEL/MOTEL Page 2-27• DO NOT DISTURB-SYSTEM Page 2-32• HOTEL/MOTEL DID NUMBER ALLOCATION

TO GUEST STATION Page 2-35• HOTEL/MOTEL FRONT DESK INSTRUMENT Page 2-36• HOTEL/MOTEL TOLL RESTRICTION

CHANGE-GUEST STATION Page 2-39• HOUSE PHONE Page 2-41• MAID STATUS Page 2-42• MESSAGE REGISTRATION Page 2-45• MESSAGE WAITING Page 2-47• PROPERTY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM INTER-

FACE Page 2-50• ROOM CUTOFF Page 2-58• ROOM STATUS Page 2-59• SINGLE DIGIT DIALING Page 2-60

2-13 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch2001.fm

HOTEL SYSTEM PROGRAMMINGAUTOMATIC WAKE UP

AUTOMATIC WAKE UP

PROGRAMMING

To provide Automatic Wake Up from a guest station or administrative station, or Front Desk Terminal, orPMS:

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign Service Restriction Class A to required guest or administrative station.

•(1)(2)

Y=02X-XXXXXX: Station No.XX ZZXX: 00-15 : Service Restriction Class A

Allow Automatic Wake Up in Service Restric-tion Class A assigned by CM12 Y=02.

••

•

(1)

(2)

Y=013 Guest stationY=020 Administrative station allowing single Wake Up Time operationY=021 Administrative station allowing multiple Wake Up Time operation00-15: Service Restriction Class A as-


Allow Voice Response System access (Record/Replay/Delete) in the Service Restriction Class A assigned by CM12 Y=02, if required.

•(1)

(2)



Assign the access code for Wake Up call set or reset.

NOTE: This data assignment is not required when Wake Up is set by PMS.

•(1)(2)

Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3X-XXXX: Access CodeA024: Wake Up set from guestA025: Wake Up cancel from guestA027: Wake Up set from administrative

station with Single Wake Up Time operation NOTE

A028: Wake Up set from administrative station with Multiple Wake Up Time operation NOTE

Specify the sending Wake Up message to Hotel Printer and PMS, when setting Wake Up feature from guest station.

(1)(2)

2000: Available

START

CM12

CM15

CM20

CM08

A

JULY/18/2008

2-14 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch2001.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify the timing for Wake Up call start. (1)(2)

228: Wake Up Call Start Timing0 : At preset time 1 : 5 minutes prior to preset time

Specify the condition for printing the Wake Up call information if Hotel Printer is provided.

(1)

(2)

282: “RING ON OK” when call starts283: “STATION BUSY” when station is

busy284: “CONNECTION BLOCK” when call

is unsuccessful285: “RESTRICTION” when call is

unsuccessful286: “STATION ANSWER” when station

answers287: “STATION NO ANSWER” when sta-

tion does not answer0 : Not printed 1 : To print

Specify whether Automatic Wake Up record is printed out on Hotel Printer, and the report is sent to PMS when setting or resetting Auto-matic Wake Up.

(1)(2)


Assign the function keys for Automatic Wake Up to the Multiline Terminal of guest room sta-tion or administrative station, if provided.


•(1)(2)

Y=00My Line No. + + Key No.F0024: Automatic Wake Up set/reset from

guest stationF0027: Automatic Wake Up set/reset from

administrative station with Single Wake Up Time operation. NOTE

F0028: Automatic Wake Up set/reset from administrative station with Multiple Wake Up Time operation. NOTE

Assign the function keys for Automatic Wake Up to the Front Desk Terminal.


•(1)(2)

Y=00My Line No. + + Key No.F1067: Automatic Wake Up NOTEF1074: SetF1075: ResetF1077: Release

A

CM08

CM90,

,

B

JULY/18/2008

2-15 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch2001.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify the duration of Wake Up Call. •(1)(2)

Y=02302-14: 8-56 seconds


Specify the number of Wake Up Call attempts before abandonment.

(1)(2)

0301-05 : 1 call-5 callsNONE : 5 calls

Specify the maximum number of Wake Up Call setting at the same time.

(1)(2)


NOTE 1: Assign the maximum number of Wake Up Call for the same time per every minute.

NOTE 2: The command is ineffective when setting from PMS (operated as NONE “No limit”).

Specify the operation for Wake Up Call setting over the limitation assigned by CM42>181.

(1)(2)

8500 : Set it to one minute ahead1 : Restricted

NOTE 1: If one minute ahead also exceeds the limitation on the number of Wake Up Call, it is set to one more minute ahead. If the attempt cannot be set up to 10 minutes.

NOTE 2: CM42>181 is ineffective when Wake Up Call is set from PMS. Therefore, this command is also in-effective (Wake Up Call is executed at the preset time).

B

CM41

CM42

CM08

C

JULY/18/2008

2-16 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch2001.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

Designate the type of tone source for Wake Up call.

NOTE: When the second data is set to “Ex-ternal Tone Source”, system reset is required.

•(1)(2)

Y=100: Tone Source of Wake Up CallXX 00XX: 00 : No Tone

02 : External Tone Source

05 : Voice Response System14 : Hold Tone Source on CPU blade15 : Internal Tone Generator1301: External Hold Tone Source

C

CM48

RESET

D

CM48 Y=1>00: 0200(External Tone Source)

E

CM48 Y=1>00: 0500(Voice Response System)

F

CM48 Y=1>00: 1400(Hold Tone Source on CPU blade)

JULY/18/2008

2-17 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch2001.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA



•(1)

(2)



•(1)

(2)




•(1)(2)



•(1)(2)




D

CM05

BLADE RESET

CM10

CM12

CM13

BLADE RESET

D1

JULY/18/2008

2-18 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch2001.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

When an External Announcement Machine is required, assign the function for Wake Up to the PGD(2)-U10 ADP.

•(1)

(2)

Y=00XX YXX: 00-31: Relay Group No.Y : 0-3: Circuit No.01XXXX: 00: External Announcement Machine

for Wake Up Call


•(1)(2)





D1

CM44

CM64

END

JULY/18/2008

2-19 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch2001.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

When providing the VRS as the internal an-nouncement source, assign the access code to record, replay, and delete a message, respec-tively.

•(1)(2)


When providing VRS, assign the answering message for Wake Up to the CPU built-in VRS.

•(1)(2)

Y=00000-007: Built-in VRS on CPU blade0C XX: Answering message on Automatic

Wake UpXX : 00-63: Message No.

•(1)(2)


Y=00

When providing the VRS, specify the duration of message replay timer for Automatic Wake Up.

•(1)(2)

Y=05201-99: 4-396 seconds


E

CM20

CM49

CM41

END

JULY/18/2008

2-20 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch2001.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

Set the music for Internal Hold Tone.


•(1)(2)



F

CM48

END

JULY/18/2008

2-21 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch2001.fm


To provide printing the set/cancel/execution record of Automatic Wake Up, refer to the programming in“PROPERTY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM INTERFACE”. Page 2-56

HARDWARE REQUIRED

To provide Hotel Printer or Front Desk Terminal or PMS: Printer (Customer provided) and RS PRT-15S CA/RS PRT-15S CA-C/RS NORM-4S CAFront Desk TerminalPMS

To provide the external announcement machine:PGD(2)-U10 ADPAnnouncement Machine (Customer provided)

To provide the internal digital announcement source:CPU blade (built-in VRS)

JULY/18/2008

2-22 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch2001.fm

HOTEL SYSTEM PROGRAMMINGCHECK IN / CHECK OUT

CHECK IN / CHECK OUT

PROGRAMMING

To provide Check In/Check Out from a Front Desk Terminal:

DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify the kind of station. •(1)(2)

Y=51X-XXXXXX: Station No. 0 : Administrative Station1 : Guest Station

Assign Service Restriction Class A to required guest station.

•(1)(2)


Allow Room Status Code setting (Room Cut-off/Do Not Disturb/Message Waiting/Wake Up Call/Trunk Restriction class change) in Service Restriction Class A assigned by CM12 Y=02.

•(1)

(2)



Assign the Charging Station Class number to each station.

•(1)(2)

Y=45X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.00-15 : Charging Station Class No.

Execute the operation set by CM4B Y=00 is executed simultaneously when Room Status Code is set/changed.

•(1)

(2)

Y=39300-15: Charging Station Class No.

assigned by CM12 Y=450: To execute

START

CM13

CM12

CM15

CM12

CM15

A

JULY/18/2008

2-23 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch2001.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign Room Status Code set by Check In op-eration.

(1)(2)

18601-08 : Room Status Code 1-8NONE : Not used

Assign Room Status Code set by Check Out operation.

(1)(2)


Specify call charge printout method when Room Status Code matches the Room Status Code for Check Out set by 42>187.

(1)(2)

18901 : Interim Printout per station02 : Audit Printout per stationNONE : Not available

Assign the each function to the Room Status Code assigned by CM42>186 and 187.

•(1)

(2)

Y=00X 00: Room Cutoff is set/resetX: 1-8: Room Status Code1 : To set2 : To resetNONE : Not available

•(1)

(2)

Y=00X 01: Do Not Disturb is set/resetX: 1-8: Room Status Code1 : To set2 : To resetNONE : Not available

•(1)

(2)

Y=00X 02: Automatic Wake Up call resetX: 1-8: Room Status Code1 : AvailableNONE : Not available

•(1)

(2)

Y=00X 03: Message Waiting is set/resetX: 1-8: Room Status Code1 : To set2 : To resetNONE : Not available

A

CM42

CM4B

B

JULY/18/2008

2-24 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch2001.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

•(1)

(2)

Y=00X 04: Check In time clearX: 1-8: Room Status Code1 : To deleteNONE : Not deleted

•(1)

(2)

Y=00X 05: Room Status Code dialing from guest

room is allowedX: 1-8: Room Status Code1 : AllowNONE : Not allowed

•(1)

(2)

Y=00X 06: Hotel/Motel Toll Restriction Class

Change-Guest StationX: 1-8: Room Status Code1 : Unrestricted (RCA)2 : Non-Restricted 1 (RCB)3 : Non-Restricted 2 (RCC)4 : Semi-Restricted 1 (RCD)5 : Semi-Restricted 2 (RCE)6 : Restricted 1 (RCF)7 : Restricted 2 (RCG)8 : Fully-Restricted (RCH)9 : Restriction reset (As per CM12

Y=01)NONE : Not available

•(1)

(2)

Y=00X 07: Check Out lamp control on DSS Con-

soleX: 1-8: Room Status Code1 : Lamp OFF2 : Flash (slowly)3 : Flash (120IPM)4 : Lamp ONNONE : Not controlled

B

CM4B

END

JULY/18/2008

2-25 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch2001.fm


To provide printing of Check In/Check In cancel, Check Out/Check Out cancel, refer to the programmingin “PROPERTY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM INTERFACE”. Page 2-56

HARDWARE REQUIRED

Front Desk Terminal or PMS

2-26 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch2001.fm

HOTEL SYSTEM PROGRAMMINGDIRECT DATA ENTRY

DIRECT DATA ENTRY

PROGRAMMING

HARDWARE REQUIRED

Printer (Customer provided) and RS PRT-15S CA/RS PRT-15S CA-C/RS NORM-4S CAPMS

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the access code for Direct Data Entry. •(1)(2)


Provide the guest room station with the func-tion key for Direct Data Entry, if required.

•(1)(2)

Y=00My Line No. + + Key No.F0097: Direct Data Entry

START

CM20

CM90,

END

2-27 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch2001.fm

HOTEL SYSTEM PROGRAMMINGDO NOT DISTURB-HOTEL/MOTEL

DO NOT DISTURB-HOTEL/MOTEL

PROGRAMMING

To provide Do Not Disturb from a guest station or administrative station, or Front Desk Terminal, or PMS:

DESCRIPTION DATA


•(1)(2)



•(1)

(2)



Assign the access code for Do Not Disturb Set/Cancel.

•(1)(2)

Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3X-XXXX: Access CodeA022: SetA023: Cancel

Assign the destination of a call transferred when the called station is in Do Not Disturb.

•(1)(2)

Y=1000-63: Tenant No. X-XXXXXX: Station No.orE000: Attendant Console

Assign the Call Forwarding-Intercept (ICPT) key, if DESKCON is assigned as destination by CM51 Y=10.

•(1)

(2)

Y=00ATTCON No. (E000-E007) + + Key No.F6065: Call Forwarding-Intercept

Assign the DND function key to the Multiline Terminal, if required.

•(1)(2)

Y=00My Line No. + + Key No. F0022: Do Not Disturb set/reset

START

CM12

CM15

CM20

CM51

CM90,

,

A

2-28 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch2001.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the DND function keys to the Front Desk Terminal, if provided.

•(1)(2)

Y=00My Line No. + + Key No.F1064: Do Not DisturbF1074: SetF1075: ResetF1077: ReleaseF1080: Do Not Disturb Override

Assign the DND function keys to the Hotel Console, if provided.

•(1)

(2)

Y=00ATTCON No. (E000-E007) + + Key No.F6102: Do Not DisturbF6103: Do Not Disturb OverrideF6104: Reset

Specify the sending Do Not Disturb message to Hotel Printer and PMS when setting Do Not Disturb from guest station.

(1)(2)

2010: Available

Specify Call Forwarding-Busy Line/Station Hunting for a station set to Do Not Disturb.

(1)(2)


For a system with multiple-tenant, specify the destination of a call transferred in CM51, Y=10 for the tenant of calling or called station.

(1)(2)

2410 : Tenant of called station1 : Tenant of calling station

Specify whether Do Not Disturb record is printed out on Hotel Printer, and the report is sent to PMS when setting or resetting Do Not Disturb.

(1)(2)



Y=214: Dial Tone on setting Do Not Disturb0 : Special Tone1 : Dial Tone

A

CM90,

,

CM08

CM48

END

2-29 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch2001.fm


To set the Do Not Disturb feature to the stations of SLT/sub line of Multiline Terminal/Virtual line stationsthat are accommodated to the Multiline Terminal multiline as the sub line, and to display the Do Not Dis-turb Set/Reset status of the stations on the lamp of Multiline Terminal:

NOTE: To make this feature available, do the programming both of the setting side (Multiline Termi-nal) and the set side (stations of SLT, sub line of Multiline Terminal or virtual line stations).

• For Setting Side (Multiline Terminal)

DESCRIPTION DATA


•(1)(2)


Allow Do Not Disturb Setting in Service Re-striction Class C assigned by CM12 Y=07.

•(1)

(2)




(1)(2)

1400: Available

To indicate the Do Not Disturb Set/Reset status on the Line/Trunk/Feature keys of Multiline Terminal, assign the Do Not Disturb LED Indi-cation to the station number of Multiline Ter-minals.

•(1)(2)

Y=62X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.0 : Not indicated1 : Not used2 : Do Not Disturb LED Indication3 : Message Waiting LED Indication


START

CM12

CM15

CM08

CM12

END

2-30 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch2001.fm


• For Set Side (stations of SLT, sub line of Multiline Terminal or virtual line stations)

DESCRIPTION DATA


•(1)

(2)



XX ZZXX: 00-15 : Service Restriction Class A


•(1)

(2)

Y=01900-15: Service Restriction Class A assigned



•(1)

(2)



00-15 : Service Restriction Class C

Allow Do Not Disturb to be set in Service Re-striction Class C assigned by CM12 Y=07.

•(1)

(2)



Provide Do Not Disturb feature to each tenant. •(1)(2)

Y=1900-63: Tenant No.0 : Not provided1 : To provide


(1)(2)

1400: Available

Specify the Do Not Disturb LED Indication on Line/Trunk/Feature keys of Multiline Termi-nal.

•(1)

(2)



0 : Not indicated1 : Not used2 : Do Not Disturb LED Indication3 : Message Waiting LED Indication


START

CM12

CM15

CM12

CM15

CM65

CM08

CM12

END

2-31 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch2001.fm


HARDWARE REQUIRED

To provide Front Desk Terminal or PMS:Front Desk Terminal orPMS

2-32 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch2001.fm

HOTEL SYSTEM PROGRAMMINGDO NOT DISTURB-SYSTEM

DO NOT DISTURB-SYSTEM

PROGRAMMING

To provide Do Not Disturb-System from a Front Desk Terminal:

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign Do Not Disturb-System to required sta-tions.Do Not Disturb is set to the stations assigned by this command simultaneously from the Front Desk Terminal or Attendant Console.

•(1)(2)

Y=00X-XXXXXX: Station No.0: To provide

Assign the destination of a call transferred when the called station is in Do Not Disturb mode.

•(1)(2)

Y=1000-63: Tenant No. X-XXXXXX: Station No.orE000: Attendant Console

Assign the Call Forwarding-Intercept (ICPT) key, if the DESKCON is assigned as destina-tion by CM51 Y=10.

•(1)

(2)

Y=00ATTCON No. (E000-E007) + + Key No.F6065: Call Forwarding-Intercept

Assign the DND function keys to the Front Desk Terminal, if provided.

•(1)(2)

Y=00My Line No. + + Key No.F1064: Do Not DisturbF1072: GroupF1074: SetF1075: ResetF1077: ReleaseF1080: Do Not Disturb Override

Assign the DND function keys to the Hotel Console, if provided.

•(1)

(2)

Y=00ATTCON No. (E000-E007) + + Key No.F6102: Do Not DisturbF6103: Do Not Disturb OverrideF6104: Reset

START

CM13

CM51

CM90,

,

,

A

2-33 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch2001.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify Call Forwarding-Busy Line/Station Hunting for a station set to Do Not Disturb-System.

(1)(2)


For a system with multiple tenant, specify the destination of a call transferred in CM51 Y=10 for the tenant of calling or called station.

(1)(2)

2410 : Tenant of called station1 : Tenant of calling station

Specify whether Do Not Disturb record is printed out on Hotel Printer, and the report is sent to PMS when setting or resetting Do Not Disturb.

(1)(2)



Y=214: Dial Tone on setting Do Not Disturb0 : Special Tone1 : Dial Tone

A

CM08

CM48

END

2-34 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch2001.fm


To provide Do Not Disturb group set/cancel at specified timing in advance:

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the group of stations in Do Not Disturb. •(1)(2)

Y=00X-XXXX: Station No.0: To provide


•(1)(2)

Y=00 My Line No. + + Key No.F0022: Do Not Disturb Set/Reset

Assign a Do Not Disturb function key on each DSS Console, if needed.

(1)

(2)

DSS Console No. (00-31) + + DSS Key No. (57-59)F1053: Do Not Disturb Set/Reset

START

CM13

CM90,

CM97 ,

END

2-35 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch2001.fm

HOTEL SYSTEM PROGRAMMINGHOTEL/MOTEL DID NUMBER ALLOCATION TO GUEST STATION

HOTEL/MOTEL DID NUMBER ALLOCATION TO GUEST STATION

PROGRAMMING

HARDWARE REQUIRED

PMS

DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify the DID Development Table for guest station.

NOTE: Set the second data the same as the DID Development Table number as-signed by CM35 Y=170.

(1)(2)

8240 : Development Table 1 for DID No. as-

signed by CM76 Y=901 : Development Table 0 for DID No. as-

signed by CM76 Y=00


•(1)(2)



•(1)(2)


Allow Hotel/Motel DID number allocation to guest station.

•(1)

(2)

Y=32 000-999: Number Conversion Block No.

assigned by CM76 Y=00/900: Available


NOTE: This programming is effective when the destination station number from PMS is not set.

••••

(1)

(2)


assigned by CM76 Y=00/90X-XXXXXXXX: DID station No.D04: Direct-In Termination

START

CM08

CM76

END

2-36 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch2001.fm

HOTEL SYSTEM PROGRAMMINGHOTEL/MOTEL FRONT DESK INSTRUMENT

HOTEL/MOTEL FRONT DESK INSTRUMENT

PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION DATA



(1)(2)


: 01 (Mon): 02 (Tue): 03 (Wed): 04 (Thu): 05 (Fri): 06 (Sat)

(1)(2)

2: TimeHH MM SSHH : 00-23 (Hour)MM : 00-59 (Minute)SS : 00-59 (Second)

Specify the control method of the Front Desk Terminal.

•(1)

(2)

Y=0110: Control method for the Front Desk Ter-

minal1: Built-in CPU


•(1)

(2)


Assign a My Line number for Front Desk Ter-minal.

NOTE: The number of Front Desk Termi-nals is limited to 8 units per system.

•(1)

(2)

Y=00XX YY ZZ: Physical Port No.XX: 01-50: Unit No.YY: 01-18: Slot No.ZZ : 01-32: Circuit No.FX-FXXXXXX: My Line No.

START

CM02

CM04

CM05

BLADE RESET

CM10

A

2-37 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch2001.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign Service Restriction Class B for Front Desk Terminal to required Multiline Terminal.

•(1)(2)

Y=02X-XXXXXX: My Line No.XX ZZZZ: 00-15 : Service Restriction Class B

Allow Front Desk Terminal in Service Restric-tion Class B assigned by CM12 Y=02.

•(1)

(2)

Y=06200-15 : Service Restriction Class B


Assign the Hotel function keys on the Front Desk Terminal.

•(1)(2)

Y=00My Line No. + + Key No.F1064: Do Not DisturbF1065: Room CutoffF1066: Message WaitingF1067: Automatic Wake Up F1068: Check InF1069: Room StatusF1071: Print OutF1072: GroupF1074: SetF1075: ResetF1076: CancelF1077: ReleaseF1080: Do Not Disturb Override

A

CM12

CM15

CM90

(07) (08) (09) (10) (11) (12)

(01) (02) (03) (04) (05) (06)

(13) (14) (15) (16) (17) (18)

(19) (20) (21) (22) (23) (24)

(09) (10) (11) (12)

(01) (02) (03) (04)

(13) (14) (15) (16)

(05) (06) (07) (08)

(01) (02) (03) (04)

(05) (06) (07) (08)

Multiline Terminal (16) Key Number



,

END

2-38 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch2001.fm


For printing the set/cancel/execution record of hotel features such as Automatic Wake Up/Do Not Disturb/Room Cutoff/Message Waiting from Front Desk Terminals, refer to the programming in “PROPERTYMANAGEMENT SYSTEM INTERFACE” Page 2-56

HARDWARE REQUIRED

Front Desk TerminalPrinter and RS PRT-15S CA/RS PRT-15S CA-C/RS NORM-4S CA

2-39 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch2001.fm

HOTEL SYSTEM PROGRAMMINGHOTEL/MOTEL TOLL RESTRICTION CHANGE-GUEST STATION

HOTEL/MOTEL TOLL RESTRICTION CHANGE-GUEST STATION

PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION DATA


Y=51X-XXXXXX: Station No. 0 : Administrative Station1 : Guest Station


•(1)(2)


Allow Room Status Code setting (Room Cut-off, Trunk Restriction class change).

•(1)

(2)




•(1)(2)



•(1)

(2)

Y=39300-15: Charging Station Class assigned by

CM12 Y=450: Allow

Assign Room Status Code set by Check In operation.

(1)(2)



(1)(2)


START

CM13

CM12

CM15

CM12

CM15

CM42

A

JULY/18/2008

2-40 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch2001.fm

HOTEL SYSTEM PROGRAMMINGHOTEL/MOTEL TOLL RESTRICTION CHANGE-GUEST STATION

HARDWARE REQUIRED

Front Desk Terminal

DESCRIPTION DATA


•(1)

(2)


•(1)

(2)




•(1)

(2)



A

CM4B

END

JULY/18/2008

2-41 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch2001.fm

HOTEL SYSTEM PROGRAMMINGHOUSE PHONE

HOUSE PHONE

PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the House Phone Group number to re-quired stations.

NOTE: There is no limit to the number of House Phones permitted in the sys-tem as long as the maximum number of ports is not exceeded.

•(1)(2)

Y=03X-XXXX: Station No.00-03: House Phone Group 0-3

Assign the destination of each House Phone Group.

•(1)(2)

Y=1400-03: House Phone Group 0-3X-XXXX: Station No. of the destinationE000 : Attendant Console

Specify the result of Switch Hook Flash on sta-tions within a House Phone Group.To allow stations within a House Phone Group to transfer a call or access a feature, set the data to “0”.

(1)

(2)

055: For House Phone Group 0, 1056: For House Phone Group 2, 30 : Special Dial Tone1 : Attendant Recall

START

CM12

CM51

CM08

END

2-42 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch2001.fm

HOTEL SYSTEM PROGRAMMINGMAID STATUS

MAID STATUS

PROGRAMMING

In addition to the programming of “HOTEL/MOTEL FRONT DESK INSTRUMENT” Page 2-36,do the following programming:

DESCRIPTION DATA

If maid ID Code is used, set the data for 281 to 0.

(1)(2)


Assign the access code for Maid Status. •(1)(2)


Assign the Maid Status key/Room Status key to the Front Desk Terminal.

•(1)(2)

Y=00My Line No. + + Key No.F0029: Maid StatusF1069: Room Status


•(1)(2)


Allow Room Status Code setting (Room Cut-off, Trunk Restriction class change).

•(1)

(2)




•(1)(2)



•(1)

(2)


CM12 Y=450: Allow

START

CM08

CM20

CM90,

CM12

CM15

CM12

CM15

A

JULY/18/2008

2-43 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch2001.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign Room Status Code set by Check In operation.

(1)(2)



(1)(2)


Assign Room Status Code when pressing Call Recording Function Button.

(1)(2)


Specify Call charge printout method when Room Status Code matches the Room Status Code for Check Out set by DD01>13.

(1)(2)

18901 : Interim Printout per station02 : Audit Printout per stationNONE : Not available


•(1)

(2)


•(1)

(2)

Y=00X 01: Do Not Disturb is set/resetX: 1-8: Room Status Code1 : To set2 : To resetNONE : Not available

•(1)

(2)

Y=00X 02: Automatic Wake Up call resetX: 1-8: Room Status Code1 : AvailableNONE : Not available

•(1)

(2)

Y=00X 03: Message Waiting is set/resetX: 1-8: Room Status Code1 : To set2 : To resetNONE : Not available

A

CM42

CM4B

B

JULY/18/2008

2-44 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch2001.fm


HARDWARE REQUIRED

Front Desk Terminal or PMS

DESCRIPTION DATA

•(1)

(2)

Y=00X 04: Check In time clearX: 1-8: Room Status Code1 : To deleteNONE : Not deleted

•(1)

(2)

Y=00X 05: Room Status Code dialing from guest

room is allowedX: 1-8: Room Status Code1 : AllowNONE : Not allowed

•(1)

(2)




•(1)

(2)



B

CM4B

END

JULY/18/2008

2-45 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch2001.fm

HOTEL SYSTEM PROGRAMMINGMESSAGE REGISTRATION

MESSAGE REGISTRATION

PROGRAMMING

The SMDR is used to provide Message Registration information to a call accounting system.Refer to STATION MESSAGE DETAIL RECORDING (SMDR) Page 1-493

To provide Message Registration on PMS:

DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify PMS via LAN port as the destination to send a call information.

•(1)(2)

Y=0105:Destination to send a call information1 : PMS via LAN port

Assign the Pseudo-Answer signal function when the answer signal (Battery Reversal) has not been detected within the time assigned by CM41 Y=0>03 after making an outgoing trunk call.

NOTE: This data is effective when CM35 Y=004 is set to “1”.

(1)(2)

1230 : Not sent 1 : To send

Provide SMDR service for outgoing calls to re-quired stations.

•(1)(2)

Y=06X-XXXXXX: Station No.1 : To provide

Specify the type of answer signal from distant office in outgoing connection for each trunk route.

•(1)(2)

Y=00400-63: Trunk Route No.1 : Battery Reversal from C.O. line2 : Answer signal arrives from Tie Line/

ISDN7 : Answer signal does not arrive

START

CM04

CM08

CM13

CM35

A

2-46 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch2001.fm

HOTEL SYSTEM PROGRAMMINGMESSAGE REGISTRATION

HARDWARE REQUIRED

Call Accounting System (customer provided) or PMS

DESCRIPTION DATA

Provide SMDR service for outgoing calls to re-quired trunk routes.

•(1)(2)

Y=01400-63: Trunk Route No.1 : To provide

Assign a trunk access code for SMDR. •(1)(2)

Y=04400-63: Trunk Route No.00-99: Trunk Access Code

Specify the timing of SMDR valid call timer (pseudo-answer timer).

•(1)(2)

Y=00300-08: 8-40 seconds


A

CM35

CM41

END

2-47 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch2001.fm

HOTEL SYSTEM PROGRAMMINGMESSAGE WAITING

MESSAGE WAITING

PROGRAMMING

To provide the Message Waiting from an administrative station, Front Desk Terminal, or PMS:

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign Service Restriction Class A for Mes-sage Waiting to required guest or administra-tive station as shown below.

•(1)(2)



•

•(1)

(2)

Y=024 Administrative station allowing Message Waiting set/reset to guest roomY=040 Guest Station00-15: Service Restriction Class A as-


Provide each station with Message Waiting Service (Multiline Terminal or Single Line Telephone with Message Waiting Lamp).

•(1)(2)

Y=03X-XXXXXX: Station No.0: To provide

Specify guest station or administrative station to each station.

NOTE 1: This data assignment is not required when Message Waiting is set by PMS.

•(1)(2)

Y=13X-XXXXXX: Station No.0 : Administrative station1 : Guest station

START

CM12

CM15

Administrative station

GUEST/ADMINISTRATIVE

0Guest station w/o MW

CM15Y=040

CM15Y=024

LampGuest station with MWLamp

0

01

10

CM13

A

2-48 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch2001.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign access code for Message Waiting Set/Reset/Retrieve from administrative station, if required.

NOTE: This data assignment is not required when Message Waiting is set by PMS.

•(1)(2)

Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3X-XXXX: Access CodeA040: MW Lamp Control-SetA041: MW Lamp Control-ResetA147: MW Retrieve

Assign the Message Front destination to be routed by dialing MW Retrieve code or press-ing MW key on Multiline Terminal to which Message Waiting is set.

•(1)

(2)

Y=1500-63: Tenant No. to which MW set Multi-

line Terminal belongsX-XXXXXX: Station No./My Line No.orE000: Attendant Console

If an Attendant Console is assigned to as the Message Front destination by CM51 Y=15, set the data for 233 to 0. With this setting, Mes-sage Waiting is automatically reset when the Attendant answers.

(1)(2)

2330: Available


(1)(2)

2340 : To delete1 : Not delete



(1)(2)


Specify whether Message Waiting record is printed out on Hotel Printer, and the report is sent to PMS when setting or resetting Message Waiting.

(1)(2)


A

CM20

CM51

CM08

B

2-49 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch2001.fm


HARDWARE REQUIRED

Single Line Telephone with Message Waiting Lamp8LC or 4LC blade

To provide Front Desk Terminal or PMS:Front Desk Terminal orPMS

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the Message Waiting function key to the Multiline Terminal of administrative sta-tion or Front Desk Terminal or Attendant Con-sole, if provided.

•(1)(2)

Y=00My Line No. + + Key No.• For administrative station

F0040: Message Waiting SetF0041: Message Waiting Reset

• For guest station w/o MW LampF1005: Message Waiting Lamp

(1)

(2)

ATTCON No. (E000-E007) + + Key No.F6101: Message WaitingF6104: Reset

B

CM90,

,

END

2-50 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch2001.fm

HOTEL SYSTEM PROGRAMMINGPROPERTY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM INTERFACE

PROPERTY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM INTERFACE

PROGRAMMING

The following shows the minimal programming to establish the PMS interface link. After this program-ming, the Status Inquiry (Feature Code “70”, Function Code “F” and “0”) is available.

NOTE: The CPU blade (or the CPU blade in a Main Unit when Remote Unit over IP feature is provid-ed) communicates with the PMS terminal. For the settings in the PMS terminal side, set IP ad-dress assigned by CM0B Y=0XX/1XX>00 (or CM0B Y=0XX/1XX>50 when VLAN is provided) as a destination of the PMS terminal, and set “60050” as the port number.

DESCRIPTION DATA



(1)(2)



(1)(2)


START

CM02

A

2-51 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch2001.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA




•

(1)(2)


1XX (VOIP Port [1] + Unit No. [01-50]) 00XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX:0.0.0.0-255.255.255.254:IP Address for the system (Maximum 15 digits)



NOTE 2: When entering the Subnet Mask by this data, a period (.) must be en-tered between the numbers (exam-ple: 255.255.255.252).

•

(1)(2)


1XX (VOIP Port [1] + Unit No. [01-50]) 01XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX:255.0.0.0-255.255.255.252:Subnet Mask for the system (Maximum 15 digits)

A

CM0BRESET

RESET

B

JULY/18/2008

2-52 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch2001.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA



NOTE 2: When entering the Default Gateway by this data, a period (.) must be en-tered between the numbers (exam-ple: 255.255.255.254).

NOTE 3: There are the following conditions when setting the Default Gateway Address by this command.• Only one Default Gateway Ad-

dress can be set for the system.• Set the Default Gateway Address

to Maintenance port (Y=0XX) when not using VoIPDB.

• Set the Default Gateway Address to VOIP port (Y=1XX/2XX) when using VoIPDB.

•

(1)(2)


1XX (VOIP Port [1] + Unit No. [01-50]) 02XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX:0.0.0.0-255.255.255.254:Default Gateway Address for the system (Maximum 15 digits)

Select the port for PMS. •(1)(2)


Specify the CPU as a control method of the PMS.

•(1)(2)

Y=0110: Control method for the PMS0: PMS (LAN interface)

Specify PMS via LAN port as the destination to send a call information.

•(1)(2)

Y=0105: Destination to send a call information0 : SMDR terminal via LAN port1 : PMS via LAN port7 : SMDR terminal via RS port

B

CM0B

RESET

RESET

CM04

C

2-53 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch2001.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA\

Specify the number of digits for a sequence used to communicate with the PMS.

(1)(2)

8250 : 3 digits (000-199)1 : 2 digits (00-99)

Specify the timing that the system sends a re-covery process request to the PMS.

(1)(2)

8260 : At every connection establishment 1 : At the first connection establishment

only since system initialization


Y=51X-XXXXXX: Station No.0 : Administrative Station1 : Guest Station

C

CM08

CM13

END

2-54 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch2001.fm


When displaying PMS information on an Administrative station, a Front Desk Terminal, do the followingprogramming in addition to the programming.

DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify the time to go back to Data and Time display after the call answered.

(1)(2)

1200 : 10 seconds later1 : 6 seconds later

Specify the duration to display the name. (1)(2)

1210 : Until call finished1 : As per CM08>120


•(1)(2)

Y=00300-63: Trunk Route No.00-14: Trunk Name No.15 : Kind of trunk route assigned by

CM35 Y=000 are displayed16-63: Trunk Name No.

Enter the desired station user name to each sta-tion number by CM77 Y=0 or Y=1.

•(1)(2)

Y=0 By Character CodeX-XXXXXX: Station No.20-7F: Character CodeMaximum 32 digitsSee APPENDIX A: Character Code Table.

Page A-2

•(1)(2)

Y=1 By CharacterX-XXXXXX: Station No.A-Z, 0-9: CharacterMaximum 16 characters

START

CM08

CM35

CM77

A

2-55 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch2001.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

Enter the desired trunk route name to each trunk route by CM77 Y=2 or Y=3.

•(1)

(2)

Y=2 By Character Code00-14, 16-63: Trunk Route Name No. as-

signed by CM35 Y=00320-7F: Character CodeMaximum 8 digitsSee APPENDIX A: Character Code Table.

Page A-2

•(1)

(2)

Y=3 By Character00-14, 16-63: Trunk Route Name No. as-

signed by CM35 Y=003A-Z, 0-9: CharacterMaximum 4 characters

Select the PMS information to display on an Administrative Station, a Front Desk Terminal and a Hotel Console.

(1)(2)

5480 : PMS information A/B1 : VIP/language

Specify display PMS information set by CM08>548 on a Hotel Console.

(1)(2)

5490 : Display PMS information set by

CM08>5481 : Not display

Specify display PMS information set by CM08>548 on an Administrative Station and a Front Desk Console.

•(1)(2)

Y=520X-XXXXXX: Station No.0 : Display PMS information set by

CM08>5481 : Not display

A

CM77

CM08

CM13

END

2-56 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch2001.fm


When printing the set/cancel/execution record of hotel features such as Automatic Wake Up/Do Not Dis-turb/Room Cutoff/Message Waiting, do the following programming in addition to the programming.To make the printing of each hotel feature record available:

DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify whether the printing of each hotel fea-ture record with the printer that is connected to the PMS.

(1)(2)


Specify the line feed code for external printer (for 20 digits).

(1)(2)

8560 : CR1 : CR/LF

Specify whether the printing of Do Not Disturb set/cancel from a individual station is avail-able, or not.

(1)(2)


Specify whether the printing of Do Not Disturb for a individual station set/cancel from a Front console/Hotel console/DSS console/PMS/At-tendant console is available, or not.

(1)(2)


Specify whether the printing of Room Cutoff for a individual station set/cancel from a Front console/Hotel console/DSS console/PMS/At-tendant console is available, or not.

(1)(2)


Specify whether the printing of Message Wait-ing set/cancel from a Front console/Hotel con-sole/DSS console/PMS/Attendant console is available, or not.

(1)(2)


Specify whether the printing of Automatic Wake Up set/cancel from a individual station is available, or not.

(1)(2)


Specify whether the printing of Automatic Wake Up for a individual station set/cancel from a Front console/Hotel console/DSS con-sole/PMS/Attendant console is available, or not.

(1)(2)


Specify whether the printing of Automatic Wake Up for a individual station execution is available, or not.

(1)(2)


START

CM08

A

2-57 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch2001.fm


HARDWARE REQUIRED

PMS

DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify the printing way of Automatic Wake Up for a individual station execution.

(1)(2)

8600 : To print process and result1 : To print only result

NOTE: When the second data is set to 0, the record of the start of calling/the called station is busy/re-calling is also printed.

Specify whether the printing of Check In/Check In cancel, Check Out/Check Out cancel is available, or not.

(1)(2)


Specify whether the printing when the PMS is connected/disconnected to/from the system is available, or not.

(1)(2)


Specify whether the printing of Room Status Code Record is available, or not.

(1)(2)


Specify the printing way of Immediate Print-out Call Record.

(1)(2)

8810 : ISDN call charge information (AOC)1 : Call charge by SMDR

Assign the setting for when SMDR billing memory overflow occurs.

(1)(2)

8860 : To clear the oldest billing memory and

to store the latest one1 : To clear the latest billing memory

Send detail information of Immediate Printout Call Record for the Printer.

•(1)

(2)


CM12 Y=450 : To send1 : Not sent

Assign the CS control of RS-232C ports. •(1)

(2)

Y=070: Port 11: Port 20 : CS control is always provided1 : As per CS signal input

NOTE 1: Set the second data of CM40 Y=07 to “0” when using the cable for PRT.

NOTE 2: Set the second data of CM40 Y=07 to “1” when using the cable except for PRT.

A

CM08

CM15

CM40

END

JULY/18/2008

2-58 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch2001.fm

HOTEL SYSTEM PROGRAMMINGROOM CUTOFF

ROOM CUTOFF

PROGRAMMING

Refer to “HOTEL/MOTEL TOLL RESTRICTION CHANGE-GUEST STATION”. Page 2-39

HARDWARE REQUIRED

Front Desk Terminal orPMS

2-59 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch2001.fm

HOTEL SYSTEM PROGRAMMINGROOM STATUS

ROOM STATUS

PROGRAMMING

Refer to “MAID STATUS” Page 2-42

HARDWARE REQUIRED

Front Desk Terminal

2-60 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch2001.fm

HOTEL SYSTEM PROGRAMMINGSINGLE DIGIT DIALING

SINGLE DIGIT DIALING

PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the single digit access code for the re-quired features.

For example, to provide the system with the following numbering plan:

1X : Service Access2XX:3XX: Station Numbers4XX:8X : Trunk Route Access9 : C.O. Outgoing Access0 : Operator Call1-8 : Single Digit Station Numbers

The programming is:

(1) Assign digit 1 through 8 to the Single Digit station number (Data=801), respectively. Assign the other access code by CM20.

(2) Assign the station numbers (2XX, 3XX, 4XX, 1-8) to required Physical Port number by CM10 Y=00.

•(1)

(2)

Y=0-3: Numbering Plan Group 0-3X: Single Digit Access Code 0-9, A (*),

B (#)A047 : TAS Answer AA048 : TAS Answer BA049 : TAS Answer CA050 : TAS Answer DA051 : TAS Answer E100-163: Trunk Route 00-63200-231: Route Advance Block 00-31800 : Operator Call801 : Single Digit station No.

START

CM21

A

2-61 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch2001.fm

HOTEL SYSTEM PROGRAMMINGSINGLE DIGIT DIALING

DESCRIPTION DATA

If different digit station numbers of the same level are required within a system, set the lead-ing one or two digits to the data for the required combination of station numbering plan.

For example, to provide the system with the following numbering plan:

200-299 : 3 digits station numbers2100-2199: 4 digits station numbers2200-2299: 4 digits station numbers

Assign the digit “2” to data 824 (2-4 digits sta-tion) and then assign the station numbers to re-quired Physical Port number by CM10 Y=00. For calling the station 200-299 press “#” key or wait for ring start after dialing the station number.

•(1)

(2)

Y=0-3: Numbering Plan Group 0-3X-XX: Leading one or two digits of station

No.823: 2-3 digits station824: 2-4 digits station

Specify the single digit dialing time-out (Tim-ing Start) timer.

•(1)(2)

Y=01303-08: 3-8 seconds

(1 second increment)If no data is set, the default setting is 4-5 sec-onds.

A

CM20

CM41

END

2-62 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch2001.fm



3-1 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch3001.fm

Chapter

3

ISDN FEATURES

This chapter explains the ISDN system outline, system specifications, system conditions and programming.

3-2 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch3001.fm

ISDN SYSTEM OUTLINESYSTEM OUTLINE OF ISDN-PRI

ISDN SYSTEM OUTLINEThis system can be interfaced with an ISDN with the Primary Rate Interface or the Basic Rate Interface atthe reference point S/T and ISDN Telephone.

SYSTEM OUTLINE OF ISDN-PRIThe system is configured with a 24/30-channel Digital Trunk Interface (DTI) for digital network interface.Since the Central Processing Unit (CPU) contains Phase Locked Oscillator (PLO), the system can be syn-chronized with the ISDN as a clock receiver office.

The figure below shows the system outline of ISDN-PRI.

System Outline of ISDN-PRI

NOTE: NT1 equipment must be installed in the premise.

23B/30B + DSLT

LC

DLC

CPU

DTI

1.5 M/2 M PCMDIGITAL LINE (23B/30B + D)

DTI : Digital Trunk InterfaceNT1 : Network Termination OnePLO : Phase Locked OscillatorPRT : Primary Rate Interface Trunk

TDSW

CLOCK SIGNAL

/PRT NT1 ISDN

(PLO)

PBX

MultilineTerminal

3-3 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch3001.fm

ISDN SYSTEM OUTLINESYSTEM OUTLINE OF ISDN-BRI

SYSTEM OUTLINE OF ISDN-BRIThe system is configured with a Basic Rate Interface Trunk (BRT) for the digital network interface. Sincethe CPU contains PLO, the system can be synchronized with the ISDN as a clock receiver office.

The figure below shows the system outline of ISDN-BRI.

System Outline of ISDN-BRI

NOTE 1: NT1 equipment must be installed in the premise.NOTE 2: We recommend the point-to-point connection when connecting the system to the public network

using the BRT blade (Set the second data of CM35 Y=079 to 0).For the point-to-multipoint connection using the BRT blade, when the system is established far from the public network, the communication error occurs easily because the ISDN signal fades away.

PBX

2B

D

SLT

LC

DLC

2-CHANNEL PCMDIGITAL LINE (2B + D)

BRT : Basic Rate Interface TrunkNT1 : Network Termination OnePLO : Phase Locked Oscillator

TDSW

CLOCK SIGNAL

BRT NT1 ISDN

CPU(PLO)

MultilineTerminal

3-4 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch3001.fm

ISDN SYSTEM OUTLINESYSTEM OUTLINE OF ISDN-BRI

NOTE 3: When connecting the system to the public network by the point-to-multipoint connection that theplural ISDN telephones and the system use the same B-CHANNELs as shown below, during theB-CHANNELs are used by the ISDN telephones, the terminals in the system cannot call to theoutside party (receive ROT, if they call) even if the B-CHANNELs of BRT blade are idle. Be-cause the system cannot recognize that the B-CHANNELs are used by ISDN telephones.Therefore, divide the B-CHANNELs between the system and ISDN telephones or use the D-CHANNEL packet for the communication of ISDN telephones.

BRT

PBX

ISDN

ISDN Telephone ISDN Telephone

B-CHANNELs

3-5 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch3001.fm

ISDN SYSTEM OUTLINESYSTEM OUTLINE OF ISDN-VPN

SYSTEM OUTLINE OF ISDN-VPNThe Virtual Private Network (VPN) is a service which provides an interoffice private line via an ISDNnetwork.

When you dial a station number (Called Party Subaddress), the system sends a pre-assigned office numberof a called party together with the Called Party Subaddress to an ISDN network. With this function, aninteroffice call can be made by only dialing a station number (Called Party Subaddress).

The following figure shows an example of using the VPN.

Example of ISDN-VPN


• When an opposite office can interface with the ISDN network.

PBX

B(034567-8910)

PBX

A

Calling Party

Dial 1234

Called PartyISDN

0345678910 (Office No.)

1234 (Called Party Subaddress)

Station No. 1234

3-6 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch3001.fm

ISDN SYSTEM OUTLINESYSTEM OUTLINE OF ISDN-VPN

Example of ISDN-VPN

• When an opposite office cannot interface with the ISDN network.

PBX

B

Tie Line

PBX

A

Calling Party

Dial 1234

Called Party

ISDN

0345678910 (Office No.)

1234 (Called Party Subaddress)

C

Station No. 1234

(034567-8910)

1234

3-7 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch3001.fm

ISDN SYSTEM OUTLINESYSTEM OUTLINE OF ISDN TELEPHONE

SYSTEM OUTLINE OF ISDN TELEPHONEThe system is configured with an Basic Rate Interface Trunk (BRT) for the line interface of an ISDN Tele-phone for layer 2 protocol processing (LAP-D).

The following figures show the system outline of ISDN Telephone (for ISDN-PRI).

System Outline of ISDN Telephone (for ISDN-PRI)

NOTE 1: Only the following connections are available.• ISDN Telephone to ISDN Telephone Connection• ISDN Telephone to ISDN Trunk Connection• ISDN Trunk to ISDN Telephone Connection• ISDN Telephone to Single Line Telephone Connection• ISDN Telephone to Multiline Terminal Connection

NOTE 2: NT1 equipment must be installed in the premise.

BRT

PBX

BRTISDN

DTI

BRT : Basic Rate Interface Trunk/ISDN Line Circuit

DTI : Digital Trunk InterfaceLC : Line CircuitNT1 : Network Termination OnePLO : Phase Locked OscillatorPRT : Primary Rate Interface TrunkTA : Terminal Adapter

TDSW

CLOCKSIGNAL

Telephone(TE)

• Point-to-PointConnection 2B × 2

2B × 2

TA

• Point-to-MultipointConnection

DataTerminal

ISDN Telephone(TE)

1.5 M/2 M PCMDIGITAL LINE (23B/30B + D)

NT1 ISDN

LC

SLT

/PRT

23B/30B + D

CPU(PLO)

D

D

JULY/18/2008

3-8 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch3001.fm

ISDN SYSTEM OUTLINESYSTEM OUTLINE OF ISDN TELEPHONE

The following figures show the system outline of ISDN Telephone (for ISDN-BRI).

System Outline of ISDN Telephone (for ISDN-BRI)

NOTE 1: The following connections are only available.• ISDN Telephone to ISDN Telephone Connection (S/T Interface)• ISDN Telephone to ISDN Trunk Connection (S/T Interface)• ISDN Trunk to ISDN Telephone Connection (S/T Interface)• ISDN Telephone to Single Line Telephone Connection• ISDN Telephone to Multiline Terminal Connection

NOTE 2: NT1 equipment must be installed in the premise.

BRT

ISDN

PBX

2B

D

BRT

ISDNBRT

TDSW

CLOCKSIGNAL

Telephone(TE)

• Point-to-PointConnection 2B × 2

2B × 2

TA

• Point-to-MultipointConnection

DataTerminal

ISDN Telephone(TE)

2-CHANNEL PCMDIGITAL LINE (2B + D)

NT1

LC

SLT

BRT: Basic Rate Interface TrunkLC : Line CircuitNT1: Network Termination OnePLO: Phase Locked OscillatorTA : Terminal Adapter

CPU(PLO)

D

D

3-9 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch3001.fm

ISDN SYSTEM OUTLINEDTI

DTIThe Digital Trunk Interface (DTI: CD-PRTA) interfaces the PBX directly to 24/30-channel PCM transmis-sion line. The DTI has the following functions.

For 24DTI:• Unipolar/Bipolar Conversion (AMI/B8ZS Format)• Alarm Detection/Insertion• Loopback Test (Local Loopback)• Cyclic Redundancy Checking (based on ITU-T Rec. G704)

For 30DTI:• Unipolar/Bipolar Conversion (HDB3 Format)• Alarm Detection/Insertion• Loopback Test (Local Loopback)• Cyclic Redundancy Checking (based on ITU-T Rec. G704)

For connections of 24DTI and transmission line, twisted-pair cable can be used. For connection of30DTI and transmission line, either coaxial cable or twisted pair cable can be used.

3-10 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch3001.fm

ISDN SYSTEM OUTLINEPRT

PRTThe Primary Rate Interface Trunk (PRT) provides the ISDN Primary Rate Interface (1.5 Mbps PCM-23B+ D/2 Mbps PCM-30B + D). The PRT has the following functions.

For 24PRT:• Unipolar/Bipolar Conversion (AMI/B8ZS Format)• Alarm Detection/Insertion• Loopback Test (Local Loopback)• Cyclic Redundancy Checking (based on ITU-T Rec. G704)

For 30PRT:• Unipolar/Bipolar Conversion (HDB3 Format)• Alarm Detection/Insertion• Loopback Test (Local Loopback)• Cyclic Redundancy Checking (based on ITU-T Rec. G704)

For connections of 24PRT and transmission line, twisted-pair cable can be used. For connectionof 30PRT and transmission line, either coaxial cable or twisted pair cable can be used.

NOTE: ISDN requires B8ZS Line coding with Extended superframing (ESF) format.

3-11 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch3001.fm

ISDN SYSTEM OUTLINEBRT

BRTThe Basic Rate Interface Trunk (BRT) provides one, two or four physical interface to the ISDN-Basic RateInterface service (192 Kbps PCM-2B + D).

The BRT has the following functions.

• Unipolar/Bipolar Conversion (AMI Format) (S/T Interface) • Signaling Insertion/Extraction• Frame Synchronization• Loopback Test (Local Loopback)

For connections of BRT and transmission line, twisted-pair cables can be used.

NOTE: We recommend the point-to-point connection when connecting the system to the public network using the BRT blade (Set the second data of CM35 Y=079 to 0).For the point-to-multipoint connection using the BRT blade, when the system is established far from the public network, the communication error occurs easily because the ISDN signal fades away.

The ISDN Line Circuit provides a physical interfaces to the ISDN Telephone. The interface provides fora maximum of 2 line circuit.

In the station to station call, the Calling Party Number sent to the ISDN Telephone is as follows.

• When calling from Single Line Telephone/Multiline TerminalBy setting CM08>584, you can select Station Number or Calling Party Number (set by CM12Y=12/13) to send to the ISDN Telephone as follows.

• When calling from ISDN TelephoneCalling Party Number is sent to the terminated ISDN Telephone, when the originated ISDNTelephone sends Calling Party Number (set by the ISDN Telephone or CM12 Y=12/13).Station Number of the originated ISDN Telephone is sent to the terminated ISDN Telephone, whenthe originated ISDN Telephone doesn’t send Calling Party Number.

CM08>584 SENT NUMBER1 Station Number is sent.

0 Calling Party Number assigned by CM12 Y=12/13 is sent.

3-12 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch3001.fm

ISDN SYSTEM OUTLINEBRT

The way of Terminal Endpoint Identifier (TEI) assignment for the combination of the terminal connectionform and each BRT blade is shown in the table below.

×: Available –: Not available

*1 TEI value is assigned for each B CHANNEL. Therefore, two TEI values are used.

BRT TEI Value

BRT BladeTerminal Connection Form for ISDN-BRI

Non-Automatic TEI Assignment

(TEI: 0)

Automatic TEI Assignment(TEI: 64-126)

CD-2BRIA Point-to-Point Connection × –

Point-to-Multipoint Con-nection

– ×

Service Profile ID (SPID) for Voice Channel[North America Only]

× ×*1

JULY/18/2008

3-13 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch3001.fm

ISDN SYSTEM OUTLINEPLO

PLOThe Phase Locked Oscillator (PLO) equipped on the CPU blade is responsible to synchronize the systemwith ISDN clocks.

The PLO generates the clock signals according to the source clocks received from network. The sourceclock signals are extracted at DTI/BRT/PRT blades and supplied to the PLO. Two clock routes are avail-able: one is the route 0 to receive clock signals from DTI0/BRT0/PRT0, and the other is a standby route 1(DTI1/BRT1/PRT1) to receive clock signals when no clock signals appear on the route 0. When no clocksignals come from either route 0 or route 1, the PLO keeps generating the clock signals at the frequencyof the last source clock. The PLO can receive different frequency of source clocks from the route 0 androute 1.

The figure below shows an example of clock supply route.

Clock Supply Route

PBX

TDSW

DTI1/BRT1

PLO

ISDN

: CLOCK SIGNAL SUPPLY ROUTE 0

: CLOCK SIGNAL SUPPLY ROUTE 1

/PRT1

DTI0/BRT0/PRT0

3-14 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch3001.fm

ISDN SYSTEM CONDITIONSTIME SLOT ALLOCATION FOR DTI/PRT BLADE

ISDN SYSTEM CONDITIONSTIME SLOT ALLOCATION FOR DTI/PRT BLADEOn each DTI/PRT blade, the system recognizes the lowest and highest channel numbers to which trunknumbers have been assigned, and allocates time slots to all the channels within them. If trunk numbers areassigned to discontinuous channels in this case, the system also allocates time slots to channels not as-signed.

For example, as shown below, even when Channel 1 through Channel 10 have been assigned by the systemdata programming (CM10 Y=00) except Channel 5, the system allocates a total of 10 time slots for all theten channels. Therefore, to avoid allocation of unnecessary time slots, it is recommended that consecutivechannels are assigned on each DTI/PRT blade.

Time Slot Allocation for DTI

10

9

6

5

4

1

CH0

DXXX

DXXX

DXXX

NONE

DXXX

DXXX

NONE

LOWEST CHANNEL

HIGHEST CHANNEL

10 TIME SLOTS AREALLOCATED EVENWHEN CH5 IS NOTASSIGNED.

3-15 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch3001.fm

ISDN SYSTEM CONDITIONSLINE DISTANCE BETWEEN PBX AND NT1/ISDN TELEPHONE

LINE DISTANCE BETWEEN PBX AND NT1/ISDN TELEPHONEThe figure below shows the line distance between PBX and NT1 and the line distance between PBX andISDN Telephone.

Line Distance between PBX and NT1/ISDN Telephone

NOTE 1: The line distance marked by * shows the value when the 0.5φ twisted-pair cable is used.NOTE 2: The line distance marked by ** shows the value when the 0.65φ twisted-pair cable is used.

BRT(A)

BRT(B)

BRT(C)

No. 1 – No. 8

No. 1 – No. 8

Maximum 400 m

Maximum 600 m

Maximum 150 m

PBX

BRT NT1 To ISDN

Maximum 1000 m

: ISDN TelephoneNT1 : Network Termination One(A) : Point-to-Point Connection(B) : Point-to-Multipoint Connection

(Extended Passive Bus)(C) : Point-to-Multipoint Connection

(Short Distance Passive Bus)

MDF

Maximum

DTI/PRT NT1 To ISDN

(1965 ft.*)

(164 ft.*)

(1310 ft.*)

(491 ft.*)

(3280 ft.*)

50 m

Maximum 1758 m(5764 ft.*) ...24DTI/PRT for DS-1Maximum 200 m(655 ft.**) ....24DTI/PRT for DSX-1Maximum 400 m(1310 ft.*) ...30DTI/PRT

3-16 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch3001.fm

DTI SPECIFICATIONSTRANSMISSION CHARACTERISTICS



*AMI : Alternate Mark InversionZCS : Zero Code SuppressionB8ZS: Bipolar Eight Zero Substitution

CHARACTERISTICS 24-CHANNEL 30-CHANNEL(1) Output

• Line Rate

• Line Code

• Line Impedance

• Pulse Amplitude(Base to Peak)

• Pulse Width

1.544 Mbps ± 50 ppm

AMI with ZCS/B8ZS*

100 Ω

3 volts ± 0.6 volts

324 ns ± 30 ns

2.048 Mbps ± 50 ppm

High Density Bipolar 3 (HDB3) 75 Ω (Coaxial Cable)120 Ω (Twisted-Pair Cable)

2.37 volts nominal(Coaxial Cable)3 volts nominal (Twisted-Pair Cable)

244 ns nominal Continued on next page

3-17 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch3001.fm



CHARACTERISTICS 24-CHANNEL 30-CHANNEL(2) Input

• Line Rate

• Pulse Amplitude(Base to Peak)

• Frame Synchronization Pattern

• Input Jitter

• Wander

• Cable Length from PBX to NT1

1.544 Mbps ± 200 bps (130 ppm)

1.5 volts – 3 volts

001011 (24MF)

ITU-T Fig. 1/G743

+138UI, –193UI or –138UI, +193UI

Maximum 200 m (655 ft.)(with 0.65φ (22 ABAM) twisted-pair cable)

2.048 Mbps ± 50 ppm

1.5 volts – 2.7 volts(Coaxial Cable)1.5 volts – 3.3 volts (Twisted-Pair Cable)

ITU-T Fig. 1/G743

ITU-T G823

Maximum 400 m (with 0.65φ twisted-pair cable)

3-18 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch3001.fm

DTI SPECIFICATIONSFRAME CONFIGURATION OF 24DTI

FRAME CONFIGURATION OF 24DTIAccording to the AT&T Specifications for 24-Channel transmission, there are two types of frame config-urations: 12-Multi Frame and 24-Multi Frame.

(1) 12-Multi FrameThe frame has 12-Multi Frames, and each Multi Frame has a 24-Channel PCM signal (8 bits/channel) and a S bit (Super Frame Bit). Figure below shows the frame configuration, and Table innext page shows frame bit assignment.


SCH1

11 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

CH2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

CH3

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

CH24

125 µs

S: Superframe Bit


3-19 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch3001.fm



*The S-bit is the first bit in each frame.*Frames are repeated in the order shown above.

FRAME No.S BIT

TERMINAL SYNCHRONIZATION (FT)

SIGNAL SYNCHRONIZATION (FS)

1 1

2 0

3 0

4 0

5 1

6 1

7 0

8 1

9 1

10 1

11 0

12 0

3-20 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch3001.fm


(2) 24-Multi FrameThis configuration has 24-Multi Frames and each Multi Frame has a 24-Channel PCM signal (8 bits/channel) and a S bit (Super Frame Bit). Figure below shows the frame configuration, and Table innext page shows frame bit assignment.


SCH1

11 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

CH2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

CH3

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

CH24


125 µs

S: Superframe Bit

3-21 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch3001.fm



*The S-bit is the first bit in each frame.*Frames are repeated in the order shown above.*“m” in the “4 Kbps Data Link” column means that the frame is usually assigned to 1.

FRAME No.S BIT

FRAME SYNCHRONIZATION 4 Kbps DATA LINK CRC

1 m2 CB13 m4 05 m6 CB27 m8 09 m10 CB311 m12 113 m14 CB415 m16 017 m18 CB519 m20 121 m22 CB623 m24 1

3-22 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch3001.fm


FRAME CONFIGURATION OF 30DTIBased on 30-channel transmission method of ITU-T Specification, the frame configuration consists of 16-multi frame, each frame having 32 time slots.

Figure below shows the frame configuration, and Table in next page shows the details of time slot assign-ment.

Frame Configuration of 30DTI

TS0 TS1 TS2


125 µsec

TS15 TS16 TS17

FRAME 14

TS30

FRAME 15

TS31

3-23 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch3001.fm


Time Slot Assignment of 30DTI

TIME SLOT No. EVEN No. FRAME ODD No. FRAME

TS0 Frame Alignment Signal (FAS)

TS1

TS15

Voice Channel (B CHANNEL) CH1

CH15

TS16 D CHANNEL Signaling

TS17

TS31

Voice Channel (B CHANNEL)CH17

CH31

X 0 0 1 1 0 1 1

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7b b

FAS

CRC BIT

X 1 X 1 1 1 1 1

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7b b

REMOTE ALARM

CRC BIT 0: NORMAL1: FRAME LOSS

~

~

~

~

3-24 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch3002.fm

ISDN-PRI PROGRAMMINGDIGITAL TRUNK DATA ASSIGNMENT


DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign a Unit and Slot number to the PRT/DTI blade.

NOTE: When PRT blade is used as a DTI blade for the first time, the PRI firm-ware program needs to be changed to the DTI firmware program by ex-ecuting the blade firmware program update.For details, refer to the PC Pro-gramming Manual.

•(1)

(2)

Y=0XX ZZXX: 01-50: Unit No.ZZ : 01-18: Slot No.41: PRT blade43: DTI blade

Assign a Trunk blade number to the PRT/DTI blade.

•(1)

(2)

Y=1XX ZZXX: 01-50: Unit No.ZZ : 01-18: Slot No.000-127: Trunk blade No

Assign trunk numbers to Physical Port number on the PRT/DTI blade.

•(1)

(2)


Allow second Dial Tone when dialing access code assigned by CM20 for ISDN B CHAN-NEL route.

•(1)(2)

Y=2040 : For ISDN trunk route, 2nd Dial Tone

is provided.1 : No 2nd Dial Tone

START

CM05

BLADE RESET

BLADE RESET

CM10

CM48

A

JULY/18/2008

3-25 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch3002.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the destination to receive the Synchro-nous signal for PRT/DTI blade.

NOTE: Assign this data when the system is a slave office and receives the clock synchronization signal from the master office.This data assignment is not required when the office is the master office.

•(1)

(2)


Specify the type of PRT blade. •(1)

(2)


CM050 : E1 (2 Mbps)1 : T1 (1.5 Mbps)

Assign the necessary functions to the PRT/DTI blade. CMAA Y=00/01/02 assignment is re-quired only for PRT/DTI.

After entering the data, set the MB switch on the PRT/DTI blade to UP, and then to DOWN, for PRT/DTI initialization.

NOTE: The following table shows the rela-tionship between CMAA Y=01 and Y=02.

•

(1)

(2)

•

(1)

(2)

•(1)

(2)

Y=00 Data Mode

000-127: Trunk blade No. assigned by CM05 Y=1

0: Based on AT&T Spec.

Y=01 Frame Configuration


0 : 12-Multi Frame1 : 24-Multi Frame


CM05 Y=10 : Available1 : Not available

A

CM04

BLADE RESET

CMAA


CMAA Y=01 (FRAME CON-FIGURATION)


SUPPRES-SION)

SIGNALING


12-Multi Frame [0]Not available [1] Transparent

Available [0] B7

BLADE RESET

BLADE RESET

B

JULY/18/2008

3-26 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch3002.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the Idle code on ISDN B CHANNELs. •

(1)

(2)

Y=09


0 : Send 7F to PSTN1 : Send FF to PSTN

Specify the cable length for DTI. •

(1)

(2)

Y=19


0 : 0-40 m (0-131.2 ft.)1 : 41-81 m (134.5-265.7 ft.)2 : 82-122 m (269.0-400.2 ft.)3 : 123-162 m (403.4-531.4 ft.)4 : 163-200 m (534.6-656 ft.)7 : 0-40 m (0-131.2 ft.)

Assign a trunk route number to each ISDN trunk used for voice channel and also to signal-ing channel. The DTI route must be separated from any analog trunk route.

•(1)

(2)



Assign the trunk data to each ISDN incoming trunk used for voice channel only.

NOTE: For ISDN Indial programming, see “DID ADDRESSING”.

Page 3-53

••••

(1)

(2)


Y=0004: Direct-In Termination09: Automated Attendant16: Remote Access to System (DISA)18: ISDN Indial

B

CMAABLADE RESET

BLADE RESET

CM30

BLADE RESET

C

JULY/18/2008

3-27 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch3002.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign Circuit Identification Code (CIC) to each ISDN trunk used for voice channel only.

NOTE: CIC must not be assigned to the trunk No. of D CHANNEL: TS16 (30DTI/30PRT) or TS23 (24DTI/24PRT).

•(1)

(2)


Y=00000-029 : CICNONE : No data

EXAMPLE OF 30DTI/30PRTB CHANNEL trunk No.: D100-D114,

D116-D130D CHANNEL trunk No.: D115(1)(2)

100-114, 116-130000-014, 015-029

EXAMPLE OF 24DTI/24PRTB CHANNEL trunk No.: D100-D122D CHANNEL trunk No.: D123(1)(2)

100-122000-022


NOTE 1: This data should be assigned to the B CHANNEL trunk route. For D CHANNEL trunk route, no data set-ting is required.

•

(1)(2)

(1)(2)

Y=000 Kind of Trunk Route NOTE 2

00-63: B CHANNEL Trunk Route No.00: ISDN Trunk

00-63: D CHANNEL Trunk Route No.15 : Not used

NOTE 2: This data should be assigned to both B CHANNEL trunk route and D CHANNEL trunk route.

•(1)(2)

Y=002 Call Direction NOTE 100-63: B CHANNEL Trunk Route No.3 : Bothway Trunk

•

(1)(2)

(1)(2)

Y=004 Answer Signal from distant officeNOTE 2

00-63: B CHANNEL Trunk Route No.2: Answer signal arrives (ISDN Trunk)

00-63: D CHANNEL Trunk Route No.7 : Answer Signal does not arrives

C

CM30

CM35BLADE RESET

D

JULY/18/2008

3-28 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch3002.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

NOTE 1: This data should be assigned to the B CHANNEL trunk route. For D CHANNEL trunk route, no data setting is required.


•

(1)(2)

Y=005 Release Signal from distant office

NOTE 100-63: B CHANNEL Trunk Route No.1 : Release signal arrives

•

(1)(2)

(1)(2)


NOTE 200-63: B CHANNEL Trunk Route No.08: ISDN

00-63: D CHANNEL Trunk Route No.15 : Ring Down

•(1)(2)

Y=011 Toll Restriction NOTE 100-63: B CHANNEL Trunk Route No.0 : To provide3 : Not provided

•(1)(2)

Y=014 SMDR for outgoing call NOTE 200-63: B CHANNEL Trunk Route No.0 : Not provided1 : To provide

•

(1)(2)

Y=015 Kind of Call Termination Indicator Key/Lamp on ATT NOTE 2

00-63: B CHANNEL Trunk Route No.00-07: C.O. Incoming Call 0-7

•

(1)(2)

Y=016Hooking Signal Sending to outside

NOTE 200-63: B CHANNEL Trunk Route No.0: Not sending

D

CM35

BLADE RESET

E

JULY/18/2008

3-29 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch3002.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA


•(1)(2)

Y=28900-63: B CHANNEL Trunk Route No.01-31 : PAD data


15: -1 dB16: 0 dB17: +1 dB




•(1)(2)



15: -1 dB16: 0 dB17: +1 dB



E

CM35

~~

~~

F

3-30 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch3002.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA


•(1)

(2)








NOTE 1: This data should be assigned to the B CHANNEL trunk route. For D CHANNEL trunk route, no data setting is required.


•(1)(2)

Y=028 Outgoing Trunk Queuing NOTE 100-63: B CHANNEL Trunk Route No.0: Restricted

•

(1)(2)

Y=039 Trunk release by detection of rever-sal of tip and ring NOTE 1

00-63: B CHANNEL Trunk Route No.1 : To release

•

(1)(2)

Y=090 Assignment of DTI route for ISDNNOTE 2

00-63: B CHANNEL Trunk Route No.3: ISDN-Primary Rate Interface

(1)(2)

00-63: D CHANNEL Trunk Route No.3: ISDN-Primary Rate Interface

F

CM36

~~

CM35

G

3-31 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch3002.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

Allow sending extension information of Low layer Compatibility (LLC) information ele-ment, to each trunk route.

•(1)(2)

Y=13000-63: Trunk Route No.0: Allow

(1)(2)

00-63: B CHANNEL Trunk Route No.0 : By Subaddress1 : By dialed-in digits

Specify whether the ISDN trunk is released when the system receives ISDN DISCON-NECT message with Progress Description=08 from ISDN (effective for an outgoing call).

NOTE: When sending the in-band tone to the calling station from ISDN, set the second data to 1.In this case, the ISDN trunk will be released automatically in 30 sec-onds after the calling station re-ceives the in-band tone or when the calling station goes on-hook.

•(1)(2)

Y=15800-63: B CHANNEL Trunk Route No.0 : To release1 : Not released

Specify whether the ISDN trunk is released when the system receives ISDN DISCON-NECT message with Progress Description=08 from ISDN (effective for an incoming call).

NOTE: When sending the in-band tone to the called station from ISDN, set the second data to 0.In this case, the ISDN trunk will be released automatically in 30 sec-onds after the called station receives the in-band tone or when the called station goes on-hook.

•(1)(2)

Y=20800-63: B CHANNEL Trunk Route No.0 : Not released1 : To release

Specify whether the ISDN trunk tone is sent when the ISDN trunk is seized.

•(1)(2)

Y=20000-63: B CHANNEL Trunk Route No.0 : To send1 : Not sent

G

CM35

H

3-32 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch3002.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify the type of CD-PRTA. •(1)(2)

Y=15000-127: Trunk blade No.0 : E1 (2 Mbps)1 : T1 (1.5 Mbps)

Assign the ISDN Protocol Type for PRT blade. •(1)

(2)


CM05 Y=1ISDN Protocol Type17: Australia18: New Zealand19: ITU-T (Hong Kong)20: AT&T (#4, #5 ESS)21: NTI (DMS 100, 250)22: Australia ETSI23: ETSI VN4 (Chile)24: ETSI Standard (Brazil, Chile,

Columbia, UAE)25: ITU-T Standard (Thailand)28: USA NI-230: ETSI-2 (Latin America/Europe)31: Germany[For EU]32: Netherlands/Greece/Luxembourg/

Portugal/Spain/Sweden[For EU]33: Italy[For EU]34: ETSI (Huawei)[For China]63 : Not used

Assign the D CHANNEL number to the each B CHANNEL trunk route assigned by CM30 Y=00.

•(1)(2)

Y=093 Assignment of D CHANNEL00-63: B CHANNEL Trunk Route No.00-31: D CHANNEL No.

Assign the DTI/PRT trunk number assigned by CM10 Y=00 to each D CHANNEL number.

•(1)(2)

Y=00 00-31: D CHANNEL No.000-511 : DTI/PRT Trunk No. assigned by

CM10 Y=00NONE : No data

H

CMAA

BLADE RESET

CM35

CMA9

BLADE RESET

I

JULY/18/2008

3-33 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch3002.fm


• For originating calls to the ISDN, do the following programming.

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign ISDN access code to each trunk route assigned by CM30 Y=00.

NOTE: LCR can be used with ISDN-PRI. Refer to BUSINESS FEATURES.

Page 1-1

•(1)(2)

Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3X-XXXX: Access code100-163: Trunk Route 00-63

Specify the timing start when making an ISDN call from an attendant.

(1)(2)


Specify the timing start when making an ISDN call from a Single Line Telephone (PB/DP), Multiline Terminal or Attendant Console, if re-quired.

•(1)(2)

Y=05003-14: 3-14 seconds

If no data is set, the default setting is 10 seconds.Recommended setting is 05 (5 seconds).

NOTE: A # or timing start is used for outgoing ISDN calls when LCR is not invoked.Example: 1-214-555-1212 is dialed from a Multiline Terminal. The PBX will access a bearer channel and ship the digits only after the timing start timer has expired or # is dialed by the caller. The # sign tells the PBX that dialing is completed.

I

CM20

CM08

CM41

J

3-34 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch3002.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the Type of Number of Called Party Number.

•

(1)

(2)

Y=5000-5255LCR Pattern No. 000-255157: Type of Number of Called Party No.

(for E.164)00 : Unknown01 : International Number02 : National Number04 : Subscriber NumberNONE : Unknown

(1)

(2)

157: Type of Number of Called Party No. (for Private Numbering Plan)

00 : Unknown01 : Level 2 Regional Number02 : Level 1 Regional Number03 : PSTN Specific Number04 : Local Number06 : Abbreviated NumberNONE : Unknown

Assign the Called Party Numbering Plan Iden-tifier.

•

(1)

(2)

Y=5000-5255LCR Pattern No. 000-255158: Called Party Numbering Plan Identifi-

er00 : Unknown01 : ISDN/Telephone Numbering

Plan03 : Data Numbering Plan04 : Telex Numbering Plan08 : National Numbering Plan09 : Private Numbering PlanNONE : Unknown

J

CM8A

K

3-35 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch3002.fm


• When providing Tandem Connection (ODT/DTI to ISDN, ISDN to ODT/DTI), do the following pro-gramming.

• When providing Tandem Connection (ISDN to CCIS, CCIS to ISDN), do the following program-ming.

DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify the combination of trunk routes allowing the tandem connection.

•(1)

(2)

Y=0XX ZZXX: 00-63: Incoming Trunk RouteZZ : 00-63: Outgoing Trunk Route0 : Allowed1 : Restricted

Specify the timing start when making an ISDN call from a station (PB/DP telephone/Multiline Terminal) or Attendant Console for the Tan-dem Connection.

•(1)(2)

Y=05703-14: 3-14 seconds


NOTE 1: By using CM41 Y=0>57, an ISDN call is available even if “#” is not dialed.

NOTE 2: CM41 Y=0>57 is effective for dialing a called number. When dialing a called party sub-address, this command is not effective.

DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify the combination of trunk routes allow-ing the tandem connection.

•(1)

(2)


Allow tandem connection by station or atten-dant.

(1)(2)

0280: Available

K

CM36

CM41

L

L

CM36

CM08

M

3-36 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch3002.fm


• When providing Tandem Connection (ISDN to ISDN), do the following programming.

DESCRIPTION DATA


•(1)

(2)



(1)(2)

0280: Available

Provide release of ISDN trunk when receiving the ISDN DISCONNECT message with Progress Description=8 from ISDN because the called party is busy in tandem connection (ISDN to ISDN).

NOTE: To release the ISDN trunk when receiv-ing the ISDN DISCONNECT message, set the second data 0 to the incoming trunk route of tandem office.

•(1)(2)

Y=23300-63: B CHANNEL Trunk Route No.0: To provide

Provide relay of the ALERT message to the calling party in tandem connection (ISDN to ISDN).

NOTE: This command should be set to both incoming trunk route and outgoing trunk route of tandem office.

•(1)(2)


M

CM36

CM08

CM35

END

3-37 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch3002.fm


• When DTI/PRT blade is mounted, reassignment of the Highway Channel (128ch) allocation is re-quired to each physical slot (slot1-6/7-12/13-18). For the details of Highway Channel reassignment,refer to “CMF7 Y=9” in Command Manual.

• To use Loopback for PRT, setting CMAA Y=22 is required.

DESCRIPTION DATA


(2)


Assign to execute the desired blade reset. •(1)

(2)

Y=3XX YYXX: 01-50: Unit No.YY: 01-18: Slot No.XX YYXX: 01-50: Unit No.YY: 01-18: Slot No

DESCRIPTION DATA

Set Local Loopback (PRT) ON. •(1)(2)

Y=220 : ON1 : OFF

START

CMF7

CME0

END

START

CMAA

END

JULY/18/2008

3-38 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch3002.fm

ISDN-BRI PROGRAMMINGBRT ASSIGNMENT


DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign a Unit and Slot number to the BRT blade.

•(1)

(2)

Y=0XX ZZXX: 01-50: Unit No.ZZ : 01-18: Slot No.40: BRT blade

Assign a Trunk blade number to the BRT blade.

•(1)

(2)


Assign the ISDN Protocol Type for D CHANNEL on the BRT blade.

•(1)

(2)

Y=06000-127: Trunk blade No. of BRT assigned

by CM05 Y=1ISDN Protocol Type17: Australia18: New Zealand20: AT&T (#4, #5 ESS)21: NTI (DMS 100, 250)22: Australia ETSI24: ETSI Standard (Brazil, Columbia,

Indonesia, UAE)25: ITU-T Standard (Thailand)27: USA NI-128: USA NI-231: Germany[For EU]32: Netherlands/Greece/Luxembourg/

Portugal/Spain/Sweden[For EU]33: Italy[For EU]63 : Not used

START

CM05

BLADE RESET

BLADE RESET

CMAA

BLADE RESET

A

3-39 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch3002.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign ISDN trunk number to Physical Port number of BRT.

NOTE: Be sure to assign the trunk numbers to all circuits (01-03 of the 2BRT blade, 01-08 of the 4BRT blade), even if only one PCM digital line is accommodated to the 2BRT blade or less than four PCM digital lines are accommodated to the 4BRT blade.Set make-busy to the unused trunk numbers by CME5 Y=1, 2nd da-ta=0.

•(1)

(2)

Y=00 XX YY ZZ: Physical Port No.XX: 01-50: Unit No.YY: 01-18: Slot No.ZZ : 01-32: Circuit No.D000-D511: Trunk No.

Assign trunk route to each ISDN trunk used for voice channel (B CHANNEL).

NOTE: BRT route must be separated from analog trunk routes.

•

(1)

(2)

Y=00

000-511: Trunk No. assigned by CM10 Y=00

00-63: Trunk Route

Assign the trunk data to each ISDN incoming trunk used for voice channel only.

••••

(1)

(2)


Y=0004: Direct-In Termination 09: Automated Attendant16: Remote Access to System (DISA)18: ISDN Indial

Assign an ISDN subscriber number (last 4 dig-its of telephone number) to each ISDN trunk.

•(1)

(2)


Y=00XXXX: ISDN Subscriber No.

Assign ISDN Local Office Code Table number to each ISDN trunk.

•(1)

(2)


Y=0000-14: Local Office Table No.15 : Not assigned

A

CM10

CM30BLADE RESET

B

3-40 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch3002.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA


•

(1)(2)


00-63: B CHANNEL Trunk Route No.00: ISDN Trunk

•(1)(2)

Y=002 Call Direction00-63: B CHANNEL Trunk Route No.3 : Bothway Trunk

•(1)(2)

Y=004 Answer Signal from distant office00-63: B CHANNEL Trunk Route No.2: Answer signal arrives (ISDN Trunk)

•(1)(2)

Y=005 Release signal from distant office00-63: B CHANNEL Trunk Route No.1 : Release signal arrives

•

(1)(2)


00-63: B CHANNEL Trunk Route No.08: ISDN Indial

•(1)(2)

Y=011 Toll Restriction00-63: B CHANNEL Trunk Route No.0 : To provide3 : Not provided

•(1)(2)

Y=014 SMDR for outgoing call00-63: B CHANNEL Trunk Route No.0 : Not provided1 : To provide

•

(1)(2)

Y=015 Kind of Call Termination Indicator Key/Lamp on ATT

00-63: B CHANNEL Trunk Route No.00-07: C.O. Incoming Call 0-7

•

(1)(2)

Y=016 Hooking Signal Sending to outside00-63: B CHANNEL Trunk Route No.0: Not sending

B

CM35BLADE RESET

BLADE RESET

C

3-41 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch3002.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA


•(1)(2)



15: -1 dB16: 0 dB17: +1 dB




•(1)(2)



15: -1 dB16: 0 dB17: +1 dB



C

CM35

~~

~~

D

3-42 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch3002.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA


•(1)

(2)








•(1)(2)

Y=028 Outgoing Trunk Queuing00-63: B CHANNEL Trunk Route No.0: Restricted

•

(1)(2)

Y=039 Trunk release by detection of rever-sal of tip and ring

00-63: B CHANNEL Trunk Route No.1 : To release

NOTE: We recommend the point-to-point connection when connecting the sys-tem to the public network using the BRT blade. For the point-to-multi-point connection using the BRT blade, when the system is estab-lished far from the public network, the communication error occurs easily because the ISDN signal fades away.

•

(1)(2)

Y=079 Terminal connection form for ISDN Basic Rate Interface

00-63: B CHANNEL Trunk Route No.0 : Point-to-Point1 : Point-to-Multipoint

D

CM36

~~

CM35

BLADE RESET

E

3-43 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch3002.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

•(1)(2)

Y=090 Assignment of BRT route for ISDN00-63: B CHANNEL Trunk Route No.2: ISDN-Basic Rate Interface

Allow sending extension information of Low layer Compatibility (LLC) information ele-ment, to each trunk route.

•(1)(2)

Y=13000-63: B CHANNEL Trunk Route No.0: Allow

Specify the method of Layer 1 activation. •

(1)(2)

Y=144

00-63: B CHANNEL Trunk Route No.0 : Activated by call event1 : Always activated

Specify whether the ISDN trunk is released when the system receives ISDN DISCON-NECT message with Progress Description=08 from ISDN (effective for an outgoing call).

NOTE: When sending the in-band tone to the calling station from ISDN, set the second data to 1.In this case, the ISDN trunk will be released automatically in 30 sec-onds after the calling station re-ceives the in-band tone or when the calling station goes on-hook.

•(1)(2)

Y=15800-63: B CHANNEL Trunk Route No.0 : To release1 : Not released

Specify whether the ISDN trunk is released when the system receives ISDN DISCON-NECT message with Progress Description=08 from ISDN (effective for an incoming call).

NOTE: When sending the in-band tone to the called station from ISDN, set the second data to 0.In this case, the ISDN trunk will be released automatically in 30 sec-onds after the called station receives the in-band tone or when the called station goes on-hook.

•(1)(2)

Y=20800-63: B CHANNEL Trunk Route No.0 : Not released1 : To release

E

CM35

BLADE RESET

F

3-44 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch3002.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify whether the ISDN trunk tone is sent when the ISDN trunk is seized.

•(1)(2)

Y=20000-63: B CHANNEL Trunk Route No.0 : To send1 : Not sent

Assign ISDN Local Office Code. •(1)

(2)

Y=0500-14: Local Office Table No. assigned by

CM30 Y=34X....X(Maximum 12 digits)

Assign Service Profile ID (SPID) to each B CHANNEL number.[North America Only]

•(1)

(2)

Y=30XXX ZXXX: 000-127: Trunk Blade No.Z : 0-7: ISDN Multipoint No.XXXX ZZZZXXXX: ISDN Subscriber No.ZZZZ : SPID

F

CM35

CM50

CMAC

RESET

G

3-45 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch3002.fm


• For originating calls to the ISDN network, do the following programming.

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign ISDN access code to each trunk route assigned by CM30 Y=00.

NOTE: LCR can be used with ISDN-BRI. Refer to BUSINESS FEATURES.

Page 1-1

•(1)(2)

Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3X-XXXX: Access code100-163: Trunk Route 00-63

Specify the timing start when making an ISDN call from an attendant.

(1)(2)


Specify the timing start when making an ISDN call from a Single Line Telephone (PB/DP), Multiline Terminal or Attendant Console, if re-quired.

•(1)(2)

Y=050 03-14: 3-14 seconds

If no data is set, the default setting is 10 seconds.(Dialing terminated by entering #.)Recommended setting is 05 (5 seconds).

NOTE: A # or timing start is used for outgoing ISDN calls when LCR is not invoked.Example: 1-214-555-1212 is dialed from a Multiline Terminal. The PBX will access a bearer channel and ship the digits only after the timing start timer has expired or # is di-aled by the caller. The # sign tells the PBX that dialing is completed.

Assign the Type of Number of Called Party Number.

•

(1)

(2)

Y=5000-5255LCR Pattern No. 000-255157: Type of Number of Called Party No.

(for E.164)00 : Unknown01 : International Number02 : National Number04 : Subscriber NumberNONE : Unknown

(1)

(2)

157: Type of Number of Called Party No. (for Private Numbering Plan)

00 : Unknown01 : Level 2 Regional Number02 : Level 1 Regional Number03 : PSTN Specific Number04 : Local Number06 : Abbreviated NumberNONE : Unknown

G

CM20

CM08

CM41

CM8A

H

3-46 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch3002.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA


•

(1)

(2)

Y=5000-5255LCR Pattern No. 000-255158: Called Party Numbering Plan Identifi-


Plan03 : Data Numbering Plan04 : Telex Numbering Plan08 : National Numbering Plan09 : Private Numbering PlanNONE : Unknown

H

CM8A

I

3-47 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch3002.fm


• When providing Tandem Connection (COT/ODT/LDT/DTI to ISDN, ISDN to COT/ODT/LDT/DTI), do the following programming.

• When providing Tandem Connection (ISDN to CCIS, CCIS to ISDN), do the following program-ming.

DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify whether the busy tone is sent to a call-ing party of ISDN when a called party is busy in the tandem connection (ISDN to COT).

(1)(2)

4070 : Available (BT)1 : Not available (RBT)


•(1)

(2)


Specify the timing start when making an ISDN call from a station (PB/DP telephone Multiline Terminal) or Attendant Console for the Tan-dem Connection.

•(1)(2)

Y=05703-14: 3-14 seconds


NOTE 1: By using CM41 Y=0>57, an ISDN call is available even if “#” is not dialed.

NOTE 2: CM41 Y=0>57 is effective for dialing a called number. When dialing a called party sub-address, this command is not effective.

DESCRIPTION DATA


•(1)

(2)



(1)(2)

0280: Available

I

CM08

CM36

CM41

J

J

CM36

CM08

K

3-48 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch3002.fm


• When providing Tandem Connection (ISDN to ISDN), do the following programming.

DESCRIPTION DATA


•(1)

(2)



(1)(2)

0280: Available

Provide release of ISDN trunk when receiving the ISDN DISCONNECT message with Progress Description=8 from ISDN because the called party is busy in tandem connection (ISDN to ISDN).

NOTE: To release the ISDN trunk when receiv-ing the ISDN DISCONNECT message, set the second data 0 to the incoming trunk route of tandem office.

•(1)(2)


Provide relay of the ALERT message to the calling party in tandem connection (ISDN to ISDN).

NOTE: This command should be set to both incoming trunk route and outgoing trunk route of tandem office.

•(1)(2)


K

CM36

CM08

CM35

END

3-49 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch3002.fm


• Specify whether the Calling Party Number (CPN) sent from ISDN is sent to the CCIS network.

• To use Loopback for BRT, setting CMAA Y=22 is required.

DESCRIPTION DATA

Maximum number of digits sent to CCIS net-work.

(1)(2)

3790: 24 digits

Activate IAI2 message for sending ISDN CPN to CCIS network.

•(1)(2)

Y=2600-15: CCIS Channel No.0: Active

Allow sending of CPN to CCIS network. •(1)(2)

Y=2800-15: CCIS Channel No.0: Allowed

DESCRIPTION DATA

Set Local Loopback (BRT) ON. •(1)(2)

Y=220 : ON1 : OFF

START

CM08

CMA7

END

START

CMAA

END

JULY/18/2008

3-50 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch3002.fm

ISDN FEATURE PROGRAMMING

ISDN FEATURE PROGRAMMING• Calling Party Recognition Service (Direct-In Termination (DIT))

Refer to “Direct Inward Termination (DIT)” in the BUSINESS FEATURES.• CLI TRANSPARENCY Page 3-51• DID ADDRESSING Page 3-53• MEGACOM® ACCESS [North America Only] Page 3-57• MEGACOM® 800 Service [North America Only]

Refer to DID ADDRESSING for programming instructions. Page 3-53• SID TO NETWORK-PRESENT/CPN TO NETWORK-PRESENT

[Australia/NZ/Asia/Latin America/UK]/[North America] Page 3-58• SID TO TERMINATING USER-DISPLAY

[Australia/NZ/Asia/Latin America/UK] Page 3-64• CPN TO TERMINATING USER-DISPLAY [North America] Page 3-67• SUBADDRESS-PRESENT Page 3-69• TRUNK PROVISIONING SERVICE SELECTION Page 3-70• CALL BY CALL SERVICE SELECTION

[North America Only] Page 3-71• ADVICE OF CHARGE-DISPLAY

[Australia/France/Germany/Netherlands/Italy/Greece/Luxembourg/Portugal/Spain/Sweden][ITU-T (UAE) Only] Page 3-78

• ALTERNATE ROUTING FOR ISDN [Australia Only] Page 3-80• CENTREX SHF OVER ISDN [New Zealand Only] Page 3-81• OVERLAP SENDING [For EU] Page 3-82• OVERLAP RECEIVING [For EU] Page 3-85• ADDRESSING [For EU] Page 3-90• CHANNEL NEGOTIATION [For EU] Page 3-93• CONNECTED LINE IDENTIFICATION PRESENTATION (COLP)/

CONNECTED LINE IDENTIFICATION RESTRICTION (COLR) [For EU] Page 3-94

• MALICIOUS CALL TRACE [Australia Only] Page 3-96• CALL COMPLETION TO BUSY SUBSCRIBER (CCBS) [For EU] Page 3-97

JULY/18/2008

3-51 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch3002.fm

CLI TRANSPARENCY

CLI TRANSPARENCY[For EU]

DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify the Screening Indicator for outgoing trunk route.

•(1)(2)

Y=26500-63: B CHANNEL Trunk Route No.0: User-provided, Not screened

Specify the Type of Number for outgoing trunk route.

•(1)(2)

Y=23000-63: B CHANNEL Trunk Route No.01: International Number02: National Number

Specify the Numbering Plan Identification for outgoing trunk route.

•(1)(2)

Y=23100-63: B CHANNEL Trunk Route No.01: ISDN/Telephony Numbering Plan

Receive “214-555-5001”.

CALLING PARTY No.

a: Tandem Connection between ISDN trunks.

PBX

ISDN

Incoming Outgoing

Relaying CPN

Send “214-555-5001” as CPN to the ISDN network.

b: Tandem Connection between CCIS and ISDN trunk.

PBX

ISDN

Incoming Outgoing

Relaying CPN

PBX

Receive “214-555-5001” from CCIS.

CALLING PARTY No.

Send “214-555-5001” as CPN to the ISDN network.

START

CM35

A

3-52 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch3002.fm

CLI TRANSPARENCY

DESCRIPTION DATA

Provide the Type of Number/Numbering Plan Identification of CPN for outgoing trunk route.

•(1)(2)


A

CM35

END

3-53 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch3002.fm

DID ADDRESSING

DID ADDRESSING

DESCRIPTION DATA


••••

(1)

(2)


Y=0018: ISDN Indial

Assign the data for DID to the trunk routes as-signed by CM30.

•

(1)(2)


00-63: B CHANNEL Trunk Route No.00: DID

•(1)(2)

Y=002 Call direction00-63: B CHANNEL Trunk Route No.3 : Bothway Trunk

•(1)(2)

Y=005 Release Signal Condition00-63: B CHANNEL Trunk Route No.1 : Release signal arrives

•

(1)(2)


00-63: B CHANNEL Trunk Route No.08: ISDN

PBX

555-9676

555-9677

TRK

555-9677

ISDN

CallingParty

START

CM30

CM35BLADE RESET

BLADE RESET

A

3-54 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch3002.fm

DID ADDRESSING

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the destination of DID Call transferred when the station is busy/unassigned/no an-swer.

•••

(1)(2)

Y=00 No AnswerY=03 BusyY=06 Unassigned00-63: Tenant No.Destination:X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.E000 : Attendant ConsoleEBXXX: Announcement Service:

Voice Response System No. (000-007)

A

CM51

B

3-55 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch3002.fm

DID ADDRESSING

• To provide DID Digit Conversion:

DESCRIPTION DATA


•(1)(2)

Y=018 Digit Conversion on DID call00-63: B CHANNEL Trunk Route No.0: To provide

•(1)(2)

Y=170 Development Table00-63: B CHANNEL Trunk Route No. 0 : Development Table 13 : Development Table 0

•(1)(2)

Y=012 Number of digits to be received00-63: B CHANNEL Trunk Route No.0 : 1 digit1 : 2 digits2 : 3 digits3 : 4 digits

•

(1)(2)


00-63: B CHANNEL Trunk Route No.0 : Leading 2-4 digits1 : All digits of DID are converted by

CM76

•

(1)(2)


00-63: B CHANNEL Trunk Route No. 01-08: 1-8 digits15 : 4 digits

B

CM35

C

3-56 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch3002.fm

DID ADDRESSING

DESCRIPTION DATA


•(1)(2)



•(1)(2)



••••

(1)

(2)



natedDXX: Change terminating system to:

D04: Direct-In TerminationD14: Attendant Console

C

CM76

END

3-57 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch3002.fm

MEGACOM® ACCESS

MEGACOM® ACCESS[North America Only]

In addition to the programming of Direct Outward Dialing, assign WATS line to the required trunk route,as shown below.

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the Trunk Restriction Class to each sta-tion.

•(1)(2)

Y=01 Trunk Restriction ClassX-XXXXXXXX: Station No.X ZX: 1 -8: Trunk Restriction Class in Day

modeZ: 1 -8: Trunk Restriction Class in Night

mode1: Unrestricted (RCA)2: Non-Restricted 1 (RCB)3: Non-Restricted 2 (RCC)4: Semi-Restricted 1 (RCD)5: Semi-Restricted 2 (RCE)6: Restricted 1 (RCF)7: Restricted 2 (RCG)8: Fully-Restricted (RCH)

Set the outgoing/incoming Trunk Route Re-striction data by Trunk Restriction Classes (RCA-RCH).

••

(1)(2)

Y=051-058 Outgoing Trunk RestrictionY=061-068 Incoming Trunk Restriction00-63: B CHANNEL Trunk Route No.0 : Restricted1 : Allowed

NOTE: If CALL BY CALL SERVICE SELECTION is required, see Page 3-72 for additional programming.

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign a WATS line to the required trunk route.

•(1)(2)

Y=000 Kind of Trunk Route00-63: B CHANNEL Trunk Route No.02: WATS line

START

CM12

CM35

END

START

CM35

BLADE RESET

END

JULY/18/2008

3-58 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch3002.fm

SID TO NETWORK-PRESENT/CPN TO NETWORK-PRESENT

SID TO NETWORK-PRESENT/CPN TO NETWORK-PRESENT[Australia/NZ/Asia/Latin America/UK]/[North America]

For providing the Calling Party Number (CPN) tothe network, do the following programming.

• When Dial-In service is provided:

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign an ISDN Subscriber number and ISDN Local Office Code Table number to required stations. NOTE 1

•(1)(2)

Y=12X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.X-XXXX: ISDN Subscriber No.

•(1)(2)

Y=13X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.00-14: ISDN Local Office Code Table No.

00-14

Specify the facility control of CPN (Calling Party Number).

•(1)(2)


Assign ISDN Local Office Code to the Table number assigned by CM12 Y=13.

•(1)

(2)


00-14X...X: Local Office Code

(Maximum 12 digits)

DIAL “516-555-4210#”

(214-555-5000)

(214-555-5001)

(214-555-5002)

CALLING PARTY No.

TRK

PBX

ISDN

516-555-4210+214-555-5000

CALLING PARTY No.

4210

START

CM12

CM13

NOTE 2

CM50

END

3-59 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch3002.fm


• When ISDN (BRI) Terminals are used:

NOTE 1: The ISDN number consists of the following numbers.ISDN number: XXXXXXXXXXXX YYYY

ISDN subscriber No. assigned by CM12 Y=12(1-4 digits)

ISDN Local Office Code assigned by CM50Y=05 (1-12 digits)

This number must be in the indial range assigned by Telecom for the ISDN line.

For example:National Destination Code for Dallas: 214Local Code for a station: 518-5000In this case, the ISDN Number is

National Destination Code + Local Code=214518-5000That is

ISDN Subscribers No. assigned by CM12 Y=12 is 5000.ISDN Local Office Code assigned by CM50 Y=05 is 214518.

DESCRIPTION DATA

Allow the ISDN Telephone to send the CPN to network without using PBX programming.

(1)(2)

4340 : CPN set in ISDN Telephone1 : CPN assigned by CM12 Y=12, 13

START

CM08

END

3-60 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch3002.fm


NOTE 2: The following facility control services for CPN are available in accordance with the subscrip-tion category of distant ISDN exchange. In case of no subscription, SID (CPN) to Network-Present is not available.

Station 5000 places an outgoing call to an ISDN subscriber. Because CM13>25 is set to 0, theISDN network is instructed to not send 214-518-5000 (see NOTE 1 above) to the distant ISDNsubscriber.

Station 5001 places an outgoing call to an ISDN subscriber, and 214-518-5001 is sent to thecalled party.

NOTE 3: When transferring to an ISDN line after a C.O. incoming call is terminated, the calling number of the call forwarding station is notified to the ISDN line.Priority of the calling number that is notified is as follows.

Example:

1st Data 2nd Data Meaning

CM13 Y=25 5000 0 Restrict transfer

5001 1 Permit transfer

CALLING NUMBER(SYSTEM DATA SETTING)

CALLING NUMBER THAT IS NOTIFIED PRIORITY

CM12 Y=12, 13, CM50 Y=05ISDN subscriber number is available

Calling number per station High

Low

CM30 Y=19, 34, CM50 Y=05ISDN subscriber number is available

Calling number per trunk

No data No data

3-61 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch3002.fm


• When Dial-In service is not provided:

DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify the sending out of Calling Party Num-ber (CPN).

•(1)(2)

Y=25X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.0 : To send1 : Not sent

Assign an ISDN subscriber number to each ISDN trunk.NOTE 1 on Page 3-59

•(1)

(2)


Y=00XXXX: ISDN Subscriber No.

Assign ISDN Local Office Code Table number to each ISDN trunk.

•(1)

(2)


Y=0000-14: Local Office Code Table No. 00-14


•(1)

(2)



(Maximum 12 digits)

DIAL “516-555-4210#”

(214-555-5000)

CALLING PARTY No.

TRK

PBX

ISDN

516-555-4210#214-555-5000

CALLING PARTY No.

555-4210

START

CM13

NOTE 2 onPage 3-60

CM30

CM50

END

3-62 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch3002.fm


• To provide the specifications of Calling Party Number (CPN), do the following programming inaddition to the programming of “When Dial-In service is provided/When Dial-In service is notprovided”.

DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify whether the Type of Number/Number-ing Plan Identification of CPN is provided, or not.

NOTE: If this data is set to “1”, the setting data of CM35 Y=230/231 is invalid.

•(1)(2)


Specify the Type of Number for outgoing call. •(1)(2)

Y=23000-63: B CHANNEL Trunk Route No.00 : Unknown01 : International Number02 : National Number03 : Network Specific Number04 : Subscriber Number06 : Abbreviated NumberNONE : No data

Specify the Numbering Plan Identification for outgoing call.

•(1)(2)

Y=23100-63: B CHANNEL Trunk Route No.00 : Unknown01 : ISDN/Telephony Numbering

Plan03 : Data Numbering Plan04 : Telex Numbering Plan08 : National Standard Numbering

Plan09 : Private Numbering PlanNONE : No data

Specify the Screening Indicator for outgoing call.

•(1)(2)

Y=26500-63: B CHANNEL Trunk Route No.3 : Network providedNONE : No data

START

CM35

END

3-63 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch3002.fm


For providing the Calling Party Name for outgoing call to the network, do the following programming.[North America]

NOTE 1: This feature is available only when the 24PRT blade is used.NOTE 2: This programming is effective when ISDN Protocol type is assigned to 28 (National ISDN-2

[NI-2]) by CMAA Y=06. Page 3-32

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the Calling Party Name to each stations with character code/character.

•(1)(2)

Y=0X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.20-7F: Calling Party Name Character Code

(Maximum 32 digits)See Command Manual.

NOTE: The characters available for assign-ing are 0-9, A-Z with PCPro/CAT.

•(1)(2)

Y=1X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.XX...XX: Calling Party Name Character

(Maximum 16 characters)NOTE


•(1)(2)


Allow Calling Party Name sending to ISDN. •(1)

(2)

Y=15600-15: Service Restriction Class B assigned

by CM12 Y=021 : Allow

Provide the Calling Party Name sending to ISDN.

•(1)(2)


Assign the Calling Party Name sending to ISDN when making an outgoing call from Sub Line.

(1)(2)

5020 : Name of My Line1 : Name of Sub Line

START

CM77

CM12

CM15

CM35

CM08

END

3-64 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch3002.fm

SID TO TERMINATING USER-DISPLAY

SID TO TERMINATING USER-DISPLAY[Australia/NZ/Asia/Latin America/UK]

To provide Calling Name Display for incoming calls from ISDN, assign the following data.

DESCRIPTION DATA


•(1)(2)


Allow Calling Name Display for incoming calls in Service Restriction Class A assigned by CM12 Y=02.

•(1)

(2)


signed by CM12 Y=021 : Calling Name Display

Specify the duration of displaying the destina-tion information called number/name on the LCD of Multiline Terminal when the outgoing call is answered by the destination via ISDN.

(1)(2)


Provide the ISDN trunk route with Calling Name Display for incoming calls.

•(1)(2)


Assign the calling party number, which is used for Calling Name search, to the 1000-Slot Memory Block No. 03.

NOTE 1: When this feature is provided, the 1000-Slot Memory Block No. 03 cannot be used for Station Speed Di-aling.

NOTE 2: The calling party number must be the number received from network, including the area code.

•(1)

(2)

Y=003 YY Z03 : 1000-Slot Memory Block No. 03

NOTE 1YY: 10-Slot Memory Block No. 00-99Z : Memory Parcel No. 0-9Stored No.:Access Code (Maximum 4 digits) + + Calling Party No. (Maximum 16 digits)

NOTE 2NONE : No data

START

CM12

CM15

CM08

CM35

CM74

,

A

3-65 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch3002.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the calling party name to be displayed for the calling party number assigned by CM74 Y=0, to each Memory Slot number, by character codes or characters.

•(1)

(2)


Code (Maximum 32 digits, 16 characters) See Command Manual.

NONE : No data

•(1)

(2)



Provide the Multiline Terminal with a Caller ID Display key.

•(1)(2)



•(1)(2)

Y=00My Line No. + + Key No.F1099: Select Key of Calling No. Display

or Calling Name Display

Provide the ATTCON/DESKCON with a se-lect key of Calling Number Display or Calling Name Display.

•(1)

(2)

Y=00ATTCON No. (E000-E007) + + Key No.F6122: Select Key of Calling No. Display


A

CM74

CM90,

,

,

END

3-66 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch3002.fm


To indicate the reason why the calling number is not informed from the network, on the LCD of MultilineTerminal/ATTCON/DESKCON.[Hong Kong]

NOTE: This feature is available only when the PN-24PRTA blade is used for the trunk route.

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the sending method of calling number from the network, to each trunk route.

•(1)(2)

Y=129 Calling No. sending method00-63: B CHANNEL Trunk Route No. 0: CALLER ID

Specify whether the LCD indicates the reason why the calling number is not informed from the network.

When CM35 Y=133 is assigned as 0, the rea-son is indicated as follows.• A call from a calling party which does not

inform the calling number:PRIVACY

• A call from a network or a single line tele-phone which cannot inform the calling num-ber:OUT OF AREA

• A call from a public telephone:No indication

•(1)(2)

Y=13300-63: B CHANNEL Trunk Route No. 0 : To indicate1 : Not indicated

START

CM35

END

3-67 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch3002.fm

CPN TO TERMINATING USER-DISPLAY

CPN TO TERMINATING USER-DISPLAY[North America]

To provide Calling Name Display for incoming calls from National ISDN 2/NTI (DMS100), assign thefollowing programming.

DESCRIPTION DATA


•(1)(2)


Allow Calling Name Display for incoming calls in Service Restriction Class A assigned by CM12 Y=02.

•(1)

(2)


assigned by CM12 Y=021 : Calling Name Display

Specify the displaying pattern of Caller ID on the LCD of Multiline Terminal before answer-ing or after answering a trunk call.

NOTE 1: When the second data of CM15 Y=400 is set to 0, set the second data of CM15 Y=136 to 1 (Calling Name Display).

NOTE 2: When the second data of CM15 Y=400 is set to 1, set the second data of CM15 Y=136 to 0 (Calling Number Display).

•(1)

(2)


assigned by CM12 Y=020 : To display Calling No. on upper line of

LCD, Calling Name on middle line of LCD

1 : To display Calling Name on upper line of LCD, Calling No. on middle line of LCD

7 : Not displayed Calling No. and Calling Name simultaneously

Specify the duration of displaying the destina-tion information called number/name on the LCD of Multiline Terminal when the outgoing call is answered by the destination via ISDN.

(1)(2)


START

CM12

CM15

CM08

A

3-68 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch3002.fm

CPN TO TERMINATING USER-DISPLAY

DESCRIPTION DATA

Provide the Multiline Terminal with a Caller ID Display key.

•(1)(2)



•(1)(2)

Y=00My Line No. + + Key No.F1099: Select Key of Calling No. Display


Provide the ATTCON/DESKCON with a se-lect key of Calling Number Display or Calling Name Display.

•(1)

(2)

Y=00ATTCON No. (E000-E007) + + Key No.F6122: Select Key of Calling No. Display


Specify whether the calling party name is sent to CCIS network.

NOTE: When providing tandem connection (ISDN to CCIS), this data is re-quired to relay a calling party name.

•(1)(2)

Y=2800-15: CCIS Channel No.0 : To send1 : Not sent

A

CM90,

,

,

CMA7

END

3-69 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch3002.fm

SUBADDRESS-PRESENT

SUBADDRESS-PRESENT(1) Calling Party Subaddress

When a station has dialed an ISDN subscribernumber, the station number is automatically sentas a Calling Party Subaddress.

(2) Called Party SubaddressWhen the system has received a Called Party Subaddress (Calling Station Number) from an ISDN subscriber, the system connects the call with the specified terminal.

DESCRIPTION DATA

Provide the system with Calling Party Subad-dress to ISDN.

(1)(2)

4000: To send

DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify the terminating system for Called Par-ty Subaddress.

(1)(2)

4010 : Station Call1 : Terminating System assigned by

CM30 Y=02/03/40/41

PBX

TRK

ISDN555-5000

4211

4211

Calling PartySubaddress

Dial214-555-5000

START

CM08

END

TRK

TRK

ISDN

Subaddress

Dial 214-555-5000 + 4211

4210214-555-5000 + 4211

4211

4212

START

CM08

END

3-70 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch3002.fm

TRUNK PROVISIONING SERVICE SELECTION

TRUNK PROVISIONING SERVICE SELECTIONDESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the trunk route to the trunk number as-signed by CM10 Y=00.

•(1)

(2)

Y=00 Trunk Route Allocation000-511: Trunk No. assigned by CM10

Y=0000-63: Route No.

START

CM30

BLADE RESET

END

3-71 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch3002.fm

CALL BY CALL SERVICE SELECTIONAVAILABLE SERVICES

CALL BY CALL SERVICE SELECTION[North America Only]

AVAILABLE SERVICESThe following Binary Facility Code can be sent to the ISDN network when the called party number isflagged as a Service. Services and features are selected by the ISDN subscriber at the time the ISDN isordered. The PBX must be programmed to match the services and features provided by the ISDN provider.

AT&T Northern TelecomSDN PrivateMegacom InWATSMegacom 800 OutWATSAccunet Foreign ExchangeInternational 800 Tie TrunkAT&T MultiQuest

JULY/18/2008

3-72 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch3002.fm

CALL BY CALL SERVICE SELECTIONCALL BY CALL LCR PROGRAMMING

CALL BY CALL LCR PROGRAMMINGThe following programming steps are an example of a long-distance call placed to any area code that be-gins with a 2 and that call is flagged as AT&T Megacom.

CM8A4005>12 (dialed #)=0001 (go to route pattern 001)CM8A0001>1 (1st choice)=00110 (use LCR pattern 000 + trk route 10)CM855>12=11 (maximum number of sending digits)

CM8A5000>157=02 (Kind of called party=National) (dialed number is 10 digits NANP, select National)

CM8A5000>158=01 (Called party Number Plan ID=ISDN/Telephony Numbering Plan)CM8A5000>159~161 are not used for this call.CM8A5000>162=1 (Service)CM8A5000>163=03 (Megacom)CM8A5000>164 is not required for this call.

The next example details a local 7 digit call and will not used a Binary Facility Code.

CM8A4005>2 (dialed number)=0000 (go to route pattern 000)CM8A0000>1 (1st choice)=00210 (use LCR pattern 002 + trk route 10)CM855>2=7 (maximum number of sending digits)

CM8A5002>157=04 (Kind of called party=Local) (dialed number is 7 digits NANP, select Local)CM8A5002>158=01 (Called party Number Plan ID=ISDN/Telephony Numbering Plan)CM8A5002>159~161 are not used for this call.CM8A5002>162=1 (Service)CM8A5002>163=NONE (not sending)CM8A5002>164 is not required for this call.

NOTE: These examples are provided to demonstrate the required programming. Always verify with the ISDN provider as to how local calls should be handled.

JULY/18/2008

3-73 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch3002.fm

CALL BY CALL SERVICE SELECTIONFEATURES

FEATURES

Carrier Identification Codes (CIC)

In ISDN terms placing a long-distance call using the equal access carrier code is a feature. There are timeswhen, depending upon the type of service provider (LEC or IEX), the PBX must contain the followingprogramming to complete a long-distance call by using CIC.

Currently all CIC are three digits in length preceded by a 10. Example: To dial AT&T a user dials 10288+ the long-distance number. The PBX must route the call based on 10288 or a portion of that number. ISDNcomplicates this process by identifying each CIC at the PBX level.

For example: Without ISDN the PBX is able to simply outpulse 10288 and the public network would pro-vide connection to AT&T. With ISDN used for routing equal access calls, the PBX must translate the10288 in its entirety and provide the network with four pieces of information as described on the next page.The implementation of this feature is further complicated by the fact that this is only required by someISDN providers and not others.

Required Network Information

Four components are required by the network when sending CIC information. This information can befound in the SETUP message.

(1) FEATURE (A statement advising the network that this is a feature based call, as opposed to a Servicebased call).

(2) TYPE OF NETWORK ID (The PBX should send out NATIONAL for this information).(3) NETWORK ID PLAN NUMBER (The Interchange Carrier should be sent).(4) NETWORK ID CHARACTER (XXX) (For AT&T the PBX sends out 288).

Use the following programming to assign the Call By Call Identification Codes.

CM8A4005>10 (dialed number)=4006 (go to table 406)CM8A4006>288 (dialed number)=0010 (use route pattern 010)CM8A0010>1 (1st choice)=02010 (use LCR pattern 020 + trk route 10)

CM8A5020>157=02 (Kind of called party=National)CM8A5020>158=01 (Called party Number Plan ID=ISDN/Telephony Numbering Plan)

JULY/18/2008

3-74 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch3002.fm


CM8A5020>159=02 (Type of Network ID=National)CM8A5020>160=01 (Network ID Plan Number=Interexchange Carrier)CM8A5020>161=288 (CIC for AT&T)CM8A5020>162=1 (Service)CM8A5020>163=01~16

The above programming will allow the 10288 to be sent out with the proper Setup message to the network.However, further LCR programming is required because the network will not understand what 10288 is asa dialed number. Use the following LCR programming to delete the 10288 digits from being sent to theISDN.

CM8A5020>151=0 (Allow digit deletion.)CM8A5020>153=05 (Delete the first five digits of the dialed number)

NOTE: This programming example only details the required steps for the 288 CIC. Each CIC must be programmed in different tables to allow CM8A5XXX-Y=161 to send out the unique CIC to the network.

JULY/18/2008

3-75 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch3002.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the kind of the called party number. •

(1)(2)

Y=5000-5255 LCR/TR Pattern No. 000-255157: Kind of Called Party No.00 : Unknown01 : International02 : National03 : Network04 : Local05 : Not used06 : Speed DialNONE : Unknown


•

(1)

(2)

Y=5000-5255 LCR/TR Pattern No. 000-255158: Called Party Numbering Plan Identifi-


Plan02 : Not used03 : Data Numbering Plan04 : Telex Numbering Plan05 : Not used06 : Not used07 : Not used08 : National Numbering Plan09 : Private Numbering PlanNONE : Unknown

Assign the Type of Network ID number. •

(1)(2)

Y=5000-5255 LCR/TR Pattern No. 000-255159: Type of Network ID00-07 : Type of Network ID No.NONE : No data

START

CM8A

A

JULY/18/2008

3-76 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch3002.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the Network ID Plan number. •

(1)(2)

Y=5000-5255 LCR/TR Pattern No. 000-255160: Network ID Plan00-15 : Network ID Plan No.NONE : No data

Assign the Network ID character.

NOTE: For assigning 4 or 5 digits Network ID;

•

(1)(2)

Y=5000-5255 LCR/TR Pattern No. 000-255161: Network ID CharacterX-XXXXX: X=0-9, A (*), B (#)NONE : No data

Specify whether Call By Call is Feature or Ser-vice.

•

(1)(2)

Y=5000-5255 LCR/TR Pattern No. 000-255162: Feature/Service0 : Feature1 : Service

Assign the Binary Facility Coding Value. •

(1)(2)

Y=5000-5255 LCR/TR Pattern No. 000-255163: Binary Facility Coding ValueFor AT&T01 : SDN02 : MEGACOM80003 : MEGACOM04 : Not used05 : Not used06 : ACCUNET07 : Not used08 : INTERNATIONAL80016 : AT&T MULTIQUESTNONE : No data

For Northern Telecom01 : Private02 : INWATS03 : OUTWATS04 : Foreign Exchange (FX)05 : Tie Trunk (TIE)NONE : No data

A

CM8A

B

JULY/18/2008

3-77 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch3002.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the WATS Band number. •

(1)(2)

Y=5000-5255 LCR/TR Pattern No. 000-255164: WATS Band No.00-09 : WATS Band No.NONE : No data

Specify whether the Transit Network Selection is sent to the network.

•

(1)(2)

Y=5000-5255 LCR/TR Pattern No. 000-255172: Sending Transit Network Selection0 : To send3 : Not sent

NOTE: Network-Specific Facilities or Transit Network Selection is sent according to the following condition.

B

CM8A

CM8A Y=5000-5255>163CM8A Y=5000-5255>172

3 0

Data assigned Network-Specific Facilities are sent Transit Network

Selection is sentNONE :No data

No information element is sent

END

JULY/18/2008

3-78 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch3002.fm

ADVICE OF CHARGE-DISPLAY

ADVICE OF CHARGE-DISPLAY[Australia/France/Germany/Netherlands/Italy/Greece/Luxembourg/Portugal/Spain/Sweden]

NOTE: When you require Call Recording of ISDN call, do the data programming for SMDR, CIS or PMS. For details, refer to the BUSINESS FEATURES. Page 1-1

DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify the Advice of Charge (AOC) display on Multiline Terminal when the charge total is over $9999.99/€655.35.(After 6 seconds, the display goes off.)

(1)(2)

4020 : Flashing display1 : Fixed display

Provide Advice of Charge (AOC). (1)(2)


Specify Advice of Charge (AOC) information is sent to PMS.

NOTE: To send call unit to PMS, set the sec-ond data of CM08>841 to 1.

(1)(2)

8410 : To send (dollar/euro charge)1 : Not sent (call unit)

Specify the call charge per unit.By this setting, the call charge is calculated ac-cording to the call unit sent from the network.

(1)(2)

(1)

(2)

69: dollar/euro/integral charge per unit00-99: 00-99 dollars/euro/integral charge

per unit

70: cent/euro cent/two decimals charge per unit

00-99: 00-99 cents/euro cents/two decimals charge per unit

START

CM08

CM42

END

3-79 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch3002.fm

ADVICE OF CHARGE-DISPLAY

[ITU-T (UAE) Only]

NOTE: When you require Call Recording of ISDN call, do the data programming for SMDR, CIS or PMS. For details, refer to the BUSINESS FEATURES. Page 1-1

DESCRIPTION DATA

Provide the PRT/BRT blade with ISDN Ad-vice of Charge (AOC) feature.

•(1)

(2)

Y=16000-127: Trunk blade No. of PRT/BRT

blade assigned by CM05 Y=10 : To provide1 : Not provided

Provide the Advice of Charge (AOC). (1)(2)


Specify the call charge per unit.By this setting, the call charge is calculated ac-cording to the call unit sent from the network.

(1)(2)

(1)(2)

69: integral charge per unit00-99: integral charge per unit

70: two decimals charge per unit00-99: two decimals charge per unit

START

CMAA

CM08

CM42

END

3-80 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch3002.fm

ALTERNATE ROUTING FOR ISDN

ALTERNATE ROUTING FOR ISDN[Australia Only]

To provide Alternate Routing to the other trunk route (ISDN/CCIS/COT/tie line), when a call originatingto the ISDN route is not available due to a line fault or other reason:

DESCRIPTION DATA


(1)(2)



Y=0-3 Number Plan Group 0-3X-XXXX: Access CodeA126: LCR Group 0A127: LCR Group 1A128: LCR Group 2A129: LCR Group 3


•(1)(2)


tern No. 5-7


•

(1)(2)



•

(1)

(2)

Y=0000-0255 Route Pattern No. 000-2551-4: Order of LCR Selection1: 1st2: 2nd3: 3rd4: 4thXXX ZZ XXX: 000-255: LCR Pattern No.ZZ : 00-63: Trunk Route No.

START

CM29

CM20

CM8A

END

3-81 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch3002.fm

CENTREX SHF OVER ISDN

CENTREX SHF OVER ISDN[New Zealand Only]

To send hooking signal from a Multiline Terminal to a main PBX via ISDN, do the following program-ming.

DESCRIPTION DATA

Provide the voice channel trunk route for the main PBX with the Centrex function.

•(1)(2)


Assign the SHF Key on the Multiline Termi-nal.

•(1)(2)

Y=00My Line No. + + Key No.F1009: SHF (Hooking Signal sent to out-

side)

Multiline

TerminalMultiline

TerminalDLC DTI DTI DLC

PBX MAIN PBX

ISDN

ISDN

START

CM35

CM90,

END

3-82 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch3002.fm

OVERLAP SENDING

OVERLAP SENDING[For EU]

NOTE: This feature is not available for call origination from the ISDN telephone.

DESCRIPTION DATA

Provide the system with Overlap Sending. (1)(2)





•(1)(2)


tern No. 5-7


•

(1)(2)



•

(1)

(2)


START

CM08BLADE RESET

CM20

CM8A

A

JULY/18/2008

3-83 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch3002.fm

OVERLAP SENDING

DESCRIPTION DATA


•(1)

(2)



000-255 CCC : No digit addition

•

(1)(2)

Y=9000-9025: Digit Addition Pattern No. 000-255

0X-X...X: Digits to be added

(Maximum 32 digits)


•(1)

(2)

Y=5000-5255153: Designation of digit to be deleted from


00 : No digit deletion01-10 : Leading 1-10 digits deletionNONE : No digit deletion

NOTE: When originating a call, the digit number of SETUP message to ISDN is as follows:The digit number of SETUP message=[20 digits]-[Number of digit deletion (2nd data set by CM8A Y=5000-5255>153)]

For example, when CM8A Y=5000-5255>153 is set to 02 (2 digits area code deletion) and a calling station dials number “0-1234567890123456789012345* (26 digits)”, ISDN message sent from the system becomes as follows.

ISDN message:SETUP message: 345678901234567890 (18 digits)INFO message: 12345 (5 digits)

*: Header 0 is LCR access code for LCR Group 0 set by CM20>A126, and following num-ber 12 is an area code.

Assign the sending an area code to ISDN as a Called Party Subaddress.

•(1)

(2)

Y=5000-5255155: Designation of sending area code as a

Called Party Subaddress0: Available

A

CM8A

B

JULY/18/2008

3-84 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch3002.fm

OVERLAP SENDING

DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify the maximum number of sending dig-its to be dialed by Calling Party.

The maximum number of sending digits in-cluding the area codes should be assigned to each area code.

•

(1)

(2)

Y=0-7 Area Code Development Pattern No. 0-7 assigned by CM8A Y=A000

X-X...X: Area code dialed, Maximum 8 digits01-79: 1 digit-79 digits24 : 24 digits

Assign the Area Code Development Pattern number for Toll Restriction and maximum dig-it analysis to each trunk route.

•(1)(2)

Y=07600-63: B CHANNEL Trunk Route No.00-07: Area Code Development Pattern

No. 0-715 : Not used

Assign the ISDN call origination procedure. •(1)(2)

Y=20600-63: B CHANNEL Trunk Route No. 0 : En-bloc call origination and overlap

call origination1 : En-bloc call origination only

Assign the number of division digits. •(1)(2)

Y=20700-63: B CHANNEL Trunk Route No. 00-31: 0 digit-31 digits63 : No data

B

CM85

CM35

END

JULY/18/2008

3-85 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch3002.fm

OVERLAP RECEIVING

OVERLAP RECEIVING[For EU]

NOTE: This feature is not available when using the ISDN telephone.

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the Station Numbering Plan data to the leading one, two, three or four digits of station number.

•(1)

(2)

Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3X-XXXX: Leading 1-4 digits of Station

No.801: 1 digit Station No.802: 2 digits Station No.803: 3 digits Station No.804: 4 digits Station No.805: 5 digits Station No.806: 6 digits Station No.807: 7 digits Station No.808: 8 digits Station No.


••

(1)

(2)

Y=02 Day ModeY=03 Night Mode000-511: Trunk No. assigned by

CM10 Y=0018: ISDN Indial

START

CM20

CM30

A

JULY/18/2008

3-86 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch3002.fm

OVERLAP RECEIVING

DESCRIPTION DATA


•(1)(2)

Y=018 Digit Conversion on DID call00-63: B CHANNEL Trunk Route No.0: To provide

•(1)(2)

Y=170 Development Table00-63: B CHANNEL Trunk Route No. 0 : Development Table 1 (For Maximum

DID number 8 digits)3 : Development Table 0 (For Maximum

DID number 4 digits)

•(1)(2)

Y=012 Number of digits to be received00-63: B CHANNEL Trunk Route No.0 : 1 digit1 : 2 digits2 : 3 digits3 : 4 digits

•

(1)(2)


00-63: B CHANNEL Trunk Route No.01-08: 1-8 digits15 : 4 digits


•(1)(2)



•(1)(2)

Y=90 X-XXXXXXXX: DID No.000-999 : Number Conversion Block No.NONE : No data


•(1)

(2)

Y=01 Day Mode000-999: Number Conversion Block No.


natedDXX: Change terminating system to:

D14: Attendant Console

A

CM35

CM76

B

JULY/18/2008

3-87 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch3002.fm

OVERLAP RECEIVING

DESCRIPTION DATA

To distinguish the maximum number of digits received from ISDN for each trunk route, spec-ify an Area Code Development Pattern number to each trunk route number.

•(1)(2)

Y=20200-63: B CHANNEL Trunk Route No.00-07: Area Code Development Pattern


Provide the Overlap Receiving feature for each trunk route.

•(1)(2)

Y=20300-63: B CHANNEL Trunk Route No.0 : To provide1 : Not provided

Specify the maximum number of sending dig-its to be dialed by calling party.The maximum number of sending digits in-cluding the area codes should be assigned to each area code.

•

(1)

(2)


X-X...X: Area Code dialed, Maximum 8 digits

01-24 : 1 digit-24 digits 25-79 : 25 digits-79 digits

Specify whether the system connects to the calling party when the system does not receive the following DID number within the time set by CM41 Y=0>109, after the first DID number of the calling party is received.

(1)(2)

6260 : Not connected1 : To connect

Specify whether the system connects to the calling party when the DID number of digits received from ISDN is more than the maxi-mum number of sending digits assigned by CM85 Y=0-7.

(1)(2)

6270 : Not connected1 : To connect

Specify the ORT timer for Overlap Receiving. •(1)(2)

Y=0109 03-99: 3-99 seconds


B

CM35

CM85

CM08

CM41

C

JULY/18/2008

3-88 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch3002.fm

OVERLAP RECEIVING

• When providing Tandem Connection (ISDN to BRT/DTI/PRT/CCT) with LCR development, do thefollowing programming.

DESCRIPTION DATA




•(1)(2)


tern No. 0-7


•

(1)(2)

Y=4000-4007 Area Code Development Pattern No. 0-7

X...X: Area Code, Maximum 8 digits0000-0255: Route Pattern No. 000-255


•

(1)

(2)


1: 1st2: 2nd3: 3rd4: 4th

XXX ZZXXX: 000-255: LCR Pattern No. 000-255ZZ : 00-63: Trunk Route No. 00-63

C

CM20

CM8A

D

JULY/18/2008

3-89 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch3002.fm

OVERLAP RECEIVING

DESCRIPTION DATA


•(1)

(2)



000-255NONE : No digit addition

•

(1)(2)

Y=9000-9255 Digit Addition Pattern No. 000-255

0X-X...X: Digits to be added (Maximum 32



For area code deletion, designate the digits to be deleted.

•

(1)

(2)

Y=5000-5255LCR Pattern No. 000-255152: Deletion of all digits of the area code

assigned by CM8A Y=4000-40070 : To delete1 : Not deleted

D

CM8A

END

JULY/18/2008

3-90 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch3002.fm

ADDRESSING

ADDRESSING[For EU]


When Addressing is provided, calling party number of station B/C/D is displayed on a called party stationA as follows:

• Call from station B to station ACalling Party Number “05671234” is displayed on station A(0: Trunk Access Code + 5671234: ISDN Subscriber Number)

• Call from station C to station A Calling Party Number “00229123456” is displayed on station A(0: Trunk Access Code + 0: National Prefix + 229: Area Code + 123456: ISDN Subscriber Number)

• Call from station D to station ACalling Party Number “00043441234567” is displayed on station A(0: Trunk Access Code + 00: International Prefix + 43: Country Code + 44: Area Code + 1234567:ISDN Subscriber Number)

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign data for Addressing to required trunk route.

•(1)

(2)

Y=222 International Prefix Code00-63: B CHANNEL Trunk Route No. X-XXXX: Prefix CodeX: 0-9, A (*), B (#)

•(1)(2)

Y=223 National Prefix Code00-63: B CHANNEL Trunk Route No. X-XXXX: Prefix CodeX: 0-9, A (*), B (#)

ISDN

PBX

Station C Country Code: 31 Area Code: 229ISDN Subscriber No.: 123456

Station A Country Code: 31 Area Code: 35ISDN Subscriber No.: 6892200

Station D Country Code: 43 Area Code: 44ISDN Subscriber No.: 1234567

Station B Country Code: 31 Area Code: 35ISDN Subscriber No.: 5671234

START

CM35

A

JULY/18/2008

3-91 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch3002.fm

ADDRESSING

DESCRIPTION DATA

•(1)(2)

Y=224 Country Code00-63: B CHANNEL Trunk Route No.X-XXXX: Country CodeX: 0-9, A (*), B (#)

•(1)(2)

Y=225 Area Code00-63: B CHANNEL Trunk Route No.X-XXXXXX: Area CodeX: 0-9, A (*), B (#)

Enable International/National Prefix Code dis-play when a call terminates via ETSI ISDN.

•

(1)(2)

Y=226 International/National Prefix Code Display

00-63: B CHANNEL Trunk Route No.0 : Available


•(1)(2)


Allow International/National Prefix Code dis-play in Service Restriction Class B assigned by CM12 Y=02.

•(1)

(2)



Assign a trunk access code for outgoing call. •(1)(2)

Y=04400-63: B CHANNEL Trunk Route No.0-9/00-99: Trunk Access Code

Enable the trunk access code display when a call terminates via ETSI ISDN.

(1)(2)

6330: Available

A

CM35

CM12

CM15

CM35

CM08

B

JULY/18/2008

3-92 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch3002.fm

ADDRESSING

DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify whether the Type of Number/Number-ing Plan Identification of CPN is provided, or not.

NOTE: If this data is set to “1”, the setting data of CM35 Y=230/231 is invalid.

•(1)(2)


Specify the Type of Number for outgoing call. •(1)(2)

Y=230 Type of Number00-63: B CHANNEL Trunk Route No.00 : Unknown01 : International Number02 : National Number03 : Network Specific Number04 : ISDN Subscriber Number06 : Abbreviated NumberNONE : No data

Specify the Numbering Plan Identification for outgoing call.

•(1)(2)

Y=231 Numbering Plan Identification00-63: B CHANNEL Trunk Route No.00 : Unknown01 : ISDN/Telephony Numbering

Plan03 : Data Numbering Plan04 : Telex Numbering Plan08 : National Standard Numbering

Plan09 : Private Numbering PlanNONE : No data

B

CM35

END

JULY/18/2008

3-93 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch3002.fm

CHANNEL NEGOTIATION

CHANNEL NEGOTIATION[For EU]


DESCRIPTION DATA

Provide the Channel Negotiation to required trunk route.

•(1)(2)


START

CM35

END

JULY/18/2008

3-94 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch3002.fm

CONNECTED LINE IDENTIFICATION PRESENTATION (COLP)/CONNECTED LINE IDENTIFICATION RESTRICTION (COLR)

CONNECTED LINE IDENTIFICATION PRESENTATION (COLP)/CONNECTED LINE IDENTIFICATION RE-STRICTION (COLR)[For EU]

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign an ISDN Subscriber number and ISDN Local Office Code Table number to required stations. NOTE 1 on Page 3-59

•(1)(2)

Y=12X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.X-XXXX: ISDN Subscriber No.

•(1)(2)


00-14


•(1)

(2)



(Maximum 12 digits)


•(1)(2)


For a call terminating office, allow the con-nected line number indication on Multiline Terminal display in Service Restriction Class B assigned by CM12 Y=02.

•(1)

(2)



For a call originating office, allow ETSI ISDN Connected Line Identification Presentation (COLP) in Service Restriction Class B as-signed by CM12 Y=02.

•(1)

(2)



START

CM12

CM50

CM12

CM15

A

3-95 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch3002.fm

CONNECTED LINE IDENTIFICATION PRESENTATION (COLP)/CONNECTED LINE IDENTIFICATION RESTRICTION (COLR)

DESCRIPTION DATA

For a call terminating office, provide the ETSI ISDN Connected Line Identification Presenta-tion (COLP).

•(1)(2)


For a call originating office, enable the receiv-ing connected line number from call terminat-ing office in ETSI ISDN Connected Line Identification Presentation (COLP).

•(1)(2)

Y=22100-63: B CHANNEL Trunk Route No.0: Available

Specify coding type when sending the ISDN Connected Line Identification Presentation (COLP).

•(1)(2)

Y=26700-63: B CHANNEL Trunk Route No.0 : Codeset 5

(Spanish specification)1 : Codeset 0

(ETSI specification)

Specify whether the connected line number in-dication is provided on ATTCON/DESKCON display.

(1)(2)


A

CM35

CM08

END

3-96 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch3002.fm

MALICIOUS CALL TRACE

MALICIOUS CALL TRACE[Australia Only]

DESCRIPTION DATA


•(1)(2)


Allow Malicious Call Trace in Service Restric-tion Class A assigned by CM12 Y=02.

•(1)

(2)



Assign the access code for Malicious Call Trace.

•(1)(2)

Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3X-XXXX: Access CodeA170: Malicious Call Trace

Provide the ISDN route with Malicious Call Trace.

•(1)(2)

Y=10600-63: B CHANNEL Trunk Route No.0 : Not provided1 : To provide

Assign the Malicious Call Trace key to the Multiline Terminal, if required.

•(1)(2)

Y=00My Line No. + + Key No.F0A70: Malicious Call Trace

Assign the Malicious Call Trace key to the AT-TCON/DESKCON.

•(1)

(2)

Y=00ATTCON No. (E000-E007) + + Key No.F6120: Malicious Call Trace

START

CM12

CM15

CM20

CM35

CM90,

,

END

3-97 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch3002.fm

CALL COMPLETION TO BUSY SUBSCRIBER (CCBS)

CALL COMPLETION TO BUSY SUBSCRIBER (CCBS)[For EU]

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the access code for Call Completion to Busy Subscriber (CCBS).

•(1)(2)

Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3X-XXXX: Access codeA004: Call Completion to Busy Subscriber

(CCBS) SetA005: Call Completion to Busy Subscriber

(CCBS) Cancel

Assign a Call Completion to Busy Subscriber (CCBS) key to the Multiline Terminal, if re-quired.

•(1)(2)

Y=00My Line No. + + Key No.F0004: Call Completion to Busy Subscrib-

er (CCBS) Set/Cancel

Assign the trunk access code for Call Comple-tion to Busy Subscriber (CCBS).

•(1)(2)

Y=04400-63: B CHANNEL Trunk Route No.0-9/00-99: Trunk Access Code

Assign the trunk route data to Call Completion to Busy Subscriber (CCBS) set from calling party.

•(1)(2)

Y=27700-63: B CHANNEL Trunk Route No.0 : Allow1 : Restricted

Assign the trunk route data to Call Completion to Busy Subscriber (CCBS) set to called party.

•(1)(2)

Y=27800-63: B CHANNEL Trunk Route No.0 : Allow1 : Restricted

START

CM20

CM90,

CM35

A

3-98 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch3002.fm

CALL COMPLETION TO BUSY SUBSCRIBER (CCBS)

NOTE: When providing the calling party number (CPN) to the network, do the programming of SID TO NETWORK-PRESENT. Page 3-58

DESCRIPTION DATA


•(1)(2)


Assign an ISDN Subscriber number and ISDN Local Office Code Table number to required stations. NOTE 1 on Page 3-59

•(1)(2)

Y=12X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.X-XXXX: ISDN Subscriber No.NONE : No data

•(1)(2)


00-1415 : No data

Specify the sending out of CPN (Calling Party Number).

•(1)(2)

Y=25X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.0 : Not sent1 : To send

Allow Call Completion to Busy Subscriber (CCBS) set from calling party in Service Re-striction Class B assigned by CM12 Y=02.

•(1)

(2)



Allow Call Completion to Busy Subscriber (CCBS) set to called party in Service Restric-tion Class B assigned by CM12 Y=02

•(1)

(2)




•(1)

(2)


00-14X...X : Local Office Code

(Maximum 12 digits)NONE : No data

A

CM12

CM13

NOTE 2 onPage 3-60

CM15

CM50

END

3-99 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch3002.fm

ISDN-VPN PROGRAMMING

ISDN-VPN PROGRAMMINGDESCRIPTION DATA



Assign the LCR Group key on the Multiline Terminal, if required.

•(1)(2)

Y=00My Line No. + + Key No.F0A26: LCR Group 0F0A27: LCR Group 1F0A28: LCR Group 2


•(1)(2)


tern No. 5-7


•

(1)(2)



•

(1)

(2)


START

CM20

CM90,

CM8A

A

3-100 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch3002.fm

ISDN-VPN PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION DATA


•(1)

(2)



000-255 NONE : No digit addition

•

(1)(2)

Y=9000-9025: Digit Addition Pattern No. 00-255

0X-X...X: Digits to be added (Maximum 32

digits)


•(1)

(2)

Y=5000-5255153: Designation of digit to be deleted from


00 : No digit deletion01-10 : Leading 1-10 digits deletionNONE : No digit deletion

Assign the sending an area code to ISDN as a Called Party Subaddress.

•(1)

(2)

Y=5000-5255155: Designation of sending area code as a

Called Party Subaddress0: Available

Specify the maximum number of sending dig-its to be Dialed by Calling Party.

The maximum number of sending digits in-cluding the area codes should be assigned to each area code.

•

(1)

(2)


X-X...X: Area code dialed, Maximum 8 digits01-79: 1 digit-79 digits24 : 24 digits

Assign the Area Code Development Pattern number for Toll Restriction and maximum dig-it analysis to each trunk route.

•(1)(2)

Y=07600-63: B CHANNEL Trunk Route No. 00-07: Area Code Development Pattern


A

CM8A

CM85

CM35

END

3-101 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch3002.fm

ISDN TELEPHONE DATA PROGRAMMINGBRT ASSIGNMENT


DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign a Unit and Slot number to the BRT blade.

•(1)

(2)

Y=0XX ZZXX: 01-50: Unit No.ZZ : 01-18: Slot No.60: BRT blade

Assign a Trunk blade number to the BRT blade.

•(1)

(2)


Assign an ISDN line station number to the re-quired Physical Port number.

•(1)

(2)

Y=00XX YY ZZ: Physical Port No.XX: 01-50: Unit No.YY: 01-18: Slot No.ZZ : 01-32: Circuit No.EFX-EFXXXXXXXX:ISDN Line Station

No.

Assign a Tenant number to each ISDN line sta-tion number.

•(1)(2)

Y=04X-XXXXXXXX: ISDN Line Station No.00-63: Tenant No.

If no data is set, the default data is 01.

Assign a Trunk Restriction Class to each ISDN line station number, if required.

•(1)(2)

Y=01X-XXXXXXXX: ISDN Line Station No.X Z: Trunk Restriction ClassX: 1 -8: Trunk Restriction Class in Day

Mode Z: 1 -8: Trunk Restriction Class in Night

Mode1: Unrestricted (RCA) 2: Non-Restricted 1 (RCB) 3: Non-Restricted 2 (RCC) 4: Semi-Restricted 1 (RCD) 5: Semi-Restricted 2 (RCE)6: Restricted 1 (RCF)7: Restricted 2 (RCG)8: Fully-Restricted (RCH)

START

CM05

BLADE RESET

BLADE RESET

CM10

CM12

A

JULY/18/2008

3-102 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch3002.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign an ISDN Subscriber number to the re-quired ISDN line station number, if required.

•(1)(2)

Y=12X-XXXXXXXX: ISDN Line Station No.X-XXXX: ISDN Subscriber No.NONE : No data

Assign a Local Office Code Table number to the required ISDN line station number, if required.

•(1)(2)

Y=13X-XXXXXXXX: ISDN Line Station No.00-14: ISDN Local Office Code Table No.

00-1415 : No data

Provide the Call Charge Service to the required stations.

•(1)(2)

Y=06X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.0 : Not provided1 : To provide

Specify the facility control of Calling Party Number (CPN), if required.

NOTE: This command is effective when sending a Calling Party Number (CPN) to ISDN.

•(1)(2)

Y=25X-XXXXXXXX: ISDN Line Station No.0 : To provide1 : Not provided


(1)(2)


Assign the digit number of ISDN line station number.

•(1)(2)

Y=0-3X-XXXX: Access Code801-808: 1 digit-8 digits

Specify whether the subaddress is sent to ISDN when making a call from ISDN Tele-phone, if required.

(1)(2)

4300 : To send (As per CM08>431)1 : Not sent

Specify the Calling Party Subaddress which is sent to ISDN when making a call from ISDN Telephone, if required.

(1)(2)

4310 : ISDN Line Station No. assigned by

CM10 Y=001 : ISDN Telephone No.

Specify the forced release when a called ISDN Telephone does not answer during 3 minutes, if required.

(1)(2)


A

CM12

CM13

CM29

CM20

CM08

B

3-103 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch3002.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign Calling Party Number (CPN) which is sent to ISDN when making a call from ISDN Telephone, if required.

(1)(2)

4340 : CPN entered in ISDN Telephone1 : CPN assigned by CM12 Y=12/13

Specify the calling number, which is sent to ISDN Telephone from Single Line Telephone/Multiline Terminal (for station to station call).

(1)(2)

5840 : Calling Party No. (assigned by CM12

Y=12, 13) NOTE1 : Station No.

Allow sending extension information of Low layer Compatibility (LLC) information element for connection between ISDN Tele-phones/ISDN trunks.

(1)(2)

7220: Allow

Specify the make busy of B CHANNEL (B1, B2) for ISDN Telephone, if required.

•(1)

(2)

Y=2XXXXXXXX ZXXXXXXXX: ISDN Line Station No.Z: 0: B1 CHANNEL

1: B2 CHANNEL0 : Make busy1 : In service

Assign the ISDN line station number to the ISDN Multipoint number of BRT (CD-2BRIA) blade.

•(1)

(2)

Y=00XX ZXX: 00-31:D CHANNEL No. controls

ISDN telephoneZ : 0-7: ISDN Multipoint No.X-XXXXXXXX: ISDN Line Station No.

Specify the checking of TEI (Terminal End-point Identifier) when Layer 2 data link is re-leased.

•(1)

(2)


ISDN telephoneZ : 0-7: ISDN Multipoint No.0 : To Provide1 : Not Provided

B

CM08

CME5,

CMAC

RESET

RESET

C

3-104 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch3002.fm


NOTE: The calling party number consists of the following numbers.Calling party number: YYYY

ISDN subscriber No. assigned by CM12 Y=12 (1-4 digits)

For example:In this case, the Calling Party Number is 5000.That is

ISDN Subscribers No. assigned by CM12 Y=12 is 5000.

DESCRIPTION DATA

Allow sending extension information of Low layer Compatibility (LLC) information element for connection between ISDN tele-phones/ISDN trunks.

•(1)

(2)


ISDN telephoneZ : 0-7: ISDN Multipoint No.0: Allow

Assign the type of power supply for ISDN tele-phone.

•(1)

(2)


ISDN telephoneZ : 0-7: ISDN Multipoint No.0 : Power supply from the system1 : Local power supply

Assign the ISDN Telephone Type to the Trunk blade number assigned by CM05.

•(1)

(2)

Y=06000-127: Trunk blade No. of BRT

(CD-2BRIA) assigned by CM05 Y=1

24 : ETSI Terminal63 : Not ETSI Terminal

C

CMAC

RESET

RESET

CMAA

BLADE RESET

END

3-105 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch3002.fm

ISDN TELEPHONE DATA PROGRAMMINGPOINT-TO-POINT CONNECTION

POINT-TO-POINT CONNECTION

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the point-to-point connection as the Layer 2 data link.

•(1)

(2)


ISDN telephoneZ : 0-7: ISDN Multipoint No.0: Point-to-Point Connection

NOTE: When Point-to-Point Connection is selected, the PBX will address the BRI Terminal with channel select (B1/B2) message. Some BRI Terminals cannot answer the call with this type of signaling. Some of the BRI Terminals require a Calling Party Number sent from the PBX. In this case, use Point-to-Multipoint for CMAC Y=01 and CM1B to assign extension number for the BRI Terminal.

Assign the Extended Passive Bus. •(1)

(2)


ISDN telephoneZ : 0-7: ISDN Multipoint No.0: Extended Passive Bus

MDFISDN Telephone/TA

Maximum 1965 ft. (600 m)

BRT

PBX

START

CMAC

RESET

RESET

END

3-106 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch3002.fm

ISDN TELEPHONE DATA PROGRAMMINGPOINT-TO-MULTIPOINT CONNECTION

POINT-TO-MULTIPOINT CONNECTION

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the point-to-multipoint connection as the Layer 2 data link.

•(1)

(2)


ISDN telephoneZ : 0-7: ISDN Multipoint No.1 : Point-to-Multipoint Connection

Specify the passive bus. •(1)

(2)


ISDN telephoneZ : 0-7: ISDN Multipoint No.0 : Extended Passive Bus 1 : Short Passive Bus

Assign an ISDN Telephone Multipoint station number to the ISDN Line station number.The numbers assigned in this command are station numbers that are to be programmed in the BRI terminal. CM12 Y=12 will use the sta-tion assignment from CM10 Y=00.

(1)

(2)

XXXXXXXX ZXXXXXXXX: ISDN Line Station No. as-

signed by CM10 Y=00Z: 0-7: ISDN Multipoint No.X-XXXXXXXX: ISDN Telephone Multi-

point Station No.

400407

410417

BRT

• Short Passive Bus

• Extended Passive Bus

MDF

ISDN Telephone

ISDN Telephone 301

300

MDF

BRT

PBX




START

CMAC

RESET

RESET

CM1B ,

END

3-107 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch3002.fm

ISDN TELEPHONE DATA PROGRAMMINGPOINT-TO-MULTIPOINT CONNECTION

BRI Programming Example:

The following is an example of common BRI Station Programming.

CM1000 010101>EF2125010102>EF2126

CMAC00>001-2125002-2126

CM

CM

CM

AC01>011-1012-1

AC03>011-1012-1

AC06>011-1012-1

CM1B>2125, 0>2225*2125, 1>2226

2>None

72126, 0>2235*2126, 1>2236*

2>None

7

* Ext. 2225 and others assigned in CM1B are the Extensionnumbers that should be entered into the BRI Terminals. MostBRI Terminals require a 10 digits number.If the BRI Terminals require a SPID [North AmericaOnly], it is common to add a 3 digits number to the mainnumber.For example;Main number (1): 214-555-2225Main number (2): 214-555-2226SPID (1) : 214-555-2225123SPID (2) : 214-555-2226123SPIDs are required for NI-1 protocol and AT&T Point-to-Multipoint. Devices that are set as AT&T Point-to-Point donot use SPIDs.

~~

3-108 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch3002.fm

ISDN TELEPHONE DATA PROGRAMMINGINDIVIDUAL TERMINAL CALL

INDIVIDUAL TERMINAL CALL(1) ISDN Indial

When receiving an ISDN Telephone station number as the ISDN Indial number, or when convertingan ISDN Indial number to an ISDN Telephone station number, by CM76, the system connects thecall with the specified ISDN Telephone or Terminal Adapter (TA) on the same bus (2B + D).

Do the following programming:“DID ADDRESSING” Page 3-53“POINT-TO-MULTIPOINT CONNECTION” Page 3-106

ISDN

ISDN TelephoneStation No. 407


ISDN LineStation No. 300

BRT

Converting “7715” to “400”

TRK

PBX

214-555-7715(ISDN Indial No.)

3-109 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch3002.fm


(2) Called Party SubaddressWhen the system has received a Called Party Subaddress (ISDN Telephone station number) from anISDN Subscriber, the system connects the call with the specified ISDN Telephone or TA on the samebus (2B + D).

Do the following programming:“SUBADDRESS-PRESENT” Page 3-69“POINT-TO-MULTIPOINT CONNECTION” Page 3-106

ISDN




BRT TRK

PBX

214-555-1111

(Office No.)-400

(Called PartySubaddress=ISDN Telephone Station No.)

3-110 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch3002.fm


(3) Direct In Termination (DIT)When the ISDN Telephone station number is assigned as the destination of DIT, the system connectsthe call with the specified ISDN Telephone or TA on the same bus (2B + D).

In addition to the programming of “POINT-TO-MULTIPOINT CONNECTION” Page 3-106,do the following programming.

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the data for DIT to the trunk numbers assigned by CM10 Y=00.

••••

(1)

(2)


Y=0004: Direct-In Termination

Assign the ISDN Telephone station number to be terminated by Direct In Termination.

••••

(1)

(2)


Y=00X-XXXXXXXX: ISDN Telephone Station

No.

ISDN




BRT TRK

PBX

214-555-7881(Office No.)

START

CM30

END

3-111 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch3002.fm


(4) Station-to-Station CallingWhen an ISDN Telephone user dials an ISDN Telephone station number within the system, thesystem connects the call with the specified ISDN Telephone.

Do the programming of “POINT-TO-MULTIPOINT CONNECTION”. Page 3-106

ISDN


ISDN Telephone Station No. 400


BRT TRK

PBX




BRT

ISDN Telephone Station No. 410 dials 400 to reachISDN Telephone 400 specifically.

3-112 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch3002.fm

ISDN TELEPHONE DATA PROGRAMMINGGROUP CALL

GROUP CALL(1) ISDN Indial

When receiving an ISDN line station number as ISDN Indial number, or when converting an ISDNIndial number to an ISDN line station number by CM76, the system connects the call with all ISDNTelephones or Terminal Adapters (TA) on the same bus (2B + D).

Do the following programming:“DID ADDRESSING” Page 3-53“POINT-TO-MULTIPOINT CONNECTION” Page 3-106

ISDN




BRT

Converting “7715” to “300”

TRK

PBX

214-555-7715(ISDN Indial No.)

3-113 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch3002.fm


(2) Called Party SubaddressWhen receiving an ISDN line station number as the Called Party Subaddress, the system connectsthe call with all ISDN Telephones or Terminal Adapters (TA) on the same bus (2B + D).

Do the following programming:“SUBADDRESS-PRESENT” Page 3-69“POINT-TO-MULTIPOINT CONNECTION” Page 3-106

ISDN




BRT TRK

PBX

214-555-1111

(Office No.)300 #

(Called PartySubaddress)

(Office Code 1111)

*

3-114 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch3002.fm


(3) Direct In Termination (DIT)When the ISDN line station number is assigned as the destination of DIT, the call from ISDNterminates all ISDN Telephones on the same bus (2B + D) simultaneously.

In addition to the programming of “POINT-TO-MULTIPOINT CONNECTION” Page 3-106,do the following programming.

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the data for DIT to the trunk numbers assigned by CM10 Y=00.

••••

(1)

(2)


Y=0004: Direct-In Termination

Assign the ISDN Telephone station number to be terminated by Direct In Termination.

••••

(1)

(2)


Y=00X-XXXXXXXX: ISDN Telephone Station

No.

ISDN

Station No. 407ISDN TelephoneStation No. 400


BRT TRK

PBX

214-555-7880(Office No.)

ISDN Telephone

START

CM30

END

3-115 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch3002.fm


(4) Station-to-Station Calling• When an ISDN Telephone user dials an ISDN line station number within the system, the system

connects the call with all ISDN Telephones.

Do the programming of “POINT-TO-MULTIPOINT CONNECTION”. Page 3-106

ISDN




BRT TRK

PBX




BRT

3-116 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch3002.fm


• When Single Line Telephone, Multiline Terminal, IP Station, PS user dials an ISDN line stationnumber within the system, the system connects the call with all ISDN Telephones.

In addition to the programming of “POINT-TO-MULTIPOINT CONNECTION”Page 3-106, do the following programming.

DESCRIPTION DATA

Provide the system with the voice communica-tion between ISDN telephone group and Sin-gle Line Telephone/Multiline Terminal/PS within the system.

(1)(2)

5270 : Provide1 : Not provided

ISDN




BRT TRK

PBX

IP Station No. 401

SLT/Multiline TerminalStation No. 410

TRK

TRK

PS Station No. 417

START

CM08

END


4-1 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch4001.fm

Chapter

4

OPEN APPLICATION INTERFACE (OAI) FEATURES

This chapter gives an overview of the OAI features.

4-2 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch4001.fm

OAI SYSTEM OUTLINE

OAI SYSTEM OUTLINEThe PBX is equipped with an interface to provide user applications through an external processor, whichtransmits/receives the control signals between the PBX and the Ethernet. The interface supports TCP/IPprotocol.

The following figure shows the system outline of OAI.

System Outline of OAI

DLC

CPU

PBX

LCSLT

TDSW

ETHER

10/100 BASE-TX

ROUTER

EXTERNALPROCESSOR

SWITCHINGHUB

IP Station

MultilineTerminal

4-3 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch4001.fm

OAI SYSTEM CONDITIONS

OAI SYSTEM CONDITIONSThe following interfaces are not available.

• OAI with RS-232C• FLF [For North America]

4-4 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch4001.fm

LIST OF OAI COMMANDS

LIST OF OAI COMMANDSThe following table shows the commands related to the OAI with each facility (MSF, TMF etc.).

List of OAI Commands

ITEM COMMAND CODE 1ST DATA 2ND DATA MEANING

BASIC DATA

CM0B Y=001 00 XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX

IP Address for the system


Subnet Mask for the system


Default Gateway Address for the sys-tem

CM0B Y=001 41 0/1/2/3 Port number for OAICMD7 Y=5 00 X-XXXX Office number for OAI

MSF

CM12 Y=02 Station No. 00-15 Service Restriction ClassCM15 Y=059 00-15 1CM20 Y=0-3 Access Code A084 MSF Access CodeCM20 Y=0-3 Access Code A100-A102 Voice Response System Access CodeCM41 Y=0 56 01-99 Message Replay Timer/Tone Sending

TimerCM49 Y=00 000-007 10 Announcement Service for OAICM90 Y=00 My Line No. +

+ Key No.F1032-F1047 OAI Function Key

CMD7 Y=0 F1032-F1047 128-191 MSF Operation CodeCMD7 Y=0 F1032-F1047 DCX (X=1-3) Digit Number of Digit CodeCMD7 Y=1 Access Code 128-191 MSF Operation CodeCMD7 Y=2 000-127 1000-1007 Voice Response System No.CMD7 Y=3 00 000-127 RR TimerCMD7 Y=4 00 00-32 Maximum number of terminals to be in

MSF simultaneously (02-63 terminals)CMD7 Y=6 Digit Code 128-191 Operation Code for MSF


,

4-5 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch4001.fm




MSF CMD7 Y=7 F1032-F1047 00/01 Chime from Multiline Terminal when Receiving RR Signal

TMF

CM90 Y=00 My Line No. + + Key No.

F1032-F1047 OAI Function Key

CMD7 Y=0 F1032-F1047 192-255 TMF Operation Code

CMD7 Y=0 F1032-F1047 DCX (X=1-3) Digit Number of Digit Code

CMD7 Y=3 00 000-127 RR Timer

CMD7 Y=4 01 00-32 Maximum number of terminals to be in TMF simultaneously (02-63 terminals)

CMD7 Y=6 Digit Code 192-255 Operation Code for TMF

CMD7 Y=7 F1032-F1047 00/01 Chime from Multiline Terminal when Receiving RR Signal

CMD7 Y=8 00-03 00/01 Chime from Multiline Terminal, Dis-play Help when setting up TMF

MRFCMD7 Y=A 0B 0/1 Chime sending out at the time (MRFR,

MRFI) terminal mode release

SCF

CM08 043 0/1 System Speed Dialing security

CM08 044 0/1 Toll Restriction

CM08 045 0/1 Warning Tone

CM08 110 0/1 1000-Slot Memory Block No. 03




CM08 465 0/1 Error detail/Default error type

CM08 534 0/1 System operation for a station that has a C.O. call on consultation hold


,

4-6 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch4001.fm




SCF

CM08 669 0 Sending the station status of DND set-ting to the destination office when the Multiline Terminal/ATTCON calls a station set the DND over CCIS

CM08 809 0/1 Exchange of trunk when answering an Exclusive hold call

CM08 816 0/1 Setting of line/trunk which is set to 3rd party line of SMFN

CM08 839 0 Sending SMFN with intermediate information via OAI queue

CM08 846 0/1 Setting CAMP ON to the destination when Call Forwarding-All Calls is set by SCF FID=19

CM11 0000-0999 Virtual-Line number

Virtual Line number

CM12 Y=02 Station No. 00-15 Service Restriction Class

CM15 Y=005 00-15 1

CM15 Y=006 00-15 1

CM15 Y=009 00-15 1

CM17 Y=0 Station No. Another Sta-tion No.

UCD Group

CM17 Y=1 Station No. 2/3 Member station/Pilot station

CM17 Y=2 Station No. 00-15 UCD Group No.

CM17 Y=A Station No. 0/1 Method of Sending Multi-Connection Announcement

CM20 Y=0-3 Access Code A006 Executive Right of Way (Executive Override)


4-7 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch4001.fm




SCF

CM20 Y=0-3 Access Code A067 System Speed Dialing origination(300-Slot Memory Block)

CM20 Y=0-3 Access Code A068 1000-Slot Memory Block No. 02




CM20 Y=0-3 Access Code A243 System Speed Dialing origination(1-8 digits Abbreviated Code)

CM29 Tenant No. 710-713 Numbering Plan Group

CM35 Y=059 00-63 1 DID Call Waiting Trunk Route No.

CM41 Y=0 65 01-99 Ringing Time

CM41 Y=0 67 01-32 OAI Announcement Connection Timer

CM42 10 01-10 Account Code Maximum digit(SCF FID=1, 3, 4, 7)

CM42 77 01-08 Number of digits for abbreviated code

CM49 Y=00 000-007 10/1602-1663 Announcement Service for OAI/Mes-sage Group No. for Multi-Connection Announcement Service for OAI

CM65 Y=27 Tenant No. 0/1 Recall/No Recall

CM71 00-63, 65, 66 000001-299300 System Speed Dialing memory area

CM72 Y=0 000-299 Stored Number Memory Slot number

CM74 Y=0 0000-9999 Stored Number Memory Slot number

CM74 Y=5 X-XXXXXXXX 0000-9999 Memory Slot number abbreviated code


F0006 OAI Function Key

CMD7 Y=2 000-127 1000-1007 Voice Response System No.Continued on next page

,

4-8 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch4001.fm




FLF

CM08 216 1 OAI

CM20 Y=0-3 Access Code A157 First Digit of Authorization Code

CM42 11 01-10 Maximum Number of Digit for Autho-rization Code

CMD7 Y=5 00 X-XXXX Office Number

CMD7 Y=A 00 0/1 Recognition of AP database

CMD7 Y=A 01 0/1 Omission of AP database

KTFCM90 Y=00 My Line No. +

+ Key No.F1032-F1047 OAI Function Key

ACF

CM08 216 1 Authorization Code/ Forced Account Code

CM08 217 1 Remote Access to System (DISA)

CM08 362 0/1 SST after Dialing the Access Code for ID Code Class Change

CM20 Y=0-3 Access Code A086/A087 Access Code for ID Code Class Change

CM42 11, 12 01-10 Number of digits for Authorization Code/Forced Account Code/DISA13 01-16

CMD7 Y=3 00 000-127 RR Timer

TCF None

NTF None

ADF None

SSF

CM08 140 0/1 Message Wait Indication (MW)

CM08 222 0/1 Call Forwarding Method

CM08 235 0 Deletion of all stored Call History-No Answer/Message Waiting of the call-ing station when answering the call.


,

4-9 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch4001.fm




SSF

CM08 376 0/1 VMS via CCIS

CM08 443 0 VMS with MCI

CM08 444 0 Message Waiting lamp control


CM13 Y=03 Station No. 0 Message Waiting/Message Reminder

CM15 Y=000 00-15 0/1 Service Restriction Class

CM15 Y=010 00-15 0/1

CM15 Y=011 00-15 0/1

CM15 Y=012 00-15 0/1

CM15 Y=026 00-15 0/1

CM15 Y=027 00-15 0/1

CM20 Y=0-3 Access Code A180-A183 Access Code for Split Call Forwarding


CM41 Y=0 01 01-30 Elapsed Timing before Call Forward-ing-No Answer for trunk incoming call

CM41 Y=0 15 01-30 Elapsed Timing before Call Forward-ing-No Answer for internal call and assisted call

CM65 Y=23 Tenant No. 0 Internal Call from Station/Attendant

CM65 Y=24 Tenant No. 1 C.O. Incoming Call

CM65 Y=25 Tenant No. 1 Tie Line Incoming Call

CM78 Tenant No. + Block No.

Trunk Access Code + + Called No./Station No.

Split Call Forwarding Destination


F0A80/F0A82 Call Forwarding key


,

,

4-10 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch4001.fm




SMF

CM08 177 0/1 SMFN FID=9 to OAI terminal

CM08 379 0/1 Caller ID Display/Name Display (Attendant Called/Calling Name Dis-play) via CCIS

CM08 429 0/1 Multiline Terminal subline

CM08 460 0/1 SMFN STS (Status)

CM08 461 0/1 SMFN when answering a held call

CM08 462 0/1 ANI/Caller ID/CPN to OAI Terminal

CM08 464 0/1 TSAPI/SCF facility

CM08 669 0 SMFN when displaying DND

CM08 804 0/1 SMFN PS Terminal Type

CM08 805 0/1 SMFN STS (Status) for SMFN FID=3/1

CM08 808 0/1 SMFN STS (Status) for SMFN FID=2

CM08 811 0/1 SMFN STS (Status) for SMFN FID=1

CM08 815 0/1 SMFN when recalling a Non-exclusive hold call

CM08 817 0/1 SMFN STS (Status) for SMFN FID=1/2

CM08 818 0/1 SMFN when providing an Exclusive hold call

CM08 839 0/1 OAI SMFN with intermediate infor-mation

CM08 840 0/1 SMFN when setting CAMP ON

CM08 847 0/1 SMFN when setting CAMP ON for the Call Hold status


4-11 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch4001.fm




SMF

CM08 851 0 Sending OAI SMFN STS (status) 3-9/3-10 when a call in OAI queuing is released


CM15 Y=002 00-15 1

CM15 Y=003 00-15 1

CM20 Y=0-3 Access Code A000-A005 Access Code for Outgoing Trunk Queuing/Call Back


CM35 Y=012 Trunk Route No.

0-3 Number of digits for DevelopmentTable 0


0/1 Digit conversion on DID display


0/1 The Capability of Outgoing Trunk Queuing


0/1 Call Waiting for DID call


3 DID digit conversion Development Table

CM76 Y=00 DID No. 000-999 Number Conversion Block No. forDevelopment Table 0

CM76 Y=10 000-999 0/1 Call Waiting for DID call per DIDincoming LDN

FSMCM90 Y=00 My Line No. +

+ Key No.F0004 OAI Function Key

Health check

None

,

4-12 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch4001.fm

OAI BASIC DATA ASSIGNMENT

OAI BASIC DATA ASSIGNMENTDESCRIPTION DATA




•

(1)(2)

Y=001 (Maintenance Port [0] + Unit No. [01])

00XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX:0.0.0.0-255.255.255.254:IP Address for the system (Maximum 15 digits)NONE : No data



NOTE 2: When entering the Subnet Mask by this data, a period (.) must be en-tered between the numbers (exam-ple: 255.255.255.252).

•

(1)(2)


01XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX:255.0.0.0-255.255.255.252:Subnet Mask for the system (Maximum 15 digits)NONE : No data

START

CM0BRESET

RESET

A

JULY/18/2008

4-13 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch4001.fm

OAI BASIC DATA ASSIGNMENT

DESCRIPTION DATA



NOTE 2: When entering the Default Gateway by this data, a period (.) must be en-tered between the numbers (exam-ple: 255.255.255.254).

NOTE 3: There are the following conditions when setting the Default Gateway Address by this command.• Only one Default Gateway

Address can be set for the system.• Set the Default Gateway Address

to the Maintenance port (Y=0XX) when not using VoIPDB.

• Set the Default Gateway Address to the VOIP port (Y=1XX/2XX) when using VoIPDB.

•

(1)(2)


02XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX:0.0.0.0-255.255.255.254:Default Gateway Address for the system (Maximum 15 digits)NONE : No data

Select the port for OAI. •(1)(2)


Assign the Port number for OAI to the system. •

(1)(2)


410 : Port No. 10241 : Port No. 10252 : Port No. 10393 : Port No. 60030

Assign the office number for OAI, if required. •(1)(2)

Y=500X-XXXX: Office No.

A

CM0B

RESET

RESET

RESET

CMD7

END

4-14 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch4001.fm

MSF DATA ASSIGNMENT

MSF DATA ASSIGNMENTTo start up MSF from a Multiline Terminal by using an OAI function key:

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the OAI function key for starting up MSF to a Multiline Terminal.

•(1)(2)

Y=00My Line No. + + Key No.F1032-F1047: OAI Function Key No. 0-15

When pressing the OAI function key to start up MSF, assign the operation code to the OAI function key assigned by CM90.

•(1)(2)

Y=0F1032-F1047: OAI Function Key No. 0-15128-191: Operation Code for MSF

When dialing a digit code (1-3 digits) after pressing OAI function key to start up MSF, as-sign the digit number of digit code, then assign the operation code to the digit code.

•(1)(2)

•(1)(2)

Y=0F1032-F1047: OAI Function Key No. 0-15DCX (X=1-3): Digit Number of Digit Code

Y=6X-XXX: Digit Code (X=0-9, #)128-191: Operation Code for MSF

Assign the waiting timer for receiving an an-swer signal (RR signal) after starting up MSF, if required.

•(1)(2)

Y=300000-127: 8-508 seconds


Specify a chime from the Multiline Terminal when receiving RR signal of MSF.

•(1)(2)

Y=7F1032-F1047: OAI Function Key No. 0-1500 : Not sent01 : Send

START

CM90,

CMD7

END

4-15 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch4001.fm

MSF DATA ASSIGNMENT

To start up MSF from PB Telephone/Multiline Terminal by using an access code:

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the Service Restriction Class B for starting up MSF to the required stations.

NOTE: After starting up the MSF from a PB telephone or Multiline Terminal, the PB receiver is busy during MSF mode. Therefore, you must make sure that a call cannot be originated if all PB receivers are used. To pre-vent the “all busy,” we recommend using the OAI function key on Multi-line Terminal, as the PB receiver is not used for the Multiline Terminal.

•(1)(2)

Y=02 X-XXXXXXXX: Station No. XX ZZZZ: 00-15 : Service Restriction Class B

•(1)

(2)

Y=059 00-15: Service Restriction Class B


Assign the access code for starting up MSF. •(1)(2)

Y=0-3 Number Plan Group 0-3X-XXXX: Access Code for MSFA084

Assign the operation code to the access code assigned by CM20>A084.

NOTE 1: The operation code means a number to designate each OAI application.

NOTE 2: The maximum number of operation codes is 16.

•(1)

(2)

Y=1X-XXXX: Access Code assigned by

CM20>A084128-191: Operation Code for MSF

Assign the waiting timer for receiving an an-swer signal after starting up MSF, if required.

•(1)(2)

Y=300000-127: 8-508 seconds

(4 second increments)If no data is set, the default setting is 000 (8 seconds).

Assign the number of the terminals (PB tele-phone) to be in the terminal mode simulta-neously.

•(1)(2)

Y=40000 : 32 terminals01-31: 2-62 terminals32 : 63 terminals

START

CM12

CM15

CM20

CMD7

A

4-16 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch4001.fm

MSF DATA ASSIGNMENT

DESCRIPTION DATA

When sending a message through the Voice Response System to PB telephone/Multiline Terminal user by using TCF-D facility:

When sending a tone to PB telephone/Multi-line Terminal user by using TCF-D facility:

When not sending a message or tone:

A

CMD7

C BEND

4-17 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch4001.fm

MSF DATA ASSIGNMENT

DESCRIPTION DATA


•(1)(2)

Y=00000-007: Built-in VRS on CPU blade10: Announcement Service in the OAI

Terminal mode

To record, replay or delete a message, assign the respective Voice Response System access code.

•(1)(2)


Specify the message replay timer in the OAI terminal mode, if required.

•(1)(2)

Y=05601-99: 4-396 seconds


Assign the Voice Response System number. •(1)(2)

Y=2 000-127: Message No. 1 XXXXXX: 000-007: Voice Response System

No.

B

CM49

CM20

CM41

CMD7

END

4-18 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch4001.fm

MSF DATA ASSIGNMENT

DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify the tone sending timer in the OAI ter-minal mode, if required.

•(1)(2)

Y=05601-99: 4-396 seconds


C

CM41

END

4-19 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch4001.fm

TMF DATA ASSIGNMENT

TMF DATA ASSIGNMENT

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the OAI function key for starting up TMF to a Multiline Terminal.

•(1)(2)


When you start up the TMF by pressing the OAI function key, assign the operation code to the OAI function key assigned by CM90.

•(1)(2)

Y=0F1032-F1047: OAI Function Key No. 0-15192-255: Operation Code for TMF

When you start up the TMF by dialing a digit code (1-3 digits) after pressing the OAI func-tion key, assign the digit number of the digit code, then assign the operation code to the dig-it code.

•(1)(2)

•(1)(2)

Y=0F1032-F1047: OAI Function Key No. 0-15DCX (X=1-3): Digit Number of Digit Code

Y=6X-XXX: Digit Code (X=0-9, #)192-255: Operation Code for TMF

Assign the waiting timer for receiving an an-swer signal after starting up the TMF, if re-quired.

•(1)(2)

Y=300000-127: 8-508 seconds


Assign the maximum number of terminals to be in TMF simultaneously.

•(1)(2)

Y=40100 : 32 terminals01-31: 2-62 terminals32 : 63 terminals

Specify a chime from Multiline Terminal when receiving RR signal of TMF.

•(1)(2)

Y=7F1032-F1047: OAI Function Key No. 0-1500 : Not sent01 : Send

START

CM90,

CMD7

A

4-20 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch4001.fm

TMF DATA ASSIGNMENT

DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify a chime from Multiline Terminal when setting up TMF.

•(1)

(2)

Y=8 00: Chime before sending terminal messag-

es (when pressing the OAI Function key)

02: Chime after sending terminal messages00 : Not ring01 : Ring

Specify the display of help on Multiline Termi-nal when setting up TMF.

•(1)

(2)

Y=8 01: Display help before sending terminal

messages (When pressing the OAI Function key)

03: Display help after sending terminal messages

00 : Not displayed01 : Displayed

A

CMD7

END

4-21 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch4001.fm

MRF DATA ASSIGNMENT

MRF DATA ASSIGNMENT

DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify a chime from Multiline Terminal at the time terminal mode is released.

•(1)

(2)

Y=A0B: Chime sending out at the time (MRFR,

MRFI) terminal mode release0 : Not ring1 : Ring

START

CMD7

END

4-22 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch4001.fm

SCF DATA ASSIGNMENT

SCF DATA ASSIGNMENTTo provide Call Origination with Ringing (FID=3):

To originate a call with Account Code (FID=1, 3, 4, 7):

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the Ringing Tone Sending time for SCF of OAI.

•(1)(2)

Y=065: OAI RGT Sending Time 01-99: 4-396 seconds


DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify the maximum number of digits for Ac-count Code.

(1)(2)


START

CM41

END

START

CM42

END

4-23 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch4001.fm

SCF DATA ASSIGNMENT

If the Voice Response System or Tone is provided, do the following programming:

To provide Queue Connection (FID=4):

DESCRIPTION DATA


•(1)(2)

Y=00 000-007: Built-in VRS on CPU blade10: Announcement Service in the OAI Ter-

minal mode


Y=2 000-127: Message No. 1 XXXXXX: 000-007: Voice Response System

No.

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the UCD group. •(1)(2)


be linked

Assign the Pilot station and Member station to queuing for SCF of OAI.

•

(1)(2)

Y=1 Distinction of Member station from Pilot station

X-XXXXXXXX: Station No. 2: Off-Hook suppressed

(Unable to place or receive a call.)3: Pilot station (Monitor No.)


Y=2 X-XXXXXXXX: UCD Station No. 00-15: UCD Group 00-15

START

CM49

CMD7

END

START

CM17

END

4-24 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch4001.fm

SCF DATA ASSIGNMENT

To provide the system with a monitor number:

To send a called party number assigned by SCF (4th Party Term Information) as intermediate informationto VMS through MCI when a call is forwarded to VMS by Call Forwarding-All Calls:

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign a virtual station number to be used as the monitored number.

(1)(2)

0000-0999: Virtual Port No.X-XXXXXXXX: Virtual-Line number

Assign the Pilot station and Member station to queuing for SCF of OAI.

•

(1)(2)


X-XXXXXXXX: Station No. 2: Member station



Y=2 X-XXXXXXXX: UCD station No. 00-15: UCD Group 00-15

DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify whether OAI SCF with intermediate information via OAI queue is sent.

(1)(2)

8390: To send

START

CM11

CM17

END

START

CM08

END

4-25 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch4001.fm

SCF DATA ASSIGNMENT

To provide Announcement Call (FID=5):

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the Pilot station and Member station to queuing for SCF of OAI.When sending an announcement from the be-ginning on the Multi-Connection Announce-ment Service, set this data to “3”.

•

(1)(2)


X-XXXXXXXX: Station No. 2: Member station


Assign the method to send Multi-Connection Announcement.When sending an announcement from the be-ginning on the Multi-Connection Announce-ment, set this data to “1”.

•(1)(2)

Y=A X-XXXXXXXX: Pilot station No.0 : To be sent periodically1 : To be sent only once

When sending an announcement from the be-ginning on the Multi-Connection Announce-ment, assign the latency time of sending the announcement after receiving SCF FID=5.

•(1)(2)

Y=0 67: OAI Announcement Connection Timer01-32: 4-128 seconds



•(1)(2)

Y=00000-007: Built-in VRS on CPU blade10 : Announcement Service for OAI16 XX: Multi-Connection Announcement

Service for OAIXX: Message Group No. (02-63)


Y=2000-127: Message No.1 XXXXXX: 000-007: Voice Response System

No.

START

CM17

CM41

CM49

CMD7

END

4-26 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch4001.fm

SCF DATA ASSIGNMENT

To provide Conversation Monitoring (FID=6) and Call Conferencing (FID=8):

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the Ringing Tone Sending time for SCF of OAI.

•(1)(2)

Y=065: OAI RGT Sending Time01-99: 4-396 seconds


Set the line/trunk in the following conditions.• Set the line/trunk which is talking with the

2nd party to the 3rd party line 1 of OAI SMFN FID=1 STS=0, when the call for Conversation Monitoring (SCF FID=6) or Call Conferencing (SCF FID=8) is terminat-ed to a station.

• Set the line/trunk which is talking with the 2nd party to the 3rd party line 2 of OAI SMFN FID=2 STS=0/1, when the call for Conversation Monitoring (SCF FID=6) is answered by a station.

(1)(2)

8160 : To set1 : Not set

START

CM41

CM08

END

4-27 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch4001.fm

SCF DATA ASSIGNMENT

To provide System Speed Dialing (FID=1, 3, 7):

DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify the System Speed Dialing security. (Stored number is displayed on Multiline Ter-minal for an outgoing call by System Speed Dialing.)

(1)(2)

0430 : Not displayed1 : Display

Specify Toll Restriction for an outgoing call by System Speed Dialing.

(1)(2)


Specify the 1000-Slot Memory Block number 00-03.

(1)(2)


(1)(2)


(1)(2)


(1)(2)



•(1)(2)



•(1)

(2)



Assign a Numbering Plan Group to each Tenant.

(1)(2)


START

CM08

CM12

CM15

CM29

A

4-28 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch4001.fm

SCF DATA ASSIGNMENT

DESCRIPTION DATA


•(1)(2)


(300-Slot Memory Block)A152: 1000-Slot Memory Block No. 00A151: 1000-Slot Memory Block No. 01A068: 1000-Slot Memory Block No. 02A150: 1000-Slot Memory Block No. 03A243: System Speed Dialing origination

(1-8 digits Abbreviated Code)

Assign the memory area for System Speed Di-aling. 300 memory slots are available per sys-tem. The number of slots available for each Tenant is also 300. Note that the memory blocks for Hot Line-Outside and Route Ad-vance (from Tie Line to C.O. Line) are includ-ed in the 300 memory slots.

Abbreviated Codes for this feature are auto-matically determined by assigning this com-mand, on each Tenant as shown below.

Example:

(1)

(2)

00-63: For stations within Tenant 00-6365 : For Hot Line-Outside66 : For Route Advance from Tie line to

C.O. lineXXX YYYXXX: 000-299: First Memory Slot No. in

BlockYYY: 001-300: Number of Slots to be

allocated in BlockFor example, to provide 20 memory slots starting at Slot 60: Data=060020

The number of digits for Abbreviated Code is automatically determined as shown below:• Less than 100 memory slots per Tenant: 2 digits (00-99)• In excess of 100 memory slots per Tenant: 3 digits (000-299)

A

CM20

CM71

Tenant 00

Slot 000

Slot 019

20MemorySlots

00

19

AbbreviatedCodes

Tenant 01

Slot 020

Slot 034

15MemorySlots

00

14

AbbreviatedCodes

B

4-29 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch4001.fm

SCF DATA ASSIGNMENT

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the number to be called to the Memory Slot number allocated by CM71.

•(1)(2)

Y=0000-299: Memory Slot No.Stored No.:Outgoing Access Code (Maximum 4 digits) + + Called Party’s No. (Maximum 26 digits)X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.Outgoing Access Code (Maximum 4 digits)CCC: ClearTo set a pause into the Stored No., enter “C” (Fixed pause=1.5 seconds) or “D” (Programmable pause specified by CM41 Y=0>38) after desired digits.

Assign the number to be dialed to each Memo-ry Slot number.

•(1)

(2)

Y=0XX YY Z XX: 00-19: 1000-Slot Memory Block No.YY: 00-99: 10-Slot Memory Block No.Z : 0-9: Memory Parcel No.Stored No.:Outgoing Access Code (Maximum 4 digits) + + Called Party’s No. (Maximum 26 digits)X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.Outgoing Access Code (Maximum 4 digits)CCC: ClearTo set a pause into the Stored No., enter “C” (Fixed pause=1.5 seconds) or “D” (Programmable pause specified by CM41 Y=0>38) after desired digits.

B

CM72

,

CM74

,

C

4-30 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch4001.fm

SCF DATA ASSIGNMENT

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the abbreviated code to each Memory Slot number that is assigned the stored number by CM74 Y=0.

NOTE 1: Memory area of System Speed Dial-ing with 1-8 digit abbreviated code is also used as the memory area of Station Speed Dialing. Do not as-sign the same Memory Slot number of System Speed Dialing with 1-8 digit abbreviated code (set by CM74 Y=0) and as Memory Slot number of Station Speed Dialing (set by CM73).

NOTE 2: Set the same number of digits as the digits of abbreviated code assigned by CM42 Y=77 to the first data.

NOTE 3: When setting the number of digits for abbreviated code to 5-8, the min-imum number of the abbreviated code that can be registered to the memory area is as follows.• 5-digit abbreviated code: 500• 6-digit abbreviated code: 333• 7-digit abbreviated code: 250• 8-digit abbreviated code: 200

•(1)

(2)

Y=5X-XXXXXXXX (X: 0-9): Abbreviated

CodeXX YY Z XX: 00-19: 1000-Slot Memory Block No.YY: 00-99: 10-Slot Memory Block No.Z : 0-9: Memory Parcel No.

Specify the number of digits for the abbreviat-ed code of System Speed Dialing origination.

(1)(2)


C

CM74

CM42

END

4-31 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch4001.fm

SCF DATA ASSIGNMENT

To specify whether a recall is sent to queuing for SCF of OAI when calling a busy station (FID=10):

To select the SCF error code type:

To specify the system operation after the C.O. call (TRK-B) hangs up, when a station that has a C.O. call(TRK-A) on consultation hold is talking with another C.O. call (TRK-B):

To allow the exchange of trunk when answering an Exclusive Hold call (FID=11):

DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify whether ACD (Automatic Call Distri-bution) is available in each tenant.

•(1)(2)

Y=2700-63: Tenant No.0 : Available (to recall) 1 : Not available (not recalled)

DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify the SCF error code type. (1)(2)

4650 : Error detail1 : Default error type

DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify the system operation after the TRK-B hangs up when a station that has a C.O. call (TRK-A) on consultation hold is talking with another C.O. call (TRK-B).

(1)(2)

5340 : Return to the original call (TRK-A)1 : ROT

DESCRIPTION DATA

Allow the exchange of trunk when answering an Exclusive hold call.

(1)(2)

8090 : Not allowed1 : To allow

START

CM65

END

START

CM08

END

START

CM08

END

START

CM08

END

4-32 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch4001.fm

SCF DATA ASSIGNMENT

To provide CAMP ON (FID=19):

DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify whether CAMP ON to the destination is set when Call Forwarding-All Calls.

(1)(2)

8460 : To set1 : Not set

Restrict DID Call Waiting to the each trunk routes.

•(1)(2)

Y=05900-63: Trunk Route No.1 : Restricted

START

CM08

CM35

END

4-33 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch4001.fm

SCF DATA ASSIGNMENT

To provide Executive Right of Way (Executive Override) (FID=22):

To provide DND override over CCIS:

DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify the Warning Tone sent to connected parties during Executive Right of Way (Exec-utive Override).

(1)(2)

0450 : Only once1 : Every 4 seconds


•(1)(2)


Allow Executive Right of Way (Executive Override) Calling side.

•(1)(2)

Y=00500-15: Service Restriction Class A 1 : Allow

Allow Executive Right of Way (Executive Override) Calling side.

•(1)(2)

Y=00900-15: Service Restriction Class A 1 : Allow

Assign a Numbering Plan Group to each Ten-ant.

(1)(2)


Assign the access code for Executive Right of Way (Executive Override).

•(1)(2)

Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3X-XXXX: Access CodeA006: Executive Right of Way (Executive

Override)

Assign the Executive Right of Way (Executive Override) key to the Multiline Terminal, if re-quired.

•(1)(2)

Y=00My Line No. + + Key No.F0006: Executive Right of Way (Executive

Override)

DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify the sending of station status to the des-tination office when the Multiline Terminal/ATTCON calls a station set the DND over CCIS.

(1)(2)

6690: To send DND setting

START

CM08

CM12

CM15

CM29

CM20

CM90,

END

START

CM08

END

4-34 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch4001.fm

FLF DATA ASSIGNMENT

FLF DATA ASSIGNMENT[North America Only]

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the access code to recognize Authori-zation Code for FLF.

NOTE: The access code should be assigned to the first one, two or three digits of Authorization Code. For example:

•(1)(2)

Y=0-3X-XXXX: Access CodeA157

Assign the maximum number of digits for Au-thorization Code.

(1)(2)

11 01-10 : Maximum Number of DigitsNONE : 10 digits

Assign the recognition of AP database by RR message.

•(1)(2)

Y=A000 : To provide1 : Not provided

Assign the omission of AP database for infor-mation added to RR message.

•(1)(2)

Y=A010 : Not omitted1 : To omit

Assign the office number. •(1)(2)

Y=500Office No. (Maximum 4 digits)

Provide the system with Authorization Code/Forced Account Code.

(1)(2)

2161 : Not provided (OAI)

START

CM20

1 2 3 4 5 6 (Authorization Code)Max. No. of digits assigned by CM42>11Access Code assigned by CM20>A157

CM42

CMD7

CM08

END

4-35 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch4001.fm

KTF DATA ASSIGNMENT

KTF DATA ASSIGNMENT

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the OAI function key for starting up FLF to a Multiline Terminal.

•(1)(2)


START

CM90,

END

4-36 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch4001.fm

ACF DATA ASSIGNMENT

ACF DATA ASSIGNMENT

DESCRIPTION DATA

Provide the system with Authorization Code/Forced Account Code.

(1)(2)

2161 : Not provided (OAI [ACF])

Provide the system with Remote Access to System (DISA).

(1)(2)

2171 : Not provided (OAI [ACF])

Specify whether SST is sent after dialing the access code for ID Code Class Change or not.

(1)(2)

3620 : No Tone1 : Service Set Tone (SST)

Assign the number of digits for each ID code of Authorization Code/Forced Account Code/Remote Access to System (DISA).

(1)

(2)

11: Authorization Code12: Forced Account Code01-10 : Number of digitsNONE : 10 digits

(1)(2)

13: Remote Access to System (DISA)01-16 : Number of digitsNONE : 16 digits

Assign the Access code for ID Code Class Change.

•(1)(2)

Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3X-XXXX: Access CodeA086: Authorization CodeA087: Forced Account Code

Assign the return result waiting timer for the PBX sent facility.

•(1)(2)

Y=300000-127: 8-508 seconds


START

CM08

CM42

CM20

CMD7

END

4-37 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch4001.fm

SSF DATA ASSIGNMENT

SSF DATA ASSIGNMENT

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the Message Wait Indication (VM) for My Line only or My Line and sub-line on Mul-tiline Terminal.

(1)(2)

1400 : MW for My Line and sub-lines1 : MW for My Line only


(1)(2)


When a forwarded call is terminated to the VMS via CCIS, specify whether Message Waiting from the VMS is provided for the called station.

(1)(2)


Assign the type of Voice Mail System. (1)(2)

4430: VMS with MCI

Specify Message Waiting lamp control from VMS with MCI to all stations.

NOTE: MW lamp control is only available to the stations in the opposite PBX connected with CCIS via MCI.Station dialing MW access codes are not allowed over CCIS.

(1)(2)

4440: Available

Assign the Message Waiting/Message Re-minder.

•(1)(2)

Y=03X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.0: To provide (For the station with MW

lamp)

START

CM08

CM13

END

4-38 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch4001.fm

SSF DATA ASSIGNMENT

To provide Split Call Forwarding-All Calls/Busy Line/No Answer (FID=8, 9, 10):

DESCRIPTION DATA


•(1)(2)


Allow Call Forwarding-All Calls/Busy Line/No Answer in Service Restriction Class A as-signed by CM12 Y=02.

••••

••

(1)

(2)

Y=000 Call Forwarding-All CallsY=010 Call Forwarding-No AnswerY=011 Call Forwarding-Busy LineY=012 Call Forwarding-Busy Line/

No AnswerY=026 Call Forwarding-All Calls-OutsideY=027 Call Forwarding-No Answer-

Outside00-15: Service Restriction Class A



(1)(2)


Assign the access code for setting Split Call Forwarding-All Calls/Busy Line/No Answer, Set and Cancel, respectively.

•(1)(2)

Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3X-XXXX: Access CodeA180: Split Call Forwarding-All Calls SetA181: Split Call Forwarding-All Calls

CancelA182: Split Call Forwarding-Busy Line/


No Answer Cancel

Assign Split Call Forwarding-All Calls/Busy Line/No Answer keys to the Multiline Termi-nals, as required.

•(1)(2)

Y=00My Line No. + + Key No.F0A80: Split Call Forwarding-All Calls

Set/CancelF0A82: Split Call Forwarding-Busy Line/


START

CM12

CM15

CM29

CM20

CM90,

A

4-39 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch4001.fm

SSF DATA ASSIGNMENT

DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify the setting method for Call Forward-ing-All Calls-Outside/Busy Line-Outside/No Answer-Outside.

(1)(2)




Specify the timing of Call Forwarding-No Answer for a trunk incoming call.

•(1)(2)

Y=001: Timing for a trunk incoming call01-30: 4-120 seconds

(4 seconds increment)If no data is set, the default setting is 32-36 sec-onds.

Specify the timing of Call Forwarding-No Answer for an internal call or an assisted call.

•(1)

(2)

Y=015: Timing for an internal call or an assisted

call01-30: 4-120 seconds

(4 seconds increment)If no data is set, the default setting is 32-36 sec-onds.

Assign the Call Forwarding type. (1)(2)

6081 : As per CM65 Y=23/24/25

Assign the Call Forwarding type when an internal call from Station/Attendant is termi-nated.

•(1)(2)

Y=2300-63: Tenant No.0: Split Call Forwarding-All Calls/Busy

Line/No Answer

Assign the Call Forwarding type when C.O. incoming call is terminated.

•(1)(2)

Y=2400-63: Tenant No.1 : Call Forwarding-All Calls/Busy Line/

No Answer

Assign the Call Forwarding type when Tie Line incoming call is terminated.

•(1)(2)

Y=2500-63: Tenant No.1 : Call Forwarding-All Calls/Busy Line/

No Answer

A

CM08

CM41

CM08

CM65

B

4-40 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch4001.fm

SSF DATA ASSIGNMENT

NOTE: The operating procedure for Split Call Forwarding-All Calls/Busy Line/No Answer is as fol-lows:CM78 is used to assign the destination forwarded when the destination No. 0-7 is specified.

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the destination of Split Call Forward-ing-All Calls/Busy Line/No Answer. NOTE

(1)

(2)

XX YXX: 00-63: Tenant No.Y : 0-7: Block No.X-XX + + YY...Y

X-XX : Trunk Access Code (1-2 digits)YY...Y: Called No. (Maximum 26 digits)

X-XXXXXXXX: Station No. (1-8 digits)

Dial Access Code for Split Call Forwarding-All Calls/Busy Line/No Answer.

Dial Destination No. X (0-9).0: BLOCK No. 01: 12: 23: 3 Destination assigned by 4: 4 CM78.5: 56: 67: BLOCK No. 78: Destination for Call Forwarding-All Calls/

Busy Line/No Answer9: Destination for Station Speed Dialing

(BLOCK No. 0)

or +

Depress Split Call Forwarding-All Calls/Busy Line/No Answer key.

B

CM78

,

END

4-41 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch4001.fm

SMF DATA ASSIGNMENT

SMF DATA ASSIGNMENTDESCRIPTION DATA

Provide the system with Last Number Redial for Single Line Telephone in order to notify the station number that calls to an outside party (SMFN FID=9) to the OAI terminal.

(1)(2)

1770 : Provide1 : Not provided

Assign the automatic setting of SMFR for Multiline Terminal Sub line.

(1)(2)


Specify OAI SMFN STS (status) for Call Transfer from a station.

(1)(2)

4600 : SMFN STS=71 : SMFN STS=0

Specify whether OAI SMFN is sent when an-swering a held call.

(1)(2)

4610 : Send1 : Not sent

Specify whether ANI/Caller ID/CPN is sent to OAI terminal.

(1)(2)


Assign the OAI-TSAPI/SCF facility. (1)(2)

4640 : Same as IMX/IPX system

(recommended setting)1 : SMFN Off-Hook indication sent

Specify the type of terminal for OAI SMFN. (1)(2)

8040 : Single Line Telephone1 : PS

Specify OAI SMFN STS (status) when a sta-tion answers the forwarded call with Call For-warding-No Answer (SMFN FID=3/1).

(1)(2)

8050 : SMFN STS=5/61 : SMFN STS=1

START

CM08

A

4-42 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch4001.fm

SMF DATA ASSIGNMENT

DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify OAI SMFN STS (status) when a sta-tion answers the forwarded call with Call For-warding-All Calls/Busy Line/No Answer (SMFN FID=2).

(1)(2)

8080 : SMFN STS=5/6/71 : SMFN STS=0

Specify OAI SMFN STS (status) when the for-warded call with Call Forwarding-All Calls/Busy Line is terminated to a station (SMFN FID=1).

(1)(2)

8110 : SMFN STS=4/51 : SMFN STS=1

Specify whether OAI SMFN is sent when re-calling a Non-exclusive hold call.[For EU]

(1)(2)


Specify OAI SMFN STS (status) when the for-warded call with Call Forwarding-All Calls/Busy line/ No Answer is terminated to a station via CCIS (SMFN FID=1 STS=4/5/6), or an-swered via CCIS (SMFN FID=2 STS=5/6/7).

(1)(2)

8170 : SMFN STS=4/5/6

(When forwarded call is terminated) SMFN STS=5/6/7 (When forwarded call is answered)

1 : SMFN STS=0

Specify whether OAI SMFN is sent when pro-viding an Exclusive hold call.

(1)(2)


Specify whether OAI SMFN with intermediate information via OAI queue is sent.[For EU]

(1)(2)


A

CM08

END

4-43 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch4001.fm

SMF DATA ASSIGNMENT

To send SMFN STS (Status) to OAI terminal in the case of Outgoing Trunk Queuing/Call Back.

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign Service Restriction Class A to the nec-essary stations.

•(1)(2)

Y=02X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.XXZZXX: 00-15 : Service Restriction Class A

Allow Outgoing Trunk Queuing in Service Re-striction Class A assigned by CM12 Y=02.

•(1)

(2)



Allow Call Back in Service Restriction Class A assigned by CM=12 Y=02.

•(1)

(2)




(1)(2)


Assign the access code for setting Outgoing Trunk Queuing/Call Back.

•(1)(2)

Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3X-XXXX: Access CodeA004: Outgoing Trunk Queuing/Call Back

SetA005: Outgoing Trunk Queuing/Call Back

Cancel

Assign the Outgoing Trunk Queuing/Call Back key to the required Multiline Terminal.

•(1)(2)

Y=00My Line No. + + Key No.F0004: Outgoing Trunk Queuing/Call Back

Specify the Outgoing Trunk Queuing capabili-ty for each trunk route.

•(1)(2)

Y=02800-63: Trunk Route No.0 : Restricted1 : Allow

START

CM12

CM15

CM29

CM20

CM90,

CM35

END

4-44 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch4001.fm

SMF DATA ASSIGNMENT

To provide sending SMFN during CAMP ON (FID=1, 2):

DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify whether SMFN is sent when setting CAMP ON (SMFN FID=1 STS=8) and when answering by pressing Answer Key from the set PBX (SMFN FID=2 STS=8).

(1)(2)



•(1)(2)

Y=01200-63: Trunk Route No.Number of digits0 : 1 digit1 : 2 digits2 : 3 digits3 : 4 digits

Assign the data for DID Call Waiting to the trunk routes.

•(1)(2)


Specify the Development Table for DID digit conversion.

•(1)(2)

Y=17000-63: Trunk Route No.3 : Development Table 0

Provide DID digit conversion to the trunk route number.

•(1)(2)



•(1)(2)


Specify Call Waiting for DID call per incom-ing LDN number.

NOTE: CM76 Y=10 is effective when the 2nd data of CM35 Y=018 is “0” (Received Digits Conversion is to be provided).

•(1)

(2)


assigned by CM76 Y=00.0 : Restricted1 : Allow

START

CM08

CM35

CM76

END

4-45 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch4001.fm

SMF DATA ASSIGNMENT

To send SMFN STS (status) 3-9/3-10 when a call in OAI queuing is released:

To provide sending SMFN during CAMP ON to the opposite office via CCIS (FID=6):

To provide DND displaying (FID=12):

DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify whether OAI SMFN STS (status) 3-9/3-10 is sent when the call in OAI queuing is released.

(1)(2)

8510: To send

DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify whether Caller ID Display/Name Dis-play (Attendant Called/Calling Name Display) is provided for the called station when a call is terminated via CCIS.

(1)(2)


Specify whether OAI SMFN is sent when set-ting CAMP ON of OAI SMFN FID=6 STS (status)=3 for the station/trunk in Call Hold status.

(1)(2)


DESCRIPTION DATA

Provide the DND displaying on OAI when an observed station calls (SMFR FID=139) to the destination office set the DND over CCIS/ISDN/QSIG.

(1)(2)

6690: To provide

START

CM08

END

START

CM08

END

START

CM08

END

4-46 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch4001.fm

TROUBLESHOOTING FOR ETHER

TROUBLESHOOTING FOR ETHERThe following table shows the cause of trouble and the remedial action for ETHER. When trouble occurs,take the remedial action.

Troubleshooting for ETHER

The LED Indications on the CC-CP00 blade on normal condition are as follows:

TROUBLE CAUSE ACTIONThe system cannot communicate with an external proces-sor at all.

The cables between the system and an external processor have not been con-nected properly.

Connect the cable properly.

The IP Address overlaps with another. Confirm the data set by CM0B Y=0XX/1XX>00, and assign the cor-rect data.

Port number does not match. Confirm the port number.• OAI port number must be set to

1024/1025/1039/60030 by CM0B Y=001>41.

• PCPro port number is fixed to 60000.

LAMP NAME COLOR FUNCTION

LINK Green Remains lit when link is established.

100M Green ON : Ethernet is operating at 100 Mbps.OFF: Ethernet is operating at 10 Mbps.


5-1 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch5001.fm

Chapter

5

WCS FEATURES (PCS)

This chapter explains the WCS system (PCS) outline, system spec-ifications, system conditions and programming.

5-2 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch5001.fm

WCS SYSTEM (PCS) OUTLINE

WCS SYSTEM (PCS) OUTLINEThe wireless communication system (WCS) provides interface with a Personal Station (PS) via a ZoneTransceiver (ZT).

There are three types of system configurations available as follows:

(1) Integrated TypeThe system provides both PBX and WCS functions.

(2) Adjunct Type (Analog Interface)The WCS is an adjunct system to the PBX linked by line-trunk connection.

(3) Adjunct Type (CCIS Interface)The WCS is an adjunct system to the PBX linked by CCIS interface.

Next page shows the system outline of the WCS.

5-3 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch5001.fm

WCS SYSTEM (PCS) OUTLINE

WCS System Outline

CCT : CCIS Trunk BladeCOT : Central Office TrunkZT : Zone TransceiverCSI : ZT Interface

VRS : Voice Response SystemDLC : Digital Line CircuitLC : Line CircuitPS : Personal Station

LCSLT

DLC

CSI COT

LCZT

SLTPS

PS

PSPBX with WCS

(1) Integrated Type

DLC

CSI COTZT

PS

PS

PSWCS

LC

PBX

(2) Adjunct Type (Analog Interface)

CSIZT

PS

PS

PS WCS

(3) Adjunct Type (CCIS Interface)

CCIS

LCSLT

DLC

ANALOG

VRS

VRS

VRS

CCT CCT

PBX

TerminalMultiline

MultilineTerminal

TerminalMultiline

5-4 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch5001.fm

WCS SYSTEM (PCS) SPECIFICATIONS

WCS SYSTEM (PCS) SPECIFICATIONS

System Specifications

DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATIONS REMARKSWireless Protocol Based on second generation wireless telephone

system standard RCR-STD-28 FCC Sub part D, UTAM complied

Distance between PBX and ZT

• ZT III-UNOTE: At voltage of – 48 V. Without arrester.

• ZT III-U at lower voltageNOTE: At voltage of – 45 V. Without arrester.

Interface with a PBX

Analog station line interface Adjunct Type (Analog Interface)

T1 or E1 interface with CCIS Adjunct Type (CCIS Interface)

WIRE DIAMETER 26 AWG 24 AWG 22 AWG 19 AWG

PBXPOWER SUPPLY 2W 2500 ft.

(762 m)4000 ft.

(1219 m)5500 ft.

(1676 m)8000 ft.

(2438 m)

4W 4300 ft.(1310 m)

6900 ft.(2103 m)

9500 ft.(2895 m)

13000 ft.(3958 m)

LOCALPOWER SUPPLY

11000 ft.(3350 m)

13000 ft.(3958 m)

13000 ft.(3958 m)

13000 ft.(3958 m)

WIRE DIAMETER 26 AWG 24 AWG 22 AWG 19 AWG

PBXPOWER SUPPLY 2W 2000 ft.

(609 m)3200 ft.(975 m)

4700 ft.(1432 m)

7000 ft.(2131 m)

4W 3500 ft.(1066 m)

5600 ft.(1706 m)

8200 ft.(2499 m)

12200 ft.(3718 m)

LOCALPOWER SUPPLY

11000 ft.(3350 m)

13000 ft.(3958 m)

13000 ft.(3958 m)

13000 ft.(3958 m)

5-5 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch5001.fm

ZT SPECIFICATIONS

ZT SPECIFICATIONS

ZT Specifications

ITEM SPECIFICATIONS• ZT III-U

Output Power 6.8 mW

Type of Interface U Interface

Number of Simultaneous Speech Path Maximum 3

Power Supply • PBX Power Supply (DC – 48 V)• Local Power Supply (AC 100 V/200 V)

Power Consumption Maximum 3 W

Operating Conditions Ambient Temperature: –10 - 50 °CRelative Humidity : 45 - 85 % (non-condensing)Installation Location : Indoor

Dimensions (unit: mm) 160 (W) × 159 (D) × 40 (H) (Excluding Antena)

Weight Approx. 400 g

5-6 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch5001.fm

PROGRAMMING SUMMARYINITIAL SET UP OF SYSTEM

PROGRAMMING SUMMARYProgram the system data for the WCS, according to the following procedure.

INITIAL SET UP OF SYSTEM

NOTE: For the CCIS data programming, refer to the Networking Manual.

END

ZT AUTHORIZATION

PS DATA PROGRAMMING

Adjunct Type (CCIS Interface)Adjunct Type (Analog Interface)

WCS FEATURE PROGRAMMING

TYPE OF SYSTEM?

Integrated Type

ZT DATA PROGRAMMING

START

CCIS DATA

Page 5-10

Page 5-18

Page 5-27

MAINTENANCE DATAPROGRAMMING Page 5-50

PROGRAMMING

NOTE

TRUNK DATAPROGRAMMING

Page 5-22

Page 5-16

5-7 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch5001.fm

PROGRAMMING SUMMARYCHANGING ZT DATA IN SERVICE

CHANGING ZT DATA IN SERVICEWhen you change the ZT data (CM10 Y=00, CMAD, CMAE) in service, making the ZT busy is required.In this case, do the following procedure.

*To make the ZT busy or idle in service, assign as follows:

CME5 Y=3(1) 000-127: ZT No.(2) 1: Make idle

2: Make busy after calls finished.

START

END

CHANGE OF ZT DATA?NOYES

CHANGE OF ZT DATA(CM10 Y=00, CMAD, CMAE)

MAKE BUSY OF ZT(CME5 Y=3>2)*

INPUT THE REQUIRED DATA BY PCPro

ACCESS TO WEB SERVER

CHANGE OF OTHER DATA

MAKE IDLE OF ZT(CME5 Y=3>1)*

CHANGE OF ZT NUMBER(CM10 Y=00)

or

FROM PC

MAKE IDLE OF ZT(CME5 Y=3>1)*

5-8 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch5001.fm

PROGRAMMING SUMMARYCHANGING PS DATA

CHANGING PS DATAIf you change the PS data which has been already downloaded to a PS, do PS data download again byCM1D.

CM1D Y=20(1) X-XXXXXXXX: PS station No.(2) 1

5-9 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch5001.fm

PROGRAMMING SUMMARYREPLACING PS

REPLACING PSWhen you replace the PS with a new one, moreover assign the same PS station number to the new PS, itis required to delete the PS station number registered to the WCS by CM10 Y=04 before downloading thenew PS data. Use CM10 Y=04 as follows.

CM10 Y=04(1) 000-511: Virtual Port number(2) CCC: Clear

5-10 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch5001.fm

ZT DATA PROGRAMMINGINITIAL SET UP


DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign a Unit and Slot number to the CSI blade.

•(1)

(2)

Y=0XX ZZXX: 01-50: Unit No.ZZ : 01-18: Slot No.50: CSI blade

Assign a ZT number to the required Physical Port number.

NOTE: The Circuit number can be set only 01, 05, 09 and 13.

•(1)

(2)

Y=00XX YY ZZ: Physical Port No.XX: 01-50: Unit No.YY: 01-18: Slot No.ZZ : 01-32: Circuit No.EE 3 XXXXXX: 000-127 (ZT No.)

START

CM05

BLADE RESET

CM10

A

5-11 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch5001.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign an area to be called to each ZT.

NOTE: Confirm that the busy LED lamp on CSI blade is flashing (60 IPM).

•(1)(2)

Y=00000-127: ZT No.XX Y ZZXX: 00-31 (Calling Area No.)Y : 0-7 (Group No.)ZZ : 00-31 (Group ZT No.)

Assign the SYS-ID. •(1)(2)

Y=0001AA BBBBBB CCCCAA : Tenant No.BBBBBB: Unit IDCCCC : Additional Information

Specify the Nation Code. •(1)(2)

Y=0003: Nation Code Assignment003: North America 310004: North America 311005: North America 312006: North America 313007: North America 314008: North America 315009: North America 316

A

CMAD

CMAE

BLADE RESET

B

JULY/18/2008

5-12 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch5001.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign a Control Carrier Information.

NOTE 1: Be sure to set from the 1st digit to last digit (10 digits). Last 4 digits must be set as “0000”.

NOTE 2: Select the Control Carrier number as follows:For example:AA: 02BB: 04CC: 06

NOTE 3: After changing CMAE Y=15, a sys-tem reset is required for the change to take effect and PS operation data must be downloaded every time the control carrier number is changed.

NOTE 4: Call NTAC or get your LVP code before proceeding.

•(1)(2)

Y=1500: Assignment of Carrier PriorityAA BB CC DD EE: Control Carrier No.(See below.)AA: 1st PriorityBB: 2nd PriorityCC: 3rd PriorityDD: 4th PriorityEE : 5th PriorityControl Carrier No. (01-20)01: 1920. 35 MHz02: 1920. 65 MHz03: 1920. 95 MHz04: 1921. 55 MHz05: 1921. 85 MHz06: 1922. 15 MHz07: 1923. 05 MHz08: 1923. 35 MHz09: 1924. 25 MHz10: 1924. 55 MHz11: 1925. 45 MHz12: 1925. 75 MHz13: 1926. 65 MHz14: 1926. 95 MHz15: 1927. 85 MHz16: 1928. 15 MHz17: 1928. 45 MHz18: 1929. 05 MHz19: 1929. 35 MHz20: 1929. 65 MHz

NOTE 4

Assign a Control Carrier Selection Pattern. •(1)(2)

Y=1501: Assignment of Carrier Selection Pattern01: 1920-1930 MHz02: 1920-1925 MHz

B

CMAEBLADE RESET

BLADE RESET

C

5-13 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch5001.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA


(1)(2)

19001-31 : PAD data





Specify the PAD data for a station/trunk-to-conference trunk.

(1)(2)

19100-63 : PAD data


44: -1 dB45: 0 dB46: +1 dB


NONE : -10 dB(+: Gain, -: Loss)


•(1)(2)



15: -1 dB16: 0 dB17: +1 dB



C

CM42

~~

~~

CM35

~~

D

JULY/18/2008

5-14 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch5001.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA


•(1)(2)



15: -1 dB16: 0 dB17: +1 dB



D

CM35

~~

END

5-15 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch5001.fm

ZT DATA PROGRAMMINGCHANGING ZT DATA IN SERVICE

CHANGING ZT DATA IN SERVICEWhen you change the ZT data (CM10, CMAD, CMAE) in service, making the ZT busy is required.

DESCRIPTION DATA

Make the ZT busy. •(1)(2)

Y=3000-127: ZT No.2: Make busy after calls finished.

Make the ZT idle. •(1)(2)

Y=3000-127: ZT No.1: Make Idle

START

CME5

Change the ZT data. See “INITIAL SET UP”.

Page 5-10

CM10

CMAD

CMAE

CME5

END

5-16 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch5001.fm

ZT AUTHORIZATIONINITIAL SET UP OF ZT

ZT AUTHORIZATIONINITIAL SET UP OF ZTDo the following procedure to set up the ZT.

START

ZT DATA PROGRAMMING

END

Page 5-10

5-17 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch5001.fm

ZT AUTHORIZATIONSETTING UP OF ADDITIONAL ZT

SETTING UP OF ADDITIONAL ZTDo the following procedure to add the ZT.

START

ZT DATA PROGRAMMING

END

Page 5-10

5-18 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch5001.fm

PS DATA PROGRAMMING

PS DATA PROGRAMMINGProceed with the following procedure after SYS ID Assignment and ZT Authorization by NTAC.

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign a PS station number to the required Vir-tual Port number.

•(1)(2)

Y=04000-511: Virtual Port No.X-XXXXXXXX: PS station No.

(X=0-9, *, #)

Assign a PS-ID.(Primary PS station only)

•(1)(2)

Y=21X-XXXXXXXX: PS station No.XX···XX: PS-ID (Maximum 9 digits, Deci-

mal)

NOTE 1: Insert leading zeroes in the PS-ID for a maximum of nine digits. For example, if PS ID is1234, enter 000001234 as the PS-ID.

NOTE 2: When a PS is assigned as a sub-line (second line), CM1D Y=21 should not be assignedand must be set to default “NONE”.

NOTE 3: PS-ID is shown inside the battery compartment of your PS.

See “MULTI-LINE OPERATION-PS” Programming. Page 5-40

START

CM10

CM1D

A

5-19 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch5001.fm

PS DATA PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION DATA

Set the terminal type of the PS.Set this data also to the Sub-line PS station number, if provided.

NOTE: PS software version is represented by the lower 3 digits of the PS’s issue number which is written on the label in the rear side of PS as shown be-low.

•(1)

(2)

Y=15X-XXXXXXXX: Primary PS station No./

Sub-line PS station No.00 : Dterm PS II/Dterm PS III Type with PS

software version 7.02 or later NOTE15 : Dterm PS II/Dterm PS III Type with PS

software version under 7.02/ NOTEFormer Dterm PS Type

Specify the kind of PS station Primary PS or Subline PS.

•(1)(2)

Y=16X-XXXXXXXX: PS station No.0 : Subline PS1 : Primary PS

Assign the sub-line PS number to each primary PS station.

•(1)(2)

Y=01X-XXXXXXXX: Primary PS station No.X-XXXXXXXX: Sub-line PS station No.

A

CM1D

Label

Rear side of PS

*072 means that PS software

version is 7.02.

NEC

DATE: 02-03

SER. NO. XXXXXXX

ISSUE NO. XXXXX072*

B

JULY/18/2008

5-20 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch5001.fm

PS DATA PROGRAMMING

DESCRIPTION DATA

Download the PS operation data to each PS by assigning the 2nd data 1.

•(1)(2)

Y=20 X-XXXXXXXX: PS station No.1: To be executed

Refer to “Dterm PS User Manual”.

NOTE 1: All steps for setting up ZTs and all wiring must be successfully com-pleted and ZTs must be idle before downloading PS operation data.

NOTE 2: When a PS is set up initially, set the PS in Data Download Mode by ap-plying power to the PS while press-ing the SEND key, and then execute the CM1D Y=20 in Calling Area No. 00.

NOTE 3: Set the Dterm PS II to download mode by simultaneously applying power to the Dterm PS II and press-ing the “L1” key.

NOTE 4: Set the Dterm PS III to download mode by simultaneously applying power to the Dterm PS III and press-ing the “TRF” key.

NOTE 5: If the download is successful, it will display the Dterm PS II/Dterm PS III number for 2 seconds, au-tomatically reset, then return to stand-by mode.If the download failed, an error tone will sound and the Dterm PS II/Dterm PS III displays “Download Failed”. Download must be performed again. If this procedure continues to fail, con-tact the Service Center.

NOTE 6: The following will be displayed on the PCPro.

STATUS DISPLAYLoading succeeded OKPS is busy WAIT, BUSY NOWPS is out of area WD ERRORLack of PS data DATA ERROR

B

CM1D

C

JULY/18/2008

5-21 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch5001.fm

PS DATA PROGRAMMING

• When changing the PS operation data

If you change the PS operation data in this section which has been already downloaded to a PS, do PS datadownload (CM1D Y=20 second data: 1) again.

DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify the timing until sending the reverse signal to the calling PS Station for connecting the line.

NOTE 1: Timer data 110 sets the timing until sending the reverse signal to the calling PS Station for connecting the line, when no answer signal is received from PS station after making Outgoing C.O. line call.

NOTE 2: Usually, set the second data to “01” (4 seconds) or “02” (8 seconds).

NOTE 3: By setting the timer data 110, the state of the line can be forcibly changed from during calling a PS to during speaking (sending DTMF becomes available).

•(1)(2)

Y=0 11001-99: 4-396 seconds

(4 second increments)If no data is set, timer data 110 is not sent.

C

CM41

END

JULY/18/2008

5-22 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch5001.fm

TRUNK DATA PROGRAMMING (FOR ADJUNCT ANALOG)

TRUNK DATA PROGRAMMING (FOR ADJUNCTANALOG)This programming is required for Adjunct Type (Analog Interface).

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the sending Switch Hook Flash for Ad-junct Analog system.

(1)(2)

5250: To send

Assign a trunk number to the required Physical Port number.

•(1)

(2)


Assign the trunk route number to the trunk number.

•(1)(2)

Y=00 DP or DTMF000-511: Trunk No.00-63: Trunk Route No.

Assign the data for terminating system. ••••

(1)(2)

Y=02 Day ModeY=03 Night ModeY=40 Mode AY=41 Mode B000-511: Trunk No.04: Direct-In Termination

Assign the station number to be terminated by Direct-In Termination.

••••

(1)(2)

Y=04 Day ModeY=05 Night ModeY=42 Mode AY=43 Mode B000-511: Trunk No.X-XXXXXXXX: Station No. assigned by

CM10 Y=04

Assign the kind of trunk to the trunk route. •(1)(2)

Y=00000-63: Trunk Route No.00: C.O. Trunk

Specify the dialing signal type to the trunk route.

•(1)(2)

Y=00100-63: Trunk Route No.4: Call Origination-DTMF

Call Termination-DTMF

START

CM08

CM10

CM30

BLADE RESET

CM35BLADE RESET

BLADE RESET

A

5-23 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch5001.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the call direction to the trunk route. •(1)(2)

Y=00200-63: Trunk Route No.3 : Bothway Trunk

Specify the answer signal from the distant of-fice for outgoing connection to the trunk route.

•(1)(2)

Y=00400-63: Trunk Route No.1: Battery Reversal

Specify the release signal from the distant of-fice for an outgoing connection of an incoming connection to the trunk route.

NOTE: In case of Adjunct Type (Analog In-terface), using a line blade over the Main PBX is recommended to pro-vide the release signal (i.e., momen-tarily, an open circuit).

•(1)(2)


Assign the sending of the dial pulse on an out-going call to the trunk route.

•(1)(2)

Y=00800-63: Trunk Route No.3 : Dial pulses are sent out

Assign the incoming connection signaling to the trunk route.

•(1)(2)

Y=00900-63: Trunk Route No.15 : Ring Down (Loop Start C.O.)

Assign the sending Switch Hook Flash for Ad-junct Analog System.

•(1)(2)

Y=16900-63: Trunk Route No.0: To send

Assign the Sender start condition to the trunk route.

•(1)(2)

Y=02000-63: Trunk Route No.15 : Timing Start

A

CM35

BLADE RESET

BLADE RESET

B

5-24 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch5001.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify the Sender prepause timing to the trunk route.

NOTE: To reduce the connecting time, it is preferable to shorten the prepause timing (i.e., second data=03 (1.5 seconds)).

•(1)(2)

Y=02100-63: Trunk Route No.00 : 0 second01 : 0.5 seconds02 : 1.0 second03 : 1.5 seconds04 : 2.0 seconds05 : 2.5 seconds06 : 4.0 seconds07 : 5.0 seconds08 : 6.0 seconds09 : 7.0 seconds10 : 8.0 seconds11 : 9.0 seconds12 : 10.0 seconds13 : 11.0 seconds14 : 12.0 seconds15 : 3.0 seconds

Specify the DP Inter-Digital Pause to the trunk route.

•(1)(2)

Y=02300-63: Trunk Route No.0 : 300 ms.1 : 400 ms.2 : 500 ms.3 : 600 ms.4 : 700 ms.5 : 900 ms.6 : 1100 ms.7 : 800 ms.

Specify the DTMF Inter-Digital Pause to the trunk route.

NOTE: To reduce the connecting time, it is recommended to shorten the DTMF inter-digital Pause timing (Y=24), i.e., second data=2 (80 ms.). Y=26, i.e., second data=0 (64 ms.).

•(1)(2)

Y=02400-63: Trunk Route No.0 : 32 ms.1 : 64 ms.2 : 80 ms.3 : 96 ms.4 : 160 ms.5 : 192 ms.6 : 240 ms.7 : 128 ms.

B

CM35

BLADE RESET

C

5-25 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch5001.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify the DP Make Ratio. •(1)(2)

Y=02500-63: Trunk Route No.0 : 39 % Make Ratio1 : 33 % Make Ratio

Assign the DTMF signal width to the trunk route.

NOTE: To reduce the connecting time, it is recommended to shorten the DTMF inter-digital Pause timing (Y=24), i.e., second data=2 (80 ms.). Y=26, i.e., second data=0 (64 ms.).

•(1)(2)

Y=02600-63: Trunk Route No.0 : 64 ms.1 : 128 ms.

Assign the trunk release by detection of rever-sal of tip and ring to the trunk route.

•(1)(2)

Y=03900-63: Trunk Route No.0 : Not released1 : To release

CAUTION: Check the timing on main PBX before making any change on timing function.

Specify the DP/DTMF Sender release timing to the trunk route.

•(1)(2)

Y=04600-63: Trunk Route No.0 : 2 seconds1 : 4 seconds2 : 6 seconds3 : 8 seconds4 : 12 seconds5 : 14 seconds6 : 16 seconds7 : 10 seconds

Specify the designated seizure of trunks on each station basis.

•(1)(2)

Y=09800-63: Trunk Route No.0: Allow

C

CM35BLADE RESET

D

5-26 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch5001.fm


To send all digits dialed by a station from COT:

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the trunk to be seized on each station basis.

•(1)

(2)

Y=16X-XXXXXXXX: Station No. assigned by

CM10 Y=04D000-D511: Trunk No.

Assign Service Restriction Class A to the re-quired station.

•(1)

(2)


CM10 Y=04XX ZZXX: 00-15 : Service Restriction Class A

Allow the sending Switch Hook Flash for Ad-junct Analog System in Service Restriction Class A assigned by CM12 Y=02.

•(1)

(2)



DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the access code for LCR Group 3. •(1)(2)

Y=0X-XXXX: Access CodeA129: LCR Group 3

Assign an Area Code Development Pattern number to LCR Group 3.

•(1)(2)

Y=A0003: LCR Group 34000: Area Code Development Pattern No.

0

Assign a Route Pattern number to each area code for Area Code Development Pattern number 0.

•(1)(2)

Y=4000X...X: Area Code 1-8 digits0000: Route Pattern No. 000

Specify the 1st order of LCR selection for Route Pattern number 000.

•(1)(2)

Y=00001: 1st order of LCR selection000 ZZZZ: 00-63: Trunk Route No.

D

CM12

CM15

E

E

CM20

CM8A

END

5-27 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch5001.fm



For programming of the following three types of system interface, see “PROGRAMMING SUMMARY”in this chapter. Page 5-6

• Analog PBX Interface• CCIS Interface• SV8300 Wired for Wireless

For the following features, no programming is required after the ZT/PS data is programmed.For ZT/PS data programming, see “PROGRAMMING SUMMARY” in this chapter. Page 5-6

• Automatic Release-Out of Zone Calls• Calling Number Display-PS NOTE 2• Handover• Individual PS Calling• Last Number Redial-PS• Out of Zone Indication• Overlap Dialing• Preset Dialing• PS Authorization• PS Location Registration• Radio Channel Changeover• Speech Encryption• Speed Dial-PS

NOTE 1: This feature is available only for the Integrated Type.NOTE 2: This feature is not available for the Adjunct Analog Type.

• ANNOUNCEMENT-PS NO ANSWER/ANNOUNCEMENT-PS OUT OF ZONE Page 5-28

• CALL FORWARDING-NOT AVAILABLE Page 5-31 NOTE 1• CALL FORWARDING-PS OUT OF ZONE Page 5-32 NOTE 1• CALLING NAME DISPLAY-PS Page 5-34 NOTE 2• DTMF SIGNAL SENDER Page 5-39• MULTI-LINE OPERATION-PS Page 5-40• NUMBER SHARING Page 5-41 NOTE 1• PS LOCATION INDICATION Page 5-43 NOTE 1• PS LOCATION SEARCH Page 5-44• SOFT PHONE WIRELESS HANDSET Page 5-46• STATION HUNTING-NOT AVAILABLE Page 5-48 NOTE 1• VOICE MAIL INDICATION Page 5-49 NOTE 1

JULY/18/2008

5-28 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch5001.fm

ANNOUNCEMENT-PS NO ANSWER/ANNOUNCEMENT-PS OUT OF ZONE


DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign a tenant number to a PS station number. •(1)

(2)


CM10 Y=0400 : Tenant 0001 -63: Tenant 01-63

Specify whether RBT is sent when the called PS is out of zone or the power is off.

NOTE: CM08>503 is effective only for Sta-tion-to-Station call.

(1)(2)


Provide PS No-Answer feature. (1)(2)

5040: Available

Specify the type of No-Answer Timer. (1)(2)

0850: No-Answer timer (CM41 Y=0>86)1: No-Answer timer (CM41 Y=0>01)

Specify the message reply timer for An-nouncement-PS No Answer.

•(1)(2)

Y=00101-30: 4-120 seconds


Specify the duration of message for An-nouncement-PS No Answer.

•(1)(2)

Y=07501-99: 4-396 seconds


Specify the duration of message for An-nouncement-PS Out of Zone/PS Power Off.

•(1)(2)

Y=08401-99: 4-396 seconds


START

CM12

CM08

CM41

A

5-29 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch5001.fm


DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify the message reply timer for An-nouncement-PS No Answer.

NOTE: CM41 Y=0>01 is effective only when CM08>085 is set to 0.

•(1)(2)

Y=08601-99: 4-396 seconds


Specify the message reply timer for An-nouncement-PS Out of Zone/PS Power Off.

•(1)(2)

Y=08501-99: 4-396 seconds


Provide the Announcement Service. •(1)

(2)

Y=500: PS No-Answer02: PS Out of Zone/PS Power Off0500: To provide


•(1)(2)

Y=00000-007: Voice Response System No. 1300-1363: PS No Answer Message Group

No. 00-631500-1563: PS Out of Zone/PS Power Off

Message Group No. 00-63

Assign the message group for PS No Answer to each tenant.

•(1)(2)

Y=1000-63: Tenant No.00-63: Message Group No.

Assign the message group for PS Out of Zone/PS Power Off to each tenant.

•(1)(2)

Y=1200-63: Tenant No.00-63: Message Group No.

A

CM41

CM48

CM49

B

5-30 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch5001.fm


To record/replay/delete a message:

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign Service Restriction Class A to a certain PS/station.

•(1)

(2)

Y=02 Service Restriction Class AX-XXXXXXXX: PS Station No. assigned


Allow Service Restriction Class A for An-nouncement Service.

•

(1)

(2)

Y=033 Voice Response System Access: Record/Replay/Delete

00-15: Service Restriction Class A assigned by CM12 Y=02

1 : Allow

Assign the access codes to record/replay/delete the message.

•(1)(2)


B

CM12

CM15

CM20

END

5-31 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch5001.fm

CALL FORWARDING-NOT AVAILABLE

CALL FORWARDING-NOT AVAILABLEDESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the destination VMS station for Call Forwarding-Not Available.

•(1)(2)

Y=2000-63: Tenant No. of Virtual StationX-XXXXXXXX: VMS Station No.

Assign the access code to set/cancel Call For-warding when the incoming call is not avail-able, and set the access code to replay the message.

•(1)(2)

Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3X-XXXX: Access CodeA189: Call Forwarding-Not Available SetA190: Call Forwarding-Not Available Can-

celA191: Call Forwarding-Not Available Re-

play

Specify whether confirmation of message ex-istence by Special Dial Tone is available or not.If the second data is set to 0, the Special Dial Tone is sent when a message exists.

•(1)(2)

Y=212: Confirmation by Dial Tone0 : Available1 : Not available

Assign Service Restriction Class A to each PS station.

•(1)

(2)



Allow Service Restriction Class A for Call Forwarding-Not Available.

•(1)

(2)

Y=115 Call Forwarding-Not Available00-15: Service Restriction Class A


START

CM51

CM20

CM48

CM12

CM15

END

5-32 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch5001.fm

CALL FORWARDING-PS OUT OF ZONE

CALL FORWARDING-PS OUT OF ZONEDESCRIPTION DATA

Assign Service Restriction Class C to the re-quired PS stations.

•(1)

(2)

Y=07X-XXXXXXXX: PS Station No. assigned

by CM10 Y=0400-15 : Service Restriction Class C

Allow Call Forwarding-PS Out of Zone in Ser-vice Restriction Class C assigned by CM12 Y=07.

•(1)

(2)

Y=48100-15: Service Restriction Class C



(1)(2)


Assign the access code for Call Forwarding-PS Out of Zone, which is used to set from PS, Set and Cancel, respectively.

•(1)(2)

Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3X-XXXX: Access CodeA241: Call Forwarding-PS Out of Zone SetA242: Call Forwarding-PS Out of Zone

Cancel

To apply this feature to incoming calls, set the trunk route combinations for Tandem connec-tion.

•(1)(2)


•(1)

(2)


Specify that the RBT is not sent when the called PS is out of zone or the power is off.


(1)(2)

5030: Not sent

START

CM12

CM15

CM29

CM20

CM35

CM36

CM08

A

5-33 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch5001.fm

CALL FORWARDING-PS OUT OF ZONE

NOTE: When setting the Voice Response System (VRS) as the destination of Call Forwarding-PS Out of Zone, set the data for “ANNOUNCEMENT-PS NO ANSWER/ANNOUNCEMENT-PS OUT OF ZONE”. Page 5-28

DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify the timer for a distinction whether the called PS is out of zone/power is off, or not.

•(1)(2)

Y=08501-99: 4-396 seconds


When setting the destination of Call Forward-ing-PS Out of Zone from PCPro/CAT, set the destination to the station number assigned by CM10 Y=04.

•(1)

(2)


CM10 Y=04Destination No.:X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.E000: Attendant ConsoleYY...Y: Outgoing Trunk Access Code (1-4

digits) + + Called No. (Maxi-mum 26 digits)

Assign Service Restriction Class A to each PS station.

•(1)

(2)



Allow Service Restriction Class A for Call Forwarding-Not Available.

•(1)

(2)

Y=115 Call Forwarding-Not Available00-15: Service Restriction Class A


A

CM41

CME6

,

CM12

CM15

END

5-34 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch5001.fm

CALLING NAME DISPLAY-PS

CALLING NAME DISPLAY-PSFor Calling Name Display-CCIS, refer to the Networking Manual.

DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify the terminal type of the PS to 00. •(1)

(2)


by CM10 Y=0400 : Dterm PS II/Dterm PS III Type with PS

software version 7.02 or later

Specify the station number and name display when an incoming call begins ringing.

(1)(2)

3350 : Display only when incoming call ter-

minates to Prime Line.1 : Display when incoming call termi-

nates to Prime Line or My Line.


•(1)

(2)



Provide Calling Name Display to the PS.

NOTE: The former Dterm PS does not pro-vide the Calling Name Display fea-ture; therefore, CM15 Y=123 should be set to “1” Not provided. Set data to “0” To provide, if provid-ing this service for the Dterm PS II/Dterm PS III.

•(1)

(2)


assigned by CM12 Y=020 : To provide1 : Not provided

START

CM1D

CM08

RESET

CM12

CM15

A

JULY/18/2008

5-35 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch5001.fm


To display the calling information on PS when a call is terminated from a station, do the following pro-gramming in addition to the programming on Page 5-34.

DESCRIPTION DATA

Enter the desired station user’s name to each station number by CM77 Y=0 or CM77 Y=1.

•(1)

(2)

Y=0 By Character CodeX-XXXXXXXX: Station No. assigned by

CM10 Y=04Character Code 20-7F: Maximum 32 digitsSee Character Code Table. Page A-2NONE : No data

•(1)

(2)

Y=1 By CharacterX-XXXXXXXX: Station No. assigned by

CM10 Y=04A-Z, 0-9: CharacterMaximum 16 CharactersNONE : No data

NOTE: There are two ways to change a name that is currently programmed. (1) Overwriting with a new name, or (2) inserting a blank space as the first character will cancel the existing name.

Specify the calling information displayed on PS when a station calls a PS with consultation holding the other station/trunk.

(1)(2)

5550 : Information of holding call

(Station/Trunk information)1 : Information of calling station

A

CM77

CM08

END

5-36 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch5001.fm


To display the calling information on PS when a call is terminated from a Trunk:

• When a Caller ID signal is sent from a network, do the programming only START to A on Page 5-34.

• When a Caller ID signal is not sent from a network, and to display the Trunk name on PS when a callis terminated from a Trunk (individual signal line), do the following programming in addition to theprogramming on Page 5-34.

DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify the calling information displayed on PS when a call is terminated from a individual signal line trunk.

(1)(2)

5560 : Trunk route name assigned by CM77

Y=2/CM77 Y=31 : Not displayed


•(1)(2)


CM35 Y=000 is displayed16-63: Trunk Name No. 16-63

Enter the desired trunk route name to each trunk route by CM77 Y=2 or CM77 Y=3.

•(1)

(2)

Y=2 By Character Code00-14, 16-63: Trunk route name No.

assigned by CM35 Y=003Character Code 20-7F: Maximum 8 digitsSee Character Code Table. Page A-2

•(1)

(2)

Y=3 By Character00-14, 16-63: Trunk route name No.

assigned by CM35 Y=003A-Z, 0-9: CharacterMaximum 4 CharactersNONE : No data

NOTE 1: The trunk route name display is provided on a trunk-route basis. The maximum amount of characters in the trunk route name is four. The maximum number of trunk routes assign-able is 16. The PCPro or CAT can be used to register or change a trunk route name display.

NOTE 2: There are two ways to change a name that is currently programmed. (1) Overwriting with a new name, or (2) inserting a blank space as the first character will cancel the existing name.

A

CM08

CM35

CM77

END

5-37 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch5001.fm


To display the calling information on PS when a call is terminated from an Attendant Console:

• To display an attendant console name, do the following programming in addition to the programmingon Page 5-34.

DESCRIPTION DATA

Enter the desired ATTCON user’s name to each ATTCON number by CM77 Y=A or CM77 Y=B.

•(1)

(2)

Y=A By Character Code0-7: ATTCON No. assigned by CM10

Y=00Character Code 20-7F: Maximum 32 digitsSee Character Code Table. Page A-2NONE : No data

•(1)

(2)

Y=B By Character0-7: ATTCON No. assigned by CM10

Y=00A-Z, 0-9: CharacterMaximum 16 CharactersNONE : No data

NOTE: There are two ways to change a name that is currently programmed. (1) Overwriting with a new name, or (2) inserting a blank space as the first character will cancel the existing name.

Specify the calling information displayed on PS when an Attendant Console calls a PS with consultation holding the other station/trunk.

(1)(2)

5540 : Information of holding call

(Station/Trunk information)1 : Information of Attendant Console

A

CM77

CM08

END

5-38 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch5001.fm


• To display an ATTCON number for PS-display, do the following programming.

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign the ATTCON number for PS-display to the ATTCON number assigned by CM10 Y=00.

NOTE: To call the destination by a calling name/number display feature easily, we recommend the access code for operator call assigned by CM20 to be set to the second data.

•(1)

(2)

Y=510-7: ATTCON No. assigned by CM10

Y=00X-XXXXXXXX: ATTCON No. for PS-

Display

Assign the access code for an operator call. •(1)(2)

Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3X-XXXX: Access Code800: Operator Call

Assign the access code for Individual Atten-dant Access.

•(1)(2)

0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3X-XXXX: Access CodeA095: Individual Attendant Access

Assign the access code for Priority Calls 0 and 1 respectively.

•(1)(2)

Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3X-XXXX: Access CodeA088: Priority Call 0A089: Priority Call 1

Assign the access code for Special Operator Call 0-3 respectively.

•(1)(2)

Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3X-XXXX: Access CodeA090-A093: Special Operator Call 0-3

Assign the access code for Emergency call. •(1)(2)

Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3X-XXXX: Access CodeA094: Emergency Call

START

CM60

CM20

END

5-39 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch5001.fm

DTMF SIGNAL SENDER

DTMF SIGNAL SENDERThis programming is available only for the Adjunct Type (Analog Interface).

DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify the DTMF signal width. •(1)(2)

Y=02600-63: Trunk Route No. 0 : 64 ms.1 : 128 ms.

Specify available timing to send DTMF sig-nals after call origination from a PS by CM35 Y=046 or CM41 Y=0>27. Only the shortest value data becomes effective among the above.

•

(1)(2)

CM35 Y=046DP/DTMF Sender Release Timing00-63: Trunk Route No. 0 : 2 seconds1 : 4 seconds2 : 6 seconds3 : 8 seconds4 : 12 seconds5 : 14 seconds6 : 16 seconds7 : 10 seconds

•(1)(2)

CM41 Y=027: Interdigit Pause on Outgoing Call03-14: 3-14 seconds

(1 second increment)If no data is set, the default setting is 7 sec-onds.

START

CM35

CM35

CM41

END

5-40 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch5001.fm

MULTI-LINE OPERATION-PS

MULTI-LINE OPERATION-PS

To assign the PS station to the line key on the Multiline Terminal, assign the following data.

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign a PS station number to the Virtual Port number.

•(1)(2)

Y=04000-511: Virtual Port No.X-XXXXXXXX: Primary PS Station No. X-XXXXXXXX: Sub-line PS Station No.

Assign the sub-line PS station number to each primary PS station, both are assigned by CM10 Y=04.

•(1)(2)

Y=01X-XXXXXXXX: Primary PS Station No. X-XXXXXXXX: Sub-line PS Station No.

Assign PS-ID of the sub-line PS as “NONE”. •(1)

(2)

Y=21X-XXXXXXXX: Sub-line PS Station No.

assigned by CM10 Y=04NONE

Specify the terminal type of the PS to 00.This data must be set to both the primary PS station number and the sub-line PS station number assigned by CM10 Y=04.

•(1)

(2)

Y=15X-XXXXXXXX: Primary PS Station No.

Sub-line PS Station No. 00 : Dterm PS II/Dterm PS III Type with PS

software version 7.02 or later

Provide the multi-line function to the station number for the primary PS and sub-line PS.

•(1)

(2)


CM10 Y=040: Provided

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign a station number to the key number of the Multiline Terminal.A station number of PS sub-line can be as-signed to the key on the Multiline Terminal.

•(1)(2)

Y=00Primary Extension No. + + Key No.X-XXXXXXXX: Station No. assigned by

CM10 Y=04

START

CM10

CM1D

CM12

A

A

CM90,

END

5-41 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch5001.fm

NUMBER SHARING

NUMBER SHARINGDESCRIPTION DATA

Specify the combination of the main station and the sub station, also the opposite combina-tion, as follows.

1st data : Main station (Multiline Terminal My Line)

2nd data: Sub station (PS)1st data : Sub station (PS)2nd data: Main station (Multiline Terminal

My Line)

NOTE: As the main station number, Multi-line Terminal My Line number must be assigned.As the sub station number, station number assigned by CM10 Y=04 must be assigned.

•

(1)

(2)

Y=19 Assignment of main station and sub station

X-XXXXXXXX: Main station No./Sub station No.

X-XXXXXXXX: Sub station No./Main station No.

Assign the Class of Service to required sta-tions.

NOTE: For the Trunk Restriction Class (CM12 Y=01) and the Tenant Num-ber (CM12 Y=04), the same data must be assigned to the sub station and the main station.

•(1)

(2)

Y=02 X-XXXXXXXX: Main station No./Sub

station No.XX ZZXX: 00-15 : Service Restriction Class A

To the sub station (PS), specify the number that is informed to the calling/called party, SMDR and MCI as the main station number.

•(1)

(2)

Y=12700-15: Service Restriction Class A of main

station1 : Own station number is informed

(1)

(2)

00-15: Service Restriction Class A of sub station

0: Main station number is informed

START

CM12

CM15

A

5-42 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch5001.fm

NUMBER SHARING

DESCRIPTION DATA

Provide the capability of setting/cancelling the Number Sharing from the sub station (PS).

•(1)

(2)


station1 : Not provide

(1)

(2)

00-15: Service Restriction Class A of sub station

0: To provide

Specify whether the sub station is controlled the same as the main station, by a Message Waiting lamp control signal sent from the MCI.

NOTE: Do not assign CM15 Y=129 for a sub station.

•(1)

(2)


station0 : Main station and sub station are con-

trolled1 : Only main station is controlled

Provide the Number Sharing set/cancel keys to the main station (Multiline Terminal).

•(1)(2)

Y=00My Line No. + + Key No.F0A94: Number Sharing Set/Cancel

Assign the Access Code for setting or cancel-ing Number Sharing from the sub station (PS).

•(1)(2)

Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3X-XXXX: Access CodeA192: Set Number Sharing from sub sta-

tionA193: Cancel Number Sharing from sub

station

A

CM15

CM90,

CM20

END

5-43 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch5001.fm

PS LOCATION INDICATION

PS LOCATION INDICATIONDESCRIPTION DATA


•(1)

(2)



Allow PS Location Indication in Service Re-striction Class A for PS.

•(1)

(2)



Allow PS Location Indication in Service Re-striction Class A for Multiline Terminal.

•(1)

(2)



Provide the DESKCON with PS Location In-dication.

(1)(2)

521: PS Location Indication0 : To provide1 : Not provided

Enter the ZT name to each ZT number by CM77 Y=8 or CM77 Y=9.

•(1)(2)

Y=8 By Character000-127: ZT No. assigned by CM10 Y=00Character Code 20-7F: Maximum 32 digitsSee Character Code Table. Page A-2

•(1)(2)

Y=9 By Character000-127: ZT No. assigned by CM10 Y=00A-Z, 0-9: CharacterMaximum 16 charactersNONE : No data

NOTE 1: The maximum number of characters per ZT is 16, including spaces.

NOTE 2: There are two ways to change a name that is currently programmed. (1) Overwriting with new name, or (2) inserting a blank space as the first character will cancel the existing name.

START

CM12

CM15

CM08

CM77

END

5-44 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch5001.fm

PS LOCATION SEARCH

PS LOCATION SEARCHDESCRIPTION DATA


•(1)

(2)



Allow PS Location Indication in Service Re-striction Class A for PS.

•(1)

(2)



Allow PS Location Indication in Service Re-striction Class A for Multiline Terminal.

•(1)

(2)



Assign the access code for PS Location Search.

•(1)(2)

Y=0-3 Numbering Plan Group 0-3X-XXXX: Access CodeA258: PS Location Search

Assign an PS Location Search key to a Multi-line Terminal.

•(1)(2)

Y=00My Line No. + + Key No.F0B58


•(1)(2)

Y=08501-99: 4-396 seconds


Specify whether the PS Location Search with no ringing is provided or not.

NOTE: For Dterm PS II/Dterm PS III Type with PS, set the second data to 0. For the other PSs, set the second data to 1.

•(1)

(2)


by CM10 Y=040 : To provide when PS is idle1 : Not provided when PS is idle

START

CM12

CM15

CM20

CM90,

CM41

CM1D

A

5-45 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch5001.fm

PS LOCATION SEARCH

DESCRIPTION DATA

Enter the ZT name to each ZT number by CM77 Y=8 or CM77 Y=9.

•(1)(2)

Y=8 By Character Code000-127: ZT No.Character Code 20-7F: Maximum 32 digitsSee Character Code Table. Page A-2

•(1)(2)

Y=9 By Character000-127: ZT No.A-Z, 0-9: CharacterMaximum 16 characters

NOTE 1: The maximum number of characters per ZT is 16, including spaces.

NOTE 2: There are two ways to change a name that is currently programmed. (1) Overwriting with new name, or (2) inserting a blank space as the first character will cancel the existing name.

A

CM77

END

5-46 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch5001.fm

SOFT PHONE WIRELESS HANDSET

SOFT PHONE WIRELESS HANDSETWhen using PS as a wireless handset of Soft Phone, do the following programming.

DESCRIPTION DATA

Assign Service Restriction Class A to the re-quired station.

•(1)(2)


Allow the accommodation of PS to Soft Phone multiline.

•(1)(2)

Y=05X-XXXXXXXX: PS station No.0 : Accommodated1 : Not accommodated


•(1)(2)


Specify the combination of the main station and sub station for Number Sharing, also the contrary combination, as follows. 1st data : Main station (Soft Phone) 2nd data : Sub station (PS) 1st data : Sub station (PS) 2nd data : Main station (Soft Phone)

NOTE: Assign Soft Phone station number for the main station number.Assign PS station number for the sub station number.

•(1)

(2)

Y=19X-XXXXXXXX:Main station No./Sub

station No.X-XXXXXXXX:Sub station No./Main

station No.

Allow the PS to be used as a wireless handset for Soft Phone.

NOTE: Assign the second data “0” for the Soft Phone station number. Assign the second data “1” for the PS sta-tion number.

•(1)(2)

Y=48X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.0 : Soft Phone as main station1 : PS as sub station3 : Not allowed

START

CM12

A

5-47 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch5001.fm

SOFT PHONE WIRELESS HANDSET

DESCRIPTION DATA

Specify whether the Sub station is controlled as same as the main station, by a Message Waiting lamp control signal sent from the VMS.

•(1)(2)

Y=12900-15: Service Restriction Class A0 : Main station and sub station are con-

trolled1 : Only main station is controlled

Assign the Soft Phone Station number key to the Soft Phone.

•(1)(2)

Y=00My Line No. + + Key No.X-XXXXXXXX: Soft Phone Station No.

Assign the PS Station number key to the Soft Phone.

•(1)(2)

Y=00My Line No. + + Key No.X-XXXXXXXX: PS Station No.

Assign that PS is used as a wireless handset for Soft Phone key to the Soft Phone.

•(1)(2)

Y=00My Line No. + + Key No.F0B51: PS used as a wireless handset for

Soft Phone

A

CM15

CM90 ,

,

,

END

5-48 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch5001.fm

STATION HUNTING-NOT AVAILABLE

STATION HUNTING-NOT AVAILABLEDESCRIPTION DATA

Provide the Station Hunting-Not Available when the called PS is out of zone or the power is off.

(1)(2)

5100: Available

Specify whether the RBT is sent when the called PS is out of zone or the power is off.


(1)(2)


Assign the station numbers included in the station hunting group, one by one, as shown below.

Station Hunting-Terminal1st Operation : (1) Station A (2) Station B2nd Operation: (1) Station B (2) Station C

Station Hunting-Circular1st Operation : (1) Station A (2) Station B2nd Operation: (1) Station B (2) Station C3rd Operation : (1) Station C (2) Station A

•(1)

(2)


CM10 Y=04X-XXXXXXXX: Station No. assigned by

CM10 Y=04

Specify the kind of station included in the station hunting group.

•(1)

(2)


CM10 Y=040 : Member station of Station Hunting-

Terminal1 : Pilot station of Station Hunting-Ter-

minalAll stations of Station Hunting-Circu-lar


•(1)(2)

Y=08501-99: 4-396 seconds


START

CM08

CM18

CM41

END

5-49 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch5001.fm

VOICE MAIL INDICATION

VOICE MAIL INDICATIONDESCRIPTION DATA

Provide PS stations with Message Waiting ser-vice.The first data should be the station number of the PS.

•(1)

(2)


CM10 Y=040: To provide

(For the station with MW lamp)

START

CM13

END

5-50 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093ch5001.fm

MAINTENANCE DATA PROGRAMMING

MAINTENANCE DATA PROGRAMMINGDESCRIPTION DATA

Define fault information to be stored. (1)(2)

450 1 : To store

Assign the registration of fault information into memory and the control of the external alarm.

•(1)

(2)

Y=2 012 : ZT fault occurred 02B: ZT fault occurred03B: ZT fault recovered0 : Registration of fault memory/

No output of External alarm1 : Registration of fault memory/External

alarm is MN alarm2 : Registration of fault memory/External

alarm is MJ alarm3 : No Registration of Fault Memory/No

output of External alarm

START

CM08

CMEA

END

JULY/18/2008

A-1 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093apa001.fm


Appendix

A

CHARACTER CODE TABLE

This appendix contains the character code table to set a stationname displayed on Multiline Terminal or Attendant Console.

Appendix A CHARACTER CODE TABLE

A-2 NWA-033625-001 Rev.2.093apa001.fm

Character Code Table

X: Upper digit Y: Lower digit

Example: To set “John”, do the following operation.

2 3 4 5 6 7

0 0 @ P \ p

1 ! 1 A Q a q

2 ” 2 B R b r

3 # 3 C S c s

4 $ 4 D T d t

5 % 5 E U e u

6 & 6 F V f v

7 ’ 7 G W g w

8 ( 8 H X h x

9 ) 9 I Y i y

A * : J Z j z

B + ; K [ k

C , < L ¥ l |

D - = M ] m

E . > N ^ n ~

F / ? O _ o ←

XY

4AJ

6Fo

68h

6En

sv8300 programong manualpdf

Documents

reference manual

additional informationthe

programming manualnwa

following features

system data backup

following office data

isdnpri programming

digital trunk data assignment